IBM Version 8.5 PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
โฆษณา
โฆษณา
Rational Developer for System z, Version 8.5
PL/I for Windows
Programming Guide
Version 8.5
SC18-9977-05
Rational Developer for System z, Version 8.5
PL/I for Windows
Programming Guide
Version 8.5
SC18-9977-05
Note!
Tenth Edition (November 2012)
This edition applies to Rational Developer for System z, PL/I for Windows, Version 8.5, and to any subsequent releases until otherwise indicated in new editions or technical newsletters. Make sure that you are using the correct edition for the level of the product.
You can order publications online at http://www.ibm.com/e-business/linkweb/publications/servlet/pbi.wss, or order by phone or fax. IBM Software Manufacturing Solutions takes publication orders between 8:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time (EST). The phone number is (800)879-2755. The fax number is (800)445-9269.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1998, 2012.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
About this book . . . . . . . . . . . xv
How to read the syntax diagrams .
Part 1. Introducing PL/I on your workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation.
Choosing the right compile-time options .
Using the macro facility to help port programs .
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation.
Data representations causing runtime differences . 7
Environment differences affecting portability .
Language elements causing runtime differences 11
Part 2. Compiling and linking your program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 2. Compiling your program . . 17
Using the sample programs provided with the product.
Preparing to compile source programs .
Setting compile-time environment variables .
Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler .
Where to specify compile-time options .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
IBM.OPTIONS and IBM.PPxxx environment variables .
Chapter 3. Compile-time options. . . . 27
Compile-time option descriptions .
Rules for using compile-time options .
iii
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors . . . . 147
Include preprocessor options environment variable .
Macro facility options environment variables 150
Programming and compilation considerations 150
iv
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor options environment variable 158
SQL preprocessor BIND environment variables 158
Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications 158
User defined functions sample programs .
Handling SQL error return codes .
SQL compatibility and migration considerations 170
Programming and compilation considerations 170
CICS preprocessor options environment variables .
Coding CICS statements in PL/I applications 173
Writing CICS transactions in PL/I .
CICS abends used for PL/I programs .
Chapter 5. Compilation output . . . . 175
Chapter 6. Linking your program . . . 185
Linking from the command line .
Specifying executable output type .
Producing a dynamic link library.
Chapter 7. Setting linker options . . . 193
Setting options on the command line .
Setting options in the ILINK environment variable .
Summary of Windows linker options .
/EXTDICTIONARY, /NOEXTDICTIONARY 199
/INFORMATION, /NOINFORMATION .
/LINENUMBERS, /NOLINENUMBERS .
Part 3. Running and debugging your program . . . . . . . . . . 205
Chapter 8. Using run-time options . . 207
Setting run-time environment variables.
Where to specify run-time options .
Specifying multiple run-time options or suboptions .
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Using compile-time options for debugging .
Using footprints for debugging .
Using error and condition handling for debugging .
Logical errors in your source programs .
Calling uninitialized entry variables .
Loops and other unforeseen errors .
Unexpected input/output data .
Unexpected program termination.
Other unexpected program results .
Compiler or library subroutine failure .
Part 4. Input and output . . . . . . 227
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files 229
Establishing data set characteristics .
Specifying characteristics using the PL/I
Specifying characteristics using DD:ddname environment variables .
Associating a PL/I file with a data set .
Using the TITLE option of the OPEN statement 249
Attempting to use files not associated with data sets.
Opening and closing PL/I files .
Associating several data sets with one file .
Combinations of I/O statements, attributes, and options .
DISPLAY statement input and output .
PL/I standard files (SYSPRINT and SYSIN) .
Redirecting standard input, output, and error devices .
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets. . . . . . . . 255
Using stream-oriented data transmission .
Defining files using stream I/O .
ENVIRONMENT options for stream-oriented data transmission .
Creating a data set with stream I/O .
Accessing a data set with stream I/O .
Using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files .
Controlling input from the terminal .
Using files conversationally .
Capital and lowercase letters .
Controlling output to the terminal .
Example of an interactive program .
Defining files using record I/O .
ENVIRONMENT options for record-oriented data transmission .
Creating a data set with record I/O .
Accessing and updating a data set with record
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets . . . . . . . . . 277
Contents
v
Defining files for a regional data set .
Specifying ENVIRONMENT options .
Essential information for creating and accessing regional data sets .
Using keys with regional data sets .
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
Accessing and updating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets . . . . . 287
Moving data between the workstation and mainframe .
Workstation VSAM organization .
Creating and accessing workstation VSAM data sets.
Determining which type of workstation VSAM data set you need .
Accessing records in workstation VSAM data sets.
Using keys for workstation VSAM data sets .
Defining files for workstation VSAM data sets .
Specifying options of the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute .
Adapting existing programs for workstation
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets .
Using a sequential file to access a workstation
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM sequential data set.
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets .
Loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a
workstation VSAM keyed data set .
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation
Workstation VSAM direct data sets .
Loading a workstation VSAM direct data set 307
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a workstation VSAM direct data set .
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation
Part 5. Using PL/I with databases 313
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Choosing embedded SQL or ODBC .
vi
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Environment-specific information.
Using the supplied include files .
Setting licensing information for ODBC Driver
Sample program using supplied include files .
Chapter 15. Using java Dclgen . . . . 323
Understanding java Dclgen terminology .
Creating a table declaration and host structure .
Selecting a table and generation a PL/I declaration .
Modifying and saving the generated PL/I declaration .
Including data declarations in your program 327
Part 6. Advanced topics. . . . . . 329
Maintenance Utility, NMAKE . . . . . 333
Display modification dates (/D) .
Override environment variables (/E) .
Specify description file (/F) .
Suppress sign-on banner (/NOLOGO) .
Print macro and target definitions (/P) .
Suppress command display (/S) .
Change target modification dates (/T) .
Targets in several description blocks.
Characters that modify special macros .
Modified special macros example.
Inference-rule path specifications .
Characters that modify commands .
Dash command modifier examples .
Suppress command display (@) .
At sign (@) command modifier example .
Execute command for dependents (!) .
Exclamation point (!) command modifier examples .
Macros and inference rules in TOOLS.INI .
Chapter 17. Improving performance 355
Selecting compile-time options for optimal performance .
Summary of compile-time options that improve performance .
Coding for better performance .
DATA-directed input and output .
PACKAGEs versus nested PROCEDUREs .
Named constants versus static variables .
Avoiding calls to library routines .
Chapter 18. Using user exits . . . . . 369
Using the compiler user exit .
Procedures performed by the compiler user exit 369
Activating the compiler user exit .
The IBM-supplied compiler exit, IBMUEXIT .
Customizing the compiler user exit .
Using the CICS run-time user exit .
Using data conversion tables .
Chapter 19. Building dynamic link libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Specifying exported names under Windows .
Sample program to build a DLL .
Using FETCH and RELEASE in your main program .
Manager on Windows . . . . . . . . 383
Using the ILIB environment variable .
Examples specifying ILIB parameters .
Chapter 21. Calling conventions . . . 395
Understanding linkage considerations .
General-purpose register implications .
Examples of passing parameters .
Example using SYSTEM linkage .
STDCALL linkage (Windows only) .
Contents
vii
Examples using the STDCALL convention.
Using WinMain (Windows only) .
Examples using the CDECL convention .
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications . . . . . 411
Maintaining your environment .
Invoking non-PL/I routines from a PL/I MAIN 415
Invoking PL/I routines from a non-PL/I main .
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java . . . 419
What is the Java Native Interface (JNI)?
JNI Sample Program #1 - 'Hello World' .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
JNI Sample Program #2 - Passing a String .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
JNI Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
Determining equivalent Java and PL/I data types 431
Chapter 24. Using sort routines . . . 433
Comparing S/390 and workstation sort programs 433
Specifying the sorting field .
Specifying the records to be sorted .
Determining whether the sort was successful .
Getting diagnostic information .
The IBM_SORT_RC environment variable .
The IBM_SORT_DIR environment variable .
The IBM_SORT_MSGFILE environment variable 441
E15 — input-handling routine (sort exit E15) 442
E35 — output-handling routine (sort exit E35) 444
viii
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser . . 453
The PLISAXA built-in subroutine .
The PLISAXB built-in subroutine .
. 455 standalone_declaration .
. 455 document_type_declaration.
. 456 attribute_predefined_reference.
. 456 attribute_character_reference .
. 456 start_of_CDATA_section .
. 457 content_predefined_reference .
. 457 content_character_reference.
. 457 processing_instruction .
. 457 unknown_attribute_reference .
. 458 start_of_prefix_mapping .
Parameters to the event functions .
Coded character sets for XML documents .
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Applying attributes and options .
Using built-in functions with MLE .
Performing date calculations and comparisons .
Part 7. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 489
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Programming interface information .
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Enterprise PL/I publications .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Contents
ix
x
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Tables
Normalized IEEE versus normalized hexadecimal.
Compile-time options, abbreviations, and
SQL data types generated from PL/I declarations .
SQL data types mapped to PL/I declarations 164
Aggregate length table headings and description .
Possible compilation disk outputs.
Windows linker options summary .
Statements, attributes, and options for native data sets .
Statements, attributes, and options for workstation VSAM data sets .
ANSI print control characters .
IBM Proprinter equivalents to ANSI control characters .
Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing consecutive data sets .
Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing regional data sets .
Types and advantages of workstation VSAM data sets .
Processing allowed on alternate index paths 292
Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM sequential data sets .
Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM keyed data sets .
Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM direct data sets .
Supplied include files for ODBC .
ODBC names truncated or abbreviated for
Mapping of ODBC C Type to PL/I Data
Declarations generated by java Dclgen 324
NMAKE Predefined Inference Rules .
Conditions under which conversions are handled inline .
Conditions under which string built-in functions are handled inline .
Equivalent data types between C and PL/I
Java Primitive Types and PL/I Native
Date patterns supported by PL/I MLE 483
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
xi
xii
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Figures
The PL/I declaration of SQLCA .
The PL/I declaration of an SQL descriptor area .
CHIMES program compiler listing .
PL/I code that produces a formatted dump 217
Static and dynamic descendant procedures 220
Creating a data set with stream-oriented data transmission .
Accessing a data set with stream-oriented data transmission .
Creating a print file via stream data transmission .
PL/I structure PLITABS for modifying the preset tab settings .
A sample interactive program .
Merge Sort—Creating and accessing a consecutive data set .
Printing record-oriented data transmission 275
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
Updating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
VSAM data sets and allowed file attributes 291
Creating a workstation VSAM keyed data set 294
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM sequential data set .
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set .
Updating a workstation VSAM keyed data set 303
Loading a workstation VSAM direct data set 308
Updating a workstation VSAM direct data set by key .
Display of tables created by the qualifier 326
PL/I compiler user exit procedures .
Example of an IBMUEXIT.INF file .
Java Sample Program #2 - Passing a String 424
PL/I Sample Program #2 - Passing a String 426
Java Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer 428
PL/I Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer 430
Flow of control for the sort program .
Skeletal code for an input procedure 443
When E15 is external to the procedure calling
Skeletal code for an output-handling procedure .
PLISRTA—Sorting from input data set to output data set .
PLISRTB—Sorting from input-handling routine to output data set .
PLISRTC—Sorting from input data set to output-handling routine .
PLISRTD—Sorting input-handling routine to output-handling routine .
PLISRTD—Sorting input-handling routine to output-handling routine .
PLISAXA coding example - type declarations 462
PLISAXA coding example - event structure 463
PLISAXA coding example - main routine
PLISAXA coding example - event routines
PLISAXA coding example - program output 473
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
xiii
xiv
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
About this book
How to read the syntax diagrams .
This Programming Guide is designed to help use the PL/I for Windows compilers to code and compile PL/I programs.
If you have typically used mainframe PL/I and are interested in moving your
guide will help you understand some basic Windows features as well as give instructions on how to compile, link, and run a PL/I program.
What's new?
Some of the most recent additions to the PL/I workstation compilers include: v
Some tips on how to use PL/I and Java together v
How to use dclgen in the Windows environment v Help with using the Open Database Connectivity
How to read the syntax diagrams
The following rules apply to the syntax diagrams used in this book:
Arrow symbols
Read the syntax diagrams from left to right, from top to bottom, following the path of the line.
───
Indicates the beginning of a statement.
───
Indicates that the statement syntax is continued on the next line.
───
Indicates that a statement is continued from the previous line.
───
Indicates the end of a statement.
Diagrams of syntactical units other than complete statements start with the
─── symbol and end with the ─── symbol.
Diagrams of syntactical units other than complete statements start with the
─── symbol and end with the
─── symbol.
Conventions
v
Keywords, their allowable synonyms, and reserved parameters appear in uppercase. These items must be entered exactly as shown.
v
Variables appear in lowercase italics (for example,
column-name
). They represent user-defined parameters or suboptions.
v When entering commands, separate parameters and keywords by at least one blank if there is no intervening punctuation.
v
Enter punctuation marks (slashes, commas, periods, parentheses, quotation marks, equal signs) and numbers exactly as given.
v
Footnotes are shown by a number in parentheses, for example, (1).
v
A symbol indicates one blank position.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
xv
How to read syntax diagrams
Required items
Required items appear on the horizontal line (the main path).
REQUIRED_ITEM
Optional Items
Optional items appear below the main path.
REQUIRED_ITEM
optional_item
If an optional item appears above the main path, that item has no effect on the execution of the statement and is used only for readability.
REQUIRED_ITEM
optional_item
Multiple required or optional items
If you can choose from two or more items, they appear vertically in a stack. If you
must
choose one of the items, one item of the stack appears on the main path.
REQUIRED_ITEM
required_choice1 required_choice2
If choosing one of the items is optional, the entire stack appears below the main path.
REQUIRED_ITEM
optional_choice1 optional_choice2
Repeatable items
An arrow returning to the left above the main line indicates that an item can be repeated.
xvi
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
How to read syntax diagrams
REQUIRED_ITEM
repeatable_item
If the repeat arrow contains a comma, you must separate repeated items with a comma.
REQUIRED_ITEM
,
repeatable_item
A repeat arrow above a stack indicates that you can specify more than one of the choices in the stack.
Default keywords
Default keywords appear above the main path, and the remaining choices are shown below the main path.
REQUIRED_ITEM
default_choice optional_choice optional_choice
Fragments
Sometimes a diagram must be split into fragments. The fragments are represented by a letter or fragment name, set off like this: |
A
|. The fragment follows the end of the main diagram. The following example shows the use of a fragment.
STATEMENT
item 1 item 2
A
A:
item 3 item 4
KEYWORD
item 5 item 6
How to send your comments
Your feedback is important in helping us to provide accurate, high-quality information. If you have comments about this document or any other PL/I documentation, contact us in one of these ways: v
Use the Online Readers' Comment Form at www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/rcf/
About this book
xvii
How to send your comments
Be sure to include the name of the document, the publication number of the document, the version of PL/I, and, if applicable, the specific location (for example, page number) of the text that you are commenting on.
v
Fill out the Readers' Comment Form at the back of this document, and return it by mail or give it to an IBM representative. If the form has been removed, address your comments to:
International Business Machines Corporation
Reader Comments
H150/090
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA 95141-1003
USA v
Fax your comments to this U.S. number: (800)426-7773.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
xviii
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 1. Introducing PL/I on your workstation
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation.
Choosing the right compile-time options .
Extents of automatic variables .
Using the macro facility to help port programs .
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation.
Data representations causing runtime differences . 7
Environment differences affecting portability .
Language elements causing runtime differences 11
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
1
2
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
The IBM mainframe environment has a different hardware and operating system architecture than your AIX system or your personal computer (PC). Operating systems other than the mainframe are sometimes referred to as
workstation
platforms. In this book, we use the term workstation to refer to the AIX and
Windows operating systems.
Some problems can arise as you move PL/I programs between the mainframe and workstation environments. The problems may be caused by fundamental platform differences or differences between the PL/I for Windows compiler and the
Enterprise PL/I for z/OS compiler. This chapter describes some of these differences between development platforms, and then provides instructions that minimize problems in the following areas: v
Compiling mainframe applications without error on the workstation.
v
Running mainframe applications on the workstation (and getting the same results).
v Writing, compiling, and testing applications on the workstation that are later run in production mode on the mainframe.
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation
As you move programs to your workstation from the mainframe, one of your first goals is to get the applications you have already been using to compile in the new environment without errors.
The character sets used on the mainframe and workstation are different and can cause some compile problems:
Embedded control characters
If a source file contains characters with hexadecimal values less than '20'x, the workstation compiler might misinterpret the size of a line in that file, or even the size of the file itself. You should use hexadecimal character constants to encode these values.
If you are downloading a source file from the host that has variables initialized to values entered with a hexadecimal editor, some of those values might have a hexadecimal value less than '20'x even though they have greater values on the host.
National characters and other symbols
Transferring programs between platforms can cause errors if you use national characters and other symbols (in PL/I context) in certain code pages. This is true of the logical “not” (
¬
) and “or” (|) signs, the currency symbol, and use of the following alphabetic extenders in PL/I identifiers:
$
#
@
To avoid potential problems involving “not”, “or” and the currency symbol,
use the NOT (see “NOT” on page 94), OR (see “OR” on page 101), and
CURRENCY (see “CURRENCY” on page 42) compile time options on the
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
3
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation
*PROCESS statement. Avoid potential problems involving other characters by
using the NAMES (see “NAMES” on page 91) compile-time option to define
extramural characters and symbols.
Choosing the right compile-time options
By selecting certain compile time options, you can make your source code more portable across compilers and platforms.
If you want to improve compatibility with pre-Enterprise PL/I, you could specify the following options: v
DEFAULT( DESCLOCATOR EVENDEC NULL370 RETURNS(BYADDR) ) v
LIMITS( EXTNAME(7) NAME(31) )
Note that the option DEFAULT(RETURNS(BYADDR)) will make the invocation of a non-PL/I function on the workstation fail unless the BYVALUE attribute is specified in the RETURNS description.
These (and all the other compiler) options are listed alphabetically in Chapter 3,
“Compile-time options,” on page 27 where they are also described in detail.
Language restricted
Except where indicated, the compiler will flag the use of any language that is restricted.
RECORD I/O
RECORD I/O is supported, but with the following restrictions: v
The EVENT clause on READ/WRITE statements is not supported.
v
The UNLOCK statement is not supported.
v
The following options of the ENVIRONMENT attribute are not supported, but their use is flagged only under LANGLVL(NOEXT):
– ADDBUFF
– ASCII
– BUFFERS
– BUFND
– BUFNI
– BUFOFF
– INDEXAREA
– LEAVE
– NCP
– NOWRITE
– REGIONAL(2)
– REGIONAL(3)
– REREAD
– SIS
– SKIP
– TOTAL
– TP
– TRKOFL
STREAM I/O
STREAM I/O is supported, but the following restrictions apply to PUT/GET
DATA statements: v
DEFINED is not supported if the DEFINED variable is BIT or GRAPHIC or has a POSITION attribute.
4
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation
v
DEFINED is not supported if its base variable is an array slice or an array with a different number of dimensions than the defined variable.
Structure expressions
Structure expressions as arguments are not supported unless both of the following conditions are true: v
There is a parameter description.
v
The parameter description specifies all constant extents.
Array expressions
An array expression is not allowed as an argument to a user function unless it is an array of scalars of known size. Consequently, any array of scalars of arithmetic type may be passed to a user function, but there may be problems with arrays of varying-length strings.
The following example shows a numeric array expression supported in a call: dcl x entry, (y(10),z(10)) fixed bin(31); call x(y + z);
The following unprototyped call would be flagged since it requires a string expression of unknown size: dcl a1 entry; dcl (b(10),c(10)) char(20) var; call a1(b || c);
However, the following prototyped call would not be flagged: dcl a2 entry(char(30) var); dcl (b(10),c(10)) char(20) var; call a2(b || c);
DEFAULT statement
Factored default specifications are not supported.
For example, a statement such as the following is not supported: default ( range(a:h), range(p:z) ) fixed bin;
But you could change the above statement to the following equivalent and supported statement: default range(a:h) fixed bin, range(p:z) fixed bin;
The use of a "(" after the DEFAULT keyword is reserved for the same purpose as under the ANSI standard: after the DEFAULT keyword, the standard allows a parenthesized logical predicate in attributes.
Extents of automatic variables
An extent of an automatic variable cannot be set by a function nested in the procedure where the automatic variable is declared or by an entry variable unless the entry variable is declared before the automatic variable.
Built-in functions
Built-in functions are supported with the following exceptions/restrictions: v
The PLITEST built-in function is not supported.
v
Pseudovariables are not supported in:
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
5
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation
– The STRING option of PUT statements v
Pseudovariables permitted in DO loops are restricted to:
– IMAG
– REAL
– SUBSTR
– UNSPEC v The POLY built-in function has the following restrictions:
– The first argument must be REAL FLOAT.
– The second argument must be scalar.
v
The COMPLEX pseudovariable is not supported.
v
The IMS built-in subroutines PLICANC, PLICKPT, and PLIREST are not supported.
iSUB defining
Support for iSUB defining is limited to arrays of scalars.
DBCS
DBCS can be used only in the following: v
G and M constants v
Identifiers v
Comments
G literals can start and end with a DBCS quote followed by either a DBCS G or an
SBCS G.
Macro preprocessor
Suffixes that follow string constants are not replaced by the macro preprocessor—whether or not these are legal PL/I suffixes—unless you insert a delimiter between the ending quotation mark of the string and the first letter of the suffix.
OS PL/I V2R1 compiler introduced this change. As an example, consider:
%DCL (GX, XX) CHAR;
%GX=’||FX’;
%XX=’||ZZ’;
DATA = ’STRING’GX;
DATA = ’STRING’XX;
DATA = ’STRING’ GX;
DATA = ’STRING’ XX;
Under OS PL/I V1, this produces the source:
DATA = ’STRING’||FX;
DATA = ’STRING’||ZZ;
DATA = ’STRING’ ||FX;
DATA = ’STRING’ ||ZZ;
However, under PL/I for MVS & VM and Enterprise PL/I for z/OS, it produces the source:
DATA = ’STRING’GX;
DATA = ’STRING’XX;
DATA = ’STRING’ ||FX;
DATA = ’STRING’ ||ZZ;
6
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Getting mainframe applications to compile on the workstation
Using the macro facility to help port programs
In many cases, potential portability problems can be avoided by using the macro facility because it has the capability of isolating platform-specific code. For example, you can include platform-specific code in a compilation for a given platform and exclude it from compilation for a different platform.
The PL/I for Windows macro facility COMPILETIME built-in function returns the date using the format 'DD.MMM.YY', while the PL/I for z/OS macro facility
COMPILETIME built-in function returns the date using the format 'DD MMM YY'.
This allows you to write code that can contain conditional system-dependent code that compiles correctly under PL/I for Windows and all versions of the mainframe
PL/I compiler, for example:
%dcl compiletime builtin;
%if substr(compiletime,3,1) = ’.’ %then
%do;
/* Windows PL/I code */
%end;
%else
%do;
/* z/OS PL/I code */
%end;
For information about the macro facility, see the
PL/I Language Reference
.
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
Once you have downloaded your source program from the mainframe and compiled it using the workstation compiler without errors, the next step is to run the program. If you want to get the same results on the workstation as you do on the mainframe, you need to know about elements and behavior of the PL/I language that vary due to the underlying hardware or software architecture.
Linking differences
Every .EXE that you build must contain exactly one main routine, that is, exactly one procedure containing OPTIONS(MAIN). If no main routine exists, the linker complains that your program has no starting address. If more than one main routine exists, the linker complains that there are duplicate references to the name main
.
Every .DLL that you build must have at least one module compiled with the
DLLINIT compile-time option (see “DLLINIT” on page 56).
Data representations causing runtime differences
Most programs act the same without regard to data representation, but to ensure that this is true for your programs, you need to understand the differences described in the following sections.
The workstation compilers support options that instruct the operating system to treat data and floating-point operations the same way that the mainframe does.
There are suboptions of the DEFAULT compile-time option that you should specify for all mainframe applications that might need to be changed when moving code to the workstation: v
DEFAULT(EBCDIC) instead of ASCII v
DEFAULT(HEXADEC) instead of IEEE
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
7
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
v
DEFAULT(E(HEXADEC)) instead of DFT(E(IEEE)) v
DEFAULT (NONNATIVE) instead of NATIVE v
DEFAULT (NONNATIVEADDR) instead of NATIVEADDR
For more information on these compile-time options, see “DEFAULT” on page 44.
ASCII versus EBCDIC
Workstation operating systems use the ASCII character set while the mainframe uses the EBCDIC character set. This means that most characters have a different hexadecimal value. For example, the hexadecimal value for a blank is '20'x in the ASCII character set and '40'x in the EBCDIC character set.
This means that code dependent on the EBCDIC hexadecimal values of character data can logically fail when run using ASCII. For example, code that tests whether or not a character is a blank by comparing it with '40'x fails when run using ASCII. Similarly, code that changes letters to uppercase by using 'OR' and '80'b4 fails when run using ASCII. (Code that uses the
TRANSLATE built-in function to change to uppercase letters, however, does not fail.)
In the ASCII character set, digits have the hexadecimal values '30'x through
'39'x. The ASCII lowercase letter 'a' has the hexadecimal value '61'x, and the uppercase letter 'A' has the hexadecimal value '41'x. In the EBCDIC character set, digits have the hexadecimal values 'F0'x through 'F9'x. In EBCDIC, the lowercase letter 'a' has the hexadecimal value '81'x, and the uppercase letter 'A' has the hexadecimal value 'C1'x. These differences have some interesting consequences:
While 'a' < 'A' is true for EBCDIC, it is false for ASCII.
While 'A' < '1' is true for EBCDIC, it is false for ASCII.
While x >= '0' almost always means that x is a digit in EBCDIC, this is not true for ASCII.
Because of the differences described, the results of sorting character strings are different under EBCDIC and ASCII. For many programs, this has no effect, but you should be aware of potential logic errors if your program depends on the exact sequence in which some character strings are sorted.
For information on converting from ASCII to EBCDIC, see “Using data conversion tables” on page 376.
NATIVE versus NONNATIVE
The personal computer (PC) holds integers in a form that is byte-reversed when compared to the form in which they are held on the mainframe or AIX.
This means, for example, that a FIXED BIN(15) variable holding the value 258, which equals 256+2, is held in storage on Windows as '0201'x and on AIX or the mainframe as '0102'x. A FIXED BIN(31) variable with the same value would be held as '02010000'x on Windows and as '00000102'x on AIX or the mainframe.
The AIX and mainframe representation is known as Big Endian (Big
End In).
The Windows representation is known, conversely, as Little Endian
(Little End In).
This difference in internal representations affects: v
FIXED BIN variables requiring 2 or more bytes v
OFFSET variables v
The length prefix of VARYING strings
8
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
v
Ordinal and area data
For most programs, this difference should not create any problems. If your program depends on the hexadecimal value of an integer, however, you should be aware of potential logic errors. Such a dependency might exist if you use the UNSPEC built-in function with a FIXED BINARY argument, or if a BIT variable is based on the address of a FIXED BINARY variable.
If your program manipulates pointers as if they were integers, the difference in data representation can cause problems. If you specify
DEFAULT(NONNATIVE), you probably also need to specify
DEFAULT(NONNATIVEADDR).
You can specify the NONNATIVE attribute on selected declarations. For example, the assignment in the following statement converts all the FIXED BIN values in the structure from nonnative to native: dcl
1 a1 native,
2 b fixed bin(31),
2 c fixed dec(8,4),
2 d fixed bin(31),
2 e bit(32),
2 f fixed bin(31); dcl
1 a2 nonnative,
2 b fixed bin(31),
2 c fixed dec(8,4),
2 d fixed bin(31),
2 e bit(32),
2 f fixed bin(31); a1 = a2;
IEEE versus HEXADEC
Workstation operating systems represent floating-point data using the IEEE format while the mainframe traditionally uses the hexadecimal format.
Table 1 summarizes the differences between normalized floating-point IEEE
and hexadecimal:
Table 1. Normalized IEEE versus normalized hexadecimal
Specification
Approximate range of values
IEEE (AIX)
±10E-308 to
±10E+308
32 Maximum precision for FLOAT
DECIMAL
Maximum precision for FLOAT
BINARY
Maximum number of digits in
FLOAT DECIMAL exponent
Maximum number of digits in
FLOAT BINARY exponent
106
4
5
IEEE (PC)
±3.30E-4932 to
±1.21E+4932
18
64
4
5
Hexadecimal
±10E-78 to
±10E+75
33
109
2
3
Hexadecimal float has the same maximum and minimum exponent values for short, long, and extended floating-point, but IEEE float has differing maximum and minimum exponent values for short, long, and extended floating-point.
This means that while 1E74, which in PL/I should have the attributes FLOAT
DEC(1), is a valid hexadecimal short float, it is not a valid IEEE short float.
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
9
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
For most programs these differences should create no problems, just as the different representations of FIXED BIN variables should create no problems.
However, use caution in coding if your program depends on the hexadecimal value of a float value.
Also, while FIXED BIN calculations produce the same result independent of the internal representations described above, floating-point calculations do not necessarily produce the same result. When the compiler converts a floating-point literal into its internal binary representation, the representations might not be the same as those from different platforms. The results from the floating-point calculation on different platforms might also be slightly different.
This is particularly true for short and extended floating-point.
The differences are usually very small and might cause rounding errors.
Programs that depend on floating-point values being exact might get incorrect results. For example, if a file contains a floating-point binary value, you might search the file for that value and fail to find an exact match.
EBCDIC DBCS versus ASCII DBCS
EBCDIC DBCS strings are enclosed in shift codes, while ASCII DBCS strings are not enclosed in shift codes. The hexadecimal values used to represent the same characters are also different.
Again, for most programs this should make no difference. If your program depends on the hexadecimal value of a graphic string or on a character string containing mixed character and graphic data, use caution in your coding practices.
Environment differences affecting portability
There are some differences, other than data representation, between the workstation and mainframe platforms that can also affect the portability of your programs. This section describes some of these differences.
File names
File naming conventions on the PC are very different from those on the mainframe. The following file name, for example, is valid on the PC, but not on the mainframe: d:\programs\data\myfile.dat
This can affect portability if you use file names in your PL/I source as part of the TITLE option of the OPEN and FETCH statements.
File attributes
PL/I allows many file attributes to be specified as part of the ENVIRONMENT attribute in a file declaration. Many of these attributes have no meaning on the workstation, in which case the compiler ignores them. If your program depends on these attributes being respected, your program is not likely to port successfully.
Control codes
Some characters that have no particular meaning on the mainframe are interpreted as control characters by the workstation and can lead to incorrect processing of data files having a TYPE of either LF, LFEOF, CRLF, or
CRLFEOF. Such files should not contain any of the following characters:
'0A'x (“LF - line feed”)
'0D'x (“CR - carriage return”)
'1A'x (“EOF - end of file”)
10
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
For example, if the file in the code below has TYPE(CRLF), the WRITE statement raises the ERROR condition with oncode 1041 because 2573 has the hexadecimal value '0D0A'x. This would not occur if the file had TYPE of either
FIXED, VARLS, or VARMS.
dcl
1 a native,
2 b char(10),
2 c fixed bin(15),
2 d char(10); dcl f file output; a.b = ’alpha’; a.c = 2573; a.d = ’omega’; write file(f) from(a);
Device-dependent control codes
Use of device-dependent (platform-specific) control codes in your programs or files can cause problems when trying to port them to other platforms that do not necessarily support the control codes.
As with all other very platform-specific code, it is best to isolate such code as much as possible so that it can be replaced easily when you move the application to another platform.
Language elements causing runtime differences
The PL/I compiler implements some language elements differently on Windows and z/OS. These differences in implementation might cause differences in the way your program runs. Each of the following items is described in terms of its behavior on Windows.
FIXED BIN(p) maps to 1 byte if p <= 7
If you have any variables declared as FIXED BIN with a precision of 7 or less, they occupy 1 byte of storage under PL/I for Windows instead of two as under PL/I for z/OS. If the variable is part of a structure, this usually changes how the structure is mapped, and that could affect how your program runs.
For example, if the structure were read in from a file created on the mainframe, fewer bytes would be read in.
To avoid this difference, you could change the precision of the variable to a value between 8 and 15 (inclusive).
INITIAL attribute for AREAs is ignored
To keep PL/I for Windows from ignoring the INITIAL attribute for AREAs, convert INITIAL clauses into assignment statements.
For example, in the following code fragment, the elements of the array are not initialized to a1, a2, a3, and a4.
dcl (a1,a2,a3,a4) area; dcl a(4) area init( a1, a2, a3, a4 );
However, you can rewrite the code as follows so that the array is initialized as wanted.
dcl (a1,a2,a3,a4) area; dcl a(4) area; a(1) = a1; a(2) = a2; a(3) = a3; a(4) = a4;
Chapter 1. Porting applications between platforms
11
Getting mainframe applications to run on the workstation
Issuing of ERROR messages
When the ERROR condition is raised, no ERROR message is issued under PL/I for Windows if the following two conditions are met: v
There is an ERROR ON-unit established.
v
The ERROR ON-unit recovers from the condition by using a GOTO to transfer control out of the block.
ERROR messages are directed to STDERR rather than to the SYSPRINT data set. By default, this is the terminal. If SYSPRINT is directed to the terminal, any output in the SYSPRINT buffer (not yet written to SYSPRINT) is written before any ERROR message is written.
ADD, DIVIDE, and MULTIPLY do not return scaled FIXED BIN
Under the RULES(IBM) compile-time option, which is the default, variables can be declared as FIXED BIN with a nonzero scale factor. Infix, prefix, and comparison operations are performed on scaled FIXED BIN as with the mainframe. However, when the ADD, DIVIDE, or MULTIPLY built-in functions have arguments with nonzero factors or specify a result with a nonzero scale factor, the PL/I for Windows compilers evaluate the built-in function as FIXED
DEC rather as FIXED BIN as the mainframe compiler.
For example, the PL/I for Windows compilers would evaluate the DIVIDE built-in function in the assignment statement below as a FIXED DEC expression: dcl (i,j) fixed bin(15); dcl x fixed bin(15,2);
.
.
.
x = divide(i,j,15,2)
Enablement of OVERFLOW and ZERODIVIDE
For OVERFLOW and ZERODIVIDE, the ERROR condition is raised under the following conditions: v
OVERFLOW or ZERODIVIDE is raised and the corresponding ON-unit is entered.
v Control does not leave the ON-unit through a GOTO statement.
12
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 2. Compiling and linking your program
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
Using the sample programs provided with the product.
Preparing to compile source programs .
Using a PROCEDURE statement with
Setting compile-time environment variables .
Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler .
Where to specify compile-time options .
IBM.OPTIONS and IBM.PPxxx environment variables .
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
Compile-time option descriptions .
Rules for using compile-time options .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
13
Include preprocessor options environment variable .
Macro facility options environment variables 150
Programming and compilation considerations 150
SQL preprocessor options environment variable 158
SQL preprocessor BIND environment variables 158
Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications 158
Defining the SQL communications area.
Defining SQL descriptor areas .
Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types .
Determining compatibility of SQL and PL/I data types .
Using statements and compile-time options 167
Sample programs for LOB support .
User defined functions sample programs .
Handling SQL error return codes .
SQL compatibility and migration considerations 170
Programming and compilation considerations 170
CICS preprocessor options environment variables .
Coding CICS statements in PL/I applications 173
14
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Writing CICS transactions in PL/I .
CICS abends used for PL/I programs .
Chapter 6. Linking your program
Linking from the command line .
Specifying executable output type .
Producing a dynamic link library.
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
Setting options on the command line .
Setting options in the ILINK environment variable .
Summary of Windows linker options .
/EXTDICTIONARY, /NOEXTDICTIONARY 199
/INFORMATION, /NOINFORMATION .
/LINENUMBERS, /NOLINENUMBERS .
Part 2. Compiling and linking your program
15
16
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
This first part of this chapter describes how to compile, link, and run a simple Pl/I program. The remainder of the chapter is dedicated to a more detailed description of setting up your compilation environment.
A short practice exercise
Try compiling, linking, and running a simple program to get an idea of how to use
PL/I in the Windows environment.
The HELLO program
Here are the steps to make a program that displays the character string “Hello!” on your computer screen.
1. Create the source program
Create a file, HELLO.PLI, with the following PL/I statements.
Hello: proc options(main); display(’Hello!’); end Hello;
Leave the first space of every line blank: by default, the compiler only recognizes characters in columns 2-72. (For additional information, see
Save the file to disk.
2. Compile the program
In a window or full-screen session, go to the directory that contains the
HELLO.PLI file and enter the following command: pli hello
The compiler displays information about the compilation on your screen, and creates the object file (HELLO.OBJ) in the current directory.
3. Link the program
Without changing directories, enter the following command: ilink hello.obj
This combines the file HELLO.OBJ with needed library files (as specified by the LIBS compile-time option), producing the file HELLO.EXE (the executable program) in the same directory.
Since no parameters are specified with the link command, the defaults are used. (The options available with the link command are described in
Chapter 6, “Linking your program,” on page 185.)
4. Run the program
Without changing directories, enter the following command: hello
This invokes the HELLO.EXE program, which displays
Hello!
on your monitor.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
17
A short practice exercise
To make things easier, programmers often put the commands for compile, link, and run together in a command (CMD) file.
Using compile-time options
As you prepare to compile programs, consider using a subset of the available compile-time options. For a complete description of the compile-time options,
including their optional abbreviated forms, see Chapter 3, “Compile-time options,” on page 27.
The following example illustrates how to specify options as part of the compilation command: pli filename (source attributes(full)
source
This option causes your source code and compiler messages to be saved in a compiler listing file (for example, HELLO.LST).
attributes(full)
This option causes a listing of all the attributes in effect for each programmer-defined identifier to be included in the compiler listing.
Using the sample programs provided with the product
Several sample programs have been included with the product, some of which appear in different parts of this book.
For Windows, the sample programs are installed in the ..\SAMPLES directory. A readme file smwread.me
. is provided for the sample programs.
Preparing to compile source programs
Before compiling your source program, you should know what structure and format the compiler expects from your source program files.
Program file structure
A PL/I application can consist of several compilation units. You must compile each compilation unit separately and then build the complete application by linking the resulting object files together.
A compilation unit consists of a main source file and any number of include files.
You do not compile the include files separately because they actually become part of the main program during compilation. The compiler does not allow DBCS to be used in source file or include file names
If your program requires %PROCESS or *PROCESS statements, they must be the first lines in your source file. The first line after them that does not consist entirely of blanks or comments must be a PACKAGE or PROCEDURE statement. The last line of your source file that does not consist entirely of blanks or comments must be an END statement matching the PACKAGE or PROCEDURE statement.
The following examples show the correct way to format source files.
Using a PROCEDURE statement with PROCESS:
%PROCESS ;
%PROCESS ;
%PROCESS ;
18
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Preparing to compile source programs
/* optional comments */ procedure_Name: proc( ... ) options( ... );
...
end procedure_Name;
Using a PACKAGE statement with PROCESS::
*PROCESS ;
*PROCESS ;
*PROCESS ;
/* optional comments */ package_Name: package exports( ... ) options( ... );
...
end package_Name;
The source file in a compilation can contain several programs separated by
*PROCESS statements. All but the first set of *PROCESS statements are ignored, and the compiler assumes a PACKAGE EXPORTS(*) statement before the first procedure.
INCLUDE processing
You can include additional PL/I files at specified points in a compilation unit by using %INCLUDE statements. For the %INCLUDE statement syntax, see PL/I
Language Reference.
If you specify the file to be included using a string, the compiler searches for the file exactly as named in that string. If you specify an include file using one of the more traditional PL/I methods, however, by either using a
ddname and member name
or just a
member name
, the compiler appends a file extension to the
member name
.
You can specify which file extensions are appended to the member name by using the INCLUDE compiler option. For example, if you specify the INCLUDE option as INCLUDE(EXT(CPY)), when the compiler sees either of the following statements, it tries to include the file member.cpy
.
%include member;
%include ddname(member);
The compiler searches for this file in the following order:
1.
The directories specified in the environment variable IBM.DDNAME, if the
%include statement specified a
ddname
2.
The directories specified in the environment variable IBM.SYSLIB
3.
The directories specified in the environment variable INCLUDE
4.
The current directory.
If you specify more than one extension in the INCLUDE compiler option, the compiler searches all the directories above using the first extension; then does another pass through all the same directories using the second extension, and so on.
%LINE directive
The %LINE directive specifies that the next line should be treated in messages and in information generated for debugging as if it came from the specified line and file.
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
19
Preparing to compile source programs
The characters '%LINE' must be in columns 1 through 5 of the input line for the directive to be recognized (and conversely, any line starting with these five characters is treated as a %LINE directive). The line-number must be an integral value of seven digits or less and the file-specification must not be enclosed in quotes. Any characters specified after the semicolon are ignored.
An example of what these lines should look like can be obtained by compiling a program with the options PPTRACE MACRO and MDECK.
Margins
By default, the compiler ignores any data in the first column of your source program file and sets the right margin 72 spaces from the left.
You can change the default margin setting (see “MARGINS” on page 82). If you
choose to keep the default setting, your source code should begin in column 2.
Note:
The %PROCESS (or *PROCESS) statement is an exception to the margin rule and
must
start in the first column. For more information about the
%PROCESS statement, see “%PROCESS statement” on page 25.
Program file format
The compiler, running under the Windows operating systems, expects the contents of your source file to consist of ASCII format and CR-LF type
. If you created your file on a workstation, the format should be correct; however, if you transfer a file from another machine environment, make sure that the file transfer utility does any needed translation (to ASCII and CR-LF).
The compiler can interpret characters that are in the range '00'X to '1F'X as control codes. If you use characters in this range in your program, the results are unpredictable.
Line continuation
During compilation, any source line that is shorter than the value of the right-hand margin setting as defined by the MARGINS option is padded on the right with blank characters to make the line as long as the right-hand margin setting. For example, if you use the IBM-default MARGINS (2,72), any line less than 72 characters long is padded on the right to make the line 72 characters long.
If long identifier names extend beyond the right margin, you should put the entire name on the next line rather than try to split it between two lines.
If a line of your program exactly reaches the right-hand margin, the last character of that line is concatenated with the first character within the margins of the next line with no blank characters in between.
If you have a string that reaches beyond the right-hand margin setting, you can carry the text of the string on to the following line (or lines). It is recommended that long strings be split into a series of shorter strings (each of which fits on a line) that are concatenated together. For example, instead of coding this: do; if x > 200 then display (’This is a long string and requires more than one line to
1. A CR-LF type file is composed of lines of variable lengths, each delimited by the CR-LF characters. CR and LF are special ASCII characters that signify “Carriage Return” and “Line Feed”—hexadecimal values 0D and 0A, respectively. The compiler interprets
CR-LF, LF-CR, CR, or LF as a record delimiter. The hexadecimal value 1A signifies the end of the file.
20
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Preparing to compile source programs
type it into my program’); else display (’This is a short string’); end;
You should use the following sequence of statements: do; if x > 200 then display (’This is a long string and requires more than ’
{
’one line to type it into my program’); else display (’This is a short string’); end;
Setting compile-time environment variables
The way you set compile-time environment variables depends on your operating system.
In Windows, environment variables are set in the
System
window (to get there, double-click on
Main
and then on
Control Panel
). In the
System
window, click on
Set
to add a new item to the list of User Environment Variables. Options set in the
Windows
System
window are in effect when you boot your computer unless you override them using a
.CMD
file or by specifying options on the command line.
For more information on environment variables and how they are used, refer to your system documentation.
The compiler provides several environment variables. They allow you to customize the defaults for: v
Location of compiler input and output v
Compile-time options.
The default location for compiler input and output is the current directory; the
IBM-supplied default for each compile-time option is specified in Chapter 3,
“Compile-time options,” on page 27.
Some of the compiler environment variables specify a directory path—this should not include a file name or extension. If the path is for compiler input, each individual path (except the last) must be delimited by a semicolon. If the path is for compiler output, only the path to a specific directory is allowed.
IBM.OPTIONS
The IBM.OPTIONS environment variable specifies compiler option settings. For example: set ibm.options=xref attributes
The syntax of the character string you assign to the IBM.OPTIONS environment variable is the same as that required for the compile-time options specified on the
PLI command (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24).
The defaults together with the changes you apply using this environment variable become the new defaults. Any options you specify on the PLI command or in your source program override these defaults.
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
21
Setting compile-time environment variables
IBM.PPINCLUDE
The IBM.PPINCLUDE environment variable specifies the include preprocessor option settings. For example: set ibm.ppinclude=id(++include)
The syntax of the character string you assign to the IBM.PPINCLUDE environment variable is the same as that required for the compile-time options specified on the
PLI command (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24).
The defaults together with the changes you apply using this environment variable become the new defaults. Any options you specify on the PP(INCLUDE) option in the IBM.OPTIONS environment variable or the PLI command or in your source program override these defaults.
IBM.PPMACRO
The IBM.PPMACRO environment variable specifies the macro facility option settings. For example: set ibm.ppmacro=xref print
The syntax of the character string you assign to the IBM.PPMACRO environment variable is the same as that required for the compile-time options specified on the
PLI command (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24).
The defaults together with the changes you apply using this environment variable become the new defaults. Any options you specify on the PP(MACRO) option in the IBM.OPTIONS environment variable or the PLI command or in your source program override these defaults.
IBM.PPSQL
The IBM.PPSQL environment variable specifies the SQL preprocessor option settings. For example: set ibm.ppsql=dbname(employee)
The syntax of the character string you assign to the IBM.PPSQL environment variable is the same as that required for the compile-time options specified on the
PLI command (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24).
The defaults together with the changes you apply using this environment variable become the new defaults. Any options you specify on the PP(SQL) option in the
IBM.OPTIONS environment variable or the PLI command or in your source program override these defaults.
IBM.PPCICS
The IBM.PPCICS environment variable specifies the CICS preprocessor option settings. For example: set ibm.ppcics=source edf
The syntax of the character string you assign to the IBM.PPCICS environment variable is the same as that required for the compile-time options specified on the
PLI command (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24).
22
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Setting compile-time environment variables
The defaults together with the changes you apply using this environment variable become the new defaults. Any options you specify on the PP(CICS) option in the
IBM.OPTIONS environment variable or the PLI command or in your source program override these defaults.
IBM.SOURCE
The IBM.SOURCE environment variable specifies the paths for your source program files. For example: set ibm.source=c:\pli\project\updates;\pli\system
IBM.SYSLIB
The IBM.SYSLIB environment variable specifies the primary input directory search path for include files identified by %INCLUDE statements in your source program.
For example: set ibm.syslib=c:\pli\project\updates;\pli\system
These directories are searched
before
any directories specified in the INCLUDE environment variable.
IBM.PRINT
The IBM.PRINT environment variable specifies the path where listing files are written. For example: set ibm.print=c:\pli\project\updates
Listing files have the same name as your source program file, with an extension of
ASM for the assembler listing and LST for the other listing information.
By default, diagnostic messages and a return code are displayed on your screen.
IBM.OBJECT
The IBM.OBJECT environment variable specifies the output directory for object and definition files which have the same name as your source program file, with an extension of OBJ or DEF. For example: set ibm.object=c:\pli\project\updates
An object file contains the machine code translation of your PL/I source statements. To make it executable, you must link it with any other OBJ files that comprise your program, and with appropriate library files. For a summary of how
to link your program, see Chapter 6, “Linking your program,” on page 185.
IBM.DECK
The IBM.DECK environment variable specifies the output directory for the modified source file produced by the macro facility. This file is only produced when the MDECK compile-time option is in effect. For example: set ibm.deck=c:\pli\project\updates
The output file has the same name as your primary source program file, with an extension of DEK. You can use it as input to a later compilation.
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
23
Setting compile-time environment variables
INCLUDE
The INCLUDE environment variable specifies the secondary input directory search path for include files identified by %INCLUDE statements in your source program.
For example: set include=c:\pli\program
These directories are searched
after
any specified in the IBM.SYSLIB environment variable.
TMP
The TMP environment variable specifies the input and output directory for any temporary work files that the compiler needs. For example: set tmp=c:\pli\project\updates
Do not specify a directory that resides on a Local Area Network (LAN). If you are working with large programs, make sure you set this variable to a location with sufficient free space.
Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler
Use the PLI command to invoke the compiler. You can enter it on the command line or in a CMD file.
pli_program_file_specification
The Windows file specification for your primary source program file. If you omit the extension from your file specification, the compiler assumes an extension of PLI. If you omit the complete path, the current directory is assumed, unless you specify otherwise using IBM.SOURCE.
compiler_option
One or more compile-time options, described in Chapter 3, “Compile-time options,” on page 27.
The following is an example of the PLI command: pli hello (source
You can use a response file to put common options into a file and then use that file to compile various programs. For example, if the file pli.opt
contained a list of options, then you could compile the towers sample program as follows: pli towers.pli ( @pli.opt
When using response files, remember these guidelines: v
The name of the source file and options can come before the name of the response file, but nothing should follow it.
v A response file can point to another response file.
Where to specify compile-time options
You can specify compile-time options in the three places described in the following sections. Each successive place overrides the options specified in the previous place, starting with the defaults as a base.
Note:
After PL/I determines the compile-time option settings to use in compilation, individual source statements in your program might further modify the effect of various compile-time options. For example, specifying
24
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Where to specify compile-time options
OPTION(BYVALUE) in the program takes precedence over the
DEFAULT(BYVALUE) compile-time option.
IBM.OPTIONS and IBM.PPxxx environment variables
The first way you can specify options is to set the IBM.OPTIONS environment variable for compile-time options and IBM.PPxxx environent variables for
preprocessor options. See “Setting compile-time environment variables” on page
21. Controlling compile-time options with these environment variables overrides
the normal option defaults.
PLI command
The second way to specify compile-time options—overriding option defaults and
IBM.OPTIONS and IBM.PPxxx—is on the PLI command when you invoke the
compiler (see “Using the PLI command to invoke the compiler” on page 24). The
options apply only to the current compilation.
%PROCESS statement
The third and final way to specify compile-time options—overriding option defaults, IBM.OPTIONS and IBM.PPxxx and the PLI command—is to use the
%PROCESS (or *PROCESS) statement in your PL/I source program. The options apply only to the current compilation.
The following example illustrates the use of the %PROCESS statement:
%process source margins(1,80);
Hello: proc options(main); display(’Hello!’); end Hello;
You can specify one or more %PROCESS statements, but they must precede all other PL/I source statements, including blank lines.
You must code the percent sign (or the asterisk) of the PROCESS statement in the first column of your source file. The keyword PROCESS can follow in the next column or after any number of blanks. The list of compile-time options on the
%PROCESS statement must not extend beyond the default right-hand margin. You can continue the %PROCESS statement onto the next line, but make sure that in doing so you do not split a keyword or value. It is recommended that, instead of wrapping the statement, you code multiple %PROCESS statements, one per line.
Once all %PROCESS statements are interpreted, the rest of the program is read using the margin settings determined after considering the PLI command and the
%PROCESS statements. This means that the sample %PROCESS statement shown previously would be processed correctly assuming that the default,
MARGINS(2,72), was in effect at compile time.
Chapter 2. Compiling your program
25
Where to specify compile-time options
26
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
This chapter contains detailed compile-time options descriptions, including abbreviations, defaults, and code samples where applicable.
Compile-time option descriptions
There are three types of compiler options; however, most compiler options have a positive and negative form. The negative form is the positive with 'NO' added at the beginning (as in TEST and NOTEST). Some options have only a positive form
(as in SYSTEM). The three types of compiler options are:
1.
Simple pairs of keywords: a positive form that requests a facility, and an alternative negative form that inhibits that facility (for example, NEST and
NONEST).
2.
Keywords that allow you to provide a value list that qualifies the option (for example, FLAG(W)).
3.
A combination of 1 and 2 above (for example, NOCOMPILE(E)).
Table 2 lists all the compiler options with their abbreviations (if any) and their
IBM-supplied default values. If an option has any suboptions which may be abbreviated, those abbreviations are described in the full description of the option.
For the sake of brevity, some of the options are described loosely in the table (for example, only one suboption of LANGLVL is mandatory, and similarly, if you specify one suboption of TEST, you do not have to specify the other). The full and completely accurate syntax is described in the pages that follow.
The paragraphs following Table 2 describe the options in alphabetical order. For
those options specifying that the compiler is to list information, only a brief
Table 2. Compile-time options, abbreviations, and IBM-supplied defaults
Compile-Time Option
ADDEXT | NOADDEXT
AGGREGATE(DECIMAL | HEXADEC) |
NOAGGREGATE
ATTRIBUTES[(FULL|SHORT)] |
NOATTRIBUTES
BIFPREC(15 | 31)
BLANK('c')
CASERULES
-
-
-
Abbreviated Name Windows Default
-
AG | NAG
ADDEXT
NOAGGREGATE
A | NA NA [(FULL)]
CHECK(STORAGE | NOSTORAGE,
CONFORMANCE | NOCONFORMANCE)
CMPAT(LE | V1 | V2 | V3)
CODEPAGE(n)
COMPILE | NOCOMPILE[(W | E | S)]
COPYRIGHT(’string’) | NOCOPYRIGHT -
-
CMP
CP
C | NC
BIFPREC(31)
CASERULES(KEYWORD
(MIXED))
CHECK(NSTG,
NOCONFORMANCE)
CMPAT(V2)
CODEPAGE(00819)
NOCOMPILE(S)
NOCOPYRIGHT
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
27
Compile-time options
Table 2. Compile-time options, abbreviations, and IBM-supplied defaults (continued)
Compile-Time Option Abbreviated Name Windows Default
CURRENCY('c')
NODBCS | DBCS(JPN | CHS | CHT | KOR)
DEFAULT(
attribute | option
)
DEPRECATE(BUILTIN(
built-in-name
) | ENTRY(
entry-name
)
| INCLUDE(
filename
) | STMT(
variable-name
)
| VARIABLE(
variable-name
))
DEPRECATENEXT(BUILTIN(
built-in-name
) | ENTRY(
entry-name
)
| INCLUDE(
filename
) | STMT(
variable-name
)
| VARIABLE(
variable-name
))
DLLINIT | NODLLINIT
EXIT | NOEXIT
EXTRN(FULL | SHORT)
FLAG[(I | W | E | S)]
FLOATINMATH(ASIS | LONG | EXTENDED)
GONUMBER | NOGONUMBER
GRAPHIC | NOGRAPHIC
IGNORE(ASSERT, DISPLAY , PUT) | NOIGNORE
IMPRECISE | NOIMPRECISE
INCAFTER(PROCESS(
INCDIR('
LIBS
LIMITS(
directory name
INCLUDE[(EXT('
options
LINECOUNT(
MAXGEN(n)
)
n
)
LIST | NOLIST
filename
')
))
include extension
INITAUTO | NOINITAUTO
INITBASED | NOINITBASED
INITCTL | NOINITCTL
INITSTATIC | NOINITSTATIC
'))]
INSOURCE[(FULL|SHORT)] | NOINSOURCE
LANGLVL(NOEXT | OS)
LINEDIR | NOLINEDIR
LISTVIEW( SOURCE | AFTERMACRO
| AFTERCICS | AFTERSQL | AFTERALL )
MACRO | NOMACRO
MARGINI('c') | NOMARGINI
MARGINS(m,n[,c])| NOMARGINS
MAXMSG(I | W | E | S,n)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CURR
-
DFT
F
GN | NGN
GR | NGR
INC
-
IS | NIS
LC
M | NM
MI | NMI
MAR(m,n)
CURRENCY($)
NODBCS
DEPRECATE(BUILTIN()
ENTRY() INCLUDE()
STMT() VARIABLE())
DEPRECATENEXT(
BUILTIN() ENTRY()
INCLUDE() STMT()
VARIABLE())
NODLLINIT
NOEXIT
EXTRN(FULL)
FLAG(W)
FLOATINMATH(ASIS)
NOGONUMBER
NOGRAPHIC
NOIGNORE
IMPRECISE
INCAFTER((PROCESS(""))
INCDIR()
INC(EXT('inc'))
NOINITAUTO
NOINITBASED
NOINITCTL
NOINITSTATIC
NOINSOURCE
LANGLVL(OS)
LINECOUNT(60)
NOLINEDIR
NOLIST
LISTVIEW(SOURCE)
NOMACRO
NOMARGINI
MARGINS
F-format: (2,72)
V-format: (10,100)
MAXGEN(100000)
MAXMSG(W,250)
28
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
Table 2. Compile-time options, abbreviations, and IBM-supplied defaults (continued)
Compile-Time Option Abbreviated Name Windows Default
MAXNEST(BLOCK(x) DO(y) IF(z))
MAXSTMT(n)
MAXTEMP(n)
MDECK | NOMDECK
MSG(390 | *)
MSGSUMMARY[(XREF | NOXREF)]
| NOMSGSUMMARY
NAMES('
lower
'[,
upper
])
NATLANG(ENU | CHS | CHT | DEU | ESP |
FRA | JPN | PTB)
NEST | NONEST
NOT
NUMBER | NONUMBER
OBJECT | NOOBJECT
OFFSET | NOOFFSET
ONSNAP(STRINGRANGE, STRINGSIZE)
| NOONSNAP
OPTIMIZE(0 | 2) | NOOPTIMIZE
OPTIONS[(ALL|DOC)] | NOOPTIONS
OR('c')
PP(
pp-name
) | NOPP
PPCICS(’string’) | NOPPCICS
PPINCLUDE(’string’) | NOPPINCLUDE
PPLIST(KEEP | ERASE)
PPMACRO(’string’) | NOPPMACRO
PPSQL(’string’) | NOPPSQL
PPTRACE | NOPPTRACE
PRECTYPE (ANS | DECDIGIT | DECRESULT)
PREFIX(
condition
)
PROBE | NOPROBE
PROCEED | NOPROCEED[(W | E | S)]
PROCESS[(KEEP | DELETE)] | NOPROCESS
QUOTE('"')
REDUCE | NOREDUCE
RESEXP | NORESEXP
RESPECT([DATE])
RULES(
options
)
SEMANTIC | NOSEMANTIC[(W | E | S)]
SNAP | NOSNAP
SOSI | NOSOSI
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MD | NMD
NUM | NNUM
OBJ | NOBJ
OF | NOF
OPT | NOPT
OP | NOP
PRO | NPRO
SEM | NSEM
MAXNEST(BLOCK(17)
DO(17) IF(17))
MAXSTMT(4096)
MAXTEMP(50000)
NOMDECK
MSG(*)
NOMSGSUMMARY
NAMES('#@$','#@$')
NATLANG(ENU)
NONEST
NOT('
¬
')
NUMBER
OBJECT
NOOFFSET
NOONSNAP
OPT(0)
NOOPTIONS
OR(' | ')
NOPP
NOPPCICS
NOPPINCLUDE
PPLIST(KEEP)
NOPPMACRO
NOPPSQL
NOPPTRACE
PRECTYPE(ANS)
PROBE
NOPROCEED(S)
PROCESS(DELETE)
QUOTE('"')
REDUCE
RESEXP
RESPECT()
NOSEMANTIC(S)
NOSNAP
NOSOSI
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
29
Compile-time options
Table 2. Compile-time options, abbreviations, and IBM-supplied defaults (continued)
Compile-Time Option Abbreviated Name Windows Default
SOURCE | NOSOURCE
STATIC(FULL | SHORT)
STMT | NOSTMT
STORAGE | NOSTORAGE
SYNTAX | NOSYNTAX[(W | E | S)]
SYSPARM('string')
SYSTEM(WINDOWS | CICS | IMS
| PENTIUM | S486)
-
-
-
-
S | NS
STG | NSTG
SYN | NSYN
NOSOURCE
STATIC(SHORT)
NOSTMT
NOSTORAGE
NOSYNTAX(S)
SYSPARM('')
SYSTEM(WINDOWS)
TERMINAL | NOTERMINAL
TEST | NOTEST
USAGE(
options
)
WIDECHAR(BIGENDIAN | LITTLEENDIAN)
-
TERM | NTERM TERMINAL
NOTEST
-
WCHAR
WIDECHAR(BIGENDIAN)
WINDOW(w)
XINFO(
options
)
-
-
WINDOW(1950)
XINFO(NODEF,NOMSG,
NOSYMNOSYN,NOXMI,
NOXML)
XML(CASE(UPPER | ASIS))
XREF[(FULL | SHORT)] | NOXREF
-
X | NX
Notes:
1.
FULL is the default suboption if the suboption is omitted with ATTRIBUTES or XREF.
2.
The default value for the BLANK character is the tab character with value '05'x.
XML(CASE(UPPER))
Rules for using compile-time options
1.
If you specify mutually exclusive compile-time options or suboptions, the last one you specify takes effect.
2.
If required strings conform to PL/I identifier rules, you do not need to enclose them in quotation marks. The compiler folds these strings to uppercase.
The following options should have their string specifications enclosed in quotation marks, because the string specifies either special characters or run-time options: v CURRENCY v DEFAULT(INITFILL) v
MARGINI v
NAMES v
NOT v
OR
3.
If an option has a string enclosed in quotation marks, the string itself cannot contain any quotation marks.
4.
If an option has a string enclosed in quotation marks, the string can be specified as a hexadecimal string, for example NOT('aa'x).
30
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
ADDEXT
Compile-time options
This option specifies whether file extensions (
.pli
,
.cpy
) are added by the compiler to source and include file names that have no extensions.
ADDEXT
NOADDEXT
NOADDEXT
File extensions are not added by the compiler. You must specify NOADDEXT when you do a checkout compile on the workstation from within the remote edit/compile environment because no mapping takes place.
ADDEXT
File extensions are added by the compiler. If you specify ADDEXT, the compiler would interpret the command “ pli hello
” as “ pli hello.pli
”.
ADDEXT and NOADDEXT only affect whether file extensions are added to filenames when the compiler is searching for a file. Compiler output files have file extensions regardless of the setting of this option.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
31
Compile-time options
AGGREGATE
The AGGREGATE option creates an Aggregate Length Table that gives the lengths of arrays and major structures in the source program in the compiler listing.
NOAGGREGATE
AGGREGATE
(
DECIMAL
HEXADEC )
ABBREVIATIONS: NAG, AG
The suboptions of the AGGREGATE option determine how the offsets of subelements are displayed in the Aggregate Length Table:
DECIMAL
All offsets in the aggregate listing will be displayed in decimal.
HEXADEC
All offsets in the aggregate listing will be displayed in hexadecimal.
The Aggregate Length Table includes structures but not arrays that have non-constant extents. However, the sizes and offsets of elements within structures with non-constant extents may be inaccurate or specified as *.
A sample listing is shown in “Using the compiler listing” on page 175.
32
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
ATTRIBUTES
This option specifies that a table of source-program identifiers and their attributes is included in the compiler listing.
NOATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTES
(
FULL
SHORT )
ABBREVIATIONS: NA, A
FULL
List all identifiers and attributes. For an example of the table produced when
you select ATTRIBUTES(FULL), see “Using the compiler listing” on page 175.
SHORT
Omit unreferenced identifiers.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
33
Compile-time options
BIFPREC
The BIFPREC option controls the precision of the FIXED BIN result returned by various built-in functions.
BIFPREC (
31
15 )
For best compatibility with PL/I for z/OS compilers, BIFPREC(15) should be used.
BIFPREC affects the following built-in functions: v
COUNT v
INDEX v
LENGTH v
LINENO v
ONCOUNT v
PAGENO v
SEARCH v SEARCHR v
SIGN v
VERIFY v
VERIFYR
The effect of the BIFPREC compiler option is most visible when the result of one of the above built-in functions is passed to an external function that has been declared without a parameter list. For example, consider the following code fragment: dcl parm char(40) var; dcl funky ext entry( pointer, fixed bin(15) ); dcl beans ext entry; call beans( addr(parm), verify(parm),’ ’) );
If the function
beans
actually declares its parameters as POINTER and FIXED
BIN(15), then if the code above were compiled with the option BIFPREC(31) and if it were run on a big-endian system such as z/OS, the compiler would pass a
4-byte integer as the second argument and the second parameter would appear to be zero.
Note that the function
funky
would work on all systems with either option.
The BIFPREC option does not affect the built-in functions DIM, HBOUND and
LBOUND. The CMPAT option determines the precision of the FIXED BIN result returned these three functions: under CMPAT(V1), these array-handling functions return a FIXED BIN(15) result, while under CMPAT(V2) and CMPAT(LE), they return a FIXED BIN(31) result. Under CMPAT(V3), they return a FIXED BIN(63) result.
34
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
BLANK
Compile-time options
The BLANK option specifies up to ten alternate symbols for the blank character.
BLANK ( '
char
' )
Note:
Do not code any blanks between the quotes.
The IBM-supplied default code point for the BLANK symbol is '09'X.
char
A single SBCS character.
You cannot specify any of the alphabetic characters, digits, and special characters defined in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
If you specify the BLANK option, the standard blank symbol is still recognized as a blank.
DEFAULT: BLANK('09'x)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
35
Compile-time options
CASERULES
The CASERULES option controls the enforcement of case rules for keywords.
MIXED
CASERULES ( KEYWORD ( UPPER ) )
LOWER
START
LOWER
Instructs the compiler to flag any keyword that is not in lowercase.
MIXED
Instructs the compiler to accept all keywords as they are coded. MIXED is the default.
START
Instructs the compiler to flag any keyword whose first letter is not in uppercase or whose remaining letters are not in lowercase.
UPPER
Instructs the compiler to flag any keyword that is not in uppercase.
Notes:
1.
The CASERULES option does not apply to elements of the OPTIONS and ENVIRONMENT attributes.
2.
The CASERULES option does not apply to any of the preprocessors.
36
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
CHECK
Compile-time options
The CHECK option specifies whether the compiler should generate special code to detect various programming errors.
CHECK (
,
NOCONFORMANCE
CONFORMANCE
NOSTORAGE
STORAGE
)
ABBREVIATIONS: STG, NSTG
Specifying CHECK(CONFORMANCE) causes the compiler to generate, under the following circumstances, code that checks at run time if the attributes of the arguments passed to a procedure match those of the declared parameters v
If a parameter is a string (or an array of strings) declared with a constant length, then the STRINGSIZE condition will be raised if the argument passed does not have matching length v If a parameter is a string (or an array of strings), then the STRINGSIZE condition will be raised if the argument does not have the same length type
(VARYING, NONVARYING or VARYINGZ) v
If a parameter is an array (of scalars or structures), then the SUBSCRIPTRANGE condition will be raised if any constant bounds do not match those of the passed argument. The the SUBSCRIPTRANGE condition will also be raised if all the extents are constant and the size and spacing of the array elements in the argument do not match those in the parameter. Arrays inside a structure are not checked.
v
If a parameter is a structure or union with constant extents, then the
SUBSCRIPTRANGE condition will be raised if the offset of the last element does not match that of the passed argument.
v If the procedure has the RETURNS BYADDR attribute and that attribute specifies a string type, then the STRINGSIZE condition will be raised if the string passed for the RETURNS value does not have matching length
This extra code will not be generated if the NODESCRIPTOR option applies to the procedure or if the block contains ENTRY statements or if the CMPAT(LE) option is in effect.
When you specify CHECK(STORAGE), the compiler calls slightly different library routines for ALLOCATE and FREE statements (except when these statements occur within an AREA). The following built-in functions, described in the PL/I Language
Reference, can be used only when CHECK(STORAGE) has been specified: v
ALLOCSIZE v
CHECKSTG v
UNALLOCATED
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
37
Compile-time options
CMPAT
The CMPAT option specifies the format used for descriptors generated by the compiler.
CMPAT (
LE
V3
V2
V1
)
ABBREVIATIONS: CMP
LE
Under CMPAT(LE), the compiler generates descriptors in the format defined by the Language Environment product.
V1
Under CMPAT(V1), the compiler generates the same descriptors as would be generated by the OS PL/I Version 1 compiler.
V2
Under CMPAT(V2), the compiler generates the same descriptors as would be generated by the OS PL/I Version 2 compiler when the CMPAT(V2) option was specified.
V3
Under CMPAT(V3), the compiler generates the same descriptors as would be generated by the Enterprise PL/I compiler when the CMPAT(V3) option was specified.
All the modules in an application must be compiled with the same CMPAT option.
The DFT(DESCLIST) option conflicts with the CMPAT(V1), CMPAT(V2), or
CMPAT(V3) option, and if it is specified with the CMPAT(V1), CMPAT(V2), or
CMPAT(V3) option, a message will be issued and the DFT(DESCLOCATOR) option assumed.
38
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
CODEPAGE
The CODEPAGE option specifies the code page used for: v conversions between CHARACTER and WIDECHAR v the default code page used by the PLISAX built-in subroutines
CODEPAGE (
ccsid
)
The supported CCSID's are:
01047
01140
01141
01142
01143
01144
01145
01146
01147
01148
01149
00037
00273
00277
00278
00280
00284
00285
The default CCSID 00819 is the Latin-1 ASCII codepage.
00297
00500
00871
00819
00813
00920
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
39
Compile-time options
COMPILE
This option specifies that execution of the code generation stage depends on the severity of messages issued prior to this stage of processing.
COMPILE
NOCOMPILE
(
S
E
W
)
ABBREVIATIONS: NC, C
NOCOMPILE
Compilation halts unconditionally after semantic checking.
NOCOMPILE(S)
Compilation halts if a severe or unrecoverable error is detected.
NOCOMPILE(E)
Compilation halts if an error, severe error, or unrecoverable error is detected.
NOCOMPILE(W)
Compilation halts if a warning, error, severe error, or unrecoverable error is detected.
COMPILE
Equivalent to NOCOMPILE(S).
If the compilation is terminated by the NOCOMPILE option, whether or not listings are produced depends on when the compilation stopped. For example, cross-reference and attribute listings should be produced with the NOCOMPILE option, but an error might occur during semantic checking that stops those listings from being produced.
40
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
COPYRIGHT
The COPYRIGHT option places a string in the object module, if generated. This string is loaded into memory with any load module into which this object is linked.
NOCOPYRIGHT
COPYRIGHT (
‘copyright string’
)
The string is limited to 1000 characters in length.
To ensure that the string remains readable across locales, only characters from the invariant character set should be used.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
41
Compile-time options
CURRENCY
This option allows you to specify a unique character for the dollar sign.
CURRENCY (
x
)
x
Character that you want the compiler and runtime to recognize and accept as the dollar sign in picture strings.
DEFAULT: CURRENCY('$')
42
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
DBCS
Compile-time options
The DBCS option determines what, if any, bytes are accepted as forming DBCS.
NODBCS
DBCS
When the DBCS option is specified, if the GRAPHIC option is also specified, then appropriate DBCS characters from the indicated language will be accepted in identifiers, literals etc.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
43
Compile-time options
DEFAULT
This option specifies defaults for attributes and options. These defaults are applied only when the attributes or options are not specified or implied in the source.
44
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
DEFAULT (
)
NULL
NULLSTRPTR (
SYSNULL
NULLSYS
NULL370
BIN1ARG
NOBIN1ARG
NONRECURSIVE
RECURSIVE
NOOVERLAP
OVERLAP
DESCLIST
DESCLOCATOR
BYVALUE
RETURNS (
BYADDR
HEXADEC
SHORT (
IEEE
ALIGNED
DUMMY (
UNALIGNED
LOWERINC
UPPERINC
MIN
ORDINAL (
MAX
IEEE
E (
HEXADEC
NORETCODE
RETCODE
ALIGNED
UNALIGNED
PSEUDODUMMY
NOPSEUDODUMMY
)
)
)
,
IBM
ANS
ASCII
EBCDIC
ASSIGNABLE
NONASSIGNABLE
BYADDR
BYVALUE
NONCONNECTED
CONNECTED
DESCRIPTOR
NODESCRIPTOR
NATIVE
NONNATIVE
NATIVEADDR
NONNATIVEADDR
NOINLINE
INLINE
REORDER
ORDER
OPTLINK
LINKAGE (
SYSTEM
CDECL
STDCALL
IEEE
HEXADEC
EVENDEC
NOEVENDEC
INITFILL
( '
nn
'
x
)
NOINITFILL
NULLSTRADDR
NONULLSTRADDR
)
)
)
)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
45
Compile-time options
ABBREVIATIONS: DFT, ASGN, NONASGN, CONN, NONCONN
ALIGNED or UNALIGNED
This suboption allows you to force byte-alignment on all of your variables.
If you specify ALIGNED, all variables other than character, bit, graphic, and picture are given the ALIGNED attribute unless the UNALIGNED attribute is explicitly specified (possibly on a parent structure) or implied by a DEFAULT statement.
If you specify UNALIGNED, all variables are given the UNALIGNED attribute unless the ALIGNED attribute is explicitly specified (possibly on a parent structure) or implied by a DEFAULT statement.
ALIGNED is the default.
ANS or IBM
Use IBM or ANS SYSTEM defaults. The arithmetic defaults for IBM and ANS are the following:
Attributes
FIXED DECIMAL
FIXED BINARY
FLOAT DECIMAL
FLOAT BINARY
DEFAULT(IBM)
(5,0)
(15,0)
(6)
(21)
DEFAULT(ANS)
(10,0)
(31,0)
(6)
(21)
Under the IBM suboption, variables with names beginning from I to N default to
FIXED BINARY and any other variables default to FLOAT DECIMAL. If you select the ANS suboption, the default for all variables is FIXED BINARY.
ASCII or EBCDIC
Use this option to set the default for the character set used for the internal representation of character problem program data.
Specify EBCDIC only when compiling programs that depend on the EBCDIC character set collating sequence. Such a dependency exists, for example, if your program relies on the sorting sequence of digits or on lowercase and uppercase alphabetics. This dependency also exists in programs that create an uppercase alphabetic character by changing the state of the high-order bit.
Note:
The compiler supports
A and
E as suffixes on character strings. The
A suffix indicates that the string is meant to represent ASCII data, even if the EBCDIC compiler option is in effect. Alternately, the
E suffix indicates that the string is EBCDIC, even when you select
DEFAULT(ASCII).
’123’A is the same as ’313133’X
’123’E is the same as ’F1F1F3’X
ASSIGNABLE or NONASSIGNABLE
This option applies only to static variables. The compiler flags statements in which NONASSIGNABLE variables are the targets of assignments. If you are porting code to the mainframe, this option flags statements that would otherwise raise a protection exception (if your program is reentrant).
BIN1ARG or NOBIN1ARG
This suboption controls how the compiler handles 1-byte REAL FIXED BIN arguments passed to an unprototyped function.
46
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
Under BIN1ARG, the compiler will pass a FIXED BIN argument as is to an unprototyped function.
But under NOBIN1ARG, the compiler will assign any 1-byte REAL FIXED BIN argument passed to an unprototyped function to a 2-byte FIXED BIN temporary and pass that temporary instead.
Consider the following example: dcl f1 ext entry; dcl f2 ext entry( fixed bin(15) ); call f1( 1b ); call f2( 1b );
If you specified DEFAULT(BIN1ARG), the compiler would pass the address of a 1-byte FIXED BIN(1) argument to the routine f1 and the address of a 2-byte
FIXED BIN(15) argument to the routine f2
. However, if you specified
DEFAULT(NOBIN1ARG), the compiler would pass the address of a 1-byte
FIXED BIN(15) argument to both routines.
Note that if the routine f1 was a COBOL routine, passing a 1-byte integer argument to it would cause problems since COBOL has no support for 1-byte integers. In this case, using DEFAULT(NOBIN1ARG) might be helpful; but it would be better to specify the argument attributes in the entry declare.
BIN1ARG is the default.
BYADDR or BYVALUE
Set the default for whether arguments or parameters are passed by address or by value. BYVALUE applies only to certain arguments and parameters. See the
PL/I Language Reference
for more information.
CONNECTED or NONCONNECTED
Set the default for whether parameters are connected or nonconnected.
CONNECTED allows the parameter to be used as a target or source in record-oriented I/O or as a base in string overlay defining.
DESCLIST or DESCLOCATOR
When you specify DEFAULT(DESCLIST), the compiler generates code in the same way as previous workstation product releases (all descriptors are passed in a list as a 'hidden' last parameter).
If you specify DEFAULT(DESCLOCATOR), parameters requiring descriptors are passed using a locator or descriptor in the same way as mainframe PL/I.
This allows old code to continue to work even if it passed a structure from one routine to a routine that was expecting to receive a pointer.
DESCLIST is the default.
DESCRIPTOR or NODESCRIPTOR
Using DESCRIPTOR with a PROCEDURE indicates that a descriptor list was passed, while DESCRIPTOR with ENTRY indicates that a descriptor list should be passed. NODESCRIPTOR results in more efficient code, but yields errors under the following conditions: v
For PROCEDURE statements, NODESCRIPTOR is invalid if any of the parameters have:
– An asterisk (*) specified for the bound of an array, the length of a string, or the size of an area
– The NONCONNECTED attribute
– The UNALIGNED BIT attribute
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
47
Compile-time options
v
For ENTRY declarations, NODESCRIPTOR is invalid if an asterisk (*) is specified for the bound of an array, the length of a string, or the size of an area in the ENTRY description list.
DUMMY(ALIGNED or UNALIGNED)
This suboption reduces the number of situations in which dummy arguments get created.
DUMMY(ALIGNED) indicates that a dummy argument should be created even if an argument differs from a parameter only in its alignment.
DUMMY(UNALIGNED) indicates that no dummy argument should be created for a scalar (except a nonvarying bit) or an array of such scalars if it differs from a parameter only in its alignment.
Consider the following example: dcl
1 a1 unaligned,
2 b1 fixed bin(31),
2 b2 fixed bin(15),
2 b3 fixed bin(31),
2 b4 fixed bin(15); dcl x entry( fixed bin(31) ); call x( b3 );
If you specified DEFAULT(DUMMY(ALIGNED)), a dummy argument would be created, while if you specified DEFAULT(DUMMY(UNALIGNED)), no dummy argument would be created.
DUMMY(ALIGNED) is the default.
E(IEEE or HEXADEC)
The E suboption determines how many digits will be used for the exponent in
E-format items.
If you specify E(IEEE), 4 digits will be used for the exponent in E-format items.
If you specify E(HEXADEC), 2 digits will be used for the exponent in E-format items.
If DFT( E(HEXADEC) ) is specified, an attempt to use an expression whose exponent has an absolute value greater than 99 will cause the SIZE condition to be raised.
DFT( E(HEXADEC) ) is useful in developing and testing 390 applications on the workstation. The statement "put skip edit(x) ( e(15,8));" would produce no messages on 390, but, by default, it would be flagged under Intel and AIX.
Specifying DFT(E(HEXADEC)) would fix this.
IEEE is the default.
EVENDEC or NOEVENDEC
This suboption controls the compiler's tolerance of fixed decimal variables declared with an even precision.
Under NOEVENDEC, the precision for any fixed decimal variable is rounded up to the next highest odd number.
If you specify EVENDEC and then assign 123 to a FIXED DEC(2) variable, the
SIZE condition is raised. If you specify NOEVENDEC, the SIZE condition is not raised (just as it would not be raised of you were using mainframe PL/I).
EVENDEC is the default.
48
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
IEEE or HEXADEC
IEEE specifies that floating-point data is held in storage using native IEEE format. HEXADEC indicates that storage of floating-point data is identical to the mainframe environment.
INITFILL or NOINITFILL
This suboption controls the default initialization of automatic variables.
If you specify INITFILL with a hexadecimal value ( nn ), that value is replicated and fills storage for all automatic variables. If you do not enter a hexadecimal value, the default is '00'x. NOINITFILL does no initialization of these variables.
INITIFILL can cause programs to run significantly slower and should not be specified in production programs. During program development, however, it is useful for detecting uninitialized automatic variables.
NOINITIFILL is the default.
INLINE or NOINLINE
This option sets the default for the inline procedure option.
Specifying INLINE allows your code to run faster but, in some cases, also creates a larger executable file. For more information on how inlining can
improve the performance of your application, see Chapter 17, “Improving performance,” on page 355.
LINKAGE
The linkage convention for procedure invocations is:
OPTLINK
The default linkage convention for PL/I for Windows. This linkage provides the best performance.
SYSTEM
All parameters are passed on the stack, but the
calling
function cleans up the stack.
STDCALL
The standard linking convention for Windows APIs. This linkage convention is used under Windows and passes all parameters on the stack.
The
called
function cleans up the stack.
CDECL
All parameters are passed on the stack, but the
calling
function cleans up the stack. External names have _ applied as a prefix.
OPTIONS(COBOL) implies LINKAGE(SYSTEM) unless a linkage is specified on the entry DCL or PROC statement.
LOWERINC or UPPERINC
If you specify LOWERINC, the compiler accepts lowercase filenames for
INCLUDE files. If you specify UPPERINC, the compiler accepts uppercase filenames for INCLUDE files.
LOWERINC is the default.
NATIVE or NONNATIVE
This option affects only the internal representation of fixed binary, ordinal,
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
49
Compile-time options
offset, area, and varying string data. When the NONATIVE suboption is in effect, the NONNATIVE attribute is applied to all such variables not declared with the NATIVE attribute.
You should specify NONNATIVE only to compile programs that depend on the non-native format for holding these kind of variables.
If your program bases fixed binary variables on pointer or offset variables (or conversely, pointer or offset variables on fixed binary variables), specify either: v Both the NATIVE and NATIVEADDR suboptions v Both the NONNATIVE and NONNATIVEADDR suboptions.
Other combinations produce unpredictable results.
NATIVEADDR or NONNATIVEADDR
This option affects only the internal representation of pointers. When the
NONNATIVEADDR suboption is in effect, the NONNATIVE attribute is applied to all pointer variables not declared with the NATIVE attribute.
If your program bases fixed binary variables on pointer or offset variables (or conversely, pointer or offset variables on fixed binary variables), specify either: v
Both the NATIVE and NATIVEADDR suboptions v
Both the NONNATIVE and NONNATIVEADDR suboptions.
Other combinations produce unpredictable results.
NULLSTRADDR or NONULLSTRADDR
This suboption controls how the compiler handles null strings when passed as arguments.
Under NULLSTRADDR, when a null string is specified as an argument in an entry invocattion, the compiler will pass the address of an initialized piece of automatic storage. The is compatible with what the OS PL/I and PL/I for MVS compilers did.
But under NONULLSTRADDR, when a null string is specified as an argument in an entry invocattion, the compiler will pass a null pointer as the address of the argument. The is compatible with what early releases of the Enterprise
PL/I compiler did.
NULLSTRADDR is the default.
NULLSTRPTR(NULL|SYSNULL)
This suboption controls how the compiler handles null strings when assigned to POINTERs.
Under NULLSTRPTR(SYSNULL), the result of assigning '' to a POINTER is the same as assigning SYSNULL() to the pointer
Under NULLSTRPTR(NULL), the result of assigning '' to a POINTER is the same as assigning NULL() to the pointer
NULLSTRPTR(NULL) is the default.
NULLSYS or NULL370
This suboption determines which value is returned by the NULL built-in function. If you specify NULLSYS, binvalue(null()) is equal to 0. If you want binvalue(null()) to equal 'ff_00_00_00'xn as is true with mainframe PL/I, specify NULL370.
NULLSYS is the default.
50
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
ORDER or REORDER
Affects optimization of the object code. Specifying REORDER allows more
optimization of your object code, see Chapter 17, “Improving performance,” on page 355.
ORDINAL(MAX or MIN)
If you specify ORDINAL(MAX), all ordinals whose definition does not include a PRECISION attribute are given the attribute PREC(31). Otherwise, they are given the smallest precision that covers their range of values.
OVERLAP or NOOVERLAP
If you specify OVERLAP, the compiler presumes the source and target in an assignment can overlap and generates, as needed, extra code in order to ensure
that the result of the assignment is okay. Chapter 17, “Improving performance,” on page 355.
PSEUDODUMMY or NOPSEUDODUMMY
This suboption determines if dummy arguments are created when a SUBSTR reference is specified as an argument to an unprototyped function.
If you specify PSEUDODUMMY, dummy arguments are created when a
SUBSTR reference is specified as an argument to an unprototyped function.
If you specify NOPSEUDODUMMY, dummy arguments are not created when a SUBSTR reference is specified as an argument to an unprototyped function.
PSEUDODUMMY is the default.
RECURSIVE or NONRECURSIVE
When you specify DEFAULT(RECURSIVE), the compiler applies the
RECURSIVE attribute to all procedures. If you specify
DEFAULT(NONRECURSIVE), all procedures are nonrecursive except procedures with the RECURSIVE attribute.
NONRECURSIVE is the default.
RETCODE or NORETCODE
If you specify RETCODE, any external procedure that does not have the
RETURNS attribute returns an integer value obtained by invoking the
PLIRETV built-in function just prior to returning from that procedure. This makes such procedures behave like similar procedures invoked from COBOL on the mainframe.
If you specify NORETCODE, no special code is generated from procedures that did not have the RETURNS attribute.
RETURNS (BYVALUE or BYADDR)
Sets the default for how values are returned by functions. See the
PL/I
Language Reference
for more information.
RETURNS(BYVALUE) is the default. You should specify RETURNS(BYADDR) if your application contains ENTRY statements and the ENTRY statements or the containing procedure statement have the RETURNS option. You must also specify RETURNS(BYADDR) on the entry declarations for such entries.
SHORT(HEXADEC or IEEE)
This suboption improves compatibility with other unix PL/I compilers. SHORT
(HEXADEC) indicates that FLOAT BIN (p) is to be mapped to a short (4-byte) floating point number for p <= 21. SHORT (IEEE) indicates that FLOAT BIN
(p) is to be mapped to a short (4-byte) floating point number for p <= 24.
SHORT (HEXADEC) is the default.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
51
Compile-time options
DEFAULT (IBM ASCII ASSIGNABLE BYADDR NONCONNECTED DESCRIPTOR
NATIVE NATIVEADDR NOINLINE REORDER LINKAGE(OPTLINK) IEEE
EVENDEC BIN1ARG NOINITFILL ORDINAL(MIN) NOOVERLAP
NULLSTRADDR NULLSTRPTR(NULL) NULLSYS NONRECURSIVE DESCLIST
RETURNS(BYVALUE) SHORT(HEXADEC) DUMMY(ALIGNED) LOWERINC
NORETCODE ALIGNED E(IEEE) PSEUDODUMMY).
52
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
DEPRECATE
This option flags variable names, included file names, and statement names that you want to deprecate with error messages.
DEPRECATE (
,
BUILTIN (
ENTRY (
INCLUDE (
built-in-name
)
entry-name
)
filename
STMT (
VARIABLE (
statement-name variable-name
)
)
)
)
BUILTIN
Flags any declaration of
built-in-name
with the BUILTIN attribute.
built-in-name
Name of the BUILTIN variable
ENTRY
Flags any declaration of
entry-name
with the ENTRY attribute.
entry-name
Level-1 name
INCLUDE
Flags any %INCLUDE statement that includes
filename
.
filename
Name of the file
STMT
Flags all statements with the name as
statement-name
.
statement-name
Name of the statement. The names are identified by the initial keywords of
PL/I statements. The STMT option accepts the following keywords: allocate detach iterate resignal assert display leave revert attach exit locate rewrite begin fetch on signal call flush open stop close free put wait delay get read write delete goto release
VARIABLE
Flags any declaration of
variable-name
that does not have the BUILTIN or
ENTRY attribute.
variable-name
Level-1 name
To specify the DEPRECATE option, you must specify at least one of these suboptions with a possible empty suboption list. For example, both of the following specifications are invalid: v
DEPRECATE
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
53
Compile-time options
v
DEPRECATE(BUILTIN)
Specifying one of the suboptions does not change the setting of any of the other suboptions that have been specified previously.
Specifying a suboption a second time replaces the previous specifications.
In all cases, there is no checking of the suboption lists.
Examples: v
The following specifications are equivalent:
DEPRECATE(ENTRY(old)) DEPRECATE(BUILTIN(acos))
DEPRECATE(ENTRY(old) BUILTIN(acos)) v
In the following example, x is replaced by y:
DEPRECATE(BUILTIN(x)) DEPRECATE(BUILTIN(y))
DEPRECATE(BUILTIN(y))
The default is DEPRECATE(BUILTIN() ENTRY() INCLUDE() STMT() VARIABLE()).
54
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
DEPRECATENEXT
The purpose of specifying the DEPRECATENEXT option and usage of this option is the same with the DEPRECATE option, except that the compiler issues warning messages rather than error messages for items that you will deprecate in a future development phase.
Default
: DEPRECATENEXT(BUILTIN() ENTRY() INCLUDE() STMT() VARIABLE())
For detailed information, see “DEPRECATE” on page 53.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
55
Compile-time options
DLLINIT
This option is used to identify whether the resulting object files are to be used in executable(.EXE) or dynamic link library files(.DLL).
NODLLINIT
DLLINIT
NODLLINIT
This option must be in effect for all compilations used to build an .EXE file.
DLLINIT
This option must be specified in at least one of your compilations when you use the object files produced by those compilations to build a .DLL.
56
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
EXIT
Compile-time options
The EXIT option enables the compiler user exit to be invoked.
NOEXIT
EXIT
(
inparm_string
)
inparm_string
A string that is passed to the compiler user exit routine during initialization.
The string can be up to 31 characters long.
For more information, see Chapter 18, “Using user exits,” on page 369.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
57
Compile-time options
EXTRN
The EXTRN option controls when EXTRNs are emitted for external entry constants.
EXTRN (
SHORT
FULL )
FULL
EXTRNs are emitted for all declared external entry constants.
SHORT
EXTRNs are emitted only for those constants that are referenced. This is the default.
58
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
FLAG
Compile-time options
The FLAG option specifies the minimum severity of error that requires a message to be listed in the compiler listing.
FLAG
(
W
I
E
S
)
ABBREVIATIONS:
F
I
List all messages.
W
List all except information messages.
E
List all except warning and information messages.
S
List only severe error and unrecoverable error messages.
If messages are below the specified severity or are filtered out by a compiler exit routine, they are not listed.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
59
Compile-time options
FLOATINMATH
The FLOATINMATH option specifies that the precision that the compiler should use when invoking the mathematical built-in functions.
FLOATINMATH (
ASIS
LONG
EXTENDED
)
ASIS
Arguments to the mathematical built-in functions will not be forced to have long or extended floating-point precision.
LONG
Any argument to a mathematical built-in function with short floating-point precision will be converted to the maximum long floating-point precision to yield a result with the same maximum long floating-point precision.
EXTENDED
Any argument to a mathematical built-in function with short or long floating-point precision will be converted to the maximum extended floating-point precision to yield a result with the same maximum extended floating-point precision.
A FLOAT DEC expression with precision
p
has short floating-point precision if
p
<= 6, long floating-point precision if 6 <
p
<= 16 and extended floating-point precision if
p
> 16.
A FLOAT BIN expression with precision
p
has short floating-point precision if
p
<=
21, long floating-point precision if 21 <
p
<= 53 and extended floating-point precision if
p
> 53.
60
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
GONUMBER
This option creates a statement number table as part of the object file. This table is useful for debugging purposes.
NOGONUMBER
GONUMBER
ABBREVIATIONS: NGN, GN
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
61
Compile-time options
GRAPHIC
This option specifies that double-byte characters in the source program are present.
NOGRAPHIC
GRAPHIC
ABBREVIATIONS: NGR, GR
You must specify GRAPHIC if you use any of the following in your source program: v
DBCS identifiers v
DBCS in comments v
Graphic string constants v
Mixed string constants
62
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
IGNORE
Compile-time options
The IGNORE option controls whether ASSERT, DISPLAY, and PUT statements are ignored. When a statement is ignored, it is as if the statement is replaced by a semicolon.
NOIGNORE
IGNORE (
,
ASSERT
DISPLAY
PUT
)
ASSERT
The compiler ignores all ASSERT statements, including any function references contained in those statements.
DISPLAY
The compiler ignores all DISPLAY statements, including any function references contained in those statements.
PUT
The compiler ignores all PUT FILE statements.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
63
Compile-time options
IMPRECISE
This option determines the precision of floating-point results and the location at which floating-point interrupts are reported.
IMPRECISE
NOIMPRECISE
ABBREVIATIONS: IMP, NIMP
IMPRECISE
Precision of floating-point results might not be IEEE conforming and the location of floating-point interrupts might not be precise. The loss of precision is negligible for most applications. The location of interrupt might be close to the interruption point or might be far from the interruption point, perhaps in another block.
Use of this option produces smaller object code that runs faster. It is recommended for your production programs.
NOIMPRECISE
Precision of floating-point results is IEEE conforming and the precise location of floating-point interrupts is required. This option produces code that runs slower and is recommended only, if at all, during program development.
Although NOIMPRECISE does provide better floating-point error detection than IMPRECISE, the Windows operating system does not allow immediate detection of floating-point exceptions. If you have a statement in your program that is likely to raise a floating-point exception, you can avoid this detection problem by enclosing the statement, by itself, in a BEGIN block.
64
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
INCAFTER
This option allows you to specify a file to be included after a particular statement in your source program.
INCAFTER ( PROCESS (
filename
) )
filename
Name of the file to be included after the last PROCESS statement.
Currently, PROCESS is the only suboption and requires the name of a file to be included after the last PROCESS statement.
Consider the following example:
INCAFTER(PROCESS(DFTS))
This example is equivalent to having the statement %INCLUDE DFTS; after the last PROCESS statement in your source.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
65
Compile-time options
INCLUDE
This option specifies the file name extensions under which include files are searched. You specify the file name on the %INCLUDE statement and the directory search path on the IBM.SYSLIB or INCLUDE environment variables.
INCLUDE ( )
EXT (
,
ext_string
)
ABBREVIATIONS: INC
The extension string (see the note on
strings
in step 2 on page 30 under “Rules for
using compile-time options”) can be up to 31 characters long, but it is truncated to the first three characters.
If you specify more than one file name extension, the compiler searches for include files with the left most extension you specify first. It then searches for extensions which you specified from left to right. You can specify a maximum of 7 extensions.
DEFAULT: INCLUDE(EXT('INC' 'CPY' 'MAC')).
Do not use 'PLI' as an extension for include files.
Examples:
In this first example, the compiler searches for include files with file name extensions of COP, INC, 2++, and MAC in that order.
include ( ext(Cop Inc ’2++’ Mac) )
In the following example, the compiler searches for include files without file name extensions first, and then for those with file name extensions of INC, CPY, and
MAC.
include (ext(’ ’,Inc,Cpy,Mac))
66
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
INITAUTO
Compile-time options
Under INITAUTO, the compiler adds an INITIAL attribute to an AUTOMATIC variable that does not have an INITIAL attribute.
NOINITAUTO
INITAUTO
The compiler determines the INITIAL values according to the data attributes of the variable: v
INIT( ( * ) 0 ) if it is FIXED or FLOAT v
INIT( ( * ) ’’ ) if it is PICTURE, CHAR, BIT, GRAPHIC or WIDECHAR v
INIT( ( * ) sysnull() ) if it is POINTER or OFFSET
NOINITAUTO is the default.
INITAUTO will cause more code to be generated in the prologue for each block containing any AUTOMATIC variables that are not fully initialized (but unlike the
DFT( INITFILL ) option, those variables will now have meaningful initial values) and will have a negative impact on performance.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
67
Compile-time options
INITBASED
This option performs the same function as INITAUTO except for BASED variables.
NOINITBASED
INITBASED
NOINITBASED is the default.
INITBASED will cause more code to be generated for any ALLOCATE of a BASED variable that is not fully initialized and will have a negative impact on performance.
68
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
INITCTL
Compile-time options
This option performs the same function as INITAUTO except for CONTROLLED variables.
NOINITCTL
INITCTL
NOINITCTL is the default.
INITCTL will cause more code to be generated for any ALLOCATE of a
CONTROLLED variable that is not fully initialized and will have a negative impact on performance.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
69
Compile-time options
INITSTATIC
This option performs the same function as INITAUTO except for STATIC variables.
NOINITSTATIC
INITSTATIC
NOINITSTATIC is the default.
The INITSTATIC option could cause some objects larger and some compilations to consume more time, but should otherwise have no impact on performance.
70
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
INSOURCE
The INSOURCE option specifies that the compiler should include a listing of the source program before the macro preprocessor translates it.
NOINSOURCE
INSOURCE
ABBREVIATIONS: NIS, IS
FULL
The INSOURCE listing will ignore %NOPRINT statements and will contain all the source before the preprocessor translates it.
FULL is the default.
SHORT
The INSOURCE listing will heed %PRINT and %NOPRINT statements.
The INSOURCE listing has no effect unless the MACRO option is in effect.
If the INSOURCE option is in effect, and if the compiler invokes more than one of the macro, CICS or SQL preprocessors, the listing contains the source for each of these preprocessors.
Under the INSOURCE option, text is included in the listing not according to the logic of the program, but as each file is read. So, for example, consider the following simple program which has a %INCLUDE statement between its PROC and END statements.
insource: proc options(main);
%include member; end;
The INSOURCE listing will contain all of the main program before any of the included text from the file "member" (and it would contain all of that file before any text included by it - and so on).
Under the INSOURCE(SHORT) option, text included by a %INCLUDE statement inherits the print/noprint status that was in effect when the %INCLUDE statement was executed, but that print/noprint status is restored at the end of the included text (however, in the SOURCE listing, the print/noprint status is not restored at the end of the included text).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
71
Compile-time options
LANGLVL
This option specifies the level of the PL/I language definition that you want the compiler to accept. The compiler flags any violations of the specified language definition.
LANGLVL (
NOEXT
OS )
NOEXT
No extensions beyond the language level specified are allowed.
OS
The ENVIRONMENT options unique to the Windows environment are allowed.
72
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
LIBS
Compile-time options
This option specifies whether or not the compiler should generate information in the object file that names the default libraries that are to be searched at link time in order to resolve references to external entries and data.
LIBS
(
SINGLE
MULTI
DYNAMIC
STATIC
)
NOLIBS
LIBS
Same as specifying LIBS(SINGLE DYNAMIC)
LIBS(SINGLE DYNAMIC)
Specifies that default libraries searched at link time are the single-threading
PL/I libraries: v
On Windows, these are ibmws20i.lib, ibmwstbi.lib, hepws20i.lib, and kernel32.lib
.
LIBS(MULTI DYNAMIC)
Specifies that default libraries searched at link time are the multi-threaded
PL/I libraries: v On Windows, these are ibmwm20i.lib, ibmwmtbi.lib, hepwm20i.lib, and kernel32.lib
.
LIBS(SINGLE STATIC)
Specifies that default libraries searched at link time are the static, non-multithreading libraries: v
On Windows, these are ibmws20.lib, ibmws35.lib ibmwstb.lib, hepws20.lib, and kernel32.lib
.
LIBS(MULTI STATIC)
Specifies that default libraries searched at link time are the static, multi-threaded libraries. This means the library will be statically linkied into the user module.
v
On Windows, these are ibmwm20.lib, ibmwm35.lib ibmwmtb.lib, hepwm20.lib, and kernel32.lib
.
You should specify the SINGLE suboption only if your application uses no multithreading language and specify the MULTI suboption when your application contains any PL/I multithreading language.
You can specify LIBS(MULTI) when no multithreading language is used, however, this causes your application to run more slowly than it would with LIBS(SINGLE).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
73
Compile-time options
LIMITS
This option specifies various implementation limits.
LIMITS (
,
EXTNAME (
FIXEDBIN (
7 n
31
63
)
,
31
63
FIXEDDEC (
15
31
,
15
31
NAME (
100 n
)
)
)
)
EXTNAME
Specifies the maximum length for EXTERNAL name. The maximum value for n is 100; the minimum value is 7.
FIXEDDEC
Specifies the maximum precision for FIXED DECIMAL to be either 15 or 31.
If FIXEDDEC(15,31) is specified, then you may declare FIXED DECIMAL variables with precision greater than 15, but unless an expression contains an operand with precision greater than 15, all arithmetic will done using 15 as the maximum precision.
FIXEDDEC(15,31) will provide much better performance than FIXEDDEC(31).
FIXEDDEC(15) and FIXEDDEC(15,15) are equivalent; similarly, FIXEDDEC(31) and FIXEDDEC(31,31) are equivalent.
FIXEDDEC(31,15) is not allowed.
The default is FIXEDDEC(15,15).
FIXEDBIN
Specifies the maximum precision for SIGNED FIXED BINARY to be either 31 or 63. The default is 31.
If FIXEDBIN(31,63) is specified, then you may declare 8-byte integers, but unless an expression contains an 8-byte integer, all arithmetic will done using
4-byte integers.
FIXEDBIN(63,31) is not allowed.
The default is FIXEDBIN(31,31).
The maximum precision for UNSIGNED FIXED BINARY is one greater, that is,
32 and 64.
NAME
Specifies the maximum length of variable names in your program. The maximum value for
n
is 100; the minimum value is 7.
DEFAULT: LIMITS(EXTNAME(100) FIXEDBIN(31,31) FIXEDDEC(15,15)
NAME(100))
74
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
LINECOUNT
This option specifies the number of lines per page for compiler listings, including blank and heading lines.
LINECOUNT (
n
)
ABBREVIATIONS: LC
The value of
n
can be from 1 to 32,767.
DEFAULT: LINECOUNT(60)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
75
Compile-time options
LINEDIR
This option specifies that the compiler should accept %LINE directives.
NOLINEDIR
LINEDIR
If the LINEDIR option is specified, the compiler will reject all %INCLUDE statements.
DEFAULT: NOLINEDIR
76
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
LIST
Compile-time options
This option causes an object module listing to be produced. This listing is in a form similar to assembler language instructions.
NOLIST
LIST
The object listing is produced in a separate file with an extension of
.asm
.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
77
Compile-time options
LISTVIEW
The LISTVIEW option specifies whether the compiler should show the source in the source listing or whether it should show the source after it has been processed by one or more of the preprocessors.
LISTVIEW (
SOURCE
AFTERALL
AFTERCICS
AFTERMACRO
AFTERSQL
)
SOURCE
Causes the source listing to show the unadulterated source, and it causes IBM
Debugger to bring up this as the source view.
AFTERALL
Causes the source listing to show the source as if it came from the MDECK from the last invocation, if any, of the last preprocessor, and it causes IBM
Debugger to bring up this as the source view if the SEPARATE suboption of the TEST compiler option is also specified,
AALL may be used as an abbreviation for AFTERALL
AFTERCICS
Causes the source listing to show the source as if it came from the MDECK from the last invocation, if any, of the CICS preprocessor, and it causes IBM
Debugger to bring up this as the source view if the SEPARATE suboption of the TEST compiler option is also specified.
ACICS may be used as an abbreviation for AFTERCICS
AFTERMACRO
Causes the source listing to show the source as if it came from the MDECK from the last invocation, if any, of the MACRO preprocessor, and it causes IBM
Debugger to bring up this as the source view if the SEPERATE suboption of the TEST compiler option is also specified.
AMACRO may be used as an abbreviation for AFTERMACRO
AFTERSQL
Causes the source listing to show the source as if it came from the MDECK from the last invocation, if any, of the SQL preprocessor, and it causes IBM
Debugger to bring up this as the source view if the SEPARATE suboption of the TEST compiler option is also specified.
ASQL may be used as an abbreviation for AFTERSQL
If the TEST option is specified and a suboption other than SOURCE is specified for
LISTVIEW then the SEPARATE suboption must also be specified for the TEST option.
As an example of the differing effects of the AFTERMACRO, AFTERSQL and
AFTERALL suboptions suppose the PP option was PP( MACRO('INCONLY'), SQL,
MACRO). Then: v
Under LISTVIEW(AFTERMACRO), the "source" in the listing and in the IBM
Debugger source window if TEST(SEP) were specified would appear as if it came from the MDECK that the second invocation of the MACRO preprocessor would have produced
78
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
v
Under LISTVIEW(AFTERSQL), the "source" in the listing and in the IBM
Debugger source window if TEST(SEP) were specified would appear as if it came from the MDECK that the invocation of the SQL preprocessor would have produced (and hence %DCL and other macro statements would still be visible) v
Under LISTVIEW(AFTERALL), the "source" would be as under the
LISTVIEW(AFTERMACRO) option since the MACRO preprocessor is the last in the PP option
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
79
Compile-time options
MACRO
The MACRO option causes the macro facility to be invoked prior to compilation. If both MACRO and PP(MACRO) are specified, the macro facility is invoked twice.
When the MACRO option is used, MACRO('
macro-options
') is inserted into the PP option.
NOMACRO
MACRO
ABBREVIATIONS: NM, M
For example, if the following compile-time options are specified:
MDECK NOINSOURCE MACRO PP(MACRO SQL)
The PP option is modified and effectively becomes:
PP (MACRO MACRO SQL)
80
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
MARGINI
Compile-time options
This option specifies the margin indicator used in the source listing produced.
MARGINI ( '
char
' )
ABBREVIATIONS: MI('char')
The character,
char
, is inserted in the positions immediately to the left and right of both side margins, making any source code outside of the margins easily detected.
DEFAULT: MARGINI(' ')
Using the default specifies that left and right source margins are shown in the listing by blank columns.
For a sample listing, see “Using the compiler listing” on page 175.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
81
Compile-time options
MARGINS
This option sets the margins within which the compiler interprets the source code in your program file. Data outside these margins is not interpreted as source code, though it is included in your source listing if you request one.
MARGINS (
2 m
,
72 n
)
,
c
ABBREVIATIONS: MAR
m
The column number of the leftmost character (first data byte) that is processed by the compiler. It must not exceed 100.
n
The column number of the rightmost character (last data byte) that is processed by the compiler. It should be greater than
m
, but must not exceed
200.
Variable-length records are effectively padded with blanks to give them the maximum record length.
c
The column number of the ANSI printer control character. It must not exceed
200 and should be outside the values specified for
m
and
n
. A value of 0 for
c
indicates that no ANSI control character is present. Only the following control characters can be used:
(blank)
Skip one line before printing
+
1
0
–
Skip two lines before printing
Skip three lines before printing
No skip before printing
Start new page
Any other character is an error and is replaced by a blank.
Do not use a value of
c
that is greater than the maximum length of a source record, because this causes the format of the listing to be unpredictable. To avoid this problem, put the carriage control characters to the left of the source margins for variable-length records.
Specifying MARGINS(,,c) is an alternative to using %PAGE and %SKIP statements (described in
PL/I Language Reference
).
DEFAULT: MARGINS (2 72)
82
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
MAXGEN
Compile-time options
MAXGEN (
size
)
The MAXGEN option specifies the maximum number of intermediate language statements that should be generated for any one user statement and will cause the compiler to flag any statement where this maximum is exceeded.
The number of intermediate language statements generated for any user statement may vary depending on the compiler release, the compiler maintenance level, and the compiler options in effect. This option is intended to be used only to help find statements for which excessive amounts of code are generated and which thus may indicate that they are perhaps are poorly coded.
However, it should be noted that using a preprocessor may cause the number of intermediate language statements generated for some statements to be very large.
In such a situation, it may be better either to set the the MAXGEN threshold to be larger or to use the LISTVIEW(AFTERALL) option.
The default is MAXGEN(100000).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
83
Compile-time options
MAXMSG
The MAXMSG option specifies the maximum number of messages with a given severity (or higher) that the compilation should produce.
MAXMSG
(
,
W
I
E
S
250 n
)
I
Count all messages.
W
Count all except information messages.
E
Count all except warning and information messages.
S
Count only severe error and unrecoverable error messages.
n
Terminate the compilation if the number of messages exceeds this value. If messages are below the specified severity or are filtered out by a compiler exit routine, they are not counted in the number. The value of n can range from 0 to 32767. If you specify 0, the compilation terminates when the first error of the specified severity is encountered.
DEFAULT: MAXMSG( W 250 )
84
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
MAXNEST
The MAXNEST option specifies the maximum nesting of various kinds of statements that should be allowed before the compiler flags your program as too complex.
MAXNEST (
,
BLOCK (
DO
IF
(
(
17 x
17 z
17 x
)
)
) )
BLOCK
Specifies the maximum nesting of BEGIN and PROCEDURE statements.
DO
Specifies the maximum nesting of DO statements.
IF
Specifies the maximum nesting of IF statements.
The value of any nesting limit must be between 1 and 50 (inclusive).
The default is MAXNEST( BLOCK(17) DO(17) IF(17) ).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
85
Compile-time options
MAXSTMT
Under the MAXSTMT option, if the MSG(390) option is also in effect, the compiler will flag any block that has more than the specified number of statements. On
Windows, however, optimization of such a block will not be turned off.
MAXSTMT (
size
)
DEFAULT: MAXSTMT( 4096 )
86
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
MAXTEMP
The MAXTEMP option determines when the compiler flags statements using an excessive amount of storage for compiler-generated temporaries.
MAXTEMP (
max
)
max
The limit for the number of bytes that can be used for compiler-generated temporaries. The compiler flags any statement that uses more bytes than those specified by
max
. The default for
max
is 50000.
You should examine statements that are flagged under this option - if you code them differently, you may be able to reduce the amount of stack storage required by your code.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
87
Compile-time options
MDECK
This option specifies that the macro facility output source is written with the file extension of .DEK and the file is put in the current directory.
NOMDECK
MDECK
ABBREVIATIONS: NMD, MD
MDECK is ignored if NOMACRO is in effect. See “MACRO” on page 80 for an
example.
88
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
MSG
Compile-time options
This option controls when the compiler will issue messages for conversions that will be done via a library call.
MSG (
*
390 )
*
Causes the compiler to issue warning messages for conversions that will be done via a library call if and only if they would be done via a library call on the platform where the code is compiled.
390
Causes the compiler to issue warning messages for conversions that will be done via a library call if and only if they would be done via a library call on
390.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
89
Compile-time options
MSGSUMMARY
The MSGSUMMARY option determines whether the compiler adds a summary of all messages that are issued during the compilation into the listing.
NOMSGSUMMARY
MSGSUMMARY (
NOXREF
XREF
)
MSGSUMMARY(NOXREF)
The compiler adds a message summary to the listing. The summary is after the file reference table in the listing. It is sorted by compiler component and within each component by severity and then by message number.
The summary includes the following information: v
One instance of each message that is produced in the compilation v
The number of times that each message is produced
MSGSUMMARY(XREF)
The compiler adds a message summary to the listing. The summary is the same with the one added when MSGSUMMARY(XREF) is specified with one difference: after each message the summary lists all the line or statement numbers where the message is issued.
NOMSGSUMMARY
No message summary is produced.
NOMSGSUMMARY is the default. When MSGSUMMARY is specified,
MSGSUMMARY(NOXREF) is the default.
90
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
NAMES
Compile-time options
This option specifies the
extralingual characters
that are allowed in identifiers.
Extralingual characters are those characters other than the 26 alphabetic, 10 digit, and special characters defined in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
NAMES ( '
extraling_char
' )
,
'
upp_extraling_char
'
extraling_char
An extralingual character.
upp_extraling_char
The extralingual character that you want interpreted as the uppercase version of the corresponding character in the first suboption.
If you omit the second suboption, PL/I uses the characters specified in the first suboption as both the lowercase and the uppercase values. If you specify the second suboption, you must specify the same number of characters as you specify in the first suboption.
DEFAULT: NAMES('#@$' '#@$')
Examples: names(’äöüß’ ’ÄÖÜß’)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
91
Compile-time options
NATLANG
This option sets the national language to be used for compiler messages and listings.
NATLANG (
ENU
CHS
CHT
DEU
ESP
FRA
JPN
PTB
)
CHS
Chinese simplified
CHT
Chinese traditional
DEU
German
ENU
US English, mixed case.
ESP
Spanish
FRA
French
JPN
Japanese
PTB
Brazilian Portuguese
DEFAULT: NATLANG(ENU)
92
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
NEST
Compile-time options
The NEST option specifies that the listing resulting from the SOURCE option indicates the block level and the do-group level for each statement.
NONEST
NEST
For an example of the source listing, see “Using the compiler listing” on page 175.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
93
Compile-time options
NOT
This option specifies up to seven symbols, any one of which is interpreted as the logical NOT sign.
NOT ( '
char
' )
char
A single character symbol. You must not specify any of the 26 alphabetic, 10 digit, and special characters defined in the
PL/I Language Reference
, except for the logical NOT sign (^).
DEFAULT: NOT ('^')
The PL/I default code point for the NOT symbol has the hexadecimal value 5E, which on many terminals will appear as the logical NOT symbol (^).
If you are invoking the compiler from the commandline and specifying a caret (^) as part of the NOT option, you must precede the caret with another caret.
Examples: not(’\}’) not(’^\}’)
If you are invoking the compiler and specifying any compile-time options that use vertical bars (|) or a caret (^) on the command line, use double quotes around the character.
94
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
NUMBER
Compile-time options
The number option specifies that statements in the source program are to be identified by the line and file number of the file from which they derived and that this pair of numbers is used to identify statements in the compiler listings resulting from the AGGREGATE, ATTRIBUTES, LIST, SOURCE and XREF options. The File
Reference Table at the end of the listing shows the number assigned to each of the input files read during the compilation.
NUMBER
NONUMBER
Note that if a preprocessor has been used, more than one line in the source listing may be identified by the same line and file numbers. For example, almost every
EXEC CICS statement generates several lines of code in the source listing, but these would all be identified by one line and file number.
NUMBER and STMT are mutually exclusive. Specifying NONUMBER implies
STMT.
ABBREVIATIONS: NUM, NNUM
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
95
Compile-time options
OBJECT
This option specifies whether object code is produced.
OBJECT
NOOBJECT
ABBREVIATIONS: OBJ, NOBJ
The module is saved in the current directory.
96
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
OFFSET
Compile-time options
This option specifies whether or not the compiler produces an assembler-like listing file with the extension
.cod
.
NOOFFSET
OFFSET
ABBREVIATIONS: OF, NOF
The
.cod
file contains the offset and machine code for every instruction generated.
Use the sample program cod2off to reduce the size of this file to a listing of the offset for the start of each statement in every block of the compilation.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
97
Compile-time options
ONSNAP
NOONSNAP
ONSNAP (
,
STRINGRANGE
STRINGSIZE
)
For a PROCEDURE with the OPTIONS(MAIN)attribute. the ONSNAP option specifies that the compiler should insert an ON STRINGRANGE SNAP; or ON
STRINGSIZE SNAP; statement (or both) into the prologue code for that
PROCEDURE. This can make it easier to determine the calling chain if the corresponding conditions are raised in other routines called from such a
PROCEDURE.
THE ONSNAP option has no affect on a PROCEDURE without either of these attributes.
98
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
OPTIMIZE
Compile-time options
This option specifies the type of optimization required.
NOOPTIMIZE
OPTIMIZE ( ) TIME
0
2
ABBREVIATIONS: NOPT, OPT
NOOPTIMIZE or OPTIMIZE(0)
Use either of these options to produce standard optimization of the object code, allowing compilation to proceed as quickly as possible.
OPTIMIZE(TIME) or OPTIMIZE(2)
Use either of these options to cause extended optimizations of the object code and produce faster running object code.
Optimization requires additional compile time, but usually results in reduced run time.
Inlining occurs only under optimization.
The use of the PREFIX option with one or more of the checkout conditions (SIZE,
STRINGRANGE, STRINGSIZE, and SUBSCRIPTRANGE) can significantly increase the time and space needed for a compile.
See Chapter 17, “Improving performance,” on page 355 for a full discussion of
optimization.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
99
Compile-time options
OPTIONS
This option produces a listing of all compile-time options in effect for the
compilation (see Chapter 5, “Compilation output,” on page 175 for an example).
NOOPTIONS
OPTIONS
(
DOC
ALL )
ABBREVIATIONS: NOP, OP
Under OPTIONS(DOC), the OPTIONS listing will include only those options (and suboptions) documented in this document at the time of the compiler’s release.
Under OPTIONS(ALL), the OPTIONS listing will also include any option added by
PTF after the compiler’s release.
100
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
OR
Compile-time options
This option specifies up to seven symbols, any one of which is interpreted as the logical OR sign (|). These symbols are also used as the concatenation symbol
(when paired).
OR ( '
char
' )
char
A single character symbol. You must not specify any of the 26 alphabetic, 10 digit, and special characters defined in the
PL/I Language Reference
, except for the logical OR sign (|).
If you are invoking the compiler and specifying a vertical bar (|) on the command line as part of the OR option, you must precede the vertical bar with a caret (^).
DEFAULT: OR ('|')
The PL/I default code point for the OR symbol (|) is hexadecimal 7C.
Examples: or(’\}’) or(’|\}’)
If you are invoking the compiler and specifying any compile-time options that use vertical bars (|) or a caret (^) on the command line, use double quotes around the character.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
101
Compile-time options
PP
The PP option specifies which (and in what order) preprocessors are invoked prior to compilation.
NOPP
PP (
,
pp-name
)
(
pp-string
)
pp-name
The name given to a particular preprocessor. CICS, INCLUDE, MACRO and
SQL are the only preprocessors currently supported. Using an undefined name causes a diagnostic error.
pp-string
A string, delimited by quotes, of up to 100 characters representing the options for the corresponding preprocessor. For example, PP(MACRO('CASE(ASIS)')) invokes the MACRO preprocessor with the option CASE(ASIS).
DEFAULT: NOPP
Preprocessor options are processed from left to right, and if two options conflict, the last (rightmost) option is used. For example, if you invoke the MACRO preprocessor with the option string 'CASE(ASIS) CASE(UPPER)', then the option
CASE(UPPER) is used.
The same preprocessor can be specified multiple times, and you can specify a maximum of 31 preprocessor steps.
The MACRO option and the PP(MACRO) option both cause the macro facility to be invoked prior to compilation. If both MACRO and PP(MACRO) are specified, the macro facility is invoked twice.
If you specify the PP option more than once, the compiler effectively concatenates them. So specifying PP(SQL) PP(CICS) is the same as specifying PP(SQL CICS).
This also means that if you specified PP(MACRO SQL('OPTIONS')) and
PP(MACRO SQL('OPTIONS DATE(ISO)')), then the resulting PP option would be
PP( MACRO SQL('OPTIONS') MACRO SQL('OPTIONS DATE(ISO)')) and both the
MACRO and SQL preprocessor would be invoked twice. If you were doing this in an attempt to override the earlier SQL options, it might be better not to specify the preprocessor options in the PP option, but rather to specify them via the PPSQL option, i.e. specify PP(MACRO SQL) PPSQL('OPTIONS DATE(ISO)').
You can specify a maximum of 31 preprocessors.
Examples:
The following example invokes the PL/I macro facility, the SQL preprocessor, and then the PL/I macro facility a second time.
pp(macro(’x’) sql(’dbname(sample)’) macro)
102
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PPCICS
Compile-time options
The PPCICS option specifies options to be passed to the CICS preprocessor if it is invoked.
NOPPCICS
PPCICS (
‘options string’
)
So, specifying PPCICS('EDF') PP(CICS) is the same as specifying PP(CICS('EDF')).
This option has no effect unless the PP(CICS) option is specified. However, if you want to specify a set of CICS preprocessor options that should be used if and when the CICS preprocessor is invoked, you could specify this option in the installation options exit. Then whenever you specified PP(CICS), the set of options specified in the PPCICS option would be used.
Also, any options specified when the preprocessor is invoked overrule those specified in the PPCICS option. So specifying PPCICS('EDF') PP(CICS('NOEDF')) is the same as specifying PP(CICS('EDF NOEDF')) or the even simpler
PP(CICS('NOEDF')).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
103
Compile-time options
PPINCLUDE
The PPINCLUDE option specifies options to be passed to the INCLUDE preprocessor if it is invoked.
NOPPINCLUDE
PPINCLUDE (
‘options string’
)
So, specifying PPINCLUDE('ID(-inc)') PP(INCLUDE) is the same as specifying
PP(INCLUDE('ID(-inc)')).
This option has no effect unless the PP(INCLUDE) option is specified. However, if you want to specify a set of INCLUDE preprocessor options that should be used if and when the INCLUDE preprocessor is invoked, you could specify this option in the installation options exit. Then whenever you specified PP(INCLUDE), the set of options specified in the PPINCLUDE option would be used.
Also, any options specified when the preprocessor is invoked overrule those specified in the PPINCLUDE option. So specifying PPINCLUDE('ID(-inc)')
PP(INCLUDE('ID(+include)')) is the same as specifying PP(INCLUDE('ID(-inc)
ID(+include)')) or the even simpler PP(INCLUDE('ID(+include)')).
104
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PPLIST
Compile-time options
The PPLIST option controls whether the compiler keeps or erases the part of the listing generated by each preprocessor phase.
PPLIST (
KEEP
ERASE )
When you specify PPLIST(KEEP), the compiler keeps the part of the listing that is generated by each preprocessor phase.
When you specify PPLIST(ERASE), the compiler erases the part of the listing that is generated by any preprocessor phase that produces no messages.
The compiler does not count messages that are suppressed by the EXIT and FLAG options. Therefore, specifying both FLAG(W) and PPLIST(ERASE) causes the compiler to suppress all output from any preprocessor that produces no warning, error or severe messages.
PPLIST(KEEP) is the default.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
105
Compile-time options
PPMACRO
The PPMACRO option specifies options to be passed to the MACRO preprocessor if it is invoked.
NOPPMACRO
PPMACRO (
‘options string’
)
So, specifying PPMACRO('CASE(ASIS)') PP(MACRO) is the same as specifying
PP(MACRO('CASE(ASIS)')).
This option has no effect unless the PP(MACRO) option is specified. However, if you want to specify a set of MACRO preprocessor options that should be used if and when the MACRO preprocessor is invoked, you could specify this option in the installation options exit. Then whenever you specified the MACRO or
PP(MACRO) options, the set of options specified in the PPMACRO option would be used.
Also, any options specified when the preprocessor is invoked overrule those specified in the PPMACRO option. So specifying PPMACRO('CASE(ASIS)')
PP(MACRO('CASE(UPPER)')) is the same as specifying PP(MACRO('CASE(ASIS)
CASE(UPPER)')) or the even simpler PP(MACRO('CASE(UPPER)')).
106
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PPSQL
Compile-time options
The PPSQL option specifies options to be passed to the SQL preprocessor if it is invoked.
NOPPSQL
PPSQL (
‘options string’
)
So, specifying PPSQL('ONEPASS') PP(SQL) is the same as specifying
PP(SQL('ONEPASS')).
This option has no effect unless the PP(SQL) option is specified. However, if you want to specify a set of SQL preprocessor options that should be used if and when the SQL preprocessor is invoked, you could specify this option in the installation options exit. Then whenever you specified PP(SQL), the set of options specified in the PPSQL option would be used.
Also, any options specified when the preprocessor is invoked overrule those specified in the PPSQL option. So, specifying PPSQL('ONEPASS')
PP(SQL('TWOPASS')) is the same as specifying PP(SQL('ONEPASS TWOPASS')) or the even simpler PP(SQL('TWOPASS')).
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
107
Compile-time options
PPTRACE
This option specifies that when a DECK file is written for a preprocessor, every non-blank line in that file is preceded by a line containing a %LINE directive. The directive indicates the original source file and line to which the non-blank line should be attributed.
NOPPTRACE
PPTRACE
PPTRACE should be used only with preprocessors other than those that are integrated with the PL/I compiler.
108
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
PRECTYPE
The PRECTYPE option determines how the compiler derives the attributes for the
MULTIPLY, DIVIDE, ADD and SUBTRACT built-in functions when the operands are FIXED and at least one is FIXED BIN.
PRECTYPE (
ANS
DECDIGIT
DECRESULT
)
ANS
Under PRECTYPE(ANS), the value p in BIF(x,y,p) and in BIF(x, y, p, 0) is interpreted as specifying a binary number of digits, the operation is performed as a binary operation and the result has the attributes FIXED BIN(p,0).
However, for BIF(x, y, p, q) if q is not-zero, then the operation will be performed as a decimal operation and the result will have the attributes FIXED
DEC(t,u) where t and u are the decimal equivalents of p and q, namely t = 1 + ceil(p / 3.32) and u = ceil(q / 3.32). In this case, x, y, p and q are effectively all converted to decimal (in contrast to the next suboption which converts only x and y to decimal and does so even if q is zero). The compiler will issue the
Informational message 1BM1053 in this situation.
DECDIGIT
Under PRECTYPE(DECDIGIT), the value p in BIF(x,y,p) and in BIF(x, y, p, 0) is interpreted as specifying a decimal number of digits, the operation is performed as a binary operation and the result has the attributes FIXED BIN(s) where s is the corresponding binary equivalent to p (namely s = ceil(3.32*p)).
For an instance of BIF(x, y, p, q) where q is not-zero, the results under
PRECTYPE(DECDIGIT) are the same as described below under
PRECTYPE(DECRESULT).
DECRESULT
Under PRECTYPE(DECRESULT), the value p in BIF(x,y,p) and the values p and q in BIF(x,y,p,q) are interpreted as specifying a decimal number of digits, the operation is performed as a decimal operation and the result has the attributes FIXED DEC(p,0) or FIXED DEC(p,q) respectively. The result is the same as would be produced if the DECIMAL built-in were applied to x and y.
PRECTYPE(ANS) is the default.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
109
Compile-time options
PREFIX
This option enables or disables the specified PL/I conditions in the compilation unit being compiled without you having to change the source program. The specified condition prefixes are logically prefixed to the beginning of the first
PACKAGE or PROCEDURE statement.
PREFIX ( )
,
condition
condition
Any condition that can be enabled/disabled in a PL/I program, as explained in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
The use of the PREFIX option with one or more of the checkout conditions (SIZE,
STRINGRANGE, STRINGSIZE, and SUBSCRIPTRANGE) can significantly increase the time and space needed for a compile.
DEFAULT: PREFIX(CONVERSION FIXEDOVERFLOW INVALIDOP OVERFLOW
NOSIZE NOSTRINGRANGE NOSTRINGSIZE NOSUBSCRIPTRANGE
UNDERFLOW ZERODIVIDE)
Examples:
Given the following source:
(stringsize): name: proc options (reentrant reorder); end;
The option prefix (size nounderflow) logically changes the program to the following:
(size nounderflow):
(stringsize): name: proc options (reentrant reorder); end;
110
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PROBE
Compile-time options
This option controls the generation of stack probes which are extra instructions generated by the compiler whenever the stack can be extended by more than 2K bytes. This extra code causes a protection exception if there is not enough storage available on the stack.
PROBE
NOPROBE
PROBE
Specifies that stack probes are generated.
NOPROBE
No generation of stack probes.
A program that requires considerable automatic storage, but is linked with an insufficient stack size, produces exceptions and might go into an infinite loop unless stack probes are generated. The presence of stack probes decreases performance in non-multithreading programs that are properly linked.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
111
Compile-time options
PROCEED
This option determines whether or not processing (by a preprocessor or the compiler) continues depending on the severity of messages issued by previous preprocessors.
NOPROCEED (
PROCEED
S
E
W
)
ABBREVIATIONS: PRO, NPRO
PROCEED
The invocation of preprocessors and the compiler continue despite any messages issued by preprocessors prior to this stage.
NOPROCEED(S)
The invocation of preprocessors and the compiler does not continue if a severe or unrecoverable error is detected in this stage of preprocessing.
NOPROCEED(E)
The invocation of preprocessors and the compiler does not continue if an error, severe error, or unrecoverable error is detected in this stage of preprocessing.
NOPROCEED(W)
The invocation of preprocessors and the compiler does not continue if a warning, error, severe error, or unrecoverable error is detected in this stage of preprocessing.
112
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
PROCESS
The PROCESS option determines if *PROCESS statements are allowed and, if they are allowed, if they are written to the MDECK file.
PROCESS
(
DELETE
KEEP )
NOPROCESS
Under the NOPROCESS option, the compiler will flag any *PROCESS statement with an E-level message.
Under the PROCESS(KEEP) option, the compiler will not flag *PROCESS statements, and the compiler will retain any *PROCESS statements in the MDECK output.
Under the PROCESS(DELETE) option, the compiler will not flag *PROCESS statements, but the compiler will not retain any *PROCESS statements in the
MDECK output.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
113
Compile-time options
QUOTE
The QUOTE option specifies an alternate symbol that can be used as the quote character.
QUOTE ( '
" char
' )
Note:
Do not code any blanks between the quotes.
The IBM-supplied default code point for the QUOTE symbol is '"'.
char
A single SBCS character.
You cannot specify any of the alphabetic characters, digits, and special characters defined in the
PL/I Language Reference
, except for the standard QUOTE symbol (").
You must specify a valid character.
The QUOTE option is ignored if the GRAPHIC option is also specified.
114
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
REDUCE
Compile-time options
The REDUCE option specifies that the compiler is permitted to reduce an assignment of a null string to a structure into simpler operations - even if that means padding bytes might be overwritten.
REDUCE
NOREDUCE
The NOREDUCE option specifies that the compiler must decompose an assignment of a null string to a structure into a series of assignments of the null string to the base members of the structure.
When you specify the NOREDUCE option, BY NAME assignments that can be reduced to aggregate moves are not reduced if the elements that would be moved together had the AREA or VARYING, or VARYINGZ attributes.
The REDUCE option causes fewer lines of code to be generated for an assignment of a null string to a structure, and that usually means your compilation is quicker and your code is run much faster. However, padding bytes might be zeroed out.
For instance, in the following structure, there is one byte of padding between
field12
and
field13
.
dcl
1 sample ext,
5 field10
5 field11
5 field12
5 field13 bin fixed(31), bin fixed(15), bit(8), bin fixed(31);
Now consider the assignment
sample = ’’;
Under the NOREDUCE option, it causes four assignments to be generated, and the padding byte is unchanged.
However, under REDUCE, the assignment is reduced to one operation, but the padding byte is zeroed out.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
115
Compile-time options
RESEXP
The RESEXP option specifies that the compiler is permitted to evaluate all restricted expressions at compile time even if this would cause a condition to be raised and the compilation to end with S-level messages.
RESEXP
NORESEXP
Under the NORESEXP compiler option, the compiler will still evaluate all restricted expression occurring in declarations, including those in INITIAL value clauses.
For example, under the NORESEXP option, the compiler would not flag the following statement (and the ZERODIVIDE exception would be raised at run time) if preconditions_not_met then x = 1 / 0;
116
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
RESPECT
Compile-time options
Causes the compiler to honor any specification of the DATE attribute and to apply the DATE attribute to the result of the DATE built-in function.
RESPECT ( )
DATE
Using the default causes the compiler to ignore any specification of the DATE attribute and the DATE attribute, therefore, would not be applied to the result of the DATE built-in function.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
117
Compile-time options
RULES
This option allows or disallows certain language capabilities and allows you to choose semantics when alternatives are available. It can help you diagnose common programming errors.
118
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
RULES (
,
IBM
ANS
BYNAME
NOBYNAME
CONTROLLED
NOCONTROLLED
NODECSIZE
DECSIZE
ELSEIF
NOELSEIF
EVENDEC
NOEVENDEC
GOTO
NOGOTO
GLOBALDO
NOGLOBALDO
NOLAXBIF
LAXBIF
NOLAXCTL
LAXCTL
LAXDCL
NOLAXDCL
NOLAXDEF
LAXDEF
LAXENTRY
NOLAXENTRY
(
STRICT
LOOSE
LAXIF
NOLAXIF
LAXINOUT
NOLAXINOUT
LAXLINK
NOLAXLINK
LAXMARGINS
NOLAXMARGINS
(
STRICT
XNUMERIC
LAXNESTED
NOLAXNESTED
LAXPUNC
NOLAXPUNC
LAXQUAL
NOLAXQUAL
LAXRETURN
NOLAXRETURN
LAXSCALE
NOLAXSCALE
LAXSEMI
NOLAXSEMI
LAXSTG
NOLAXSTG
NOLAXSTRZ
LAXSTRZ
MULTICLOSE
NOMULTICLOSE
PADDING
NOPADDING
PROCENDONLY
NOPROCENDONLY
RECURSIVE
NORECURSIVE
SELFASSIGN
NOSELFASSIGN
STOP
NOSTOP
UNREF
(
NOUNREF (
LOOSE
STRICT
ALL
SOURCE )
)
)
)
)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
119
Compile-time options
IBM or ANS
Under the IBM suboption: v
For operations requiring string data, data with the BINARY attribute is converted to BIT.
v
Conversions in arithmetic operations or comparisons occur as described in the
pre-Enterprise PL/I Language Reference
.
v
Conversions for the ADD, DIVIDE, MULTIPLY, and SUBTRACT built-in functions occur as described in the
pre-Enterprise PL/I Language Reference
except that operations specified as scaled fixed binary are evaluated as scaled fixed decimal.
v
Nonzero scale factors are permitted in FIXED BIN declares.
v
If the result of any precision-handling built-in function (ADD, BINARY, etc.) has FIXED BIN attributes, the specified or implied scale factor can be nonzero.
v
Even if all arguments to the MAX or MIN built-in functions are UNSIGNED
FIXED BIN, the result is always SIGNED.
v
Even when you add, multiply, or divide two UNSIGNED FIXED BIN operands, the result has the SIGNED attribute.
v
Even when you apply the MOD or REM built-in functions to two
UNSIGNED FIXED BIN operands, the result has the SIGNED attribute.
Under the ANS suboption: v
For operations requiring string data, data with the BINARY attribute is converted to CHARACTER.
v
Conversions in arithmetic operations or comparisons occur as described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
v
Conversions for the ADD, DIVIDE, MULTIPLY, and SUBTRACT built-in functions occur as described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
v
Nonzero scale factors are
not
permitted in FIXED BIN declares.
v
If the result of any precision-handling built-in function (ADD, BINARY, etc.) has FIXED BIN attributes, the specified or implied scale factor must be zero.
v If all arguments to the MAX or MIN built-in functions are UNSIGNED
FIXED BIN, then the result is also UNSIGNED.
v
When you ADD, MULTIPLY, or DIVIDE two UNSIGNED FIXED BIN operands, the result has the UNSIGNED attribute.
v
When you apply the MOD or REM built-in functions to two UNSIGNED
FIXED BIN operands, the result has the UNSIGNED attribute.
BYNAME or NOBYNAME
Specifying NOBYNAME causes the compiler to flag all BYNAME assignments with an E-level message.
CONTROLLED | NOCONTROLLED
Specifying NOCONTROLLED causes the compiler to flag any use of the
CONTROLLED attribute.
Specifying CONTROLLED causes the compiler not to flag the use of the
CONTROLLED attribute.
DECSIZE or NODECSIZE
Specifying DECSIZE causes the compiler to flag any assignment of a FIXED
DECIMAL expression to a FIXED DECIMAL variable when the SIZE condition is disabled if the SIZE condition could be raised by the assignment.
120
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
Specifying RULES(DECSIZE) may cause the compiler to produce a large number of messages since if SIZE is disabled, then any statement of the form X
= X + 1 will be flagged if X is FIXED DECIMAL.
ELSEIF or NOELSEIF
Specifying NOELSEIF causes the compiler to flag any ELSE statement that is immediately followed by an IF statement and suggest that it be rewritten as a
SELECT statement.
This option can be useful in enforcing that SELECT statements be used rather than a series of nested IF-THEN-ELSE statements.
EVENDEC or NOEVENDEC
Specifying NOEVENDEC causes the compiler to flag any FIXED DECIMAL declaration that specifies an even precision.
GOTO|NOGOTO
Specifying NOGOTO causes all GOTO statements to be flagged except for those out of BEGIN blocks.
LAXBIF or NOLAXBIF
Specifying LAXBIF causes the compiler to build a contextual declaration for built-in functions, such as NULL, even when used without an empty parameter list.
GLOBALDO|NOGLOBALDO
Specifying NOGLOBALDO causes the compiler to flag all DO loop control variables that are declared in a parent block.
LAXCTL or NOLAXCTL
Specifying LAXCTL allows a CONTROLLED variable to be declared with a constant extent and yet to be allocated with a differing extent. NOLAXCTL requires that if a CONTROLLED variable is to be allocated with a varying extent, then that extent must be specified as an asterisk or as a non-constant expression.
The following code is illegal under NOLAXCTL: dcl a bit(8) ctl; alloc a; alloc a bit(16);
But this code would still be valid under NOLAXCTL: dcl b bit(n) ctl; dcl n fixed bin(31) init(8); alloc b; alloc b bit(16);
LAXDCL or NOLAXDCL
Specifying LAXDCL allows implicit declarations. NOLAXDCL disallows all implicit and contextual declarations except for BUILTINs and for files SYSIN and SYSPRINT.
LAXDEF or NOLAXDEF
Specifying LAXDEF allows so-called illegal defining to be accepted without any compiler messages (rather than the E-level messages that the compiler would usually produce).
LAXENTRY or NOLAXENTRY
Specifying LAXENTRY allows unprototyped entry declarations. Specifying
NOLAXENTRY will cause the compiler to flag all unprototyped entry declarations, i.e. all ENTRY declares that do not specify a parameter list. Note
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
121
Compile-time options
that this would mean that if an ENTRY should have no parameters, it should be declared as ENTRY() rather than simply as ENTRY.
STRICT
Specifying RULES(NOLAXENTRY(STRICT)) causes the compiler to flag unprototyped entry declarations that have the OPTIONS(ASM) attribute.
LOOSE
Specifying RULES(NOLAXENTRY(LOOSE)) causes the compiler not to flag unprototyped entry declarations that have the OPTIONS(ASM) attribute.
RULES(LAXENTRY) is the default.
LAXIF or NOLAXIF
Specifying RULES(NOLAXIF) will cause the compiler to flag any IF, WHILE,
UNTIL, and WHEN clauses that do not have the attributes BIT(1)
NONVARYING. It also causes the compiler to flag the assignments of the form x=y=z
.
The following would all be flagged under NOLAXIF: dcl i fixed bin; dcl b bit(8);
...
if i then ...
if b then ...
LAXINOUT | NOLAXINOUT
Specifying NOLAXINOUT causes the compiler to assume that all
ASSIGNABLE BYADDR parameters are input (and possibly output) parameters and hence to issue a warning if it thinks such a parameter has not been initialized.
LAXLINK or NOLAXLINK
Specifying NOLAXLINK causes the compiler to flag any assign or compare of two ENTRY variables or constants if any of the following do not match: v the parameter description lists
For instance if A1 is declared as ENTRY(CHAR(8)) and A2 as
ENTRY(POINTER) VARIABLE, then under RULES(NOLAXLINK), the compiler would flag an attempt to assign A1 to A2.
v the RETURNS attribute
For instance if A3 is declared as ENTRY RETURNS(FIXED BIN(31)) and A4 as an ENTRY VARIABLE without the RETURNS attribute, then under
RULES(NOLAXLINK), the compiler would flag an attempt to assign A3 to
A4.
v the LINKAGE and other OPTIONS suboptions
For example, if A5 is declared as ENTRY OPTIONS(ASM) and A6 as an
ENTRY VARIABLE without the OPTIONS attribute, then under
RULES(NOLAXLINK), the compiler would flag an attempt to assign A5 to
A6 because the OPTIONS(ASM) in the declare of A5 implies that A5 has
LINKAGE(SYSTEM) while A6 will have LINKAGE(OPTLINK) by default, since it has no OPTIONS attribute.
LAXMARGINS or NOLAXMARGINS
Specifying NOLAXMARGINS causes the compiler to flag, depending on the setting of the STRICT and XNUMERIC suboption, lines containing non-blank characters after the right margin. This can be useful in detecting code, such as a closing comment, that has accidentally been pushed out into the right margin.
122
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
If the NOLAXMARGINS and STMT options are used together with one of the preprocessors, then any statements that would be flagged because of the
NOLAXMARGINS option will be reported as statement zero (since statement numbering occurs only after all the preprocessors are finished, but the detection of text outside the margins occurs as soon as the source is read).
STRICT
Under the STRICT suboption, the compiler will flag any line containing non-blank characters after the right margin
XNUMERIC
Under the XNUMERIC suboption, the compiler will flag any line containing non-blank characters after the right margin except if the right margin is column 72 and columns 73 through 80 all contain numeric digits
LAXNESTED | NOLAXNESTED
Specifying RULES(NOLAXNESTED) causes the compiler to flag any executable code in a procedure that follows any subprocedures.
Specifying RULES(LAXNESTED) causes the compiler not to flag the executable code in a procedure that follows any subprocedures.
LAXPUNC or NOLAXPUNC
Specifying NOLAXPUNC causes the compiler to flag with an E-level message any place where it assumes punctuation that is missing.
For instance, given the statement "I = (1 * (2);", the compiler assumes that a closing right parenthesis was meant before the semicolon. Under
RULES(NOLAXPUNC), this statement would be flagged with an E-level message; otherwise it would be flagged with a W-level message.
LAXQUAL | NOLAXQUAL
Specifying NOLAXQUAL(LOOSE) causes the compiler to flag any reference to structure members that are not level 1 and are not dot qualified. Consider the following example: dcl
1 a,
2 b,
3 b fixed bin,
3 c fixed bin; c = 11; /* would be flagged */ b.c = 13; /* would not be flagged */ a.c = 17; /* would not be flagged */
Specifying NOLAXQUAL(STRICT) causes the compiler to flag any reference to structure members that do not include the level-1 name. Consider the following example: dcl
1 a,
2 b,
3 b fixed bin,
3 c fixed bin; c = 11; /* would be flagged */ b.c = 13; /* would be flagged */ a.c = 17; /* would not be flagged */
LAXRETURN|NOLAXRETURN
Specifying NOLAXRETURN causes the compiler to generate code to raise the
ERROR condition when a RETURN statement is used in either of the following ways:
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
123
Compile-time options
v
A RETURN statement with an expression in a procedure that is coded without the RETURN option v
A RETURN statement without an expression in a procedure that is coded with the RETURN option
RULES(LAXRETURN) is the default.
LAXSCALE|NOLAXSCALE
Specifying NOLAXSCALE causes the compiler to flag any FIXED BIN(p,q) or
FIXED DEC(p,q) declare where q < 0 or p < q.
It also causes the compiler to flag ROUND(x, p) when p < 0.
The message issued when flagging ROUND(x, p) is different from that issued when flagging the FIXED BIN(p, q) or FIXED DEC(p, q) declaration. Therefore, you can use the EXIT option to suppress the message issued when ROUND(x, p) is flagged and keep the message for other questionable declarations.
LAXSEMI or NOLAXSEMI
Specifying NOLAXSEMI causes the compiler to flag any semicolons appearing inside comments.
LAXSTG or NOLAXSTG
Specifying NOLAXSTG causes the compiler to flag declares where a variable A is declared as BASED on ADDR(B) and STG(A) > STG(B) even (and this is the key part) if B is a parameter.
The compiler would already flag this kind of problem if B were in
AUTOMATIC or STATIC storage, but it does not, by default, flag this when B is a parameter (since some customers declare B with placeholder attributes that do not describe the actual argument). For those customers whose parameter and argument declares match (or should match), specifying
RULES(NOLAXSTG) may help detect more storage overlay problems.
LAXSTRZ or NOLAXSTRZ
Specifying LAXSTRZ causes the compiler not to flag any bit or character variable that is initialized to or assigned a constant value that is too long if the excess bits are all zeros (or if the excess characters are all blank).
MULTICLOSE or NOMULTICLOSE
NOMULTICLOSE causes the compiler to flag all statements that force the closure of multiple groups of statement with an E-level message.
PADDING|NOPADDING
Specifying NOPADDING causes the compiler to flag all structures that contain padding.
PROCENDONLY|NOPROCENDONLY
Specifying NOPROCENDONLY causes any END statement closing a
PROCEDURE to be flagged if the END statement does not name the
PROCEDURE, that is, if the END keyword is immediately followed by a semicolon.
RECURSIVE | NORECURSIVE
Specifying NORECURSIVE causes the compiler to flag any use of the
RECURSIVE attribute or any procedure that directly calls itself.
Specifying RECURSIVE causes the compiler not to flag the use of the
RECURSIVE attribute or any procedure that directly calls itself.
Note:
Do not use RULES(NORECURSIVE) and DFT(RECURSIVE) together.
124
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
SELFASSIGN|NOSELFASSIGN
Specifying NOSELFASSIGN causes the compiler to flag all assignments where the source and the target are the same.
RULES(SELFASSIGN) is the default.
STOP|NOSTOP
Specifying NOSTOP causes all STOP and EXIT statements to be flagged.
UNREF or NOUNREF
Specifying NOUNREF causes the compiler to flag any level-1 AUTOMATIC variable which is not referenced and which, if it is a structure or union, contains no subelement which is referenced.
ALL
Specifying RULES(NOUNREF(ALL)) causes the compiler to flag all unreferenced variables. When NOUNREF is specified, ALL is the default.
SOURCE
Specifying RULES(NOUNREF(SOURCE)) causes the compiler to flag unreferenced variables that are not declared in an INCLUDE file.
Default
: RULES (IBM BYNAME CONTROLLED NODECSIZE EVENDEC ELSEIF
GOTO GLOBALDO NOLAXBIF NOLAXCTL LAXDCL NOLAXDEF LAXENTRY
LAXIF LAXINOUT LAXLINK LAXNESTED LAXPUNC LAXMARGINS
LAXQUAL LAXRETURN LAXSCALE LAXSEMI LAXSTG NOLAXSTRZ
MULTICLOSE PADDING PROCENDONLY RECURSIVE SELFASSIGN STOP
UNREF)
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
125
Compile-time options
SEMANTIC
This option specifies that the execution of the compiler's semantic checking stage depends on the severity of messages issued prior to this stage of processing.
SEMANTIC
NOSEMANTIC
( S
E
W
)
ABBREVIATIONS:
SEM, NSEM
SEMANTIC
Equivalent to NOSEMANTIC(S).
NOSEMANTIC
Processing stops after syntax checking. No semantic checking is performed.
NOSEMANTIC (S)
No semantic checking is performed if a severe error or an unrecoverable error has been encountered.
NOSEMANTIC (E)
No semantic checking is performed if an error, a severe error, or an unrecoverable error has been encountered.
NOSEMANTIC (W)
No semantic checking is performed if a warning, an error, a severe error, or an unrecoverable error has been encountered.
Semantic checking is not performed if certain kinds of severe errors are found. If the compiler cannot validate that all references resolve correctly (for example, if built-in function or entry references are found with too few arguments) the suitability of any arguments in any built-in function or entry reference is not checked.
126
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SNAP
Compile-time options
This option specifies whether SNAP and PLIDUMP traceback output must be complete if an exception occurs.
NOSNAP
SNAP
SNAP
SNAP and PLIDUMP traceback output always includes all PL/I routines on the call stack. SNAP can significantly increase the size and reduce the performance of your programs. It is not recommended for production programs.
NOSNAP
SNAP and PLIDUMP traceback output may not be complete.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
127
Compile-time options
SOSI
This option specifies how source containing the DBCS shift-out and shift-in characters is handled.
NOSOSI
SOSI
NOSOSI
Under the NOSOSI option, there will be no special handling of these characters.
SOSI
Under the SOSI option, the compiler will accept and correctly process source containing the DBCS shift-out and shift-in characters.
128
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SOURCE
Compile-time options
The SOURCE option specifies that a listing of the source input to the compiler be created.
NOSOURCE
SOURCE
ABBREVIATIONS: S, NS
SOURCE
The complier produces a listing of the source.
NOSOURCE
The compiler does not produce a source listing.
A source listing is not produced unless syntax checking is performed.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
129
Compile-time options
STATIC
The STATIC option controls whether INTERNAL STATIC variables are retained in the object module even if unreferenced.
STATIC (
SHORT
FULL )
SHORT
INTERNAL STATIC will be retained in the object module only if used.
FULL
All INTERNAL STATIC with INITIAL will be retained in the object module.
If INTERNAL STATIC variables are used as "eyecatchers", you should specify the
STATIC(FULL) option to insure that they will be in the generated object module.
130
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
STMT
Compile-time options
The STMT option specifies that statements in the source program are to be counted and that this "statement number" is used to identify statements in the compiler listings resulting from the AGGREGATE, ATTRIBUTES, SOURCE and XREF options.
NOSTMT
STMT
Specifying NOSTMT implies NUMBER.
When the STMT option is specified, the source listing will include both the logical statement numbers and the source file numbers.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
131
Compile-time options
STORAGE
The STORAGE option directs the compiler to produce as part of the listing a summary of the storage used by each procedure and begin-block.
NOSTORAGE
STORAGE
ABBREVIATIONS: STG, NSTG
132
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SYNTAX
Compile-time options
This option specifies that the execution of the compiler's syntax checking stage depends on the severity of messages issued prior to this stage of processing.
SYNTAX
NOSYNTAX
( S
E
W
)
ABBREVIATIONS: SYN, NSYN
SYNTAX
Equivalent to NOSYNTAX(S).
NOSYNTAX
No syntax checking is performed.
NOSYNTAX(S)
No syntax checking is performed if a severe error or unrecoverable error has been detected.
NOSYNTAX(E)
No syntax checking is performed if an error, severe error, or unrecoverable error has been detected.
NOSYNTAX(W)
No syntax checking is performed if a warning, error, severe error, or unrecoverable error has been detected.
If the NOSYNTAX option terminates the compilation, the cross-reference listing, attribute listing, source listing, and other listings that follow the source program are not produced.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
133
Compile-time options
SYSPARM
This option allows you to specify the value of the string that is returned by the macro facility built-in function SYSPARM.
SYSPARM (
'string'
)
string
This string can be up to 64 characters long. A null string is the default, however, if you choose to specify a string value, see the note on
strings
in step
2 on page 30 under “Rules for using compile-time options”.
For more information about the macro facility, see the
PL/I Language Reference
.
DEFAULT: SYSPARM('')
134
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SYSTEM
Compile-time options
This option specifies the operating system and hardware platform under which the
PL/I program will run. It also enforces the parameters that can be received by a
MAIN procedure.
In addition, a suboption allows you to exploit the hardware platform on which the object code will run.
SYSTEM (
WINDOWS
CICS
IMS
)
WINDOWS
Specifies that the program runs under WINDOWS.
CICS
Specifies that the program runs under CICS.
IMS
Specifies that the program will run under IMS.
S486
The object code is intended to run on a machine which has an 80486 or compatible chip. The code runs on machines with a Pentium chip, but not a
386 chip.
Pentium
The object code is intended to run on a machine with a Pentium chip. The code does not run on machines without a Pentium chip.
For MAIN procedures compiled with SYSTEM(CICS), OPTIONS (BYVALUE) is assumed and PROCEDURE OPTIONS(BYADDR), if specified, is diagnosed.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
135
Compile-time options
TERMINAL
This option determines whether or not diagnostic and information messages produced during compilation are displayed on the terminal.
TERMINAL
NOTERMINAL
ABBREVIATIONS: TERM, NTERM
TERMINAL
Messages are displayed on the terminal.
NOTERMINAL
No information or diagnostic compiler messages are displayed on the terminal.
136
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
TEST
Compile-time options
The TEST option specifies the level of testing capability generated as part of the object code. It allows you to control the location of test hooks and to control whether or not the symbol table is generated.
NOTEST
TEST
The TEST option implies GONUMBER. Because the TEST option can increase the size of the object code and can affect performance, you might want to limit the number and placement of hooks.
NOTEST
Suppresses the generation of all testing information.
TEST
Specifies that testing information should be included in the object code.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
137
Compile-time options
USAGE
The USAGE option lets you choose IBM or ANS semantics for selected built-in functions.
USAGE (
,
HEX
ROUND
(
(
SUBSTR (
UNSPEC (
SIZE
CURRENTSIZE
IBM
ANS
STRICT
)
LOOSE
IBM
ANS )
)
) )
HEX( SIZE | CURRENTSIZE )
Under the HEX(SIZE) suboption, when HEX is applied to a VARYING or
VARYINGZ string, it will a return a hex string that represents the maximum amount of storage used by the string.
Under the HEX(CURRENTSIZE) suboption, when HEX is applied to a
VARYING or VARYINGZ string, it will a return a hex string that represents the current amount of storage used by the string.
ROUND( IBM | ANS )
Under the ROUND(IBM) suboption, the second argument to the ROUND built-in function is ignored if the first argument has the FLOAT attribute.
Under the ROUND(ANS) suboption, the ROUND built-in function is implemented as described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
SUBSTR( STRICT | LOOSE )
Under the SUBSTR(STRICT) suboption, if x has CHARACTER type, a
SUBSTR(x,y,z) built-in function reference will return a string whose length is equal to MIN( z, MAXLENGTH(x) ).
Under the SUBSTR(LOOSE) suboption, the same reference would return a string whose length is z
.
The SUBSTR(LOOSE) suboption may be useful for those who have
SUBSTR(x,y,z) references where x is a CHAR(1) BASED variable.
UNSPEC( IBM | ANS )
Under the UNSPEC(IBM) suboption, UNSPEC cannot be applied to a structure and, if applied to an array, returns an array of bit strings.
Under the UNSPEC(ANS) suboption, UNSPEC can be applied to structures and, when applied to a structure or an array, UNSPEC returns a single bit string.
138
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compile-time options
WIDECHAR
The WIDECHAR option specifies the format in which WIDECHAR data will be stored.
WIDECHAR (
LITTLEENDIAN
BIGENDIAN )
BIGENDIAN
Indicates that WIDECHAR data will be stored in bigendian format. For instance, the WIDECHAR value for the UTF-16 character '1' will be stored as
'0031'x.
LITTLEENDIAN
Indicates that WIDECHAR data will be stored in littleendian format. For instance, the WIDECHAR value for the UTF-16 character '1' will be stored as
'3100'x.
WX constants should always be specified in bigendian format. Thus the value '1' should always be specified as '0031'wx, even if under the
WIDECHAR(LITTLEENDIAN) option, it is stored as '3100'x.
DEFAULT: WIDECHAR( LITTLEENDIAN )
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
139
Compile-time options
WINDOW
The WINDOW option sets the value for the w window argument used in various date-related built-in functions.
WINDOW (
w
)
The value for
w
is either an unsigned integer that represents the start of a fixed window or a negative integer that specifies a "sliding" window. For example,
Window(-20) indicates a window that starts 20 years prior to the year when the program runs.
DEFAULT: WINDOW(1950)
140
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
XINFO
Compile-time options
The XINFO option specifies that the compiler should generate additional files with extra information about the current compilation unit.
XINFO (
,
NODEF
DEF
NOMSG
MSG
NOSYM
SYM
NOSYN
SYN
NOXMI
XMI
NOXML
XML
)
DEF
A definition side-deck file is created. This file lists, for the compilation unit, all: v defined EXTERNAL procedures v defined EXTERNAL variables v statically referenced EXTERNAL routines and variables v dynamically called fetched modules
This file is written to the same directory as the object deck and has the extension "def".
For instance, given the program: defs: proc; dcl (b,c) ext entry; dcl x ext fixed bin(31) init(1729); dcl y ext fixed bin(31) reserved; call b(y); fetch c; call c; end;
The following def file would be produced:
EXPORTS CODE
DEFS
EXPORTS DATA
X
IMPORTS
B
Y
FETCH
C
The def file can be used to be build a dependency graph or cross-reference analysis of your application.
NODEF
No definition side-deck file is created.
MSG
Message information is generated to the ADATA file. See the appendix for more details on the format of the ADATA file.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
141
Compile-time options
The ADATA file is generated in the same directory as the object file and has an extension of "adt".
NOMSG
No message information is generated to the ADATA file. If neither MSG nor
SYM is specified, no ADATA file is generated.
SYM
Symbol information is generated to the ADATA file.
The ADATA file is generated in the same directory as the object file and has an extension of "adt".
NOSYM
No symbol information is generated to the ADATA file.
SYN
Syntax information is generated to the ADATA file. Specifying the
XINFO(SYN) option can greatly increase the amount of storage, both in memory and for the file produced, required by the compiler.
The ADATA file is generated in the same directory as the object file and has an extension of "adt".
NOSYN
No syntax information is generated to the ADATA file.
XMI
An XMI side-file is created. This XMI is not intended to be read or interpreted except by other tools.
This file is written to the same directory as the object deck and has the extension "xmi".
NOXMI
No XMI side-file is created.
XML
An XML side-file is created. This XML file includes: v the file reference table for the compilation v the block structure of the program compiled v the messages produced during the compilation
This file is written to the same directory as the object deck and has the extension "xml".
The DTD file for the XML produced is:
<?xml encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!ELEMENT PACKAGE ((PROCEDURE)*,(MESSAGE)*,FILEREFERNCETABLE)>
<!ELEMENT PROCEDURE (BLOCKFILE,BLOCKLINE,(PROCEDURE)*,(BEGINBLOCK)*)>
<!ELEMENT BEGINBLOCK (BLOCKFILE,BLOCKLINE,(PROCEDURE)*,(BEGINBLOCK)*)>
<!ELEMENT MESSAGE (MSGNUMBER,MSGLINE?,MSGFILE?,MSGTEXT)>
<!ELEMENT FILE (FILENUMBER,INCLUDEDFROMFILE?,INCLUDEDONLINE?,FILENAME)>
<!ELEMENT FILEREFERENCETABLE (FILECOUNT,FILE+)>
<!ELEMENT BLOCKFILE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT BLOCKLINE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT MSGNUMBER (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT MSGLINE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT MSGFILE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT MSGTEXT (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT FILECOUNT (#PCDATA)>
142
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
<!ELEMENT FILENUMBER (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT FILENAME (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT INCLUDEFROMFILE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT INCLUDEDONLINE (#PCDATA)>
NOXML
No XML side-file is created.
Compile-time options
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
143
Compile-time options
XML
The XML option lets you choose the case of the names in the XML generated by the XMLCHAR built-in function
XML ( CASE (
UPPER
ASIS ) )
CASE( UPPER | ASIS )
Under the CASE(UPPER) suboption, the names in the XML generated by the
XMLCHAR built-in function will all be in upper case.
Under the CASE(ASIS) suboption, the names in the XML generated by the
XMLCHAR built-in function will be in the case used in their declares. Note that if you the MACRO preprocessor without using the macro preprocessor option CASE(ASIS), then the source seen by the compiler will have all the names in upper case - and that would make specifying the XML(CASE(ASIS)) option useless.
144
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
XREF
Compile-time options
The XREF option provides a cross-reference table of names used in the program together with the numbers of the statements in which they are declared or referenced in the compiler listing.
NOXREF
XREF
(
FULL
SHORT )
ABBREVIATIONS: X, NX
NOXREF
Indicates that the compiler should not produce this information as part of the listing.
XREF
Specifies that the compiler should produce a cross-reference list.
In addition to the cross-reference list, the compiler produces a listing of unreferenced identifiers. In this list, variables do not appear if they are named constants or static nonassignable variables. If any field in a union or structure is referenced, the name of the union or structure does not appear. Level 1 names for unions or structures appear only if none of the members are referenced.
For an example and description of the content of the cross-reference table, see
“Using the compiler listing” on page 175. If both XREF and ATTRIBUTES are
specified, the two listings are combined.
Chapter 3. Compile-time options
145
146
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
The PL/I compiler allows you to select one or more of the integrated preprocessors as required for use in your program. You can select the include preprocessor, macro facility, the SQL preprocessor, or the CICS preprocessor and the order in which you would like them to be called.
v
The include preprocessor processes special include directives and incorporates external source files.
v
The macro facility, based on %statements and macros, modifies your source program.
v
The SQL preprocessor modifies your source program and translates EXEC SQL statements into PL/I statements.
v
The CICS preprocessor modifies your source program and translates EXEC CICS statements into PL/I statements.
Each preprocessor supports a number of options to allow you to tailor the processing to your needs. You can set the default options for each of the preprocessors by using the corresponding attributes in the configuration file.
Include preprocessor
The include preprocessor allows you to incorporate external source files into your programs by using include directives other than the PL/I directive %INCLUDE.
The following syntax diagram illustrates the options supported by the INCLUDE preprocessor:
PP ( INCLUDE ( '
ID(<directive>)
' ) )
ID
Specifies the name of the include directive. Any line that starts with this directive as the first set of nonblank characters is treated as an include directive.
The specified directive must be followed by one or more blanks, an include member name, and finally an optional semicolon. Syntax for ddname(membername) is not supported.
In the following example, the first include directive is valid and the second one is not:
++include payroll
++include syslib(payroll)
Examples
This first example causes all lines that start with -INC (and possibly preceding blanks) to be treated as include directives: pp( include( ’id(-inc)’))
This second example causes all lines that start with ++INCLUDE (and possibly preceding blanks) to be treated as include directives: pp( include( ’id(++include)’))
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
147
Include preprocessor
Include preprocessor options environment variable
You can set the default options for the include preprocessor by using the
IBM.PPINCLUDE environment variable. See “IBM.PPINCLUDE” on page 22.
Macro preprocessor
Macros allow you to write commonly used PL/I code in a way that hides implementation details and the data that is manipulated, and exposes only the operations. In contrast with a generalized subroutine, macros allow generation of only the code that is needed for each individual use.
The macro preprocessing facilities of the compiler are described in the
PL/I
Language Reference
manual.
You can invoke the macro preprocessor by specifying either the MACRO option or the PP(MACRO) option. You can specify
PP(MACRO) without any options or with options from the list below.
The defaults for all these options cause the macro preprocessor to behave the same as the OS PL/I V2R3 macro preprocessor.
If options are specified, the list must be enclosed in quotes (single or double, as long as they match) ; for example, to specify the FIXED(BINARY) option, you must specify PP(MACRO(’FIXED(BINARY)’)).
If you want to specify more than one option, you must separate them with a comma and/or one or more blanks. For example, to specify the CASE(ASIS) and
RESCAN(UPPER) options, you can specify PP(MACRO(’CASE(ASIS)
RESCAN(UPPER)’)) or PP(MACRO("CASE(ASIS),RESCAN(UPPER)")). You may specify the options in any order.
Macro preprocessor options
The macro preprocessor supports the following options:
CASE
This option specifies if the preprocessor should convert the input text to uppercase.
CASE (
UPPER
ASIS )
ASIS
the input text is left "as is".
UPPER
the input text is to be converted to upper case.
FIXED
This option specifies the default base for FIXED variables.
FIXED (
DECIMAL
BINARY )
DECIMAL
FIXED variables will have the attributes REAL FIXED DEC(5).
148
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Macro facility
BINARY
FIXED variables will have the attributes REAL SIGNED FIXED BIN(31).
INCONLY
This option specifies that the preprocessor should process only %INCLUDE and %XINCLUDE statements. When this option is in effect, you may use neither INCLUDE or XINCLUDE as a macro v procedure name v statement label v variable name
NOINCONLY
This option specifies that the preprocessor should process all preprocessor statements and not only %INCLUDE and %XINCLUDE statements. This option and the INCONLY option are mutually exclusive, and for compatibility,
NOINCONLY is the default.
NAMEPREFIX
This option specifies that the names of preprocessor procedures and variables must start with the specified character.
NAMEPREFIX (
character
)
The character should be specified "as is" and should not be enclosed in quotes.
NONAMEPREFIX
This option specifies that the names of preprocessor procedures and variables are not required to start with one particular character. NONAMEPREFIX is the default.
RESCAN
This option specifies how the preprocessor should handle the case of identifiers when rescanning text.
RESCAN (
ASIS
UPPER )
UPPER
rescans will not be case-sensitive.
ASIS
rescans will be case-sensitive.
To see the effect of this option, consider the following code fragment
%dcl eins char ext;
%dcl text char ext;
%eins = ’zwei’;
%text = ’EINS’; display( text );
%text = ’eins’; display( text );
When compiled with PP(MACRO('RESCAN(ASIS)')), in the second display statement, the value of text is replaced by eins
, but no further replacement occurs since under RESCAN(ASIS), eins does not match the macro variable eins since the former is left asis while the latter is uppercased. Hence the following text would be generated
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
149
Macro facility
DISPLAY( zwei );
DISPLAY( eins );
But when compiled with PP(MACRO('RESCAN(UPPER)')), in the second display statement, the value of text is replaced by eins
, but further replacement does occur since under RESCAN(UPPER), eins does match the macro variable eins since both are uppercased. Hence the following text would be generated
DISPLAY( zwei );
DISPLAY( zwei );
In short: RESCAN(UPPER) ignores case while RESCAN(ASIS) does not.
You can set the default options for the macro preprocessor by using the set
IBM.PPMACRO
command.
Macro facility options environment variables
You can set the default options for the macro facility by using the IBM.PPMACRO
environment variable. See “IBM.PPMACRO” on page 22.
SQL preprocessor
You can use dynamic and static EXEC SQL statements in PL/I applications. Before you can take advantage of EXEC SQL support, you must have installed IBM DB2
Universal Database (herinafter referred to as DB2) for Windows.
Workstation PL/I products support most of the function in DB2 and increased function will be added in each successive release. If you specify newer DB2 functions while using a downlevel DB2 product, warning messages are generated and those newer options are ignored.
Programming and compilation considerations
You need to consider specific options when using the PL/I SQL preprocessor. The
PL/I for Windows SQL preprocessor does not support variables that have either the NONNATIVE or the HEXADEC attributes.
When you have EXEC SQL statements in your PL/I source program, use the
PP(SQL) option to process those statements: pp(sql(’
option-string
’))
In the preceding example, '
option-string
' is a character string enclosed in quotes. For example, pp(sql(’dbname(Sample)’) tells the preprocessor to work with the
SAMPLE database.
If you are using EXEC SQL statements in your program, you must specify the SQL library in addition to the other link libraries in the linking command, for example: ilink myprog.obj db2api.lib
All PL/I statements must be syntactically correct, because the SQL preprocessor scans the source looking for EXEC SQL statements, DECLARE statements, and statements that delimit blocks of declarations. If a statement is coded incorrectly, this might mislead the preprocessor when looking for the END statement to a
BEGIN, DO, PACKAGE, PROCEDURE, or SELECT statement, and that can cause the preprocessor to be unable to resolve some host variable references correctly.
150
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
If the source uses %INCLUDE or other macro statements, invoke the MACRO preprocessor before the SQL preprocessor.
The SQL preprocessor supports DBCS in the same manner as the PL/I compiler does. When the GRAPHIC PL/I compiler option is in effect, some source language elements can be written using DBCS and SBCS characters. In particular, you can use DBCS characters in the source program in the following places: v
Inside comments v As part of statement labels and identifiers v
In G or M literals
The following restrictions apply to the use of PL/I built-in functions, compiler options, and statements when you program and compile SQL statements: v
When EXEC SQL statements are translated to PL/I, the following built-in functions might be included in the generated code. If you use any of the following built-in functions as the names of elements in structures, you must also explicitly declare them as BUILTIN:
– ADDR
– LENGTH
– MAXLENGTH
– PTRVALUE
– SYSNULL v
You must not use PL/I type functions, such as BIND(: t, p :), in EXEC SQL statements.
v
When compiling with the preprocessor, you must not use these compiler options:
– DFT(EBCDIC)
– DFT(HEXADEC) v
Do not use DECLARE STATEMENT statements in SQL queries, because the PL/I preprocessor always ignores these statements.
SQL Users
You must have DB2 Universal Database for Windows installed and started before you can compile a program containing EXEC SQL statements. To find out how to install DB2, refer to database installation guide for the platform you are using.
You can start the database manager by issuing the following at a command prompt: db2start
SQL preprocessor options
The following syntax diagram illustrates all of the options supported by the SQL preprocessor.
PP ( SQL ( ' DBNAME (
dbname
)
BLOCK ( UNAMBIG )
ALL
NO
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
151
SQL preprocessor
NOBIND
BIND
(
bindname
)
CALL_RESOLUTION ( IMMEDIATE )
DEFERRED
COLLECTION (
schema-name
) CONNECT ( 1 )
2
DATETIME ( DEF )
USA
EUR
ISO
JIS
LOC
DBUID(
userid
) DBPWD(
password
)
NODECK
DECK
,
DEPRECATE ( STMT (
EXPLAIN
GRANT
REVOKE
SET_CURRENT_SQLID
NOINCONLY
INCONLY DISCONNECT ( EXPLICIT
AUTOMATIC
CONDITIONAL
)
) )
INSERT ( DEF )
BUF
ISOLATION ( CS )
RR
RS
UR
ONEPASS
TWOPASS OWNER (
authorization-id
)
PLAN
(
planname
)
NOPLAN
NOPLANSYNTAX
QUALIFIER (
qualifier-name
)
152
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
SQLFLAG ( MVSDB2V23 )
MVSDB2V31
MVSDB2V41
SQLRULES ( DB2 )
STD
SYNCPOINT ( ONEPHASE )
TWOPHASE
NONE
TBQUAL (
table-qualifier-name
)
VALIDATE ( BIND )
RUN
VERSION (
version-id
)
AUTO
Abbreviations: DB, BLK, CRESO, DT, ISOL, ON, TW, D, ND, INS, COL, CON,
DISC, SQLR, SYNC
DBNAME
Specifies the original or alias name of a database. This option directs the preprocessor to process the SQL statements against the specified database. If you omit this option or do not specify a database name, the preprocessor uses the default database if an implicit connect is enabled. The default database is specified by the environment variable DB2DBDFT. Further information is available in your DB2 documentation.
The preprocessor must have a database to work with or an error occurs.
BLOCK
Specifies the type of record blocking to be used and how ambiguous cursors are to be treated. The valid values for this option are:
UNAMBIG
Blocking occurs for read-only cursors, those that are not specified as FOR
UPDATE OF, have no static DELETE WHERE CURRENT OF statements, and have no dynamic statements. Ambiguous cursors can be updated.
ALL
Blocking occurs for read-only cursors, those that are not specified as FOR
UPDATE OF, and for which no static DELETE WHERE CURRENT OF statements are executed. Ambiguous and dynamic cursors are treated as read-only.
NO
No blocking is done on any cursors in the package. Ambiguous cursors can be updated.
BIND or NOBIND
Determines whether or not a bind file bindname is created. The bind file has an extension .BND and is saved either in the current directory or the directory specified by the IBM_BIND environment variable. If you do not specify a bindname, the name defaults to the name of the input source file.
CALL_RESOLUTION
Determines whether the CALL statement will be executed as an invocation of
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
153
SQL preprocessor
the deprecated sqleproc() API or as a normal SQL statement. Note that
SQL0204 will be issued if the precompiler fails to resolve the procedure on a
CALL statement with CALL_RESOLUTION IMMEDIATE.
IMMEDIATE
The CALL statement will be executed as a normal SQL statement. This is the default.
DEFERRED
The CALL statement will be executed as an invocation of the deprecated sqleproc() API.
COLLECTION
Specifies an eight character collection identifier for the package.
schema-name
Eight character identifier.
There is no default value for the COLLECTION option. If the COLLECTION is specified, a schema-name must also be provided.
CONNECT
Specifies the type of CONNECT that is made to the database.
1
Specifies that a CONNECT command is processed as a type 1 CONNECT.
This is the default setting.
2
Specifies that a CONNECT command is processed as a type 2 CONNECT.
The default option value is CONNECT(1). The following option strings evaluate to CONNECT(1): CON, CONNECT, CON(), and CONNECT().
DATETIME
Determines the date and time format used when date and time fields are assigned to string representations in host variables. The following three-letter abbreviations are valid for the variable
location
:
DEF
Use the date/time format associated with the country code of the database. This is also the default if DATETIME is not specified.
USA
IBM standard for U.S. form.
Date format: mm/dd/yyyy
Time format: hh:mm xM (AM or PM)
EUR
IBM standard for European form.
Date format: dd.mm.yyyy
ISO
Time format: hh.mm.ss
International Standards Organization.
Date format: yyyy-mm-dd
Time format: hh.mm.ss
JIS
Japanese Industrial Standards.
Date format: yyyy-mm-dd
Time format: hh:mm:ss
LOC
Local form, not necessarily equal to DEF
DBUID and DBPWD
Allows you to specify a
userid
and
password
for those database managers which require that these values be supplied when a remote connection is attempted.
For example, these values might be required during a compile against a remote database resident on a Windows server.
The options DBUID and DBPWD can be in either case, but the values of
userid
(maximum length is 8 characters) and
password
(maximum length is 18 characters) are case sensitive.
154
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
The userid and password are only used by the SQL preprocessor to connect to the database manager during the compile process. When the application connects during execution, the userid and password for that connect must be provided on the EXEC SQL CONNECT statement in the program.
DECK or NODECK
This option specifies that the SQL preprocessor output source is written to a file with the extension .DEK and the file is put the current directory.
DEPRECATE
This option indicates that the preprocessor flags the specified statements as deprecated.
STMT
Specifies a list of statements that the preprocessor should flag as deprecated. The list can be empty.
EXPLAIN
The EXPLAIN SQL statement.
GRANT
The GRANT SQL statement.
REVOKE
The REVOKE SQL statement.
SET_CURRENT_SQLID
The SET CURRENT SQLID SQL statement.
The default option is: DEPRECATE(STMT())
DISCONNECT
Specifies the type of DISCONNECT that is made to the database.
EXPLICIT
Specifies that only database connections that have been explicitly marked for release by the RELEASE statement are disconnected at commit. This is the default setting.
AUTOMATIC
Specifies that all database connections are disconnected at commit.
CONDITIONAL
Specifies that the database connections that have been marked RELEASE or have no open WITH HOLD cursors are disconnected at commit.
The default option value is DISCONNECT(EXPLICIT). The following option strings evaluate to DISCONNECT(EXPLICIT): DISC, DISCONNECT, DISC(),
DISCONNECT().
INCONLY or NOINCONLY
Determines whether or not the SQL preprocessor should process only EXEC
SQL INCLUDE statements.
When INCONLY is specified, no code is generated by the SQL preprocessor and all of the EXEC SQL INCLUDE statements are expanded. When INCONLY is specified, other options cannot be specified.
When NOINCONLY is specified, the SQL preprocessor processes all statements and generates code. INCONLY and NOINCONLY are mutually exclusive, and for compatibility, NOINCONLY is the default.
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
155
SQL preprocessor
INSERT
Requests that the data inserts be buffered to increase performance on the
DB2/6000 Parallel Edition server.
DEF
Use standard INSERT with VALUES execution. This is the default setting.
BUF
Use buffering when executing INSERTs with VALUES.
Note:
This option can only be used when precompiling against a DB2 Parallel
Edition server. If INSERT is used against a DB2 V1.x server, it is ignored and a warning message is issued. If INSERT is used against a DB2 V2.x
server, it is ignored, a warning message is issued, and the option is added to the bind file.
ISOLATION
Determines how far a program bound to this package can be isolated from the effect of other executing programs.
CS
RR
RS
Specifies Cursor Stability as the isolation level.
Repeatable readSpecifies Repeatable Read as the isolation level.
Specifies Read Stability as the isolation level. Read Stability ensures that the execution of SQL statements in the package is isolated from
UR
other application processes for rows read and changed by the application.
Specifies Uncommitted Read as the isolation level.
ONEPASS or TWOPASS
ONEPASS is the default and indicates that host variables must be declared before use. Use of TWOPASS indicates that host variables do not need to be declared before use.
OWNER
Designates a 30-character
authorization-id
for the package owner. The owner must have the privileges required to execute the SQL statements contained in the package. Only a user with SYSADM or DBADM authority can specify an
authorization-id
other than the user ID. The default value is the primary
authorization-id
of the precompile/bind process. SYSIBM, SYSCAT, and
SYSSTAT are not valid values for this option.
PLAN, NOPLAN, or NOPLANSYNTAX
Determines whether or not an access plan
planname
is created. If you do not specify a planname, the name defaults to the name of the input source file.
If you specify NOPLANSYNTAX, no plan is created and a syntax check is performed against DB2 Version 2.1 syntax.
QUALIFIER
Provides an 30-character implicit
qualifier-name
for unqualified objects contained in the package. The default is the owner's authorization ID, whether or not owner is explicitly specified.
SQLFLAG
Identifies and reports on deviations from SQL language syntax specified in this option. If this option is not specified, the flagger function is not invoked.
Further information is available in your DB2 documentation.
MVSDB2V23
SQL statements are checked against the MVS DB2 V2.3 SQL language syntax. This is the default setting.
156
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
MVSDB2V31
SQL statements are checked against the MVS DB2 V3.1 SQL language syntax.
MVSDB2V41
SQL statements are checked against the MVS DB2 V4.1 SQL language syntax.
SQLRULES
Specifies whether type 2 CONNECTs should be processed according to the
DB2 rules or the Standard (STD) rules based on ISO/ANS SQL92.
DB2
Allows the use of the SQL CONNECT statement to switch the current connection to another established (dormant) connection. This is the default setting.
STD
Allows the use of the SQL CONNECT statement to establish a new connection only. The SQL SET CONNECTION must be used to switch to a dormant connection.
The default option value is SQLRULES(DB2). The following option strings evaluate to SQLRULES(DB2): SQLR, SQLRULES, SQLR(), SQLRULES().
SYNCPOINT
Specifies how commits or rollbacks are coordinated among multiple database connections.
ONEPHASE
Specifies that no Transaction Manager (TM) is used to perform a two-phase commit. A one-phase commit is used to commit the work done by each database in multiple database transactions. This is the default setting.
TWOPHASE
Specifies that the TM is required to coordinate two-phase commits among those databases that support this protocol.
NONE
Specifies that no TM is used to perform a two-phase commit, and does not enforce single updater, multiple reader. A COMMIT is sent to each participating database. The application is responsible for recovery if any of the commits fail.
The default option value is SYNCPOINT(ONEPHASE). The following option strings evaluate to SYNCPOINT(ONEPHASE): SYNC, SYNCPOINT, SYNC(),
SYNCPOINT().
TBQUAL
Provides an 8-character implicit
table-qualifier-name
for unqualified objects contained in the package.
VALIDATE
Determines when the database manager checks for authorization errors and object not found errors. The package owner authorization ID is used for validity checking.
BIND
Validation is performed at precompile/bind time. If all objects do not exist, or all authority is not held, error messages are produced. If
sqlerror
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
157
SQL preprocessor continue
is specified, a package/bind file is produced despite the error message, but the statements in error are not executable.
RUN
Validation is attempted at bind time. If all objects exist, and all authority is held, no further checking is performed at execution time. If all objects do not exist, or all authority is not held at precompile/bind time, warning messages are produced, and the package is successfully bound, regardless of the
sqlerror continue
option setting. However, authority checking and existence checking for SQL statements that failed these checks during the precompile/bind process can be redone at execution time.
VERSION
Defines the version identifier for a package. If this option is not specified, the package version will be "" (the empty string).
version-id
Specifies a version identifier that is any alphanumeric value, $, #, @, _, -, or
., up to 64 characters in length.
AUTO
The version identifier will be generated from the consistency token. If the consistency token is a timestamp (it will be if the LEVEL option is not specified), the timestamp is converted into ISO character format and is used as the version identifier.
SQL preprocessor options environment variable
You can set the default options for the SQL Preprocessor by using the IBM.PPSQL
environment variable. See “IBM.PPSQL” on page 22.
SQL preprocessor BIND environment variables
If the BIND option is specified, the SQL preprocessor creates a bind file in the current directory for the program you compile. You can change the destination of the output file by setting the IBM.BIND environment variable, for example: set ibm.bind=C:\bindlib
The SQL bind output file has the same name as the primary input file, unless otherwise specified, and an extension of BND.
Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications
You can code SQL statements in your PL/I applications using the language defined in
SQL Reference, Volume 1 and Volume 2
. Specific requirements for your SQL code are described in the sections that follow.
Defining the SQL communications area
A PL/I program that contains SQL statements must include an SQL
communications area (SQLCA) As shown in Figure 1 on page 159 part of an
SQLCA consists of an SQLCODE variable and an SQLSTATE variable.
v
The SQLCODE value is set by the Database Manager after each SQL statement is executed. An application can check the SQLCODE value to determine whether the last SQL statement was successful.
v
The SQLSTATE variable can be used as an alternative to the SQLCODE variable when analyzing the result of an SQL statement. Like the SQLCODE variable, the
SQLSTATE variable is set by the Database Manager after each SQL statement is executed.
158
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
The SQLCA should be included by using the SQL INCLUDE statement: exec sql include sqlca;
The SQLCA must not be defined within an SQL declare section. The scope of the
SQLCODE and SQLSTATE declaration must include the scope of all SQL statements in the program.
Dcl
1 Sqlca,
2 sqlcaid
2 sqlcabc
2 sqlcode
2 sqlerrm char(8), /* Eyecatcher = ’SQLCA ’*/ fixed binary(31), /* SQLCA size in bytes = 136 */ fixed binary(31), char(70) var,
/* SQL return code */
/* Error message tokens */
2 sqlerrp char(8), /* Diagnostic information */
2 sqlerrd(6) fixed binary(31), /* Diagnostic information */
2 sqlwarn,
3 sqlwarn0 char(1),
/* Warning flags */
3 sqlwarn1 char(1),
3 sqlwarn2 char(1),
3 sqlwarn3 char(1),
3 sqlwarn4 char(1),
3 sqlwarn5 char(1),
3 sqlwarn6 char(1),
3 sqlwarn7 char(1),
2 sqlext,
3 sqlwarn8 char(1),
3 sqlwarn9 char(1),
3 sqlwarna char(1),
3 sqlstate char(5); /* State corresponding to SQLCODE */
Figure 1. The PL/I declaration of SQLCA
Defining SQL descriptor areas
The following statements require an SQLDA:
PREPARE
statement-name
INTO
descriptor-name
FROM
host-variable
EXECUTE...USING DESCRIPTOR
descriptor-name
FETCH...USING DESCRIPTOR
descriptor-name
OPEN...USING DESCRIPTOR
descriptor-name
DESCRIBE
statement-name
INTO
descriptor-name
Unlike the SQLCA, there can be more than one SQLDA in a program, and an
SQLDA can have any valid name. An SQLDA should be included by using the
SQL INCLUDE statement: exec sql include sqlda;
The SQLDA must not be defined within an SQL declare section.
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
159
SQL preprocessor
Dcl
1 Sqlda based(Sqldaptr),
2 sqldaid
2 sqldabc
2 sqln
2 sqld char(8), /* Eye catcher = ’SQLDA ’ */ fixed binary(31), /* SQLDA size in bytes=16+44*SQLN*/ fixed binary(15), /* Number of SQLVAR elements*/ fixed binary(15), /* # of used SQLVAR elements*/
2 sqlvar(Sqlsize refer(sqln)), /* Variable Description
3 sqltype fixed binary(15), /* Variable data type
*/
*/
3 sqllen fixed binary(15), /* Variable data length
3 sqldata pointer,
*/
/* Pointer to variable data value*/
3 sqlind pointer,
3 sqlname char(30) var ; dcl Sqlsize fixed binary(15); dcl Sqldaptr pointer;
/* Pointer to Null indicator*/
/* Variable Name */
/* number of sqlvars (sqln) */
Figure 2. The PL/I declaration of an SQL descriptor area
Embedding SQL statements
The first statement of your PL/I program must be a PROCEDURE or a PACKAGE statement. You can add SQL statements to your program wherever executable statements can appear. Each SQL statement must begin with EXEC (or EXECUTE)
SQL and end with a semicolon (;).
For example, an UPDATE statement might be coded as follows: exec sql update Department export Mgrno = :Mgr_Num where Deptno = :Int_Dept;
Comments
In addition to SQL statements, PL/I comments can be included in embedded SQL statements wherever a blank is allowed.
SQL style comments ('--') are supported when embedded in SQL statements.
Continuation for SQL statements
The line continuation rules for SQL statements are the same as those for other PL/I statements.
Including code
SQL statements or PL/I host variable declaration statements can be included by placing the following SQL statement at the point in the source code where the statements are to be embedded: exec sql include member;
Margins
SQL statements must be coded in columns
m
through
n
where
m
and
n
are specified in the MARGINS(
m
,
n
) compile-time option.
Names
Any valid PL/I variable name can be used for a host variable and is subject to the following restriction: Do not use host variable names, external entry names, or access plan names that begin with 'SQL', 'DSN', or 'IBM'. These names are reserved
160
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
for the database manager or PL/I. The length of a host variable name must not exceed 100 characters.
Statement labels
With the exception of the END DECLARE SECTION statement, and the INCLUDE text-file-name statement, executable SQL statements, like PL/I statements, can have a label prefix.
WHENEVER statement
The target for the GOTO clause in an SQL WHENEVER statement must be a label in the PL/I source code and must be within the scope of any SQL statements affected by the WHENEVER statement.
Using host variables
All host variables used in SQL statements must be explicitly declared, and all host variables within an SQL statement must be preceded by a colon (:).
Subscripts must not be used in host variable references.
The following topics describe the details of using host variables: v
“Using arrays as host variables”
v
Using arrays as host variables:
You can use an array as a host variable only when it is an array of indicator variables for a host structure. That array must be one-dimensional, have the
CONNECTED attribute, and have constant bounds.
All other use of arrays as host variables is invalid.
Declaring host variables:
Host variable declarations can be made at the same place as regular PL/I variable declarations.
Only a subset of valid PL/I declarations are recognized as valid host variable declarations. The preprocessor does not use the data attribute defaults specified in the PL/I DEFAULT statement. The preprocessor ignores the DEFINE ALIAS and
DEFINE STRUCT statements, so variables with attributes that are dependent on them may not be used as host variables. If the declaration for a variable is not recognized, any statement that references the variable might result in the message:
’The host variable token ID is not valid’
To use a structure that is declared with LIKE or an element of this structure as a host variable, the declaration for the LIKE object must be visible to the SQL preprocessor. For example, the LIKE object must not be in a %INCLUDE file that has not been included.
You can use restricted expressions in host variable declarations to define the bounds of an array or the length of a string as long as the expression has one of the following forms:
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
161
SQL preprocessor
v
A prefix operator applied to an expression where the expression can be collapsed to an integer v
An add or sub operator applied to two expressions where both expressions can be collapsed to integers v
A multiply operator applied to two expressions where both expressions can be collapsed to integers v
A reference to a named constant where the reference can be collapsed to an integer v One of these built-in functions: INDICATORS, HBOUND, LENGTH, and
MAXLENGTH v
A number that is an integer
Only the names and data attributes of the variables are used by the preprocessor; the alignment, scope, and storage attributes are ignored.
Declaring scalar host variables:
You must declare a scalar host variable with one of the following data attributes:
CHARACTER, GRAPHIC, or WIDECHAR
Host variables that are declared with the CHARACTER, GRAPHIC, or
WIDECHAR attributes are called string host variables. The following restrictions apply to the string host variable: v
It must have either the NONVARYING or VARYING attribute.
v
If it has the VARYING attribute, it must have the NATIVE attribute.
FIXED BINARY, FIXED DECIMAL, or FLOAT
Host variables that are declared with the FIXED and BINARY, FIXED and
DECIMAL, or FLOAT attributes are called numeric host variables. The following restrictions apply to the numeric host variable: v
It must have the REAL attribute.
v If it has the FIXED and BINARY attributes, it must have the SIGNED and NATIVE attributes, a zero scale factor, and a precision greater than
7.
v
If it has the FIXED and DECIMAL attributes, it must have a non-negative scale factor that is smaller than its precision.
v
If it has the FLOAT and DECIMAL attributes, it must have a precision that is less than 17.
v
If it has the FLOAT and BINARY attributes, it must have a precision that is less than 54.
SQL TYPE
Host variables that are declared with the SQL TYPE attribute are called
SQL TYPE host variables. The attribute specification must conform to one of the following syntax diagrams:
BINARY
SQL TYPE IS BINARY (
length
)
VARBINARY
SQL TYPE IS VARBINARY (
length
)
162
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
Result set locator
SQL TYPE IS RESULT_SET_LOCATOR
ROWID
SQL TYPE IS ROWID
Table locator
SQL TYPE IS TABLE LIKE
table-name
AS LOCATOR
LOB file reference
SQL TYPE IS BLOB_FILE
CLOB_FILE
DBCLOB_FILE
LOB locator
SQL TYPE IS BLOB_LOCATOR
CLOB_LOCATOR
DBCLOB_LOCATOR
LOB variable
SQL TYPE IS BLOB
CLOB
DBCLOB
(
length
K
M
G
)
BLOB
You can also use
BINARY LARGE OBJECT
as an alternative for
BLOB
.
CLOB
You can also use either
CHARACTER LARGE OBJECT
or
CHAR LARGE OBJECT
as an alternative for
CLOB
.
XML LOB variable
) SQL TYPE IS XML AS BLOB
CLOB
DBCLOB
(
length
K
M
G
BLOB
You can also use
BINARY LARGE OBJECT
as an alternative for
BLOB
.
CLOB
You can also use either
CHARACTER LARGE OBJECT
or
CHAR LARGE OBJECT
as an alternative for
CLOB
.
XML file reference
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
163
SQL preprocessor
SQL TYPE IS XML AS BLOB_FILE
CLOB_FILE
DBCLOB_FILE
The following constant declarations are generated by the SQL preprocessor.
You can use them to set the file option variable when you use the file reference host variables:
DCL SQL_FILE_READ
DCL SQL_FILE_CREATE
FIXED BIN(31) VALUE(2);
FIXED BIN(31) VALUE(8);
DCL SQL_FILE_OVERWRITE FIXED BIN(31) VALUE(16);
DCL SQL_FILE_APPEND FIXED BIN(31) VALUE(32);
Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types
The base SQLTYPE and SQLLEN of host variables are determined according to the following table. If a host variable appears with an indicator variable, the SQLTYPE is the base SQLTYPE plus one.
Table 3. SQL data types generated from PL/I declarations
4000
PL/I Data Type
BIN FIXED(n), n < 16
BIN FIXED(n), n ranges from 16 to 31
DEC FIXED(p,s)
SQLTYPE of
Host Variable
500
496
484
BIN FLOAT(p), 22
≤ p
≤
53 480
DEC FLOAT(m), 7
≤ m
≤
16 480
CHAR(n), 1
≤ n
≤
254
CHAR(n) VARYING, 1
≤ n
≤
CHAR(n) VARYING, n >
4000
GRAPHIC(n), 1
≤ n
≤
127
GRAPHIC(n) VARYING, 1
≤ n
≤
2000
GRAPHIC(n) VARYING, n >
2000
452
448
456
468
464
472
SQLLEN of
Host Variable
2
4 n n
8
8 p (byte 1) s
(byte 2) n n n n
SQL Data Type
SMALLINT
INTEGER
DECIMAL(p,s)
FLOAT
FLOAT
CHAR(n)
VARCHAR(n)
LONG VARCHAR
GRAPHIC(n)
VARGRAPHIC(n)
LONG VARGRAPHIC
Since SQL does not have single or extended precision floating-point data type, if a single or extended precision floating-point host variable is used to insert data, it is converted to a double precision floating-point temporary and the value in the temporary is inserted into the database. If the single or extended precision floating-point host variable is used to retrieve data, a double precision floating-point temporary is used to retrieve data from the database and the result in the temporary variable is assigned to the host variable.
The following table can be used to determine the PL/I data type that is equivalent to a given SQL data type.
Table 4. SQL data types mapped to PL/I declarations
SQL Data Type
SMALLINT
PL/I Equivalent
BIN FIXED(15)
Notes
164
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
Table 4. SQL data types mapped to PL/I declarations (continued)
SQL Data Type PL/I Equivalent Notes
INTEGER
DECIMAL(p,s)
FLOAT
CHAR(n)
VARCHAR(n)
LONG VARCHAR
GRAPHIC(n)
VARGRAPHIC(n)
BIN FIXED(31)
DEC FIXED(p) or
DEC FIXED(p,s)
BIN FLOAT(p) or
DEC FLOAT(m)
CHAR(n)
CHAR(n) VAR
CHAR(n) VAR
GRAPHIC(n)
GRAPHIC(n) VAR
LONG VARGRAPHIC GRAPHIC(n) VAR
DATE
TIME
TIMESTAMP
CHAR(n)
CHAR(n)
CHAR(n) p = precision and s = scale; 1
≤
22
1
1 s
≤
≤
≤
≤ n n p p
≤
≤
≤ 53 7
254
4000 n > 4000
≤ m ≤ 16
≤ p
≤
31 and 0
n
is a positive integer from 1 to 127 that refers to the number of double-byte characters, not to the number of bytes
n
is a positive integer that refers to the number of double-byte characters, not to the number of bytes; 1 ≤ n ≤ 2000 n > 2000
n
must be at least 10
n
must be at least 8
n
must be at least 26
Determining compatibility of SQL and PL/I data types
PL/I host variables in SQL statements must be type compatible with the columns which use them: v
Numeric data types are compatible with each other. A SMALLINT, INTEGER,
DECIMAL, or FLOAT column is compatible with a PL/I host variable of BIN
FIXED(15), BIN FIXED(31), DECIMAL(
p
,
s
), BIN FLOAT(
n
) where
n
is from 22 to
53, or DEC FLOAT(
m
) where
m
is from 7 to 16.
v
Character data types are compatible with each other. A CHAR or VARCHAR column is compatible with a fixed-length or varying-length PL/I character host variable.
Graphic data types are compatible with each other. A GRAPHIC or
VARGRAPHIC column is compatible with a fixed-length or varying-length PL/I graphic character host variable.
v
Datetime data types are compatible with character host variables. A DATE,
TIME, or TIMESTAMP column is compatible with a fixed-length or varying-length PL/I character host variable.
When necessary, the Database Manager automatically converts a fixed-length character string to a varying-length string or a varying-length string to a fixed-length character string.
Using host structures
A PL/I host structure name can be a structure name with members that are not structures or unions. For example: dcl 1 A,
2 B,
3 C1 char(...),
3 C2 char(...);
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
165
SQL preprocessor
In this example, B is the name of a host structure consisting of the scalars C1 and
C2.
Host structures are limited to two levels. A host structure can be thought of as a named collection of host variables.
Each leaf element of a host structure must have one of the following valid host
data attributes as discussed in “Declaring host variables” on page 161:
v
CHARACTER, GRAPHIC, or WIDECHAR v FIXED BIN, FIXED DEC, or FLOAT v
SQL TYPE
Using indicator variables
An indicator variable is a 2-byte integer (BIN FIXED(15)). On retrieval, an indicator variable is used to show whether its associated host variable has been assigned a null value. On assignment to a column, a negative indicator variable is used to indicate that a null value should be assigned.
Indicator variables are declared in the same way as host variables and the declarations of the two can be mixed in any way that seems appropriate to the programmer.
The SQL Preprocessor does not require that indicator arrays have a lower bound of one.
An indicator variable must have the attribute REAL NATIVE SIGNED FIXED
BIN(15).
Given the statement: exec sql
fetch
Cls_Cursor
into
:Cls_Cd,
:Day :Day_Ind,
:Bgn :Bgn_Ind,
:End :End_Ind;
Variables can be declared as follows: exec sql
begin declare section
; dcl Cls_Cd char(7); dcl Day dcl Bgn bin fixed(15); char(8); dcl End char(8); dcl (Day_Ind, Bgn_Ind, End_Ind) bin fixed(15); exec sql
end declare section
;
Host structure example
The following example shows the declaration of a host structure and an indicator array followed by an SQL statements that could be used to retrieve the data into the host structure.
dcl 1 games,
5 sunday,
10 opponents char(30),
10 gtime char(10),
10 tv char(6),
10 comments char(120) var; dcl indicator(4) fixed bin (15); exec sql fetch cursor_a into :games.sunday:indicator;
166
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
Using statements and compile-time options
This topic describes the way the preprocessor handles statements and compile-time options with SQL statements.
CONNECT TO statement:
You can use a host variable to represent the database name you want your application to connect to, for example: exec sql connect to :dbase;
If a host variable is specified: v
It must be a character or a character varying variable.
v
It must be preceded by a colon and must not be followed by an indicator variable.
v
The server-name that is contained within the host variable must be left-justified.
v
If the length of the server name is less than the length of the fixed-length character host variable, it must be padded on the right with blanks.
dcl dbase char (10); dbase = ’SAMPLE’; exec sql connect to :dbase;
/* blanks are padded automatically */ v
If a varying character host variable is used, you may receive the following warning from the compiler. You can ignore this message.
IBM1214I W xxx.x
A dummy argument is created for argument number 6 in entry reference SQLESTRD_API
DECLARE TABLE statement:
The preprocessor ignores all DECLARE TABLE statements.
DECLARE STATEMENT statement:
The preprocessor ignores all DECLARE STATEMENT statements.
Large Object (LOB) support
Binary Large Objects (BLOBs), Character Large Objects (CLOBs), and Double Byte
Character Large Objects (DBCLOBs), along with the concepts of LOB LOCATORS and LOB FILES are recognized by the preprocessor. See the DB2 manuals for more information on these subjects.
LOBS, CLOBS, and BLOBS can be as large as 2,147,483,640 bytes long (2 Gigabytes
- 8 bytes for PL/I overhead). Double Byte CLOBS can be 1,073,741,820 characters long (1 Gigabyte - 4 characters for PL/I overhead).
Note:
Under CMPAT(V1), the size of a BLOB, CLOB, or DBCLOB must not exceed
32767 KB.
Sample programs for LOB support
Three sample programs are provided to show how LOB types can be used in PL/I programs:
SQLLOB1.PLI
Shows how to fetch a BLOB from the database into a file.
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
167
SQL preprocessor
SQLLOB2A.PLI
Shows how to use LOCATOR variables to modify a LOB without any movement of bytes until the final assignment of the LOB expression.
SQLLOB2B.PLI
Fetches the CLOB created in SQLLOB2A.PLI into a file for viewing.
User defined functions sample programs
You must install the following items to access the User Defined Function (UDF) sample programs: v DB2 V2.1 or later v
Sample database
Several PL/I programs have been included to show how to code and use UDFs.
Here is a short description of how to use them.
The file
UDFDLL.PLI
contains five sample UDFs. While these are simple in nature, they show basic concepts of UDFs.
MyAdd
Adds two integers and returns the result in a third integer.
MyDiv
Divides two integers and returns the result in a third integer.
MyUpper
Changes all lowercase occurrences of a,e,i,o,u to uppercase.
MyCount
Simple implementation of counter function using a scratchpad.
ClobUpper
Changes all lowercase occurrences of a,e,i,o,u in a CLOB to uppercase then writes them out to a file.
Use the command file bldudfdll to compile and link it into the udfdll library.
After the udfdll library has been compiled and linked, copy it to the user defined function directory for your database instance.
Before the functions can be used they must be defined to DB2. This is done using the CREATE FUNCTION command. The sample program, addudf.pli
, has been provided to perform the CREATE FUNCTION calls for each UDF. CREATE
FUNCTION calls would look something like the following:
CREATE FUNCTION MyAdd ( INT, INT ) RETURNS INT NO SQL
LANGUAGE C FENCED VARIANT NO EXTERNAL ACTION PARAMETER
STYLE DB2SQL EXTERNAL NAME ’udfdll!MyAdd’
CREATE FUNCTION MyDiv ( INT, INT ) RETURNS INT NO SQL
LANGUAGE C FENCED VARIANT NO EXTERNAL ACTION PARAMETER
STYLE DB2SQL EXTERNAL NAME ’udfdll!MyDiv’
CREATE FUNCTION MyUpper ( VARCHAR(61) ) RETURNS VARCHAR(61) NO SQL
LANGUAGE C FENCED VARIANT NO EXTERNAL ACTION PARAMETER
STYLE DB2SQL EXTERNAL NAME ’udfdll!MyUpper’
CREATE FUNCTION MyCount ( ) RETURNS INT NO SQL
LANGUAGE C FENCED VARIANT NO EXTERNAL ACTION PARAMETER
STYLE DB2SQL EXTERNAL NAME ’udfdll!MyCount’
SCRATCHPAD
168
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SQL preprocessor
CREATE FUNCTION ClobUpper ( CLOB(5K) ) RETURNS CLOB(5K) NO SQL
LANGUAGE C FENCED VARIANT NO EXTERNAL ACTION PARAMETER
STYLE DB2SQL EXTERNAL NAME ’udfdll!ClobUpper’
These are just sample CREATE FUNCTION commands. Consult your DB2 manuals for more information or refinement.
Use the command file bldaddudf to compile and link the addudf.pli
program.
After it is compiled and linked, run it to define the user defined functions to your database.
Several sample PL/I programs are provided that call the user defined functions you have just created and added to the database:
UDFMYADD.PLI
Fetches
ID and
Dept from the STAFF table then adds them together by calling
MyAdd
UDF. Use the command file bldmyadd to compile and link it.
UDFMYDIV.PLI
Fetches
ID and
Dept from the STAFF table then divides them by calling
MyDiv
UDF. Use the command file bldmydiv to compile and link it.
UDFMYUP.PLI
Fetches Name from the STAFF table then calls MyUpper to change the vowels to uppercase. Use the command file bldmyup to compile and link it.
UDFMYCNT.PLI
Fetches
ID from the STAFF table, outputs the count of the call, then divides
ID by the count. Use the command file bldmycnt to compile and link it.
UDFCLOB.PLI
Fetches the resume for employee '000150' then calls
ClobUpper to change the vowels to uppercase. Use the command file bldclobu to compile and link it. After this program is run, look in the file udfclob.txt
for the results.
Once these sample programs are compiled, linked, and the UDFs defined to DB2, the PL/I programs can be run from the command line.
These UDFs may also be called from the DB2 Command Line just line any other builtin DB2 function. For further information on how to customize and get the most out of your UDFs, please refer to your DB2 manuals.
Handling SQL error return codes
PL/I provides a sample program
DSNTIAR.PLI
that you can use to translate an
SQLCODE into a multi-line message for display purposes. This PL/I program provides the same function as the DSNTIAR program on mainframe DB2*.
You must compile DSNTIAR with the same DEFAULT and SYSTEM compile time options that are used to compile the programs that use DSNTIAR.
You must compile DSNTIAR with the following compiler options: v
DEFAULT(ASCII NATIVE LINKAGE(OPTLINK)) v
SYSTEM(WINDOWS)
The caller must declare the entry and conform to the interface as described in the mainframe DB2 publications. For your information, the declaration is of the following form:
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
169
SQL preprocessor
dcl dsntiar entry options(asm inter retcode);
Three arguments are always passed:
arg 1
This input argument must be the SQLCA.
arg 2
This input/output argument is a structure of the form: dcl 1 Message,
2 Buffer_length fixed bin(15) init(
n
), /* input */
2 User_buffer char(
n
); /* output */
You must fill in the appropriate value for
n
.
arg 3
This input argument is a FIXED BIN(31) value that specifies logical record length.
SQL compatibility and migration considerations
The workstation compilers tolerate the following statement:
’ EXEC SQL CONNECT :userid IDENTIFIED BY :passwd’
The preceding statement is translated by the PL/I SQL preprocessor and sent to the database precompiler services as:
’ EXEC SQL CONNECT’
The allows VM SQL/DS users to compile their programs without making significant changes.
CICS support
If you do not specify the PP(CICS) option, EXEC CICS statements are parsed and variable references in them are validated. If they are correct, no messages are issued as long as the NOCOMPILE option is in effect. Without invoking the CICS preprocessor, real code cannot be generated.
You can use EXEC CICS statements in PL/I applications that run as transactions under CICS.
You can develop these applications under CICS on Windows for eventual execution under CICS that particular development platform or under CICS/ESA,
CICS/MVS, or CICS/VSE systems on S/390.
Make sure that the CICS installation adds all the
\OPT\...
settings to your system environment variables for Windows support. It is not necessary that the CICS system be operational when you are compiling your programs.
Programming and compilation considerations
When you are developing programs for execution under CICS, v
You must use the SYSTEM(CICS) compile-time option.
v
The MACRO option must follow the CICS option of PP.
170
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
CICS support
If your CICS programs include files or use macros that contain EXEC CICS statements, you must also use either the MACRO compile-time option or the
MACRO option of PP before the CICS option of the PP option as shown in the following example: pp (macro(...) cics(...) macro(...) )
Make sure that INC is specified as an extension on the INCLUDE(EXT)
compile-time option, see “INCLUDE” on page 66.
The IBM.SYSLIB or INCLUDE environment variable must specify the CICS include file directories, for example: set include=d:\cicsnnn\plihdr;
The PL/I declarations generated by the CICSMAP, the Basic Mapping Support
(BMS) utility, are placed in the first directory specified in the INCLUDE
Output produced in one of the following ways is written to the CPLI transient data queue (TDQ): v
PUT statements to SYSPRINT v
Messages written to the MSGFILE v
DISPLAY statements
Output produced by PLIDUMP is always written to the CPLD transient data queue.
The full workstation CICS API is supported for PL/I programs. Support is also provided for PL/I progams to use: v
External Presentation Interface (EPI) v
External Call Interface (ECI) v
External Transaction Initiation (ETI)
Other PL/I considerations that apply on S/390 CICS apply to CICS on the workstation also. The program behaves as though the STAE option is always in effect. The NOSTAE option is not supported.
If you are developing applications for eventual execution on S/390 CICS subsystems, you can check your PL/I programs for reentrancy violations with the
DEFAULT(NONASSIGNABLE) compile-time option.
For compatibility with CICS/ESA, CICS/MVS, and CICS/VSE, make sure that the
EXEC CICS commands are in upper case.
You can use PL/I FETCH and RELEASE under CICS.
A CICS program must not have more than one procedure that has
OPTIONS(MAIN).
The EXEC CICS ADDRESS and other similar commands that return a pointer to a
CICS control block (such as the TWA COMMAREA, and ACEE) might return a
SYSNULL() pointer if the control block does not exist. (For example, '00000000'x not 'FF000000'x) Your programs must use the SYSNULL built-in function to test such pointers.
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
171
CICS support
Each PL/I compilation unit processed by the CICS preprocessor generates the following: dcl IBMMCICS_ID char(n) static init(’cics-id-and-version’);
The name, version, and release level of the CICS system for which your program was compiled are indicated.
The CICS preprocessor requires the compiler option DEFAULT(ASCII NATIVE
IEEE) be in effect.
You must have CICS installed before you can compile a program containing EXEC
CICS statements. To find out how to install CICS on your workstation, refer to the installation instructions for that product.
CICS preprocessor options
The following syntax diagram show options supported by the CICS preprocessor.
PP ( CICS ( '
NOSOURCE
SOURCE
NOPRINT
NODECK
DECK
EDF
NOEDF
DEBUG
NODEBUG
' ) )
Abbreviations: S, NS, D, ND
SOURCE or NOSOURCE
Specifies whether or not the source input to the CICS preprocessor is printed.
PRINT or NOPRINT
Specifies whether or not the source code generated by the CICS preprocessor is printed in the source listing(s) produced by subsequent preprocessors or the compiler.
DECK or NODECK
Specifies that the CICS preprocessor output source is written to a file with the extension .DEK. The file is in the current directory.
EDF or NOEDF
Specifies whether or not the CICS Execution Diagnostic Facility (EDF) is to be enabled for the PL/I program. There is no performance advantage in specifying NOEDF, but the option can be useful in preventing CICS commands from appearing on EDF displays in well tested programs.
DEBUG or NODEBUG
Specifies whether or not the CICS preprocessor is to pass source program line numbers to CICS for use by the CICS Execution Diagnostic Facility (EDF).
CICS preprocessor options environment variables
You can set the default options for the CICS preprocessor by using the
IBM.PPCICS environment variable. See “IBM.PPCICS” on page 22.
172
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
CICS support
Coding CICS statements in PL/I applications
You can code CICS statements in your PL/I applications using the language defined in
TXseries for Multiplatforms, CICS Application Programming Guide
in
TXSeries for Multiplatforms Information Center at publib.boulder.ibm.com/ infocenter/txformp/v7r1/.
Specific requirements for your CICS code are described in the sections that follow.
Embedding CICS statements
The first statement of your PL/I program must be a PROCEDURE statement. You can add CICS statements to your program wherever executable statements can appear. Each CICS statement must begin with EXEC (or EXECUTE) CICS and end with a semicolon (;).
For example, the GETMAIN statement might be coded as follows: exec cics getmain set(blk_ptr) length(stg(blk));
Comments
In addition to the CICS statements, PL/I comments can be included in embedded
CICS statements wherever a blank is allowed.
Continuation for CICS statements
Line continuation rules for CICS statements are the same as those for other PL/I statements.
Including code
If included code contains EXEC CICS statements or your program uses PL/I macros that generate EXEC CICS statements, you must use one of the following: v
The MACRO compile-time option v
The MACRO option of the PP option (before the CICS option of the PP option)
Margins
CICS statements must be coded within the columns specified in the MARGINS compile-time option.
Statement labels
EXEC CICS statements, like PL/I statements, can have a label prefix.
Writing CICS transactions in PL/I
This section describes the rules and guidelines that apply to PL/I support of CICS on the workstation.
You can use PL/I with CICS facilities to write application programs (transactions) for CICS subsystems. If you do this, CICS provides facilities to the PL/I program that would normally be provided directly by the operating system. These facilities include most data management facilities and all job and task management facilities.
You should observe the following rules to ensure compatibility with S/390 PL/I
CICS support.
Chapter 4. PL/I preprocessors
173
CICS support
v
Do not use macro level support, only command level support is provided.
v
Do not use any PL/I input or output except:
Stream output for SYSPRINT
PLIDUMP
Since these are intended for debugging purposes only, you should not include them in production programs for performance reasons.
v Do not use the following statements:
DELAY
WAIT v
Do not use the PLISRTx built-in subroutines.
v
Do not make calls to IMS using the PLITDLI, ASMTDLI, or EXEC DLI.
v
Do not communicate with FORTRAN, COBOL, or C, using PL/I interlanguage facilities. However, CICS programs written in different languages can communicate with each other using EXEC CICS LINK or XCTL commands.
Subroutines written in a language other than PL/I can be called using PL/I interlanguage facilities providing those subroutines do not contain any EXEC
CICS code. If you want to communicate with a non-PL/I program that contains
EXEC CICS code, you must use EXEC CICS LINK or EXEC CICS XCTL as stated.
CICS abends used for PL/I programs
APLS
This abend is issued on termination, if termination is caused by the ERROR condition, and the ERROR condition was not caused by an abend (other than an ASRA abend).
This is the abend code issued by PL/I when either:
1.
A transaction terminates in error due to a PL/I software interrupt
(CONVERSION, for example), and there is no ERROR ON-unit
2.
The program takes normal return from the ERROR ON-unit.
Because the program failed, the failure must be reflected to CICS on your workstation as an abend so that DTB, and so on, can occur if necessary.
APLT
An error was detected in the user exit.
CICS run-time user exit
It is strongly recommended that you review and modify (if necessary) the
IBM-supplied CICS user exit, CEEFXITA. See “Using the CICS run-time user exit” on page 375.
174
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 5. Compilation output
The results of compilation depend on how error-free your source program is and on the compile-time options you specify. Results can include diagnostic messages, a return code, and other output saved to disk (for example, an object module and
from the compiler.
Using the compiler listing
During compilation, the compiler generates listings that contain information about the source program, the compilation, and the object module. The TERMINAL option sends diagnostics and statistics to your terminal. The IBM.PRINT
environment variable specifies the output directory for printable listing files (see
“IBM.PRINT” on page 23 for more information on the IBM.PRINT environment
variable). The following description of the listing refers to its appearance on a printed page.
This listing for CHIMES program highlights some of the more useful parts of the
compiler listing. Figure 3 on page 176 is similar to the compiler listing for that
program.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
175
Using the compiler listing
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows 8.5
Options Specified
1
Environment:
Command: op
Line.File Process Statements
1.0
2.0
*PROCESS MACRO S A(F) X AG;
*PROCESS NOT(’^’) OR(’|’);
(Built:20120821)
Options Used
2
+
+
ADDEXT
AGGREGATE(DECIMAL)
ATTRIBUTES(FULL)
BIFPREC(31)
BLANK(’09’x)
CASERULES( KEYWORD( MIXED ) )
CHECK( NOCONFORMANCE NOSTORAGE )
CMPAT(LE)
CODEPAGE(00819)
NOCOMPILE(S)
NOCOPYRIGHT
CURRENCY(’$’)
NODBCS
DEFAULT(IBM ASSIGNABLE NOINITFILL NONCONNECTED LOWERINC
DESCRIPTOR DESCLIST DUMMY(ALIGNED) ORDINAL(MIN)
BYADDR RETURNS(BYVALUE) LINKAGE(OPTLINK) NORETCODE
NOINLINE REORDER NOOVERLAP NONRECURSIVE ALIGNED NULLSYS
BIN1ARG PSEUDODUMMY NULLSTRADDR NULLSTRPTR(NULL) EVENDEC
SHORT(HEXADEC) ASCII IEEE NATIVE NATIVEADDR E(IEEE))
DEPRECATE(
BUILTIN()
ENTRY()
INCLUDE()
VARIABLE()
STMT()
)
DEPRECATENEXT(
BUILTIN()
ENTRY()
INCLUDE()
VARIABLE()
STMT()
)
NODLLINIT
NOEXIT
EXTRN(SHORT)
FLAG(W)
FLOATINMATH(ASIS)
NOGONUMBER
NOGRAPHIC
NOIGNORE
IMPRECISE
INCAFTER(PROCESS(""))
CHIMES program compiler listing
Figure 3. CHIMES program compiler listing
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 1
176
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler listing
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 2 5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
+
+
+
NOINCDIR
INCLUDE(EXT(’inc’ ’cpy’ ’mac’))
NOINITAUTO
NOINITBASED
NOINITCTL
NOINITSTATIC
NOINSOURCE
LANGLVL(NOEXT)
LIBS( SINGLE DYNAMIC )
LIMITS( EXTNAME(100) FIXEDBIN(31,31) FIXEDDEC(15,15) NAME(100) )
LINECOUNT(60)
NOLINEDIR
NOLIST
LISTVIEW(SOURCE)
MACRO
MARGINI(’ ’)
MARGINS(2,72)
MAXGEN(100000)
MAXMSG(W 250)
MAXNEST( BLOCK(17) DO(17) IF(17) )
MAXSTMT(4096)
MAXTEMP(50000)
NOMDECK
MSG(*)
NOMSGSUMMARY
NAMES(’@#$’ ’@#$’)
NATLANG(ENU)
NONEST
NOT(’^’)
NUMBER
OBJECT
NOOFFSET
NOONSNAP
OPTIMIZE(0)
OPTIONS(DOC)
OR(’|’)
PP( MACRO )
NOPPCICS
NOPPINCLUDE
PPLIST(KEEP)
NOPPMACRO
NOPPSQL
NOPPTRACE
PRECTYPE(ANS)
PREFIX(CONVERSION FIXEDOVERFLOW INVALIDOP OVERFLOW
NOSIZE NOSTRINGRANGE NOSTRINGSIZE NOSUBSCRIPTRANGE
UNDERFLOW ZERODIVIDE)
PROBE
NOPROCEED(S)
PROCESS(DELETE)
QUOTE(’"’)
REDUCE
RESEXP
RESPECT()
RULES(IBM BYNAME CONTROLLED NODECSIZE ELSEIF EVENDEC GOTO GLOBALDO
NOLAXBIF NOLAXCTL LAXDCL NOLAXDEF LAXENTRY LAXIF LAXINOUT LAXLINK
LAXMARGINS LAXNESTED LAXPUNC LAXQUAL LAXRETURN LAXSCALE LAXSEMI LAXSTG
NOLAXSTRZ MULTICLOSE PADDING PROCENDONLY RECURSIVE SELFASSIGN UNREF)
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
+
+
NOSEMANTIC(S)
NOSNAP
NOSOSI
SOURCE
STATIC(SHORT)
NOSTMT
NOSTORAGE
NOSYNTAX(S)
SYSPARM(’’)
SYSTEM(WINDOWS)
TERMINAL
NOTEST
USAGE( HEX(SIZE) ROUND(IBM) SUBSTR(STRICT) UNSPEC(IBM) )
WIDECHAR(LITTLEENDIAN)
WINDOW(1950)
XINFO(NODEF NOXMI NOXML)
XML( CASE(UPPER) )
XREF(FULL)
CHIMES program compiler listing
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 3
Chapter 5. Compilation output
177
Using the compiler listing
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
Compiler Source
Line.File
46.0
47.0
48.0
49.0
50.0
51.0
52.0
53.0
54.0
55.0
56.0
32.0
33.0
34.0
35.0
36.0
37.0
38.0
39.0
40.0
41.0
42.0
43.0
44.0
45.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
31.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* NAME - CHIMES.PLI
/*
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
5639-A83, 5639-A24 (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1992,1996.
*/
*/
All Rights Reserved.
*/
US Government Users Restricted Rights-- Use, duplication or */ disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.
/* DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Plays a tune using system API services
The following ’enclosed’ code is sample code created by IBM
Corporation. This sample code is not part of any standard
IBM product and is provided to you solely for the purpose of assisting you in the development of your applications.
The */ code is provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind.
*/
IBM shall not be liable for any damages arising out of your */ use of the sample code, even if IBM has been advised of the */ possibility of such damages.
*/
/* */
/********************************************************************/
CHIMES: PROC OPTIONS(MAIN);
DCL ( REST VALUE( 0 ),
G4
C5
D5
VALUE( 392 ),
VALUE( 523 ),
VALUE( 587 ),
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* Play a tune using DOSBEEP tones */
/* Declare Named Constants
E5 VALUE( 657 ),
WHOLE VALUE( 800 ) ) FIXED BIN(31);
*/
/* for note and rest tone */
/* values and timings.
*/
DCL NOTES(19,2) STATIC NONASGN FIXED BIN(31)
INIT( E5, (WHOLE/2), /* Declare tone and timing */
/* for each note of tune.
*/ C5, (WHOLE/2),
D5, (WHOLE/2),
G4, (WHOLE),
REST, (WHOLE/2),
G4, (WHOLE/2),
D5, (WHOLE/2),
/* Initial values may be */
/* restricted expressions */
/* using Named Constants */
/* previously defined in
/* this program.
*/
*/ E5, (WHOLE/2),
C5, (WHOLE),
REST, (WHOLE/2),
E5, (WHOLE/2),
C5, (WHOLE/2),
D5, (WHOLE/2),
G4, (WHOLE),
REST, (WHOLE/2),
G4, (WHOLE/2),
D5, (WHOLE/2),
E5, (WHOLE/2),
CHIMES program compiler listing
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 4
178
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler listing
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
Line.File
Line.File
73.0
88.0
89.0
90.0
91.0
92.0
93.0
94.0
95.0
96.0
97.0
65.0
66.0
67.0
68.0
69.0
70.0
71.0
72.0
57.0
58.0
59.0
60.0
61.0
62.0
64.0
DCL SLEEP
C5, (WHOLE) );
DCL I FIXED BIN(31);
/* Declare external APIs called by chimes. */
DCL BEEP ENTRY( FIXED BIN(31), FIXED BIN(31) ) /* tone, time */
EXT( ’Beep’ )
OPTIONS( BYVALUE
ENTRY( FIXED BIN(31) )
EXT( ’Sleep’ )
OPTIONS( BYVALUE
/* External name of function */
/* Pass parameters by value
LINKAGE(STDCALL));
LINKAGE(STDCALL) );
*/
/* Time duration only */
/* Play all of the notes and rests of the tune using a do loop.
DO I = LBOUND(NOTES,1) TO HBOUND(NOTES,1);
IF NOTES(I,1) ^= 0
THEN CALL BEEP( NOTES(I,1), NOTES(I,2) );
ELSE CALL SLEEP( NOTES(I,2) );
END;
END;
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
*/
/* Note the use of ?for logical NOT */
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page
64.0
33.0
29.0
34.0
35.0
32.0
BEEP
Attribute/Xref Table
4
C5
CHIMES
D5
E5
G4
+++++++ HBOUND
59.0
I
+++++++ LBOUND
38.0
31.0
70.0
36.0
NOTES
REST
SLEEP
WHOLE
CONSTANT EXTERNAL(’Beep’)
ENTRY( BYVALUE INONLY FIXED BIN(31,0),
BYVALUE INONLY FIXED BIN(31,0) )
OPTIONS( LINKAGE ( STDCALL ) )
Refs: 93.0
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
CONSTANT EXTERNAL
ENTRY()
OPTIONS( LINKAGE ( OPTLINK ) )
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
BUILTIN
Refs: 91.0
AUTOMATIC FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 92.0 93.0 93.0 94.0
Sets: 91.0
BUILTIN
Refs: 91.0
STATIC NONASSIGNABLE DIM(1:19,1:2) FIXED BIN(31,0) INITIAL
Refs: 91.0 91.0 92.0 93.0 93.0 94.0
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0
CONSTANT EXTERNAL(’Sleep’)
ENTRY( BYVALUE INONLY FIXED BIN(31,0) )
OPTIONS( LINKAGE ( STDCALL ) )
Refs: 94.0
CONSTANT FIXED BIN(31,0)
Refs: 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
CHIMES program compiler listing
6
5
Chapter 5. Compilation output
179
Using the compiler listing
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
Line.File Dims
Aggregate Length Table
5
Offset Total Size Base Size Identifier
152 4 NOTES 38.0
2 0
5724-B67 IBM(R) PL/I for Windows
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 7
2012.08.21 13:09:51 Page 8
No Compiler Messages
File Reference Table
6
File
0
3
Component
Included From Name
C:\pliz\newfe\chimes.pli
Return Code Messages (Total/Suppressed)
MACRO
Compiler
0
0
End of compilation of CHIMES
CHIMES program compiler listing
0 / 0
0 / 0
Time
0 secs
1 secs
7
1
Options specified
This section of the compiler listing shows any compile-time options you specified. Options shown under
Install: are specified in your IBM.OPTIONS
environment variable. Options shown under
Command: indicate that these options were specified on the command line when you invoked the compiler
(there are no command options in this example). Options specified with the
*PROCESS or %PROCESS statement are shown below the command options.
2
Options used
The compiler listing includes a list of all compile-time options used, including the default options. If an option is marked with a plus sign (+), the default has been changed. If any compile-time options contradict each other, the compiler uses the one with the highest priority. The following list shows which options the compiler uses, beginning with the highest priority: v
Options specified with the *PROCESS or %PROCESS statement.
v
Options specified when you invoked the compiler with the PLI command.
v
Install options installed either at installation time or by the IBM.OPTIONS
environment variable (see “IBM.OPTIONS” on page 21 for more information
on the IBM.OPTIONS environment variable).
3
Using the NUMBER option
The statement numbers shown are generated by the NUMBER option. In this case, the statement begins on the 14th line in file 1. The File Reference Table at the bottom of the listing also shows that file 1 refers to D:\ibmpli\samples\ chimes.pli.
By generating these statement numbers during compilation, you can locate lines that need editing (indicated in messages, for example) without having to refer to the listing.
4
Attribute and cross-reference table
If you specify the ATTRIBUTES option, the compiler provides an attribute table containing a list of the identifiers in the source program together with their declared and default attributes in the compiler listing. The FULL attribute lists
180
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler listing
all identifiers and attributes. If you specify the SHORT suboption for
ATTRIBUTES, unreferenced identifiers are not listed.
If you specify the XREF option, the compiler prints a cross-reference table containing a list of the identifiers in the source program together with the
Line.File
number (the statement number inside the file and the file number, respectively) in which they appear in the compiler listing.
An identifier appears in the Sets: part of the cross-reference table if it is: v The target of an assignment statement.
v Used as a loop control variable in DO loops.
v Used in the SET option of an ALLOCATE or LOCATE statement.
v
Used in the REPLY option of a DISPLAY statement.
If there are unreferenced identifiers, they are displayed in a separate table (not shown in this example).
If you specify ATTRIBUTES and XREF (as in this example), the two tables are combined.
Explicitly-declared variables are listed with the number of the DECLARE statement in which they appear. Implicitly-declared variables are indicated by asterisks and contextually declared variables (HBOUND and LBOUND in this example) are indicated by plus (+) signs. (Undeclared variables are also listed in a diagnostic message.)
The attributes INTERNAL and REAL are never included; they can be assumed unless the respective conflicting attributes, EXTERNAL and COMPLEX, are listed.
For a file identifier, the attribute FILE always appears, and the attribute
EXTERNAL appears if it applies; otherwise, only explicitly declared attributes are listed.
For an array, the dimension attribute is printed first. If the bound of an array is a restricted expression, the value of that expression is shown for the bound; otherwise an asterisk is shown.
If the length of a bit string or character string is a restricted expression, that value is shown, otherwise an asterisk is shown.
5
Aggregate length table
If you specified the AGGREGATE option, the compiler provides an aggregate length table in the compiler listing. The table shows how each aggregate in the
program is mapped. Table 5 shows the headings for the aggregate length table
columns and the description of each.
Table 5. Aggregate length table headings and description
Heading
Line.File
Offset
Total Size
Base Size
Identifier
Description
The statement number and file number in which the aggregate is declared
The byte offset of each element from the beginning of the aggregate
The total size in bytes of the aggregate
The size in bytes of the data type
The name of the aggregate and the element within the aggregate
6
File reference table
The
Included From
column of the File reference table indicates where the corresponding file from the
Name
column was included. The first entry in this
Chapter 5. Compilation output
181
Using the compiler listing
column is blank because the first file listed is the source file. Entries in the
Included From
column show the line number of the include statement followed by a period and the file number of the source file containing the include.
7
Component, return code, diagnostic messages, time
The last part of the compiler listing consists of the following headings:
Component
Shows you which component or processor is providing the information.
Either the macro facility, if invoked, or the compiler itself can provide you with informational messages.
Return code
Shows you the highest return code generated by the component, issued upon completion of compilation. Possible return codes are:
0 (Informational)
No warning messages detected (as in this example). The compiled program should run correctly. The compiler might inform you of a possible inefficiency in your code or some other condition of interest.
4 (Warning)
Indicates that the compiler found minor errors, but the compiler could correct them. The compiled program should run correctly, but might produce different results than expected or be significantly inefficient.
8 (Error)
Indicates that the compiler found significant errors, but the compiler could correct them. The compiled program should run correctly, but might produce different results than expected.
12 (Severe error)
Indicates that the compiler found errors that it could not correct. If the program was compiled and an object module produced, it should not be used.
16 (Unrecoverable error)
Indicates an error-forced termination of the compilation. An object module was not successfully created.
Note:
When coding CMD files for PL/I, you can use the return code to decide whether or not post-compilation procedures are performed.
Messages
Indicates: v
The number of messages issued, if any v
The number of messages suppressed, if any, because they were equal to or below the severity level set by the FLAG compile-time option.
Messages for the compiler, macro facility, SQL preprocessor, and run-time environment are listed and explained in
Messages and Codes
.
Only messages of the severity above that specified by the FLAG option are issued. The messages, statements, and return code appear on your screen unless you specify the NOTERMINAL compile-time option.
Time
Shows you the total time the component took to process your program.
182
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Compiler output files
Compiler output files
If you compile a program using default options, an object module is created in the current directory. By altering compile-time options, you can request other output to
be created in addition to the object module. Table 6 lists other possible compilation
outputs which are also located in the current directory by default.
All compiler output files use the same file name as the main program file. The file extensions are specified in the following table.
Table 6. Possible compilation disk outputs
Output File extension
Preprocessed source text DEK
Object module
Object listing
Template .DEF file
Message listing
OBJ
ASM
DEF
XML
How requested
(compile-time option)
DECK option of appropriate preprocessor
OBJECT
LIST
XINFO(DEF)
XINFO(XML)
How relocated
(environment variable)
IBM.DECK
IBM.OBJECT
IBM.PRINT
IBM.OBJECT
IBM.OBJECT
Note:
You always receive a .LST file containing the program listing.
Chapter 5. Compilation output
183
Compiler output files
184
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 6. Linking your program
The following sections describe how to link object files produced by the compiler into either an executable program file (.EXE) or dynamic link library (.DLL).
Every .EXE that you build must contain exactly one main routine, that is, exactly one procedure containing OPTIONS(MAIN). If no main routine exists, the linker complains that your program has no starting address. If more than one main routine exists, the linker complains that there are duplicate references to the name main
.
Every .DLL that you build must have at least one module compiled with the
DLLINIT compile-time option (see “DLLINIT” on page 56).
Starting the linker
Once the compiler has created object modules out of your source files, use the linker to link them together with the PL/I runtime libraries to create an EXE or
DLL file.
Statically linking
To statically link the library into your
.EXE
, specify the LIBS(SINGLE STATIC) or
LIBS(MULTI STATIC) compile-time option (see “LIBS” on page 73). You must also
link with the /NOE linker option.
Linking from the command line
Specify the ILINK command followed by any sequence of options, file names, or directories, separated by space or tab characters.
options
One or more ILINK options. ILINK options start with a / or - character.
filename
The names of one or more of the following kinds of files: v
Object files—have an .OBJ filename extension v
Library files—have an .LIB filename extension v
Definition files—have a .DEF filename extension v
Export files—have an .EXP filename extension v
Resource files—have an .RES filename extension
You must specify at least one object file to use ILINK correctly.
directories
One or more directory locations which end with a / or \ character.
responsefile
The name of a response file. The file name should immediately follow the @ character.
Linking considerations
You can specify the name of the output file with the
/OUT option. You can specify the name of a map file with the
/MAP option.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
185
Starting the linker
In addition to the libraries you specify, by default the linker searches the PL/I
runtime libraries defined in your object files at compile time (see “LIBS” on page
The directories you specify become part of the linker's search path, before any
directories set in the LIB environment variable. See “Search rules” on page 188 and
“Specifying directories” on page 188 for more information.
You can use wildcard characters to specify multiple object files. For example, use
*.OBJ to specify all the object files in a directory.
Filename extensions are not assumed
The linker does not assume extensions for files. If you specify a filename with no extension, then the linker looks for the file with that name and no extension. If the linker cannot find a file, it stops linking.
Examples
The following command links the object files FUN.OBJ, TEXT.OBJ, TABLE.OBJ, and
CARE.OBJ. The linker searches for unresolved external references in the library file
XLIB.LIB and in the default libraries. Since there is no name provided for the executable file, it is named FUN.EXE, taking the filename of the first object file and the default extension .EXE. The linker also produces a map file, FUNLIST.MAP.
ilink /MAP:funlist fun.obj text.obj table.obj care.obj xlib.lib
The following command links the files MAIN.OBJ, GETDATA.OBJ, and
PRINTIT.OBJ into an executable file named MAIN.EXE, and produces a map file named MAIN.MAP.
ilink /MAP main.obj getdata.obj printit.obj
In Windows, the same command changes slightly by adding an export file,
GETDATA.EXP, which specifies the functions that are exported from
GETDATA.DLL.
ilink getdata.obj printit.obj /OUT:getdata.dll /DLL getdata.exp
Linking from a make file
Use a make file to organize the sequence of actions (such as compiling and linking) required to build your project. You can then invoke all the actions in one step. The
NMAKE utility saves you time by performing actions on only the files that have changed, and on the files that incorporate or depend on the changed files.
The following figure contains a basic make file example.
186
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Linker input and output
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#--------------------------------------------------------
#
# fun.mak - sample makefile
#
Usage: nmake fun.mak
The following commands are done only when needed:
- Compiles fun, text, table, care, xlib1, and xlib2
- Adds xlib1 and xlib2 to library xlib
- Links fun, text, table, care, and xlib to build fun.exe
#
#
#
#
Each block is as follows:
<target>: <list of dependencies for target>
<action(s) required to build target>
#--------------------------------------------------------
OBJS = fun.obj text.obj table.obj care.obj
LIBS = xlib.lib
fun.exe: $(OBJS) $(LIBS) ilink /MAP:funlist $(OBJS) $(LIBS) xlib.lib: xlib1.obj xlib2.obj
ilib /OUT:xlib.lib xlib1.obj xlib2.obj
fun.obj: fun.pli
pli fun.pli
text.obj: text.pli
pli text.pli
table.obj: table.pli
pli table.pli
care.obj: care.pli
pli care.pli
xlib1.obj: xlib1.pli
pli xlib1.pli
xlib2.obj: xlib2.pli
pli xlib2.pli
Figure 4. Make file example
Input and output
The linker is designed to link object files with other library files you specify to produce either an executable program file (.EXE) or a dynamic link library (.DLL).
The linker optionally produces a map file, which provides information about the contents of the executable output.
Input Output
options executable file
(.EXE or .DLL)
object files
(*.OBJ)
map file
(.MAP)
library files
(*.LIB)
return code module definition file
(.DEF)
(Windows)
export files
(*.EXP)
(Windows)
resource files
(*.RES)
Chapter 6. Linking your program
187
Linker input and output
Search rules
When searching for an object (.OBJ), library (.LIB), or module definition (.DEF) file, the linker looks in the following locations in this order:
1.
The directory you specified for the file or the current directory if you did not give a path. Default libraries do not include path specifications.
Note:
If you specify a path with the file, the linker searches only that path.
2.
Any directories entered by themselves on the command line (they must end
3.
Any directories listed in the LIB environment variable.
If the linker cannot locate a file, it generates an error message and stops linking.
Example
A response file could contain the following information:
FUN.OBJ TEXT.OBJ TABLE.OBJ CARE.OBJ
NEWLIBV3.LIB
C:\TESTLIB\
The linker links four object files to create an executable file named FUN.EXE. The linker searches NEWLIBV3.LIB before searching the default libraries to resolve references.
To locate NEWLIBV3.LIB and the default libraries, the linker searches the following locations in this order:
1.
The current directory (because NEWLIBV3.LIB was entered without a path)
2.
The C:\TESTLIB\ directory
3.
The directories listed in the LIB environment variable
Specifying directories
To have the linker search additional directories for input files, specify a drive or directory by itself on the command line. Specify the drive or directory with a slash
(/) or backslash (\) character at the end so the linker will recognize it as a path.
The linker searches the paths you specify before it searches the paths in the LIB
environment variable. See the section on “Search rules” for more information.
Filename defaults
If you do not enter a file name, the linker assumes the following defaults:
Table 7. Linker filename defaults
File Default Filename
Object files
Output file
None. You must enter at least one object file name.
The base name of the first object file.
Map file
Library files
The base name of the output file.
The default libraries defined in the object files. Use the LIBS compile-time option to define the default libraries. Any additional libraries you specify are searched before the default libraries.
Module definition file None. The linker assumes you accept the default for all module statements.
188
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Specifying object files
Specifying object files
When you invoke the linker from the command line, the linker assumes that any input it cannot recognize as other files, options, or directories must be an object
You can also use wildcard characters to specify multiple object files. For example, use *.OBJ to specify all the object files in a directory.
Using response files
Instead of specifying linker input on the command line, you can put options and filename parameters in a response file. You can combine the response file with options and parameters on the command line.
When you invoke the linker, use the following syntax: ilink @responsefile
The value for
responsefile
is the name of the response file. The @ symbol indicates that the file is a response file. If the file is not in the working directory, specify the path for the file as well as the file name.
You can begin using a response file at any point on the linker command line.
Although multiple response files can be specified on the command line, they cannot be nested.
Options can appear anywhere in the response file. If an option is not valid, the linker generates an error message and stops linking.
Specify the contents of the response file just as you would on the command line.
Because the default syntax identifies input by file extension rather than by position on the command line, it does not matter how many lines there are, or whether there are blank lines in the file.
Example
The response file named FUN.LNK contains the following:
/DEBUG /MAP fun.obj text.obj table.obj care.obj
/exec
/map:funlist graf.lib
When you enter ilink @fun.lnk
, the linker does the following: v Links the four object modules fun.obj
, text.obj
, table.obj
, and care.obj
into an .EXE file named fun.exe
. Because no output type is specified, the linker defaults to .exe.
v
Generates the map file funlist.map
(assuming the extension
.map
).
v
Preserves debugging information (because of the
/DEBUG option).
v
Links any needed routines from the library file graf.lib
, and from the default
PL/I libraries specified in the object files.
Chapter 6. Linking your program
189
Specifying executable output type
Specifying executable output type
You can use the linker to produce executable modules (.EXE) and dynamic link libraries (.DLL). The linker produces .EXE files by default.
Use options to specify what kind of output you want: v
To produce a .DLL, specify the
/DLL option. Or, include the module statement
LIBRARY.
Producing an .EXE file
The linker produces .EXE files by default. Use the
/EXEC option, to explicitly identify the output file as an .EXE file.
An .EXE file is one that can be executed directly. You can run the program by typing the name of the file. In contrast, DLL and device driver programs execute when they are called by other processes, and cannot be run independently. To reduce the size of the .EXE file and improve its performance, use the following options: v /ALIGNFILE:
n
to set the file alignment for sections in the output file. Set
n
to smaller factors to reduce the size of the executable, and to larger factors to reduce load time for the executable. By default, the alignment is set to 512 .
v
/BASE:
n
to specify the load address for the executable. For example, if several
DLLs are loaded at base addresses that ensure that the DLLs do not overlap, the linker does not have to reapply the relocation records.
n
(the load address) must be a multiple of 0x10000, and it cannot be 0.
If you do not specify an extension for the output file name, the linker automatically adds the extension .EXE to the name you provide. If you do not specify an output filename at all, the linker generates an .EXE file with the same filename as the first .OBJ file it linked.
Producing a dynamic link library
A dynamic link library (.DLL) file contains executable code for common functions, just as a library (.LIB) file does. When you link with a DLL (using an import library), the code in the DLL is
not
copied into the executable file. Instead, only the import definitions for DLL functions are copied, resulting in a smaller executable.
At run time, the dynamic link library is loaded into memory, along with the .EXE
file.
To produce a DLL as output, compile at least one object file with the DLLINIT compiler option, and link it with the
/DLL linker option. You must include an export definition (.EXP) file that specifies which functions are to be included in the
DLL.
You can find more information in Chapter 19, “Building dynamic link libraries,” on page 379.
To reduce the size of the DLL and improve its performance, use the following options: v
/ALIGNFILE:value to set the alignment factor in the output file. Set
value
to smaller factors to reduce the size of the DLL, and to larger factors to reduce load time for the DLL. By default, the alignment is set to
512
.
190
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Specifying executable output type
For DLLs, setting a /BASE value can save load time when the given load address is available. If the load address is not available, the /BASE value is ignored, and there is no load time benefit.
Once you have produced the DLL, you can produce an executable that links to the
DLL.
The linker determines which functions your object files need during the linking process. Use the ILIB utility to create an import library, and then use the .LIB
file as input to the linker.
Packing executables
Specify
/DBGPACK when you are debugging, to reduce the size of the executable file and potentially improve debugger performance.
Generating a map file
Specify /MAP to generate a map file, which lists the object modules in your output file; section names, addresses, and sizes; and symbol information. If you do not specify a name for the map file, the map file takes the name of the executable output file, with the extension .MAP. To prevent the map file from being generated, use the default, /NOMAP.
Specify /LINENUMBERS to include source file line numbers and associated addresses in the map file.
Linker return codes
4
8
The linker has the following return codes:
Code Meaning
0
The link was completed successfully. The linker detected no errors, and issued no warnings.
Warnings
issued. There may be problems with the output file.
12
16
Errors
detected. The linking might have completed, but the output file cannot be run successfully.
Both warnings issued and errors detected (see return codes 4 and 8)
20
24
28
Severe errors
detected. Linking ended abnormally, and the output file cannot be run successfully.
Both warnings issued and severe errors detected (see return codes 4 and
16)
Both errors and severe errors issued (see return codes 8 and 16)
The linker issued warnings, detected errors, and detected severe errors (see return codes 4, 8, and 16)
If you invoke the linker through a makefile, you can force NMAKE to ignore warnings by putting
-7 before the
ILINK command.
Chapter 6. Linking your program
191
Linker return codes
192
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
Linker options are not case sensitive, so you can specify them in lower-, upper-, or mixed case. You can also substitute a dash (
-
) for the slash (
/
) preceding the option. For example, -DEBUG is equivalent to /DEBUG . You can specify options in either a short or long form. For example, /DE, /DEB, and /DEBU are all
equivalent to /DEBUG. See “Summary of Windows linker options” on page 194
for the shortest acceptable form for each option. Lower- and uppercase, short and long forms, dashes, and slashes can all be used on one command line, as in: ilink /de -DBGPACK -Map /NOI prog.obj
Separate options with a space or tab character. You can specify linker options in the following ways: v
On the command line v
In the ILINK environment variable
Options specified on the command line override the options in the ILINK environment variable.
Some linker options take numeric arguments. You can enter numbers in decimal,
octal, or hexadecimal format. See “Specifying numeric arguments” on page 194 for
more information.
Setting options on the command line
Linker options specified on the command line override any previously specified in
You can specify options anywhere on the command line. Separate options with a space or tab character.
For example, to link an object file with the /MAP option, enter: ilink /M myprog.obj
Setting options in the ILINK environment variable
Store frequently used options in the ILINK environment variable. This method is useful if you find yourself repeating the same command-line options every time you link. You cannot specify file names in the environment variable, only linker options.
The ILINK environment variable can be set either from the command line, in a command ( .CMD
) file, or in the System Properties. If it is set on the command line or by running a command file, the options will only be in effect for the current session (until you reboot your computer). If it is set in the System Properties, the options are set when you boot your computer, and are in effect every time you use the linker unless you override them using a
.CMD
file or by specifying options on the command line.
Using the linker
In the following example, options on the command line override options in the environment variable. If you enter the following commands:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
193
The ILINK environment variable
SET ILINK=/NOI /AL:256 /DE
ILINK test
ILINK /NODEF /NODEB prog
The first command sets the environment variable to the options
/NOIGNORECASE, /ALIGNMENT:256, and /DEBUG
The second command links the file test.obj
, using the options specified in the environment variable, to produce test.exe
The last command links the file prog.obj
to produce prog.exe
, using the option
/NODEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH, in addition to the options /NOIGNORECASE and /ALIGNMENT:256. The /NODEBUG option on the command line overrides the /DEBUG option in the environment variable, and the linker links without the
/DEBUG option.
Specifying numeric arguments
Some linker options and module statements take numeric arguments. You can specify numbers in any of the following forms:
Decimal
Any number
not
prefixed with 0 or 0x is a decimal number. For example,
1234 is a decimal number.
Octal
Any number prefixed with 0 (but not 0x) is an octal number. For example,
01234 is an octal number.
Hexadecimal
Any number prefixed with 0x is a hexadecimal number. For example,
0x1234 is a hexadecimal number.
Summary of Windows linker options
Table 8. Windows linker options summary
Option
“/DBGPACK, /NODBGPACK” on page
“/DEBUG, /NODEBUG” on page 197
“/DEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH” on page
Description
Display help
Set address alignment
Set file alignment
Set preferred loading address
Set section attributes for executable
Set section attributes for data
Pack debugging information
Include debugging information
Search default libraries
Generate DLL
Specify an entry point in an executable file
Generate .EXE file
Use extended dictionary to search libraries
Default
None
/A:0x00010000
/A:512
/BAS:0x00400000
/CODE:RX
/DATA:RW
/NODB
/NODEB
/DEF
/EXEC
None
/EXEC
/EXT
194
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Windows linker options
Table 8. Windows linker options summary (continued)
Option Description
Do not relocate the file in memory
“/INFORMATION, /NOINFORMATION” on page 200
“/LINENUMBERS, /NOLINENUMBERS” on page 200
Create executable output file even if errors are detected
Set the size of the program heap
Display help
Forces a reference to a symbol
Display status of linking process
Include line numbers in map file
Display logo, echo response file
Generate map file
Name output file
Specify application type
Set attributes for section
Set maximum number of segments
Set stack size of application
Default
/NOFI
/NOFO
/HEAP:0x100000,0x1000
None
None
/NOIN
/NOLI
/LO
/NOM
Name of first .obj file
/PMTYPE:VIO
Set by /CODE and /DATA
/SE:256
/STACK:
0x100000,0x1000
Specify the name of the DOS stub file None
Specify the required subsystem and version /SUBSYSTEM:
WINDOWS,4.0
Display status of linking process
Write a version number in the run file
/NOV
/VERSION:0.0
Windows linker options
This section describes the linker options in alphabetical order.
For each option, the description includes: v The syntax for specifying the option.
v
The default setting.
v
Any accepted abbreviations.
v
A description of the option and its parameters, and any interaction it may have with other options.
/?
Use
/?
to display a list of valid linker options. This option is equivalent to
/HELP
.
/ALIGNADDR
Use /ALIGNADDR to set the address alignment for segments.
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
195
Windows linker options
The alignment factor determines where segments in the .EXE or .DLL file start.
From the beginning of the file, the start of each segment is aligned at a multiple (in bytes) of the alignment factor. The alignment factor must be a power of 2, from 512 to 256M.
Default: /ALIGNADDR:0x00010000
Abbreviation: /ALIGN
/ALIGNFILE
Use
/ALIGNFILE to set the file alignment for segments.
The alignment factor determines where segments in the .EXE or .DLL file start.
From the beginning of the file, the start of each segment is aligned at a multiple (in bytes) of the alignment factor. The alignment factor must be a power of 2, from 512 to 64K.
Default: /ALIGNFILE:512
Abbreviation: /A
/BASE
Use
/BASE to specify the preferred load address for the first load segment of a .DLL
file.
Specifying
@filename, key
, in place of
address
, bases a set of programs (usually a set of DLLs) so they do not overlap in memory.
filename
is the name of a text file that defines the memory map for a set of files.
key
is a reference to a line in
filename
beginning with the specified key. Each line in the memory-map file has the syntax:
key address maxsize
Separate the elements with one or more spaces or tabs. The
key
is a unique name in the file. The
address
is the location of the memory image in the virtual address space. The
maxsize
is an amount of memory within which the image must fit. The linker will issue a warning when the memory image of the program exceeds the specified size. A comment in the memory-map file begins with a semicolon (;) and runs to the end of the line.
Default: /BASE:0x00400000
Abbreviations: /BAS
/CODE
Use
/CODE to specify the default attributes for all code sections. Letters can be specified in any order.
R
S
Letter Attribute
E or X
EXECUTE
W
READ
SHARED
WRITE
Default: /CODE:RX
196
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Windows linker options
CODE description abbreviations: None
/DATA
R
S
W
Use
/DATA to specify the default attributes for all data sections. Letters can be specified in any order.
Letter Attribute
E or X
EXECUTE
READ
SHARED
WRITE
Default: /DATA:RW
Abbreviations: None
/DBGPACK, /NODBGPACK
Use
/DBGPACK to eliminate redundant debug type information. The linker takes the debug type information from all object files and needed library components, and reduces the information to one entry per type. This results in a smaller executable output file, and can improve debugger performance.
Performance Consideration:
Generally, linking with
/DBGPACK slows the linking process, because it takes time to pack the information. However, if there is enough redundant debug type information,
/DBGPACK can actually speed up your linking, because there is less information to write to file.
When you specify
/DBGPACK
,
/DEBUG is turned on by default.
Default: /NODBGPACK
Abbreviations: /DB|/NODB
/DEBUG, /NODEBUG
Use
/DEBUG to include debug information in the output file, so you can debug the file with the debugger, or analyze its performance with Performance Analyzer. The linker will embed symbolic data and line number information in the output file.
For debugging, compile the object files with TEST.
For the Performance Analyzer, compile the object files with PROFILE and
GONUMBER. Linking with
/DEBUG increases the size of the executable output file.
Default: /NODEBUG
Abbreviations: /D|/NODEB
/DEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH
Use
/DEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH to have the linker search the default libraries of object files when resolving references.
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
197
Windows linker options
If you specify a
library
with the option, the linker adds the library name to the list of default libraries. The default libraries for an object file are defined at compile time, and embedded in the object file. The linker searches the default libraries by default.
Use
/NODEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH to tell the linker to ignore default libraries when it resolves external references. If you specify a
library
with the option, the linker ignores that default library, but searches the rest of the default libraries (and any others that are defined in the object files).
If you specify /NODEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH without specifying
library
, then you must explicitly specify all the libraries you want to use, including VA PL/I runtime libraries.
Default: /DEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH
Abbreviations: /DEF|/NOD
/DLL
Use
/DLL to identify the output file as a dynamic link library (.DLL file). The object files should be compiled with the PL/I option
DLLINIT
.
If you specify
/DLL with
/EXEC
, only the last specified of the options takes effect.
If you do not specify
/DLL
, or any of the other options, then by default the linker produces an .EXE file (
/EXEC
).
Default: /EXECUTABLE
Abbreviation: /EXEC
/ENTRY
Use /ENTRY to specify an entry point (name of a routine or function) in an executable.
Default: None
Abbreviation: /EN
/EXECUTABLE
Use
/EXEC to identify the output file as an executable program (.EXE file). The linker generates .EXE files by default.
If you specify
/EXEC with
/DLL
, only the last specified of the options takes effect.
If you do not specify
/EXEC or
/DLL
, then by default the linker produces an .EXE
file.
Default: /EXECUTABLE
Abbreviation: /EXEC
198
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Windows linker options
/EXTDICTIONARY, /NOEXTDICTIONARY
Use
/EXTDICTIONARY to have the linker search the extended dictionaries of libraries when it resolves external references. The extended dictionary is a list of module relationships within a library. When the linker pulls in a module from the library, it checks the extended dictionary to see if that module requires other modules in the library, and then pulls in the additional modules automatically.
The linker searches the extended dictionary by default, to speed up the linking process.
Use
/NOEXTDICTIONARY if you are defining a symbol in your object code that is also defined in one of the libraries to which you are linking. Otherwise the linker issues an error because you have defined the same symbol in two different places. When you link with
/NOEXTDICTIONARY, the linker searches the dictionary directly, instead of searching the extended dictionary. This results in slower linking, because references must be resolved individually.
Default: /EXTDICTIONARY
Abbreviations: /EXT|/NOE
/FIXED, /NOFIXED
Use
/FIXED to tell the loader not to relocate a file in memory when the specified base address is not available.
For more information on base addresses, see the /BASE linker option.
Default: /NOFIXED
Abbreviations: /FI|/NOFI
/FORCE
Use /FORCE to produce an executable output file even if there are errors during the linking process.
Default: /NOFORCE
Abbreviations: /FO|/NOFO
/HEAP
Use
/HEAP to set the size of the program heap in bytes. The
reserve
argument sets the total virtual address space reserved. The
commit
sets the amount of physical memory to allocate initially. When
commit
is less than
reserve
, memory demands are reduced, but execution time can be slower.
Default: /HEAP:0x100000,0x1000
Abbreviation: /HEA
/HELP
Use
/HELP to display a list of valid linker options. This option is equivalent to
/?
.
Default: None
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
199
Windows linker options
Abbreviation: /H
/INCLUDE
Use
/INCLUDE to force a reference to a symbol. The linker searches for an object module that defines the symbol.
Default: None
Abbreviation: /INC
/INFORMATION, /NOINFORMATION
See the description of the
/VERBOSE linker option.
Default: /NOINFORMATION
Abbreviations: /I|/NOIN
/LINENUMBERS, /NOLINENUMBERS
Use
/LINENUMBERS to include source file line numbers and associated addresses in the map file. For this option to take effect, there must already be line number information in the object files you are linking.
When you compile, use the GONUMBER option to include line numbers in the object file (or the TEST option to include all debugging information).
If you give the linker an object file without line number information, the
/LINENUMBERS option has no effect.
The
/LINENUMBERS option forces the linker to create a map file, even if you specified
/NOMAP
.
By default, the map file is given the same name as the output file, plus the extension .map
. You can override the default name by specifying a map filename.
Default: /NOLINENUMBERS
Abbreviations: /L|/NOLI
/LOGO, /NOLOGO
Use
/NOLOGO to suppress the product information that appears when the linker starts.
Specify
/NOLOGO before the response file on the command line, or in the ILINK environment variable. If the option appears in or after the response file, it is ignored.
Default: /LOGO
Abbreviations: /LO|/NOL
200
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Windows linker options
/MAP, /NOMAP
Use
/MAP to generate a map file called
name
. The file lists the composition of each segment, and the public (global) symbols defined in the object files. The symbols are listed twice: in order of name and in order of address.
If you do not specify a directory, the map file is generated into the current working directory. If you do not specify
name
, the map file has the same name as the executable output file, with the extension .map
.
Default: /NOMAP
Abbreviations: /M|/NOM
/OUT
Use
/OUT to specify a name for the executable output file.
If you do not provide an extension with
name
, then the linker provides an extension based on the type of file you are producing:
File produced
Default extension
Executable program
.EXE
Dynamic link library
.DLL
If you do not use the
/OUT option, then the linker uses the filename of the first object file you specified, with the appropriate extension.
Default: Name of first .OBJ file with appropriate extension.
Abbreviation: /O
/PMTYPE
Use /PMTYPE to specify the type of .EXE file that the linker generates. Do not use this option when generating dynamic link libraries (DLLs).
One of the following types must be specified:
PM
The executable must be run in a window.
VIO
The executable can be run either in a window or in a full screen.
NOVIO
The executable must not be run in a window; it must use a full screen.
Default: /PMTYPE:VIO
Abbreviation: /PM
/SECTION
Use
/SECTION to specify memory-protection attributes for the
name
section.
name
is case sensitive. You can specify the following attributes:
Letter Sets Attribute
E or
X
EXECUTE
R
READ
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
201
Windows linker options
S
W
SHARED
WRITE
The following example sets the READ and SHARED attributes, but not the
EXECUTE, or WRITE attributes, for the section dseg1 in an .EXE file.
/SEC:dseg1,RS
Defaults
Sections are assigned attributes by default, as follows:
Segment
Default Attributes
Code sections
EXECUTE, READ (ER)
Data sections (in .EXE file)
READ, WRITE (RW), not shared
Data sections (in .DLL file)
READ, WRITE, not shared
CONST32_RO section
READ, SHARED (RS)
Default: Depends on segment type
Abbreviation: /SEC
/SEGMENTS
Use
/SEGMENTS to set the number of logical segments a program can have. You can set
number
to any value in the range 1 to 16375. See “Specifying numeric arguments” on page 194.
For each logical segment, the linker must allocate space to keep track of segment information. By using a relatively low segment limit as a default (256), the linker is able to link faster and allocate less storage space.
When you set the segment limit higher than 256, the linker allocates more space for segment information. This results in slower linking, but allows you to link programs with a large number of segments.
For programs with fewer than 256 segments, you can improve link time and reduce linker storage requirements by setting
number
to the actual number of segments in the program.
Default: /SEGMENTS:256
Abbreviation: /SE
/STACK
Use
/STACK to set the stack size (in bytes) of your program. The size must be an even number from
0 to
0xFfffFffe
. If you specify an odd number, it is rounded up to the next even number.
202
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Windows linker options
reserve
indicates the total virtual address space reserved.
commit
sets the amount of physical memory to allocate initially. When
commit
is less than
reserve
, memory demands are reduced, although execution time may be slower.
Default: /STACK:0x100000,0x1000
Abbreviation: /ST
/STUB
Use /STUB to specify the name of the DOS executable at the beginning of the output file created.
Default: None
Abbreviation: /STU
/SUBSYSTEM
Use
/SUBSYSTEM to specify the subsystem and version required to run the program.
The
major
and
minor
arguments are optional and specify the minimum required version of the subsystem. The
major
and
minor
arguments are integers in the range
0 to 65535.
Subsystem
WINDOWS
CONSOLE
Major.Minor
Description
3.10
3.10
A graphical application that uses the Graphical Device
Interface (GDI) API.
A character-mode application that uses the Console API.
Default: /SUBSYSTEM:WINDOWS,4.0
Abbreviation: /SU
/VERBOSE
Use
/VERBOSE to have the linker display information about the linking process as it occurs, including the phase of linking and the names and paths of the object files being linked.
If you are having trouble linking because the linker is finding the wrong files or finding them in the wrong order, use
/VERBOSE to determine the locations of the object files being linked and the order in which they are linked.
The output from this option is sent to
stdout
. You can redirect the output to a file using Windows redirection symbols.
/VERBOSE is the same as /INFORMATION .
Default: /NOVERBOSE
Abbreviations: /VERB|/NOV
/VERSION
Use
/VERSION to write a version number in the header of the run file. The
major
and
minor
arguments are integers in the range 0 to 65535.
Chapter 7. Setting linker options
203
Windows linker options
Default: /VERSION:0.0
Abbreviation: /VER
204
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 3. Running and debugging your program
Chapter 8. Using run-time options
Setting run-time environment variables.
Where to specify run-time options .
Specifying multiple run-time options or suboptions .
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
Using compile-time options for debugging .
Using footprints for debugging .
Formatted PL/I dumps—PLIDUMP .
SNAP dumps for trace information .
Using error and condition handling for debugging .
Error and condition handling terminology 219
ON-units for qualified and unqualified conditions .
Conditions used for testing and debugging 222
Logical errors in your source programs .
Calling uninitialized entry variables .
Loops and other unforeseen errors .
Unexpected input/output data .
Unexpected program termination.
Other unexpected program results .
Compiler or library subroutine failure .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
205
206
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 8. Using run-time options
Once you have prepared the executable form of your PL/I program, you need to test its execution behavior. The first step is to run the program and see what happens. Depending on the nature of your application, you might need to do some input and output setup (SET statements) before invoking the program.
Setting run-time environment variables
You can set the run-time environment for your program by using environment variables.
PATH
Use the PATH environment variable to specify the search path for EXE and CMD files not in the current directory.
set path=c:\ibm;d:\project
You can specify one or more directories with this variable. Given the preceding example, the current directory is searched first, followed by c:\ibm and then d:\project .
DPATH
Use DPATH to specify the search path for run-time messages. The program searches for them first in the current directory, then in the directory or directories specified by the DPATH variable. The following example would cause the program to search the current directory followed by c:\set1 and d:\set2 in that order.
set dpath=c:\set1;d:\set2
Specifying run-time options
Each time your application executes, a set of run-time options is established. These options determine some of the properties of the application's execution, such as allocation of storage and production of reports. IBM supplies defaults for each of the run-time options; however, you can change them as needed prior to running your application.
Where to specify run-time options
You can alter the default settings for run-time options in an environment variable and in the application source code. Alternatives, from lowest priority to highest priority, are: v
Using the IBM defaults
v
Setting run-time options in the CEE.OPTIONS environment variable
Use the SET command on the command line or define them in System
Properties to specify run-time options by means of the CEE.OPTIONS
environment variable. For example: set cee.options=natlang(enu)
As mentioned above, there are two methods for setting options in the
CEE.OPTIONS environment variable. The first method, setting CEE.OPTIONS in
System Properties has lower priority than the second, using the SET command.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
207
Specifying run-time options
1.
Setting CEE.OPTIONS in System Properties
Run-time options specified in System Properties are the options in effect for every session you start. This is a good place to specify run-time options that you want to have in effect for every application you run.
If CEE.OPTIONS already exists in the System Properties, change or add to the existing variable.
2.
Run-time options specified in a SET command on the command line are in effect only for that session or window and override any run-time options specified in System Properties. This is the recommended method.
To change run-time option settings, use a SET command with the desired settings. Each SET command completely replaces any previous SET commands, including the definition in System Properties. Therefore, you must include the settings of all run-time options from any previous SET command if you still want them in effect in each subsequent SET command.
For example, assume you have the following in your System Properties: cee.options=natlang(jpn) and later enter this command from the command line: set cee.options=natlang(enu)
This means that NATLANG has returned to its default value, which is
NATLANG(ENU).
To return all run-time options to the IBM-supplied defaults, set
CEE.OPTIONS to a null argument: set cee.options=
With Windows, you can group several commands, including a SET command for CEE.OPTIONS, in a command file. Running such a command file is equivalent to issuing each of the commands individually on the command line.
Specifying multiple run-time options or suboptions
When specifying a string of run-time options, you must separate each option with a comma without any embedded spaces.
Use commas to separate suboptions of run-time options. If you do not specify a suboption, you must still specify the comma to indicate its omission. Trailing commas are not required. If you do not specify any suboptions, the defaults are used. For example, NATLANG() is valid syntax.
Default settings for the options are indicated in the options syntax diagrams or in the descriptions of suboptions, where applicable.
Run-time options
This section describes the run-time option NATLANG.
NATLANG
The NATLANG option specifies the national language to be used for run-time messages. Message translations are provided for Japanese and mixed-case U.S.
English. NATLANG also determines how the message facility formats messages.
208
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Run-time options
NATLANG (
ENU
JPN )
JPN
This is a 3-character id specifying Japanese. Message text can be a mixture of
SBCS (single-byte character set) and DBCS (double-byte character set) characters.
ENU
This is a 3-character id specifying mixed-case U.S. English. Message text is made up of SBCS characters and consists of both upper and lowercase letters.
USAGE: NATLANG(ENU)
Run-time option and storage reports, as well as dump output, are written only in mixed-case U.S. English.
If you specify a national language that is unavailable on your system, the default is used.
Shipping run-time DLLs
If you are shipping DLLs with your application, this list should help you determine which ones you need based on your application.
For Windows, the following files are needed for a non-multithreading application: v
BIN\HEPWS20.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWS20.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWSTB.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWS20F.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWS20G.DLL
v
BIN\IBMRTENU.DLL
These files are needed for multithreading applications on Windows: v BIN\HEPWM20.DLL
v BIN\IBMWM20.DLL
v BIN\IBMWMTB.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWM20F.DLL
v
BIN\IBMWM20G.DLL
v
BIN\IBMRTENU.DLL
In addition to those listed previously, if your Windows application uses BTRIEVE, you must also ship BIN\IBMPBTRV.DLL.
Your application containing a copy of any of these files or modules must be labeled as follows:
CONTAINS
IBM PL/I for Windows Version 8.5
Runtime Modules
(c) Copyright IBM Corporation 2012
All Rights Reserved
Chapter 8. Using run-time options
209
Shipping run-time DLLs
210
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
Effective design and coding practices help you create quality programs and should be followed by thorough testing of those programs. You should give adequate attention to the testing phase of development so that: v
Your program becomes fully operational after the fewest possible test runs, thereby minimizing the time and cost of program development.
v
Your program is proven to have fulfilled all of its design objectives before it is released for production work.
v
Your program contains sufficient comments to enable those who use and maintain the program to do so without additional assistance.
The process of testing usually uncovers
bugs
, a generic term that encompasses anything that your program does that you did not expect it to do. The process of removing these bugs from your program is called
debugging
.
While this chapter does not attempt to provide an exhaustive coverage of testing and debugging, it does provide useful tips and techniques to help you produce top-quality, error-free PL/I programs. Both general and PL/I-specific testing and debugging information follow.
Testing your programs
Testing your PL/I programs can be difficult, especially if the programs are logically complex or involve numerous modules. Do not skip this step, though, because it is important to detect and remove bugs from a program before it moves into a production environment.
Here are three testing approaches that you can apply to all of your PL/I programs:
Code inspection
Also called desk checking, code inspection involves selecting a piece of code and reading it from the viewpoint of the computer. With either a printed copy of the source program or an online view of the source file, follow the flow of the program. Where there is input data, guess at some likely data and substitute it for variable values. When there is a calculation, do the calculation manually or with a calculator, and so on. Code inspection often reveals logic problems, syntax errors, and bugs that the compiler misses (for example, “n + 2” instead of “n*2”).
Data testing
You provide a program with test data to verify that it runs as designed.
The purpose of data testing is to see if the program takes exception (for example, a run-time error) to any possible data that it might have to handle in a production environment. Therefore, you need to use a wide variety of data to test your program.
For example, have your program process extremes of data that you know lead to errors (such as the OVERFLOW condition) and see how the program responds. Your program should incorporate error checking (such as ERROR ON-units) to accommodate any possible data.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
211
Testing your programs
Attention:
You should never test with irreplaceable data, nor should you store irreplaceable data within access of a program being tested!
Path testing
The data that you use for testing a program should be selected to test all parts of the program. In other words, if your program consists of a number of modules, the data that you test the program with should require the use of all of the modules. If your program can take five possible paths at a given point, you should provide sets of data that take the program down each of the five paths.
As your program becomes more and more complex, providing the program with data to accommodate every possible path combination might become practically impossible. However, it is important that you select test cases that check a representative range of paths. For example, rather than check every possible iteration of a DO-loop, test the first, last, and one intermediate case.
Bugs are discovered as you test your programs and removing those bugs sometimes requires being able to reproduce them. Therefore, when you test programs, always begin from a known state. For example, when a bug is encountered you should know the values of variables, the compile-time options used, the contents of memory, and so on. PL/I provides features such as SNAP and PLIDUMP that help you do this.
As a rule, a program that ran perfectly well yesterday but reveals a bug today does so because of one or more changes to the state of the machine. Therefore, when testing your PL/I programs be sure to know, in detail, the state of the machine at compile time and at run time.
General debugging tips
Debugging is a process of letting your program run until it does something that you did not expect it to do. After finding a bug, you modify the program so that it does not encounter the bug when the program is in the exact machine state that initially produced the bug. This is accomplished by a combination of back-tracking, intuition, and trial and error. The major obstacle to effective debugging is that removing one bug can introduce new bugs into your program. You should consider general debugging tips as well as some debugging techniques specific to
PL/I.
Consider the following tips when debugging your programs:
Make one change at a time
When attempting to remedy a bug, introduce only one change into the source code of your program at a time. By introducing a single change, you can compare the program behavior before and after the change to accurately measure the effect of the change.
Follow program logic sequence
Fix your program's bugs in the order in which they are encountered when the program is run.
Watch for unexpected results
Locate a given bug in the program source code at a point that corresponds to an unexpected change in the state of program execution.
For example, the undesired change in the state of program execution might be the unintended assignment of the decimal value “100” to the character variable
212
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
General debugging tips
“z”. In this case, you might find that the source code has an error that assigns the wrong variable in an assignment statement.
PL/I debugging techniques
PL/I provides you with a number of methods for program debugging which are described in the following sections:
Compile-time options
Footprints
Dumps
Error and condition handling
Using compile-time options for debugging
The PL/I workstation products are designed to diagnose many of the bugs in your programs at compile time, and provides you with a compiler listing that explains what mistakes you made and where you made them. In addition, you can use compile-time options to make the compiler listing even more useful.
The following compile-time options are useful for debugging your PL/I programs:
FLAG
Suppresses the listing of diagnostic messages below a certain severity and terminates compilation if a specified number of messages is reached. If your program is not behaving as expected and the compiler messages do not explain the problem, you might want to use FLAG to include informational messages in the compiler listing. These messages (otherwise suppressed by default) might help explain problems in your program. For additional
information on using FLAG, see “FLAG” on page 59.
GONUMBER
Creates a statement number table that is needed for debugging.
PREFIX
Enables or disables specified PL/I conditions. Because you can specify the conditions with a compile-time option, you do not need to change your source program. Compiling with PREFIX( SUBRG STRZ STRG) can be very helpful in
debugging. For more information on using PREFIX, see “PREFIX” on page 110.
RULES
Specifies the strictness with which various language rules are enforced by the compiler. You can use it to flag common programming errors.
You might find the following suboptions for RULES particularly useful for debugging:
NOLAXIF
Disallows IF, WHILE, UNTIL, and WHEN clauses to evaluate to other than
BIT(1) NONVARYING.
NOLAXDCL
Disallows all implicit and contextual declarations except for built-ins and the files SYSIN and SYSPRINT.
NOLAXQUAL
The compiler flags any reference to structure members that are not level 1 and are not dot qualified.
For example, consider the program:
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
213
PL/I debugging techniques
program: proc( ax1xcb, ak2xcb ); dcl (ax1xcb, ax2xcb ) pointer; dcl
1 xcb based,
2 xcba13 fixed bin,...
ak1xcb->xcba13 = ax2xcb->xcba13;
With RULES(NOLAXDCL) in effect, the two typographical errors above are considered implicit declarations by the compiler and are flagged as errors. For
more information on using RULES, see “RULES” on page 118.
SNAP
Specifies that the compiler produces a listing of trace information that is useful for locating errors in your program.
For more information on SNAP syntax, see “SNAP” on page 127.
XREF
Specifies that the compiler listing includes a table of names used in the program together with the numbers of the statements in which they are referenced or set. This allows you to easily track where names are used in your
source program. For more information on using XREF, see “XREF” on page
Using footprints for debugging
When debugging, it is useful to periodically check: v
Where your program is in its execution flow (for example, which module is being run).
v
The value of identifiers so that you can see when they change and what values they are assigned.
To accomplish these tasks, you can use built-in functions, PUT DATA and PUT
LIST statements, and display statements. These approaches are described in more detail in the following sections.
Built-in functions
The built-in functions PROCNAME, PACKAGENAME, and SOURCELINE are useful in following the execution of your program when you are trying to track the location of a problem and the sequence of events that caused it. The following statement can be inserted wherever you want to display the procedure name and line number of the statement currently being executed.
display (procname()
{ sourceline());
PUT LIST
Allows you to transmit strings and data items to the data stream (for example, to a printer-destined output file). For example, the following procedure lets you know if the FIXEDOVERFLOW condition is raised, and prints out the value of the variable that led to the condition (in this case, z ):
Debug: Proc(x); dcl x fixed bin(31); on fixedoverflow begin; put skip list(’Fixedoverflow raised because z = ’
{ z); end; end; get list(z); x = 8 * z;
214
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PL/I debugging techniques
If z is too large, multiplying it by 8 produces a value that is too large for any
FIXED BIN(31) variable and would therefore raise the FIXEDOVERFLOW condition. PUT SKIP LIST transmits the data (in this case, the string
“
Fixedoverflow raised because z = ...
”) to the default file SYSPRINT. You can define SYSPRINT using export DD= statements. For more information on
using SYSPRINT, see “Using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files” on page 265.
PUT DATA
Allows you to transmit the value of data items to the output stream. For example, if you specified the following line in your program, it would transmit the values of string1 and string2 to the output stream (for example, to
SYSPRINT): put data (string1, string2);
DISPLAY
You can use DISPLAY to transmit information to your monitor. This can be useful to let you know how far a program has progressed, what procedure a program is running, and so on. For example:
Display (’End of job!’);
Display (’Reached the MATH procedure’);
Display (’Hurrah! Got past the string manipulation stuff...’);
Using DISPLAY with PUT statements results in output appearing in unpredictable order. For more information on using the DISPLAY statement,
see “DISPLAY statement input and output” on page 253.
Using dumps for debugging
When you are debugging your programs, it is often useful to obtain a printout (a dump) of all or part of the storage used by your program. You can also use a dump to provide trace information. Trace information helps you locate the sources of errors in your program.
Two types of dumps are useful:
PLIDUMP
SNAP
Use of the IMPRECISE compile-time option might lead to incomplete trace information. For additional information on the IMPRECISE option, see
Formatted PL/I dumps—PLIDUMP
You use PLIDUMP to obtain: v
Trace information that allows you to locate the point-of-origin of a condition in your source program.
v
File information, including: the attributes of the files open at the time of the dump, the values of certain file-handling built-in functions, and the contents of the I/O storage buffer.
To get a formatted PL/I dump, you must include a call to PLIDUMP in your program. The statement CALL PLIDUMP can appear wherever a CALL statement appears. It has the following form: call plidump(’dump options string’, ’dump title string’);
dump options string
An expression specifying a string consisting of any of the following dump option characters:
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
215
PL/I debugging techniques
T–Trace
PL/I generates a calling trace.
NT–No trace
The dump does not give a calling trace.
F–File information
The dump gives a complete set of attributes for all open files, plus the contents of all accessible I/O buffers.
NF–No file information
The dump does not give file information.
S–Stop
The program ends after the dump.
E–Exit
The current thread or the program (if it is the main thread) ends after the dump.
K
Ignored.
NK
Ignored.
C–Continue
The program continues after the dump.
PL/I reads options from left to right. It ignores invalid options and, if contradictory options exist, takes the rightmost options.
dump title string
An expression that is converted to character if necessary and printed as a header on the dump. The string has no practical length limit. PL/I prints this string as a header to the dump. If the character string is omitted, PL/I does not print a header.
If the program calls PLIDUMP a number of times, the program should use a different user-identifier character string on each occasion. This simplifies identifying the point at which each dump occurs. In addition to this header, each new invocation of PLIDUMP prints another heading above the user-identifier showing the date, time, and page number 1.
PLIDUMP defaults:
The default dump options are T, F, and C with a null dump title string: plidump(’TFC’, ’ ’);
Suggested PLIDUMP coding:
A program can call PLIDUMP from anywhere in the program, but the normal method of debugging is to call PLIDUMP from an ON-unit. Because continuation after the dump is optional, the program can use PLIDUMP to get a series of dumps while the program is running.
You can use the
DD:plidump
environment variable to specify where the PLIDUMP output should be located, for example: set dd:plidump = d:\mydump;
In your PLIDUMP specification, you cannot override other options such as
RECSIZE. The default device association for the file is stderr:.
216
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PL/I debugging techniques
PLIDUMP example:
When you run the program shown in Figure 5, a formatted dump is produced as
shown in Figure 6 on page 218.
TestDump: proc options(main); declare
Sysin input file,
Sysprint stream print file; open file(Sysprint); open file(Sysin); put skip list(’AbCdEfGhIjKlMnOpQrStUvWxYz’); call IssueDump;
IssueDump: proc; call plidump( ’ ’, ’Testing PLIDUMP’); end IssueDump; end TestDump;
Figure 5. PL/I code that produces a formatted dump
The call to PLIDUMP in the IssueDump procedure does not specify any PLIDUMP options (they appear as the first of the two character strings), so the defaults are used. Also note that the PL/I default files SYSIN and SYSPRINT have been explicitly opened so that the formatted dump displays the contents of their portions of the I/O buffer.
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
217
PL/I debugging techniques
1
* * * PLIDUMP * * * Date = 910623
2
User identifier: Testing PLIDUMP
Time = 142249090 Page 0001
3
* * * Calling trace * * *
IBM0092I The PL/I PLIDUMP Service was called with Traceback (T) option
At offset +00000024 in procedure with entry ISSUEDUMP
From offset +0000010B in procedure with entry TESTDUMP
* * * End of calling trace * * *
* * * File Information * * *
Attributes of file SYSIN
4
STREAM INPUT EXTERNAL
5
ENVIRONMENT( CONSECUTIVE RECSIZE(80) LINESIZE(0) )
6
I/O Built-in functions: COUNT(0) ENDFILE(0)
7
I/O Buffer: 000D9008 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D9018 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D9028 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D9038 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D9048 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D9058 0000 ’..’
Attributes of file SYSPRINT
STREAM OUTPUT PRINT EXTERNAL
ENVIRONMENT( CONSECUTIVE RECSIZE(124) LINESIZE(120) PAGESIZE(60) )
I/O Built-in functions: PAGENO(1) COUNT(1) LINENO(1)
8
I/O Buffer: 000D8008 20416243 64456647 68496A4B 6C4D6E4F ’ AbCdEfGhIjKlMnO’
000D8018 70517253 74557657 78597A20 0D0A0000 ’pQrStUvWxYz ....’
000D8028 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D8038 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D8048 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D8058 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D8068 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’................’
000D8078 00000000 00000000 00000000 ’............’
* * * End of File Information * * *
* * * End of Dump * * * * * *
Figure 6. Example of PLIDUMP output
1
2
3
4
5
6
Time and date when PLIDUMP is called. Each separate PLIDUMP call has this information.
Character string specified in the PLIDUMP call (the second of the two strings provided to PLIDUMP) that is useful in helping to identify the dump if a number of dumps are produced.
Trace information, delineated by
* * * Calling trace * * * and
* * *
End of calling trace * * *
. This information allows you to trace back through the procedures from which PLIDUMP was called. In the example above, PLIDUMP was called from the procedure ISSUEDUMP which is nested in the TESTDUMP procedure. The hexadecimal offsets of each procedure are also provided in the trace information.
The trace information is provided by default as the T option and can be suppressed by specifying the NT option for PLIDUMP.
File attributes of SYSIN (opened explicitly in the program).
ENVIRONMENT options for the file SYSIN.
Values of relevant I/O built-in functions for the file SYSIN.
218
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PL/I debugging techniques
7
8
Contents of the I/O buffer for the SYSIN file. The first column is the hexadecimal address, the following columns are the hexadecimal contents of memory.
Contents of the I/O buffer for SYSPRINT. Notice that the second character string supplied to PLIDUMP (
AbCd...
) is contained in the I/O buffer, as seen by the text representation of the I/O buffer at the right-hand side of the row.
SNAP dumps for trace information
While not a “dump” in the strictest sense, the SNAP compile-time option is used to find out what error conditions are raised in your program and where they are raised. SNAP provides the same trace information provided by PLIDUMP “T”
option (see “Formatted PL/I dumps—PLIDUMP” on page 215). Like PLIDUMP,
SNAP can be issued multiple times throughout one run of a program.
An example of a call for a SNAP dump is: on attention snap;
This statement calls for a SNAP dump if the ATTENTION condition is raised.
Using error and condition handling for debugging
PL/I condition handling is a powerful tool for debugging programs. All errors detected at run-time are associated with conditions. You can handle these conditions in one of the following ways: v
Writing ON-units that specify what your program should do if a given condition is raised v
Accepting the standard system action
Error and condition handling terminology
You should be familiar with several terms used in discussions of PL/I error and condition handling. The terms are listed below:
Established
An ON-unit becomes established when the ON statement is executed. It ceases to be established when an ON or REVERT statement referring to the same condition is executed, or when the associated block is terminated.
Enabled
A condition is enabled when the occurrence of the condition results in the execution of an ON-unit or standard action.
Interrupts and PL/I conditions
Certain PL/I conditions are detected by machine interrupts. Others have to be detected by special testing code either in the run-time library modules or in the compiled program.
Statically and dynamically descendant
Static and dynamic descendant are terms used to define the scope of error-handling features. ON-units are dynamically descendant; that is, they are inherited from the calling procedure in all circumstances. Condition enablement is statically descendant; that is, it is inherited from the containing block in the source program. Statically descendant procedures can be determined during compilation. Dynamically descendant procedures might not
be known until run-time. Figure 7 on page 220 shows an example of statically
and dynamically descendant procedures.
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
219
PL/I debugging techniques
┌──────────────
│(SIZE):B:PROC;
│ON ERROR SNAP;
│ .
│ .
│
│
│
│CALL C;
│ ┌───────
│C:PROC;
│
│
│
│END C;
└───────
│CALL D;
│END B;
└──────────────
┌───────
│D:PROC;
│.
│.
│
│CALL E;
│END D;
└───────
│
│
┌───────
│E:PROC;
│
│
│END E;
└──────
Figure 7. Static and dynamic descendant procedures
Statically descendant:
The enablement prefix SIZE in procedure B is inherited only by the contained procedure C, regardless of which procedure calls which.
Dynamically descendant:
The ON-unit ON ERROR SNAP is inherited by any procedure called by B and any subsequently called procedures. Thus, if B calls D, which calls E, the ON-unit is established in procedure E.
Normal return
A normal return is a return from a called block after reaching the END or
RETURN statement, rather than reaching a GOTO statement out of a block. In an error-handling context, normal return is taken to mean normal return from the ON-unit. The action taken after normal return from an ON-unit is specified in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
Standard system action
Standard system action refers to the default PL/I-defined action taken when a condition occurs for which there is no established ON-unit.
Error handling concepts
You should be familiar with the following error handling concepts when you attempt to debug your PL/I programs. For details on condition handling, see the
PL/I Language Reference
.
System facilities
The operating system offers error-handling facilities. Various situations can cause a machine interrupt, resulting in an entry to the system supervisor. The PL/I control program can use specified routines to define the action that is taken after any of these interrupts. Alternatively, the PL/I control program passes control to ON-units specified by the PL/I programmer.
Language facilities
The PL/I language and its execution environment extend the error-handling facilities offered by the operating system. Numerous situations can cause interrupts
220
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PL/I debugging techniques
for PL/I, and some situations (such as ENDFILE) can be used to control normal program flow rather than to handle errors. ON-units allow you to obtain control after most interrupts.
If you do not write ON-units to obtain control after interrupts, you can: v
Accept standard system action v
Choose whether certain conditions cause interrupts or not by enabling or disabling those conditions. If the condition is disabled, neither ON-unit nor standard system action is taken when the condition occurs.
The majority of PL/I conditions occur because of errors in program logic or the data supplied. Some, however, are not connected with errors. These are conditions such as ENDFILE, which are difficult to anticipate because they can occur at any time during program execution.
PL/I has both system messages and snap messages:
System messages
If an ON-unit contains both SNAP and SYSTEM, the resulting PL/I message is essentially the PL/I SYSTEM message followed by any (or a combination) of the following three lines:
From offset xxx in a BEGIN block
From offset xxx in procedure xxx
From offset xxx in a condition_name ON-unit
These messages are repeated as often as necessary to trace back to the main procedure.
SNAP messages
If an ON-unit contains only SNAP, the resulting PL/I message begins as follows. The messages then continue as for SNAP SYSTEM messages.
Condition_name condition was raised at offset xxx in procedure xxx.
Determining statement numbers from offsets:
If you want to translate offset numbers into statement numbers, use the following steps: v
Use the OFFSET compile-time option during compilation v
Open the resulting object (
.cod
) listing file v
Search for and locate the offset in the first column and find the statement number from the last source statement included in the listing.
Built-ins for condition handling:
PL/I also provides condition-handling built-in functions and pseudovariables.
These allow you to inspect various fields associated with the interrupt and, in certain cases, to correct the contents of fields causing the error.
These built-in functions include:
DATAFIELD
ONCHAR
ONCODE
ONCONDCOND
ONCONDID
ONCOUNT
ONFILE
ONGSOURCE
ONKEY
ONLOC
ONSOURCE
ONWCHAR
ONWSOURCE
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
221
PL/I debugging techniques
For detailed information on these condition-handling built-in functions and pseudovariables, consult the
PL/I Language Reference
.
ON-units for qualified and unqualified conditions
There can only be one established ON-unit for an unqualified condition at any given point in a program, but there can be more than one established ON-unit for qualified conditions. For example, in handling the ENDFILE condition as qualified for different files, you can have an ON-unit established to uniquely handle the occurrence of ENDFILE for any one of the files.
Conditions used for testing and debugging
The following conditions are useful in testing and debugging your programs: v
SUBSCRIPTRANGE v
STRINGSIZE v
STRINGRANGE
Running your program with these conditions decreases performance, but ON-units for these conditions can serve as powerful tools for finding out the sources of errors in your program. You can enable any of these conditions by writing an
ON-unit for them. Then, if the condition is raised, your ON-unit can define an action that tells you the cause of the error.
For example, if your program raises FIXEDOVERFLOW, it is useful to issue PUT
DATA to discover the values of your data that led to the condition being raised.
In addition, the PREFIX option is useful because you can enable conditions without having to edit your program.
Common programming errors
A failure in running a PL/I program can be caused by: v Logical errors in a source program v Invalid use of PL/I (for example, uninitialized variables) v Calling uninitialized entry variables v Loops and other unforeseen errors v
Unexpected input/output data v
Unexpected program termination v
Other unexpected program results v
System failure v
Poor performance
Logical errors in your source programs
Logical errors in a source program are often difficult to detect and sometimes can make it appear as though there are compiler or library failures.
Some common errors in source programs are: v
Failure to convert correctly from arithmetic data v
Incorrect arithmetic and string-manipulation operations v
Failure to match data lists with their format lists
Invalid use of PL/I
A misunderstanding of the language can result in an apparent program failure. For example, any of the following programming errors can cause a program to fail: v
Using uninitialized variables
222
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Common programming errors
v
Using controlled variables that have not been allocated v
Reading records into incorrect structures v
Misusing array subscripts v
Misusing pointer variables v
Incorrect conversion v
Incorrect arithmetic operations v
Incorrect string-manipulation operations v Freeing or using storage that was never allocated or already free
Calling uninitialized entry variables
If you call an entry variable that is uninitialized: v
Windows will raise a protection exception almost immediately.
v
Windows 98, however, does not raise an immediate protection exception and allows you to execute instructions in low memory which can cause unpredictable program behavior.
Loops and other unforeseen errors
If an error is detected during execution of a PL/I program, and no ON-unit is provided in the program to terminate execution or attempt recovery, the job terminates abnormally. However, you can record the status of your program at the point where the error occurred by using an ERROR ON-unit that contains the statements: on error begin; on error system; call plidump (’TFBS’,’This is a dump’); end;
The statement ON ERROR SYSTEM; contained in the ON-unit ensures that further errors caused by attempting to transmit uninitialized variables do not result in an endless loop.
If you want to take action based on the specific type of condition being handled, use the ONCONDID function (for more information on this function, see the
PL/I
Language Reference
): on anycondition begin; on anycondition system; select( oncondid() ); when( condid_ofl )
.
.
.
when( condid_ufl )
.
.
.
when( condid_zdiv )
.
.
.
otherwise resignal; end; end;
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
223
Common programming errors
Tips for dealing with loops
To prevent a permanent loop from occurring within an ON-unit, use the following code segment: on Error begin; on Error System;
.
.
.
end;
If your program is caught in an endless loop, your primary concern is to be able to get out of the loop without shutting down your machine. The following solution is recommended for handling endless loops: v
When the loop is entered, press
Ctrl-Break
to end your program. No
ATTENTION ON-unit is driven in this environment.
Unexpected input/output data
A program should contain checks to ensure that any incorrect input and output data is detected before it can cause the program to fail.
Use the COPY option of the GET and PUT statements if you want to check values obtained by stream-oriented input and output. The values are listed on the file named in the COPY option. If no file name is given, SYSPRINT is assumed.
Use the VALID built-in function to check the validity of PICTURE and FIXED
DECIMAL identifiers.
For additional information on features that can lead to unexpected I/O, see
Chapter 1, “Porting applications between platforms,” on page 3. Many of the
features that can lead to portability problems (such as differences in ASCII and
EBCDIC collating sequences) can also lead to unexpected I/O for your PL/I programs.
Unexpected program termination
If your program terminates abnormally without an accompanying run-time diagnostic message, the error that caused the failure probably also prevented the message from being displayed. Possible causes of this type of behavior are: v
Trying to run modules that were not compiled by this version of the compiler.
v
Incorrect export DD: statements.
v
Overwriting storage areas that contain executable instructions, particularly the
PL/I communications area. Any of the following could cause overwriting of storage areas:
– Assigning a value to a nonexistent array element. For example: dcl array(10);
.
.
.
do I = 1 to 100; array(I) = value;
You can detect this type of error in a compile module by enabling the
SUBSCRIPTRANGE condition. Each attempt to access an element outside the declared range of subscript values should raise the SUBSCRIPTRANGE condition. If there is no ON-unit for this condition, a diagnostic message prints and the ERROR condition is raised.
224
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Common programming errors
Though this method is costly in terms of execution time and storage space, it is a valuable program testing aid. For more information on error handling,
see “Using error and condition handling for debugging” on page 219.
– Using an incorrect locator value for a locator (pointer or offset) variable. This type of error is possible if a locator value is obtained using a record-oriented transmission.
Make sure that locator values created in one program, transmitted to a data set, and subsequently retrieved for use in another program, are valid for use in the second program.
– Attempting to free a non-BASED variable. This can happen when you free a
BASED variable after its qualifying pointer value has been changed. For example: dcl a static,b based (p); allocate b; p = addr(a); free b;
– Using an incorrect value for a label, entry, or file variable. Label, entry, and file values that are transmitted and subsequently retrieved are subject to the same kind of errors as those described previously for locator values.
– Using the SUBSTR pseudovariable to assign a string to a location beyond the end of the target string. For example: dcl x char(3); i = 3 substr(x,2,i) = ’ABC’;
To detect this type of error in a compiled module, use the STRINGRANGE
condition (for more information, see “Conditions used for testing and debugging” on page 222).
Other unexpected program results
Because Windows responds to floating-point conditions differently, you might experience altered program flow. One consequence of altered program flow is conditions that do not get raised because they have become disabled.
For example, although using the NOIMPRECISE compile-time option does provide better floating-point error detection than IMPRECISE, the Windows operating system does not always detect floating-point exceptions immediately. If you have a statement in your program that is likely to raise a floating-point exception, you can avoid this detection problem by enclosing the statement, by itself, in a BEGIN block.
Compiler or library subroutine failure
If you are convinced that the failure is caused by a compiler failure or a library subroutine failure, you should contact IBM.
Meanwhile, you can attempt to find an alternative way to perform the operation that is causing the trouble. A bypass is often possible because the PL/I language frequently provides an alternative method of performing a given operation.
System failure
System failures include machine malfunctions and operating system errors. System messages identify these failures to the operator.
Chapter 9. Testing and debugging your programs
225
Common programming errors
Poor performance
While not necessarily caused by bugs, poor performance is associated with excessive run-time and memory requirements. One thing to keep in mind is that many debugging techniques (such as enabling SUBSCRIPTRANGE) tend to decrease performance.
One feature that can increase performance is the OPTIMIZE compile-time option
(see “OPTIMIZE” on page 99). For additional information on improving program
performance, see Chapter 17, “Improving performance,” on page 355.
226
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 4. Input and output
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
Conventional text files and devices .
Establishing data set characteristics .
Specifying characteristics using the PL/I
Specifying characteristics using DD:ddname environment variables .
Associating a PL/I file with a data set .
Using the TITLE option of the OPEN statement 249
Attempting to use files not associated with data sets.
Opening and closing PL/I files .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
Associating several data sets with one file .
Combinations of I/O statements, attributes, and options .
DISPLAY statement input and output .
PL/I standard files (SYSPRINT and SYSIN) .
Redirecting standard input, output, and error devices .
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
Using stream-oriented data transmission .
Defining files using stream I/O .
ENVIRONMENT options for stream-oriented data transmission .
Creating a data set with stream I/O .
Accessing a data set with stream I/O .
Controlling printed line length .
Overriding the tab control table .
Using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files .
Controlling input from the terminal .
Using files conversationally .
Capital and lowercase letters .
Controlling output to the terminal .
Example of an interactive program .
Defining files using record I/O .
ENVIRONMENT options for record-oriented data transmission .
Creating a data set with record I/O .
Accessing and updating a data set with record
Examples of consecutive data sets .
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
Defining files for a regional data set .
Specifying ENVIRONMENT options .
Essential information for creating and accessing regional data sets .
Using keys with regional data sets .
227
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
Accessing and updating a REGIONAL(1) data set .
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation
Moving data between the workstation and mainframe .
Workstation VSAM organization .
Creating and accessing workstation VSAM data sets.
Determining which type of workstation VSAM data set you need .
Accessing records in workstation VSAM data sets.
Using keys for workstation VSAM data sets .
Using keys for workstation VSAM keyed data sets .
Using sequential record values .
Using relative record numbers.
Defining files for workstation VSAM data sets .
Specifying options of the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute .
Adapting existing programs for workstation
Adapting programs using CONSECUTIVE files .
Adapting programs using INDEXED files
Adapting programs using REGIONAL(1)
Adapting programs using VSAM files .
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets .
Using a sequential file to access a workstation
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM sequential data set.
Updating a sequential data set .
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets .
Loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a
workstation VSAM keyed data set .
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation
Workstation VSAM direct data sets .
Loading a workstation VSAM direct data set
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a
workstation VSAM direct data set .
Using the REWRITE or DELETE statements 309
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation
228
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
Your PL/I programs can process and transmit units of information called
records
. A collection of records is called a data set, but for PL/I workstation products, a data set can be either a file or a device. Data sets are logical collections of information external to PL/I programs; they can be created, accessed, or modified by programs written in PL/I.
Your PL/I program recognizes and processes information in a data set by associating it with a symbolic representation of the data set called a PL/I file. This
PL/I file represents the environment independent characteristics of a set of input and output operations.
In order to minimize confusion, this book uses the term
PL/I file
to refer to the file declared and used in a PL/I program. The terms data set and workstation file (or workstation device) are used to refer to the collection of data on an external I/O device. In some cases the data sets have no name; they are known to the system by the device on which they exist.
Types of data sets
PL/I defines the following two types of data sets: v
Native data set. It is a PL/I term used to define conventional text files and devices associated with the platform in use.
v
Workstation VSAM data set. It is used to refer to files that are similar to mainframe VSAM data sets. PL/I uses either the DDM, ISAM, or BTRIEVE access method to create and access these types of data sets.
Platform distinctions
This chapter refers to the access methods available on PL/I workstation products; however, all methods are not available on all platforms. As you refer to information in this chapter, use the following guideline: v
DDM—supported on AIX only v
ISAM—supported on AIX and Windows v
BTRIEVE—supported on Windows only v
REMOTE—supported on Windows to access mainframe data files
To convert mainframe VSAM files to the corresponding DDM, ISAM, or BTRIEVE files, follow the procedure documented in the prolog for the LODVSAM utility
(not yet supported on AIX). Make sure you specify the appropriate access method
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE).
To convert DDM, ISAM, or BTRIEVE files to corresponding mainframe VSAM files, follow the procedure documented in the prolog for the RELOAD utility (not yet supported on AIX). These utilities should be in the samples directory for PL/I for
Windows.
Data sets that reside on the mainframe can be accessed remotely by your PL/I program using the Distributed FileManager product that comes with SMARTdata
Utilities (SdU), one of the PL/I for Windows components. You can find
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
229
Types of data sets
information about using SdU in the online books for that product. The online books for SdU are installed only if you select that component.
For Windows, refer to the
Distributed FileManager User's Guide
.
There are several types of native data sets: v
Conventional text files v Character devices v Fixed-length data sets
Both record and stream I/O can be used to access these types of data sets, which can be accessed only in a sequential manner.
Additional types of PL/I-defined data sets include: v
Varying-length v
Regional v
Workstation VSAM data sets
Only record I/O can be used to access regional data sets. Access can be either sequential or direct.
Native data sets
A native data set in PL/I terms defines conventional text files and devices associated with the platform you are using.
Conventional text files and devices
A conventional text file has logical records delimited by the CR - LF (carriage return and line feed) character sequence. Most text editor programs create, and allow you to alter, conventional text files. Your PL/I programs can create conventional text files, or they can access text files that were created by other programs.
Devices for workstation products are the keyboard, screen, and printer. The names you use to refer to them in PL/I are:
In a non-interactive environment, SYSIN and SYSPRINT can be pipes or files.
NUL: (or NUL)
Null output device (for discarding output)
STDIN:
Standard input file (defaults to CON)
STDOUT:
Standard output file (defaults to CON)
STDERR:
Standard error message file (defaults to CON)
Note:
STDIN:, STDOUT:, and STDERR: can be redirected, whereas the other device names cannot.
Fixed-length data sets
PL/I also allows you to treat a file as a set of fixed-length records. Your PL/I programs can create fixed-length data sets, or access existing files as fixed-length data sets. The data access does not treat Carriage Return(CR) or Line Feed (LF) as characters with special meaning. In particular, the CR - LF sequence does not delimit records, although these characters can be contained in the data set. It is the length you specify that determines what PL/I considers to be a record within the
230
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Types of data sets
data set. This type of data set has the restriction that the total number of characters in the data set must be evenly divisible by the length you specify.
Fixed-length data sets can be accessed only in a sequential manner.
Additional data sets
Other types of data sets include varying-length, regional, and workstation VSAM data sets.
Varying-length data sets
Your PL/I program can also create and access data sets where each record has a
2-byte prefix that specifies the number of bytes in the rest of the record. Unlike files with records delimited by CR - LF, these varying-length files can have records that possibly contain arbitrary bit patterns.
Regional data sets
A description of regional data sets and how you can use them is presented in
Chapter 12, “Defining and using regional data sets,” on page 277.
Note:
Regional in this context means the same thing as REGIONAL(1) does in
PL/I for z/OS.
Workstation VSAM data sets
The PL/I workstation products support VSAM file organization. There are three types of VSAM data sets on the workstation: v
Consecutive, similar to a VSAM entry-sequenced data set (ESDS) v
Relative, similar to a VSAM relative record data set (RRDS) v
Indexed, similar to a VSAM key-sequenced data set (KSDS)
The PL/I workstation products currently support the following methods for accessing VSAM data sets: v
ISAM (AIX and Windows) v
BTRIEVE (Windows only) v
REMOTE to access mainframe data files on Windows
DDM access method
DDM data sets are record-oriented files as defined by the SMARTdata Utilities
(SdU) architecture. Workstation VSAM data sets that use the DDM access method can exist on local systems. You can compile and run most existing mainframe programs that reference mainframe VSAM data sets.
A DDM keyed data set is represented by two files—one called the
base
, and the other called the
prime index
. The records of the data set are kept in the base; the prime index contains information about the primary keys of the data set. When you create a DDM keyed data set, you specify the name of the base; DDM generates a name for the prime index, which it derives from the name of the base.
When you use DDM data sets, you do not need to be concerned about record length, except that your records cannot exceed the maximum specified length.
You can compile and run most existing mainframe programs that reference mainframe VSAM data sets by creating the appropriate workstation VSAM data set on your PC before running the program.
ISAM access method
Unless otherwise specified, the term
ISAM
in this chapter refers to the STL
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
231
Types of data sets
(Standard Language) file system, which is a local access method and not mainframe ISAM. ISAM data sets are stored in one file and can exist on local file systems only.
SFS access method
The term
SFS
in this chapter refers to Encina SFS, which is one of the file systems used by CICS.
BTRIEVE access method (Windows only)
The BTRIEVE access method is provided to allow you to use PL/I input and output statements to access files created under CICS. There is currently no
PL/I support for BTRIEVE segmented and multiple keys.
BTRIEVE data sets are stored in one file and can exist on local file systems only.
REMOTE access method on Windows
The REMOTE access method is provided to allow you to remotely access data files on the mainframe.
Establishing data set characteristics
When you declare or open a file in your program, you are describing to PL/I the characteristics of the file. You can also use a DD:ddname environment variable or an expression in the TITLE option of the OPEN statement to describe to PL/I the characteristics of the data in data sets or in PL/I files associated with them. See
“Associating a PL/I file with a data set” on page 248 for more information.
You do not always need to describe your data both within the program and outside it; often one description serves for both data sets and their associated PL/I files. There are, in fact, advantages to describing your data's characteristics in only one place. These are described later in this chapter and in following chapters.
To effectively describe your program data and the data sets you are using, you need to understand something about how PL/I moves and stores data.
Records
A record is the unit of data transmitted to and from a program. You can specify the length of records in the RECSIZE option for any of the following:
DD_ddname
environment variable
PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute
TITLE option of the OPEN statement
Except for certain stream files, where defaults are applied, you must specify the
RECSIZE option when your PL/I program creates a data set. For more information
about stream files, see Chapter 11, “Defining and using consecutive data sets,” on page 255.
You must also specify the RECSIZE option when your program accesses a data set that was not created by PL/I.
Please note that an editor might alter a data set implicitly. You should use special caution if you examine a non CR - LF file using an editor, because most editors automatically insert CR - LF or similar character sequences.
232
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
Record formats
The records in a data set can have one of the following formats:
Undefined-length
Fixed-length
Varying-length
For a native file, you specify either undefined-length or fixed-length record format in the TYPE option of the DD information. You do not need to specify a record format for workstation VSAM data sets; they implicitly consist of varying-length records.
Data set organizations
The options of the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute that specify data set organization are:
CONSECUTIVE
ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE)
ORGANIZATION(INDEXED)
ORGANIZATION(RELATIVE)
REGIONAL(1)
VSAM
Each is described in “Specifying characteristics using the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute.”
If you do not specify the data set organization option in the ENVIRONMENT attribute, it defaults to CONSECUTIVE.
Specifying characteristics using the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute
The ENVIRONMENT attribute of the DECLARE statement allows you to specify certain data set characteristics within your programs. These characteristics are not part of the PL/I language; hence, using them in a file declaration might make your program non-portable to other PL/I implementations.
Here is an example of how to specify environment options for a file in your program: declare Invoices file environment(regional(1), recsize(64));
The options you can specify in the ENVIRONMENT attribute are defined in the following sections.
CONSECUTIVE
The CONSECUTIVE option defines a file with consecutive data set organization. In a data set with CONSECUTIVE organization, records are placed in physical sequence. Given one record, the location of the next record is determined by its physical position in the data set.
CONSECUTIVE
You use the CONSECUTIVE option to access native data sets using either stream-oriented or record-oriented data transmission. You also use it for input files
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
233
Establishing data set characteristics
declared with the SEQUENTIAL attribute and associated with a workstation
VSAM data set. In this case, records in a workstation VSAM keyed data set are presented in key sequence.
CONSECUTIVE is the default data set organization.
CTLASA
The CTLASA option specifies that the first character of a record is to be interpreted as an American National Standard Institute (ANSI) print control character. The option applies only to RECORD OUTPUT files associated with consecutive data sets.
CTLASA
The ANSI print control characters, listed in Table 11 on page 255, cause the
specified action to occur before the associated record is printed.
For information about how you use the CTLASA option, see “Printer-destined files” on page 255.
The IBM Proprinter control characters require up to 3 bytes more than the single byte required by an ANSI printer control character. However,
do not
adjust your logical record length specification (see the RECSIZE environment option) because
PL/I automatically adds 3 to the logical record length when you specify CTLASA.
You can modify the effect of CTLASA so that the first character of records is left untranslated to IBM Proprinter control characters. See the ASA environment option
Do not specify the SCALARVARYING environment option for printer-destined output operations, as PL/I does not know how to interpret the first data byte of records.
GENKEY
The GENKEY (generic key) option applies only to workstation VSAM indexed data sets. It enables you to classify keys recorded in the data set and to use a
SEQUENTIAL KEYED INPUT or SEQUENTIAL KEYED UPDATE file to access records according to their key class.
GENKEY
A generic key is a character string that identifies a class of keys; all keys that begin with the string are members of that class. For example, the recorded keys “ABCD”,
“ABCE”, and “ABDF” are all members of the classes identified by the generic keys
“A” and “AB”, and the first two are also members of the class “ABC”; and the three recorded keys can be considered to be unique members of the classes
“ABCD”, “ABCE”, and “ABDF”, respectively.
234
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
The GENKEY option allows you to start sequential reading or updating of a
VSAM data set from the first record that has a key in a particular class, and for an
INDEXED data set from the first nondummy record that has a key in a particular class. You identify the class by including its generic key in the KEY option of a
READ statement. Subsequent records can be read by READ statements without the
KEY option. No indication is given when the end of a key class is reached.
Although you can retrieve the first record having a key in a particular class by using a READ with the KEY option, you cannot obtain the actual key unless the records have embedded keys, since the KEYTO option cannot be used in the same statement as the KEY option.
In the following example, a key length of more than 3 bytes is assumed: dcl ind file record sequential keyed update env (indexed genkey);
.
.
.
read file (ind) into (infield) key (’ABC’);
.
.
.
next: read file (ind) into (infield);
.
.
.
go to next;
The first READ statement causes the first nondummy record in the data set with a key beginning 'ABC' to be read into INFIELD. Each time the second READ statement is executed, the nondummy record with the next higher key is retrieved.
Repeated execution of the second READ statement could result in reading records from higher key classes, since no indication is given when the end of a key class is reached. It is your responsibility to check each key if you do not wish to read beyond the key class. Any subsequent execution of the first READ statement would reposition the file to the first record of the key class 'ABC'.
If the data set contains no records with keys in the specified class, or if all the records with keys in the specified class are dummy records, the KEY condition is raised. The data set is then positioned either at the next record that has a higher key or at the end of the file.
The presence or absence of the GENKEY option affects the execution of a READ statement which supplies a source key that is shorter than the key length specified in the KEYLENGTH subparameter. The KEYLENGTH subparameter is found in the DD statement that defines the indexed data set. If you specify the GENKEY option, it causes the source key to be interpreted as a generic key, and the data set is positioned to the first nondummy record in the data set whose key begins with the source key.
If you do not specify the GENKEY option, a READ statement's short source key is padded on the right with blanks to the specified key length, and the data set is positioned to the record that has this padded key (if such a record exists). For a
WRITE statement, a short source key is always padded with blanks.
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
235
Establishing data set characteristics
Use of the GENKEY option does not affect the result of supplying a source key whose length is greater than or equal to the specified key length. The source key, truncated on the right if necessary, identifies a specific record (whose key can be considered the only member of its class).
GRAPHIC
You must specify the GRAPHIC option if you use DBCS variables or DBCS constants in GET and PUT statements for list-directed and data-directed I/O. You can also specify the GRAPHIC option for edit-directed I/O.
GRAPHIC
PL/I raises the ERROR condition for list-directed and data-directed I/O if you have graphics in input or output data and you do not specify the GRAPHIC option.
For information on the graphic data type, and on the G-format item for edit-directed I/O, see the
PL/I Language Reference
.
KEYLENGTH
The KEYLENGTH option specifies the length,
n
, of the recorded key for a KEYED file. You can specify KEYLENGTH only for INDEXED files (see ORGANIZATION later in this section).
KEYLENGTH (
n
)
If you include the KEYLENGTH option in a file declaration, and the associated data set already exists, the value is used for checking purposes. If the key length you specify in the option conflicts with the value defined for the data set, the
UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised.
ISAM and BTRIEVE
Keys are kept in the index pages of an ISAM or BTRIEVE file. The length of the key needs to be defined to PL/I when the file is created.
KEYLOC
The KEYLOC option specifies the starting position,
n
, of the embedded key in records of a KEYED file. You can specify KEYLOC only for INDEXED files (see
ORGANIZATION later in this section).
KEYLOC (
n
)
The position,
n
, must be within the limits:
1 ≤ n ≤ recordsize - keylength + 1
236
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
That is, the key cannot be larger than the record and must be contained completely within the record.
This means that if you specify the SCALARVARYING option, the embedded key must not overlap the first two bytes of the record; hence, the value you specify for
KEYLOC must be greater than 2.
If you do not specify KEYLOC when creating an indexed data set, the key is assumed to start with the first byte of the record.
If you include the KEYLOC option in a file declaration, and the associated data set already exists, the value is used for checking purposes. If the key position you specify in the option conflicts with the value defined for the data set, the
UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised.
ISAM and BTRIEVE
Keys are kept in the index pages of an ISAM or BTRIEVE file. The location of the key needs to be defined to PL/I when the file is created.
ORGANIZATION
The ORGANIZATION option specifies the organization of the data set associated with the PL/I file.
ORGANIZATION
CONSECUTIVE
( INDEXED
RELATIVE
)
CONSECUTIVE
Specifies that the file is associated with a consecutive data set. A consecutive file may be either a native data set or a workstation VSAM sequential, direct, or keyed data set.
INDEXED
Specifies that the file is associated with an indexed data set. INDEXED specifies that the data set contains records arranged in a logical sequence, according to keys embedded in each record. Logical records are arranged in the data set in ascending key sequence according to the ASCII collating sequence. An indexed file is a workstation VSAM keyed data set.
RELATIVE
Specifies that the file is associated with a relative data set. RELATIVE specifies that the data set contains records that do not have recorded keys. A relative file is a workstation VSAM direct data set. Relative keys range from 1 to nnnn.
RECSIZE
The RECSIZE option specifies the length,
n
, of records in a data set.
RECSIZE (
n
)
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
237
Establishing data set characteristics
For regional and fixed-length data sets, RECSIZE specifies the length of each record in the data set; for all other data set types, RECSIZE specifies the maximum length records can have.
If you include the RECSIZE option in a file declaration, and the file is associated with a workstation VSAM data set that already exists, the value is used for checking purposes. If the record length you specify in the option conflicts with the value defined for the data set, the UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised.
Specify the RECSIZE option when you access data sets created by non-PL/I programs such as text editors.
ISAM and BTRIEVE
You must specify RECSIZE when using the BTRIEVE or ISAM access method.
REGIONAL(1)
The REGIONAL(1) option defines a file with the regional organization.
REGIONAL(1)
A data set with regional organization contains fixed-length records that do not have recorded keys. Each region in the data set contains only one record; therefore, each region number corresponds to a relative record within the data set (that is, region numbers start with 0 at the beginning of the data set).
SCALARVARYING
The SCALARVARYING option is used in the input and output of VARYING strings.
SCALARVARYING
When storage is allocated for a VARYING string, the compiler includes a 2-byte prefix that specifies the current length of the string. For an element varying-length string, this prefix is included on output, or recognized on input, only if you specify
SCALARVARYING for the file.
When you use locate mode statements (LOCATE and READ SET) to create and read a data set with element VARYING strings, you must specify
SCALARVARYING to indicate that a length prefix is present, since the pointer that locates the buffer is always assumed to point to the start of the length prefix.
When you specify this option and element VARYING strings are transmitted, you must allow 2 bytes in the record length to include the length prefix.
A data set created using SCALARVARYING should be accessed only by a file that also specifies SCALARVARYING.
238
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
SCALARVARYING and CTLASA must not be specified for the same file, as this causes the first data byte to be ambiguous.
VSAM
The VSAM option is provided for compatibility with PL/I for z/OS.
VSAM
Specifying characteristics using DD:ddname environment variables
You use the SET command to establish an environment variable that identifies the data set to be associated with a PL/I file, and, optionally, provide additional characteristics of that data set. This information provided by the environment variable is called data definition (or DD) information.
The syntax of the DD:ddname environment variable is:
DD:ddname
=
filespec
,
option
Blanks are acceptable within the syntax. In addition, the syntax of the statement is not checked at the time the command is entered. It is verified when the data set is opened. If the syntax is wrong, UNDEFINEDFILE is raised with the oncode 96.
DD:ddname
Specifies the name of the environment variable. The ddname can be either the name of a file constant or an alternate ddname that you specify in the TITLE
option of your OPEN statement. The TITLE option is described in “Using the
TITLE option of the OPEN statement” on page 249.
If you use an alternate ddname, and it is longer than 31 characters, only the first 31 characters are used in forming the environment variable name.
option
The options that you can specify as DD information are described in the pages
that follow, beginning with “AMTHD” and ending with “TYPE” on page 246.
AMTHD
The AMTHD option specifies the access method to access the data set.
AMTHD
FSYS
( ISAM
BTRIEVE
REMOTE
)
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
239
Establishing data set characteristics
FSYS
Specifies that PL/I uses its native access methods to access a native file. This is the default.
ISAM
Specifies that the ISAM access method is to be used to access an ISAM file.
BTRIEVE (Windows)
Specifies that the BTRIEVE access method is to be used to access a BTRIEVE file.
REMOTE (Windows)
Specifies that the file resides on a remote DDM target system (such as MVS).
For Windows, the name of the file needs to be qualified by the LU alias or the fully-qualified SNA network name
FSYS is used by default if you do not specify the AMTHD option and if you do not apply one of the following ENVIRONMENT options:
ORGANIZATION(INDEXED)
ORGANIZATION(RELATIVE)
VSAM
If you specify any of the above options, AMTHD(ISAM)is the default on Windows while AMTHD(DDM) is the default on AIX.
APPEND
The APPEND option specifies whether an existing data set is to be extended or re-created.
APPEND
Y
( N )
Y
Specifies that new records are to be added to the end of a sequential data set, or inserted in a relative or indexed data set. This is the default.
N
Specifies that, if the file exists, it is to be re-created.
The APPEND option applies only to OUTPUT files. APPEND is ignored if: v
The file does not exist v
The file does not have the OUTPUT attribute v
The organization is REGIONAL(1)
ASA
The ASA option applies to printer-destined files. This option specifies when the
ANSI control character in each record is to be interpreted.
ASA
N
( Y )
N
Specifies that the ANSI print control characters are to be translated to IBM
Proprinter control characters when records are written to the data set. This is the default.
240
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
Y
Specifies that the ANSI print control characters are not to be translated; instead they are to be left as is for subsequent translation by a process you determine.
If the file is not a printer-destined file, the option is ignored. Printer-destined files
are described in “Printer-destined files” on page 255.
AUTOPAGE
The AUTOPAGE option specifies whether a form feed character is the first control character output to a PRINT file, regardless of the PUT option used.
AUTOPAGE
Y
( N )
Y
Specifies that the library puts a form feed control character as the first control character in a PRINT file, even if the first I/O statement to the PRINT file is a
PUT SKIP statement. AUTOPAGE(Y) is the default.
N
Specifies that the library interprets the PUT option used. For example, if the first I/O statement to the PRINT file is a PUT SKIP statement, the library interprets the SKIP option; that is, a carriage return control character is used.
BUFSIZE
The BUFSIZE option specifies the number of bytes for a buffer.
BUFSIZE (
n
)
RECORD output is buffered by default and has a default value for BUFSIZE of
64k. STREAM output is buffered, but not by default, and has a default value for
BUFSIZE of zero.
If the value of zero is given to BUFSIZE, the number of bytes for buffering is equal to the value specified in the RECSIZE or LRECL option.
The BUFSIZE option is valid only for a consecutive binary file. If the file is used for terminal input, you should assign the value of zero to BUFSIZE for increased efficiency.
CHARSET for record I/O
This version of the CHARSET option applies only to consecutive files using record
I/O. It gives the user the capability of using EBCDIC data files as input files, and specifying the character set of output files.
CHARSET
ASIS
( EBCDIC )
ASCII
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
241
Establishing data set characteristics
Choose a suboption of CHARSET based on what form the file has (input) or what form you want the file have (output).
CHARSET(ASIS) is the default.
CHARSET for stream I/O
This version of the CHARSET option applies for stream input and output files. It gives the user the capability of using EBCDIC data files as input files, and specifying the character set of output files. If you attempt to specify ASIS when using stream I/O, no error is issued and character sets are treated as ASCII.
CHARSET
ASCII
( EBCDIC )
Choose a suboption of CHARSET based on what form the file has (input) or what form you want the file to have (output).
CHARSET(ASCII) is the default.
DELAY
The DELAY option specifies the number of milliseconds to delay before retrying an operation that fails when a file or record lock cannot be obtained by the system.
DELAY (
n
)
The default value for DELAY is 0. .
DELIMIT
The DELIMIT option specifies whether the input file contains field delimiters or not. A field delimiter is a blank or a user-defined character that separates the fields in a record. This is applicable for sort input files only.
DELIMIT
N
( Y )
The sort utility distinguishes text files from binary files with the presence of field delimiters. Input files that contain field delimiters are processed as text files; otherwise, they are considered to be binary files. The library needs this information in order to pass the correct parameters to the sort utility.
LRECL
The LRECL option is the same as the RECSIZE option.
242
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
LRECL (
n
)
If LRECL is not specified and not implied by a LINESIZE value (except for
TYPE(FIXED) files, the default is 1024.
LRMSKIP
The LRMSKIP option allows output to commence on the nth
( n refers to the value specified with the SKIP option of the PUT or GET statement) line of the first page for the first SKIP format item to be executed after a file is opened.
LRMSKIP
N
( Y )
If n is zero or 1, output commences on the first line of the first page.
PROMPT
The PROMPT option specifies whether or not colons should be visible as prompts for stream input from the terminal.
PROMPT
N
( Y )
PROMPT(N) is the default.
PUTPAGE
The PUTPAGE option specifies whether or not the form feed character should be followed by a carriage return character. This option only applies to printer-destined files. Printer-destined files are stream output files declared with the PRINT attribute, or record output files declared with the CTLASA environment option.
PUTPAGE
NOCR
( CR )
NOCR
Indicates that the form feed character ('0C'x) is not followed by a carriage return character ('0D'x). This is the default.
CR
Indicates that the carriage return character is appended to the form feed character. This option should be specified if output is sent to non-IBM printers.
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
243
Establishing data set characteristics
RECCOUNT
The RECCOUNT option specifies the maximum number of records that can be loaded into a relative or regional data set that is created during the PL/I file opening process.
RECCOUNT (
n
)
The RECCOUNT option is ignored if PL/I does not create, or re-create, the data set. If the RECCOUNT option applies and is omitted, the default is 50 for regional and relative files.
RECSIZE
The RECSIZE option specifies the length,
n
, of records in the data set.
RECSIZE (
n
)
For regional and fixed-length data sets, RECSIZE specifies the length of each record in the data set; for all other data set types, RECSIZE specifies the maximum length records may have.
The default for
n
is 512.
RETRY
The RETRY option specifies the number of times an operation should be retried when a file or record lock cannot be obtained by the system.
RETRY (
n
)
The default value for RETRY is 10. This option is applicable only to DDM files.
SAMELINE
The SAMELINE option specifies whether the system prompt occurs on the same line as the statement that prompts for input.
SAMELINE
N
( Y )
The following examples show the results of certain combinations of the PROMPT and SAMELINE options:
244
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
Example 1
Given the statement
PUT SKIP LIST(’ENTER:’);
, output is as follows: prompt(y), sameline(y) prompt(n), sameline(y) prompt(y), sameline(n) prompt(n), sameline(n)
ENTER: (cursor)
ENTER: (cursor)
ENTER:
(cursor)
ENTER:
(cursor)
Example 2
Given the statement
PUT SKIP LIST(’ENTER’);
, output is as follows: prompt(y), sameline(y) prompt(n), sameline(y) prompt(y), sameline(n) prompt(n), sameline(n)
ENTER: (cursor)
:
ENTER (cursor)
ENTER
(cursor)
ENTER
(cursor)
SHARE
The SHARE option specifies the level of file sharing to be allowed.
SHARE
NONE
( READ )
ALL
NONE
Specifies that the file is not to be shared with other processes. This is the default.
READ
Specifies that other processes can read the file.
ALL
Specifies that other processes can read or write the file. Data integrity is the user's responsibility, and PL/I provides no assistance in maintaining it.
This option is valid only with DDM files.
To enable record-level locking, specify SHARE(ALL) and declare the file as an update file. This is recommended when running CICS applications.
The UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised if the requested or default level of file sharing cannot be obtained.
SKIP0
The SKIP0 option specifies where the line cursor moves when SKIP(0) statement is coded in the source program. SKIP0 applies to terminal files that are not linked as
PM applications.
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
245
Establishing data set characteristics
SKIP0
N
( Y )
SKIP0(N)
Specifies that the cursor is to be moved to the beginning of the next line. This is the default.
SKIP0(Y)
Specifies that the cursor to be moved to the beginning of the current line.
The following example shows how you could make the output to the terminal skip zero lines so that the cursor moves to the beginning of the current output line: set dd:sysprint=stdout:,SKIP0(Y) set dd:sysprint=con,SKIP0(Y)
TERMLBUF
The TERMLBUF option specifies the maximum number of lines in the window of a
PL/I Presentation Manager (PM) terminal.
TERMLBUF (
n
)
If the file is not associated with a PM terminal, the option is ignored. The default is
512 lines.
TYPE
The TYPE option specifies the format of records in a native file.
TYPE
CRLF
( LF
TEXT
FIXED
VARLS
VARLS4X4
VARMS4X4
VARMS
LL
LLLS
LLZZ
CRLFEOF
U
)
CRLF
Specifies that records are delimited by the CR - LF character combination. ('CR' and 'LF' represent the ASCII values of carriage return and line feed, '0D'x and
'0A'x, respectively. See restrictions on file attributes) For an output file, PL/I
places the characters at the end of each record; for an input file, PL/I discards the characters. For both input and output, the characters are not counted in consideration for RECSIZE.
246
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Establishing data set characteristics
The data set must not contain any record that is longer than the value determined for the record length of the data set.
This is the default for ISAM and BTRIEVE.
LF
Specifies that records are delimited by the LF character combination. ('LF'
represents the ASCII values of feed or '0A'x. See restrictions on file attributes)
For an output file, PL/I places the characters at the end of each record; for an input file, PL/I discards the characters. For both input and output, the characters are not counted in consideration for RECSIZE.
The data set must not contain any record that is longer than the value determined for the record length of the data set.
TEXT
Equivalent to CRLF.
FIXED
Specifies that each record in the data set has the same length. The length determined for records in the data set is used to recognize record boundaries.
All characters in a TYPE(FIXED) file are considered as data, including control characters if they exist. Make sure the record length you specify reflects the presence of these characters or make sure the record length you specify accounts for all characters in the record.
VARLS|VARMS
Indicates that records have a 2-byte prefix that specifies the number of bytes in the rest of the record.
For VARLS, the length prefix is in little endian format. These records look like
NATIVE CHAR VARYING strings.
For VARMS, the length prefix is in big endian format. These records look like
NONNATIVE CHAR VARYING strings.
TYPE(VARLS) data sets provide the fastest way to use PL/I to read and write data sets containing records of variable length and arbitrary byte patterns. This is not possible with TYPE(CRLF) data sets because when a record is read that was written containing the bit string '0d0a'b4, a misinterpretation occurs.
TYPE(VARMS) data sets provide a way to read SCALARVARYING files downloaded from the mainframe.
VARLS4X4|VARMS4X4
Indicates that records have a 4-byte prefix and a 4-byte suffix. The prefix and suffix each contain the number of bytes in the rest of the record. This number does not include either the 4 bytes used by the prefix or the 4 bytes used by the suffix.
For VARLS4X4, the data is in little endian format, which is used on a PC.
For VARMS4X4, the data is in big endian format, which is downloaded from the z/OS or AIX system.
Type(VARLS4X4) and Type(VARMS4X4) data sets provide a way to handle
FORTRAN sequential unformatted files.
LL|LLLS
Indicates that records have a 2-byte prefix that specifies the total number of bytes in the record (including the prefix).
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
247
Establishing data set characteristics
TYPE(LL) data sets provide a way to read files downloaded from the mainframe with a tool (see VRECGEN.PLI sample program) that appends 2 bytes. The length is in big endian format.
TYPE(LLLS) data sets provide a way to read files downloaded from the PC.
The length is in little endian format.
LLZZ
Specifies that records have a 4-byte prefix held the same way as varying records on S/390.
The LLZZ suboption provides a way to read and write data sets that contain records of variable length and arbitrary byte patterns. This does not apply to
TYPE(CRLF) data sets. Under CRLF, a written record containing the bit string
'0d0a'b4 is misinterpreted when it is read.
A TYPE(LLZZ) data set must not contain any record that is longer than the value determined for the record length of the data set.
CRLFEOF
Except for output files, this suboption specifies the same information as CRLF.
When one of these files is closed for output, an end-of-file marker is appended to the last record.
U
Indicates that records are unformatted. These unformatted files cannot be used by any record or stream I/O statements except OPEN and CLOSE. You can read from a TYPE(U) file only by using the FILEREAD built-in function. You can write to a TYPE(U) file only by using the FILEWRITE built-in function.
The TYPE option applies only to CONSECUTIVE files, except that it is ignored for printer-destined files with ASA(N) applied.
If your program attempts to access an existing data set with TYPE(FIXED) in effect and the length of the data set is not a multiple of the logical record length you specify, PL/I raises the UNDEFINEDFILE condition.
When using non-print files with the TYPE(FIXED) attribute, SKIP is replaced by trailing blanks to the end of the line. If TYPE(CRLF) is being used, SKIP is replaced by CRLF with no trailing blanks.
Associating a PL/I file with a data set
A file used within a PL/I program has a PL/I file name. A data set also has a name by which it is known to the operating system.
PL/I needs a way to recognize the data set(s) to which the PL/I files in your program refer, so you must provide an identification of the data set to be used, or allow PL/I to use a default identification.
You can identify the data set explicitly using either an environment variable or the
TITLE option of the OPEN statement.
Using environment variables
You use the SET command to establish an environment variable that identifies the data set to be associated with a PL/I file, and, optionally, to specify the characteristics of that data set. The information provided by the environment variable is called data definition (or DD) information.
248
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Associating a PL/I file with a data set
These environment variable names have the form DD:ddname where the
ddname
is the name of a PL/I file constant (or an
alternate ddname
, as defined below), for example: declare MyFile stream output;
You can specify options for the SET command by including them on the command line.
set dd:myfile=c:\datapath\mydata.dat,APPEND(N)
If you are familiar with the IBM mainframe environment, you can think of the environment variable much like you do the:
DD statement in MVS
ALLOCATE statement in TSO
FILEDEF command in CMS
For more about the syntax and options you can use with the DD:ddname
Using the TITLE option of the OPEN statement
You can use the TITLE option of the OPEN statement to identify the data set to be associated with a PL/I file, and, optionally, to provide additional characteristics of that data set.
TITLE (
expression
)
The
expression
must yield a character string with the following syntax:
alternate_ddname
/
filespec
,
dd_option
alternate_ddname
The name of an alternate DD:ddname environment variable. An alternate
DD:ddname environment variable is one not named after a file constant. For example, if you had a file named INVENTRY in your program, and you establish two DD:ddname environment variables—the first named INVENTRY and the second named PARTS—you could associate the file with the second one using this statement: open file(Inventry) title(’PARTS’);
filespec
Any valid file specification on the system you are using.
dd_option
“Specifying characteristics using DD:ddname environment variables” on page
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
249
Associating a PL/I file with a data set
Here is an example of using the OPEN statement in this manner: open file(Payroll) title(’/June.Dat,append(n),recsize(52)’);
With this form, PL/I obtains all DD information either from the TITLE expression or from the ENVIRONMENT attribute of a file declaration. A
DD:ddname environment variable is not referenced.
Attempting to use files not associated with data sets
If you attempt to use a file that has not been associated with a data set, (either through the use of the TITLE option of the OPEN statement or by establishing a
DD:ddname environment variable), the UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised. The only exceptions are the files SYSIN and SYSPRINT; these default to the CON device.
How PL/I finds data sets
PL/I establishes the path for creating new data sets or accessing existing data sets in one of the following ways: v
The current directory.
v
The paths as defined in the DPATH environment variable.
Opening and closing PL/I files
This topic summarizes what PL/I does when your application executes the OPEN and CLOSE statements.
Opening a file
The execution of a PL/I OPEN statement associates a file with a data set. This requires merging of the information describing the file and the data set. The information is merged using the following order of precedence:
1.
Attributes on the OPEN statement
2.
ENVIRONMENT options on a file declaration
3.
Values in TITLE option of the OPEN statement when '/' is used
4.
Values in the DD:ddname environment variable
5.
IBM defaults
When the data set being opened is not a workstation device, the paths specified in the DPATH environment variable are searched for the data set. If the data set is not found, and the file has the OUTPUT attribute, the data set is created in the current directory.
If any conflict is detected between file attributes and data set characteristics, the
UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised.
Closing a file
The execution of a PL/I CLOSE statement dissociates a file from the data set with which it was associated.
Associating several data sets with one file
A PL/I file can, at different times, represent entirely different data sets. The TITLE option allows you to choose dynamically, at open time, among several data sets to be associated with a particular PL/I file. Consider the following example:
250
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Associating data sets
do Ident=’A’,’B’,’C’; open file(Master) title(’/MASTER1’
{
Ident
{
’.DAT’);
.
.
.
close file(Master); end;
In this example, when Master is opened during the first iteration of the do-group, the file is associated with the data set named MASTER1A.DAT. After processing, the file is closed, dissociating the PL/I file MASTER from the MASTER1A.DAT
data set. During the second iteration of the do-group, MASTER is opened again.
This time, MASTER is associated with the data set named MASTER1B.DAT.
Similarly, during the final iteration of the do-group, MASTER is associated with the data set MASTER1C.DAT.
Combinations of I/O statements, attributes, and options
The figures that follow list the I/O statements, file attributes, ENVIRONMENT options, and DD:ddname environment variable options you can use for the various
PL/I file operations. Table 9 lists those for native data sets and Table 10 on page
252 lists those for workstation VSAM data sets.
Table 9. Statements, attributes, and options for native data sets
Statements
PUT
File attributes
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
OUTPUT
STREAM
ENVIRONMENT options
CONSECUTIVE
GRAPHIC
RECSIZE(n)
1
GET
WRITE
LOCATE
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
STREAM
INPUT
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
5
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
KEYED
6
RECORD
OUTPUT|UPDATE
BUFFERED
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
KEYED
6
RECORD
OUTPUT
SEQUENTIAL
CONSECUTIVE
GRAPHIC
RECSIZE(n)
4
CONSECUTIVE|REGIONAL(1)
CTLASA
7
RECSIZE(n)
1
SCALARVARYING
CONSECUTIVE|REGIONAL(1)
CTLASA
2
RECSIZE(n)
1
DD_DDNAME options
AMTHD(FSYS)
APPEND(Y|N)
ASA(Y|N)
2 file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
1
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TERMLBUF(n)
3
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
AMTHD(FSYS) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
4
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TERMLBUF(n)
3
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
AMTHD(FSYS)
APPEND(Y|N) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
1
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TERMLBUF(n)
3
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
7
AMTHD(FSYS)
APPEND(Y|N) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
1
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
7
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
251
Statements, attributes, options
Table 9. Statements, attributes, and options for native data sets (continued)
Statements File attributes ENVIRONMENT options
READ
REWRITE
DELETE
6
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
5
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
INPUT|UPDATE
KEYED
6
RECORD
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
5
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
UPDATE
KEYED
6
RECORD
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
UPDATE
KEYED
RECORD
CONSECUTIVE|REGIONAL(1)
RECSIZE(n)
4
SCALARVARYING
CONSECUTIVE|REGIONAL(1)
RECSIZE(n)
4
SCALARVARYING
REGIONAL(1)
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
Notes:
DD_DDNAME options
AMTHD(FSYS) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
4
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TERMLBUF(n)
3
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
7
AMTHD(FSYS) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
4
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
TYPE(CRLF|TEXT|FIXED)
7
AMTHD(FSYS) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
When creating a new data set
When printer-destined PL/I file
When associated with a PM terminal
When data set was not created by PL/I program
DIRECT applicable only to REGIONAL(1)
For REGIONAL(1)
Not applicable to REGIONAL(1)
Table 10. Statements, attributes, and options for workstation VSAM data sets
Statements File attributes
PUT ENVIRONMENT
FILE
OUTPUT
STREAM
ENVIRONMENT options
ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE)
GRAPHIC
RECSIZE(n)
1
GET
WRITE
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
STREAM
INPUT
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
KEYED
RECORD
OUTPUT|UPDATE
ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE)
GRAPHIC
RECSIZE(n)
ORGANIZATION|VSAM
CTLASA
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
DD_DDNAME options
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE)
APPEND(Y|N)
ASA(Y|N)
2 file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
1
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE)
ASA(Y|N)
2
APPEND(Y|N)
3 file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
252
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Statements, attributes, options
Table 10. Statements, attributes, and options for workstation VSAM data sets (continued)
Statements File attributes ENVIRONMENT options DD_DDNAME options
LOCATE
READ
BUFFERED
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
KEYED
RECORD
OUTPUT
SEQUENTIAL
BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
INPUT|UPDATE
KEYED
RECORD
REWRITE BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
UPDATE
KEYED
RECORD
DELETE BUFFERED|UNBUFFERED
DIRECT|SEQUENTIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FILE
UPDATE
KEYED
RECORD
3
2
1
Notes:
When creating a new data set
When printer-destined PL/I file
Does not apply to VSAM data sets
ORGANIZATION|VSAM
CTLASA
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
ORGANIZATION|VSAM
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
ORGANIZATION|VSAM
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
ORGANIZATION|VSAM
RECSIZE(n)
SCALARVARYING
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE)
APPEND(Y|N)
3 file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE) file_spec
RECSIZE(n)
SHARE(NONE|READ|ALL)
DISPLAY statement input and output
The REPLY in DISPLAY is read from stdin. Output from the DISPLAY statement is directed to stdout by default. The syntax of the IBM.DISPLAY environment variable is: std
IBM.DISPLAY= con
std
Specifies that the DISPLAY statement is to be associated with the standard output device. This is the default.
con
Specifies that the DISPLAY statement is to be associated with the CON device.
You can redirect display statements to a file, for example:
Chapter 10. Using data sets and files
253
DISPLAY I/O
set ibm.display=std
Hello: proc options(main); display(’Hello!’); end;
After compiling and linking the program, you could invoke it from the command line by entering: hello > hello1.out
The greater than sign redirects the output to the file that is specified after it, in this case HELLO1.OUT. This means that the word 'HELLO' is written in the file
HELLO1.OUT.
PL/I standard files (SYSPRINT and SYSIN)
SYSIN is read from stdin and SYSPRINT is directed to stdout by default. If you want either to be associated differently, you must use the TITLE option of the
OPEN statement, or establish a DD:ddname environment variable naming a data set or another device.
Redirecting standard input, output, and error devices
You can also redirect standard input, standard output, and standard error devices to a file. You could use redirection in the following program, but you would first need to issue two SET DD: statements to allow the redirection to work. They are: set dd:sysprint=stdout: set dd:sysin=stdin:
Hello: proc options(main); put list(’Hello!’); end;
After compiling and linking the program, you could invoke it from the command line by entering: hello2 > hello > hello2.out
As is true with display statements, the greater than sign redirects the output to the file that is specified after it, in this case HELLO2.OUT. This means that the word
'HELLO' is written in the file HELLO2.OUT. Note also that the output includes printer control characters since the PRINT attribute is applied to SYSPRINT by default.
READ statements can access data from stdin, however, they must specify an
LRECL equal to 1.
254
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
The sections that follow describe consecutive data set organization and explain how to create, access, and update consecutive data sets.
In a data set with consecutive organization, records are organized solely on the basis of their successive physical positions. In other words, when the data set is created, records are written consecutively in the order in which they are presented.
You can retrieve the records only in the order in which they were written.
The information in this chapter applies to files using the CONSECUTIVE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute that are associated with either a native or workstation VSAM data set. PL/I Presentation Manager supports only native data sets.
Printer-destined files
Printer-destined files are PL/I files with the PRINT attribute and record files declared with the CTLASA option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute. You can either print these files at your workstation or upload them to your mainframe.
The first character of each record is an American National Standard Institute
(ANSI) carriage control character (see Table 11).
For STREAM files, PL/I inserts the character, based on the SKIP, LINE, or PAGE option (or control format item) of the PUT statement. For RECORD files with
CTLASA, your program must insert the control characters in the first byte of each record.
If you want to print the data set from your workstation, select the ASA(N) option
(it is the default). To keep the format for printing at the mainframe, select ASA(Y), which causes the control characters to be left untranslated.
Character
6
7
8
4
5
9
A
B
C
2
3
+
1
(blank)
0 hyphen (-)
Table 11. ANSI print control characters
Meaning
Skip 1 line before printing
Skip 2 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Do not skip any lines before printing
Skip to next page before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
Skip 3 lines before printing
The translation to IBM Proprinter control characters is as follows:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
255
Printer-destined files
Table 12. IBM Proprinter equivalents to ANSI control characters
ANSI Character Proprinter Characters (in hexadecimal)
(blank)
-
0
+
1
2 to 9, A to C
Note:
Where:
0A = Line feed
0C = Form feed
0D = Carriage return
0A
0A 0A
0A 0A 0A
0D
0C
0A 0A 0A
Only the first five characters listed are translated by PL/I; the others are treated as hyphens (-).
Using stream-oriented data transmission
This section covers how to define data sets for use with PL/I files that have the
STREAM attribute. It covers the ENVIRONMENT options you can use and how to create and access data sets. The essential parameters you use in the DD:ddname environment variable for creating and accessing these data sets are summarized, and several examples of PL/I programs are included.
Data sets with the STREAM attribute are processed by stream-oriented data transmission. The stream-oriented data transmission allows your PL/I program to ignore block and record boundaries and to treat a data set as a continuous stream of data values. Data values are in either SBCS or DBCS format. You create and access data sets for stream-oriented data transmission using the list-, data-, and edit-directed input and output statements described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
For output, PL/I converts the data items from program variables into character format if necessary, and builds the stream of characters or graphics into records for transmission to the data set.
For input, PL/I takes records from the data set and separates them into the data items requested by your program, converting them into the appropriate form for assignment to program variables.
You can use stream-oriented data transmission to read or write graphic data. There are terminals, printers, and data-entry devices that, with the appropriate programming support, can display, print, and enter graphics. You must be sure that your data is in a format acceptable for the intended device or for a print utility program.
Defining files using stream I/O
You define files for stream-oriented data transmission by a file declaration with the following attributes: declare
Filename file stream input | {output [print]} environment(options);
256
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Stream-oriented transmission
The FILE attribute is described in the
PL/I Language Reference
. The PRINT attribute
is described further in “Using PRINT files” on page 261.
ENVIRONMENT options for stream-oriented data transmission
The ENVIRONMENT options you can use with stream-oriented data transmission are: v CONSECUTIVE v RECSIZE v GRAPHIC v ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE).
Creating a data set with stream I/O
To create a data set, use one of the following: v
ENVIRONMENT attribute v
DD:ddname environment variable v
TITLE option of the OPEN statement
Refer to “Using the TITLE option of the OPEN statement” on page 249 for more
information on the TITLE option.
Essential information
When your application creates a STREAM file, it must supply a line size value for that file from one of the following sources: v
LINESIZE option of the OPEN statement v
RECSIZE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute v
RECSIZE option of the TITLE option of the OPEN statement v
RECSIZE option of the DD:ddname environment variable v
PL/I-supplied default value
The PL/I default is used when you do not supply any value. If you choose the
LINESIZE option, it overrides all other sources. The RECSIZE option of the
ENVIRONMENT attribute overrides the other RECSIZE options. RECSIZE specified in the TITLE option of the OPEN statement has precedence over the
RECSIZE option of the DD:ddname environment variable.
If LINESIZE is not supplied, but a RECSIZE value is, PL/I derives line size value from RECSIZE as follows: v
A PRINT file with the ASA(N) option applied has a RECSIZE value of 4 v
A PRINT file with the ASA(Y) option applied has the RECSIZE value of 1 v
Otherwise, the value of RECSIZE is assigned to the line size value.
PL/I determines a default line size value based on attributes of the file and the type of associated data set. In cases where PL/I cannot supply an appropriate default line size, the UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised.
A default line size value is supplied for an OUTPUT file when: v
The file has the PRINT attribute. In this case, the value is obtained from the tab
control table (see Figure 11 on page 264).
v
The associated data set is the terminal (CON:, STDOUT:, or STDERR:). In this case the value is 120.
PL/I always derives the record length of the data set from the line size value. A record length value is derived from the line size value as follows:
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
257
Stream-oriented transmission
v
For a PRINT file, with the ASA(N) option applied, the value is line size + 4 v
For a PRINT file, with the ASA(Y) option applied, the value is line size + 1 v
Otherwise, the line size value is assigned to the record length value.
Example
Figure 8 on page 259 shows the use of stream-oriented data transmission to create
a consecutive data set. The data is first read from the data set bday.inp
that contains a list of names and birthdays of several people. Then a consecutive data set bday.oct
is written that contains the names and birthdays of people whose birthdays are in October.
The command
SET DD:SYSIN=BDAY.INP
should be used to associate the disk file bday.inp
with the input data set. If this file was not created by a PL/I program, the RECSIZE option must also be specified.
The command
SET DD:WORK=BDAY.OCT
should be used to associate the consecutive output file WORK with the disk data set bday.oct
.
258
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Stream-oriented transmission
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
*/
Create a CONSECUTIVE data set with 30-byte records containing */
/*
/*
/*
/* names and birthdays of people whose birthdays are in October. */
*/
USAGE
The following commands are required to establish */
*/
/*
/*
/*
/* the environment variables to run this program:
SET DD:WORK=BDAY.OCT
SET DD:SYSIN=BDAY.INP,RECSIZE(80)
*/
*/
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
BDAY: proc options(main); put skip list(’BDAY TEST HAS STARTED’); dcl Work file stream output,
1 Rec,
3 Name char(19),
3 BMonth char(3),
3 Pad1 char(1),
3 BDate char(2),
3 Pad2 char(1),
3 BYear char(4); dcl Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl In char(30) def Rec; on endfile(sysin) Eof=’1’b; open file(Work) linesize(400); get file(sysin) edit(In)(a(30)); do while (¬Eof); if BMonth = ’OCT’ then put file(Work) edit(In)(a(30)); else; get file(sysin) edit(In)(a(30)); end; close file(Work); put skip list(’BDAY TEST HAS ENDED’); end BDAY; bday.inp contains the input data used at execution time:
LUCY D.
REGINA W.
GARY M.
PETER T.
JANE K.
MAR 15 1950
OCT 09 1971
DEC 01 1964
MAY 03 1948
OCT 24 1939
Figure 8. Creating a data set with stream-oriented data transmission
Accessing a data set with stream I/O
It is not necessary that a data set accessed using stream-oriented data transmission was created by stream-oriented data transmission. However, it must have
CONSECUTIVE organization, and all the data in it must be in character or graphic
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
259
Stream-oriented transmission
form. You can open the associated file for input, and read the items the data set contains; or you can open the file for output, and extend the data set by adding items at the end.
To access a data set, you must use one of the following to identify it: v
ENVIRONMENT attribute v
DD:ddname environment variable v TITLE option of the OPEN statement
Essential information
When your application accesses an existing STREAM file, PL/I must obtain a record length value for that file. The value can come from one of the following sources: v
The LINESIZE option of the OPEN statement v
The RECSIZE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute v
The RECSIZE option of the DD:ddname environment variable v
The RECSIZE option of the TITLE option of the OPEN statement v
An extended attribute of the data set v
PL/I-supplied default value.
If you are using an existing OUTPUT file, or if you supply a RECSIZE value, PL/I
PL/I uses a default record length value for an INPUT file when: v
The file is SYSIN, value = 80 v
The file is associated with the terminal (CON:, SCREEN$:, STDOUT:, or
STDERR:), value = 120.
Example
The program in Figure 9 on page 261 reads the data created by the program in
Figure 8 on page 259 and uses the data set SYSPRINT to display that data. The
SYSPRINT data set is associated with the CON device, so if no dissociation is made prior to executing the program, the output is displayed on the screen. (For
details on SYSPRINT, see “Using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files” on page 265.)
260
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Stream-oriented transmission
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Read a CONSECUTIVE data set and print the 30-byte records
/*
/* to the screen.
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* USAGE
/* The following command is required to establish
/*
/* the environment variable to run this program:
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
SET DD:WORK=BDAY.OCT
Note: This sample program uses the CONSECUTIVE data set created by the previous sample program BDAY.
*/
*/
/* */
/********************************************************************/
*/
*/
*/
*/
BDAY1: proc options(main); put skip list(’BDAY1 TEST HAS STARTED’); dcl Work file stream input; dcl Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl In char(30); on endfile(Work) Eof=’1’b; open file(Work); get file(Work) edit(In)(a(30)); do while (¬Eof); put file(sysprint) skip edit(In)(a); get file(Work) edit(In)(a(30)); end; close file(Work); put skip list(’BDAY1 TEST HAS ENDED’); end BDAY1;
Figure 9. Accessing a data set with stream-oriented data transmission
Using PRINT files
In a PL/I program, using a PRINT file provides a convenient means of controlling the layout of printed output from stream-oriented data transmission. PL/I automatically inserts print control characters in response to the PAGE, SKIP, and
LINE options and format items.
You can apply the PRINT attribute to any STREAM OUTPUT file, even if you do not intend to print the associated data set directly. When a PRINT file is associated with a direct-access data set, the print control characters have no effect on the layout of the data set, but appear as part of the data in the records.
PL/I reserves the first byte of each record transmitted by a PRINT file for an
American National Standard print control character, and inserts the appropriate
characters automatically (see “Printer-destined files” on page 255).
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
261
Stream-oriented transmission
PL/I handles the PAGE, SKIP, and LINE options or format items by inserting the appropriate control character in the records. If the SKIP or the LINE option specifies more than a 3-line space, PL/I inserts sufficient blank records with appropriate control characters to accomplish the required spacing.
If a PRINT file is being transmitted to a terminal device, the PAGE, SKIP, and
LINE options never cause more than 3 lines to be skipped, unless formatted output is specified.
Controlling printed line length
You can limit the length of the printed line produced by a PRINT file by either: v
Specifying record length in your PL/I program using the RECSIZE option of the
ENVIRONMENT attribute.
v
Specifying line size in an OPEN statement using the LINESIZE option.
v
Specifying record length in the TITLE option of the OPEN statement using the
RECSIZE option.
RECSIZE must include the extra byte for the print control character; it must be 1 byte larger than the length of the printed line. LINESIZE refers to the number of characters in the printed line; PL/I adds the print control character.
Do not vary the line size for a file during execution by closing the file and opening it again with a new line size.
Since PRINT files have a default line size of 120 characters, you need not give any record length information for them.
Example:
Figure 10 on page 263 illustrates the use of a PRINT file and the printing options
of stream-oriented data transmission statements to format a table and write it onto a direct-access device for printing on a later occasion. The table comprises the natural sines of the angles from 0° to 359° 54' in steps of 6'.
262
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Stream-oriented transmission
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Create a SEQUENTIAL data set.
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
The following command is required to establish the environment variable to run this program:
SET DD:TABLE=MYTAB.DAT,ASA(Y)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
SINE: proc options(main); put skip list(’START CON3 TEST’);
/* Build a table of SINE values.
dcl Table dcl Deg file stream output print; fixed dec(5,1) init(0);
*/
/* init(0) for endpage */ dcl Min dcl PgNo dcl Oncode dcl I fixed dec(3,1); fixed dec(2) builtin; fixed dec(2); init(0); on error begin; on error system; display (’oncode = ’|| Oncode); end; on endpage(Table) begin; if PgNo ¬= 0 then put file(Table) edit (’page’,PgNo)
(line(55),col(80),a,f(3)); if Deg ¬= 360 then do; put file(Table) page edit (’Natural Sines’) (a); put file(Table) edit ((I do I = 0 to 54 by 6))
(skip(3),10 f(9));
PgNo = PgNo + 1; end; else put file(Table) page; end; open file(Table) pagesize(52) linesize(102); signal endpage(Table); put file(Table) edit
((Deg,(sind(Deg+Min) do Min = 0 to .9 by .1) do Deg = 0 to 359))
(skip(2), 5 (col(1), f(3), 10 f(9,4) )); put file(Table) skip(52); put skip list(’END CON3 TEST’); end SINE;
Figure 10. Creating a print file via stream data transmission.
(The example in Figure 15 on page 275 prints this file)
The statements in the ENDPAGE ON-unit insert a page number at the bottom of each page, and set up the headings for the following page.
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
263
Stream-oriented transmission
The program in Figure 15 on page 275 uses record-oriented data transmission to
print the table created by the program in Figure 10 on page 263.
Overriding the tab control table
Data-directed and list-directed output to a PRINT file are aligned on preset tabulator positions, which are defined in the PL/I-defined tab control table. The
tab control table is an external structure named PLITABS. Figure 11 shows its
declaration.
dcl 1 PLITABS static external,
( 2 Offset init (14),
2
2
Pagesize init (60),
Linesize init (120),
2
2
2
2
Pagelength init (64),
Fill1 init (0),
Fill2 init (0),
Fill3 init (0),
2
2
2
2
2
Number_of_tabs init (5),
Tab1 init (25),
Tab2 init (49),
Tab3 init (73),
Tab4 init (97),
2 Tab5 init (121)) fixed bin (15,0);
Figure 11. Declaration of PLITABS.
(Gives standard page size, line size and tabulating positions)
The definitions of the fields in the table are as follows:
Offset
Binary integer that gives the offset of Number_of_tabs, the field that indicates the number of tabs to be used, from the top of PLITABS.
Pagesize
Binary integer that defines the default page size. This page size is used for dump output to the PLIDUMP data set as well as for stream output.
Linesize
Binary integer that defines the default line size.
Pagelength
Binary integer that defines the default page length for printing at a terminal.
The value 0 indicates unformatted output.
Fill1, Fill2, Fill3
Three binary integers; reserved for future use.
Number_of_tabs
Binary integer that defines the number of tab position entries in the table
(maximum 255). If tab count = 0, any specified tab positions are ignored.
Tab1—Tab
n
:
Binary integers that define the tab positions within the print line. The first position is numbered 1, and the highest position is numbered 255. The value of each tab should be greater than that of the tab preceding it in the table; otherwise, it is ignored. The first data field in the printed output begins at the next available tab position.
You can override the default PL/I tab settings for your program by causing the linker to resolve an external reference to PLITABS. You do this by including a PL/I
264
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Stream-oriented transmission
structure with the name PLITABS and the attributes EXTERNAL STATIC in the source program containing your main routine.
An example of the PL/I structure is shown in Figure 12. This example creates three
tab settings, in positions 30, 60, and 90, and uses the defaults for page size and line size. Note that TAB1 identifies the position of the second item printed on a line; the first item on a line always starts at the left margin. The first item in the structure is the offset to the NO_OF_TABS field; FILL1, FILL2, and FILL3 can be omitted by adjusting the offset value by –6.
dcl 1 PLITABS static ext,
2 (Offset init(14),
Pagesize init(60),
Linesize init(120),
Pagelength init(0),
Fill1 init(0),
Fill2 init(0),
Fill3 init(0),
No_of_tabs init(3),
Tab1 init(30),
Tab2 init(60),
Tab3 init(90)) fixed bin(15,0);
Figure 12. PL/I structure PLITABS for modifying the preset tab settings
Using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files
If you code GET or PUT statements without the FILE option, PL/I contextually assumes file SYSIN and SYSPRINT, respectively.
If you do not declare SYSPRINT, PL/I gives the file the attribute PRINT in addition to the normal default attributes; the complete set of attributes is: file stream print external
Since SYSPRINT is a PRINT file, a default line size of 120 characters is applied when the file is opened.
You can override the attributes given to SYSPRINT by PL/I by explicitly declaring or opening the file. However, when SYSPRINT is declared or opened as a STREAM
OUTPUT file, the PRINT attribute is applied by default unless the INTERNAL attribute is also declared.
PL/I does not supply any special attributes for the input file SYSIN; if you do not declare it, it receives only the default attributes.
Controlling input from the terminal
To enter data for an input file, do both of the following: v
Declare the input file explicitly or implicitly with the CONSECUTIVE environment option (all stream files meet this condition).
v Allocate the input file to the terminal.
You can usually use the standard default input file SYSIN because it is a stream file and can be allocated to the terminal.
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
265
Controlling input from the terminal
You can be prompted for input to stream files by a colon (:) if you specify
PROMPT(Y), see “PROMPT” on page 243. You can see the colon each time a GET
statement is executed in the program. The GET statement causes the system to go to the next line. You can then enter the required data. If you enter a line that does not contain enough data to complete execution of the GET statement, a further prompt, which is a plus sign followed by a colon (+:), is displayed.
If you do not specify PROMPT(Y), the default is to have no colon visible at the beginning of the line.
By adding a hyphen to the end of any line that is to continue, you can delay transmission of the data to your program until you enter two or more lines. The hyphen is an explicit continuation character.
If your program includes output statements that prompt for input, you can inhibit the initial system prompt by ending your own prompt with a colon. For example, the GET statement could be preceded by a PUT statement: put skip list(’Enter next item:’);
To inhibit the system prompt for the next GET statement, your own prompt must meet the following conditions: v It must be either list-directed or edit-directed, and if list-directed, must be to a
PRINT file.
v
The file transmitting the prompt must be allocated to the terminal. If you are using the COPY option to copy the file at the terminal, the system prompt is not inhibited.
Using files conversationally
To have your programs interact with a user conversationally, use the terminal as an input and output device for consecutive files in the program. Any stream file can be used conversationally, because conversational I/O needs no special PL/I code.
Format of data
The data you enter on the terminal should have exactly the same format as stream input data in batch mode, except for the following variations: v
Simplified punctuation for input:
If you enter separate items of input on separate lines, there is no need to enter intervening blanks or commas; PL/I inserts a comma at the end of each line.
As an example, consider the following statement: get list(I,J,K);
You could give the following response pressing the ENTER key after each item.
(The colons only appear if you specify PROMPT(Y).
:
2
:
1
:
3
Entering the data on separate lines is equivalent to specifying:
:
1,2,3
266
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Controlling input from the terminal
If you wish to continue an item on another line, you must end the first line with a continuation character (the hyphen). Otherwise, for a GET LIST or GET DATA statement, a comma is inserted. For a GET EDIT statement, the item is padded.
v
Automatic padding for GET EDIT:
There is no need to enter blanks at the end of a line of input for a GET EDIT statement. The item you enter is padded to the correct length.
Consider the following PL/I statement: get edit(Name)(a(15));
You could enter these five characters followed immediately by the ENTER.
SMITH
The item is padded with 10 blanks, so that the program receives a string 15 characters long. If you wish to continue an item on a second or subsequent line, you must add a continuation character to the end of every line except the last.
Otherwise, the first line transmitted would be padded and treated as the complete data item.
v
SKIP option or format item:
A SKIP in a GET statement ignores the data not yet entered. All uses of SKIP(n) where
n
is greater than one are taken to mean
SKIP(1). SKIP(1) is taken to mean that all unused data on the current line is ignored.
Stream and record files
You can allocate both stream and record files to the terminal. However, no prompting is provided for record files. If you allocate more than one file to the terminal, and one or more of them is a record file, the output of the files is not necessarily synchronized. The order in which data is transmitted to and from the terminal is not guaranteed to be the same order in which the corresponding PL/I
I/O statements are executed.
Capital and lowercase letters
For both stream and record files, character strings are transmitted to the program as entered in lowercase or uppercase.
End of file
The characters
/* in positions one and two of a line that contains no other characters are treated as an end-of-file indication and raise the ENDFILE condition.
Note that the sequence of characters
/* in a line is not an end-of-file indication when input is attached to a file instead of a terminal. For example: cat input.txt | ./plipgm or
./plipgm < input.txt
where a line containing only /* from the input.txt
file is not an end-of-file indication.
When using a terminal, use the control-D key sequence to generate an end-of-file indication.
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
267
Controlling output to the terminal
Controlling output to the terminal
At your screen, you can display data from a PL/I file that has been both: v
Declared explicitly or implicitly with the CONSECUTIVE environment option.
All stream files meet this condition.
v
Allocated to the terminal device (CON:, STDOUT:, SCREEN$:, or STDERR:).
The standard output file SYSPRINT generally meets both these conditions.
Format of PRINT files
Data from SYSPRINT or other PRINT files is not normally formatted into columns and pages at the terminal. Three lines are always skipped for PAGE and LINE options and format items. The ENDPAGE condition is normally never raised.
SKIP(n), where
n
is greater than three, causes only three lines to be skipped.
SKIP(0) is implemented by carriage return.
You can cause a PRINT file to be formatted into pages by inserting a tab control table in your program. The table must be called PLITABS, and its contents are
264. You can also use PLITABS to alter the tabulating positions of list-directed and
data-directed output.
Tabulating of list-directed and data-directed output is achieved by transmission of blank (space) characters.
Stream and record files
You can allocate both stream and record files to the terminal. However, if you allocate more than one file to the terminal and one or more is a record file, the file output is not necessarily synchronized. There is no guarantee that the order in which data is transmitted between the program and the terminal is the same as the order in which the corresponding PL/I input and output statements are executed.
For stream and record files, characters are displayed on the terminal as they are held in the program. Both capital and lowercase characters can be displayed.
Example of an interactive program
The example program in Figure 13 on page 269 creates a consecutive data set
PHONES using a dialog with the user. By default, SYSIN is associated with the
CON device. You can override this association by setting an environment variable for the SYSIN file or by using the TITLE option on the OPEN statement. The output data set is associated with a disk file INT1.DAT and contains names and phone numbers that the user enters from the keyboard.
268
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using record-oriented I/O
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Create a SEQUENTIAL data set using a terminal dialog.
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
The following command is required to establish the environment variable to run this program:
SET DD:PHONES=INT1.DAT,APPEND(Y)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
INT1: proc options(main); dcl Phones stream env(recsize(40)); dcl Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl 1 PhoneBookEntry,
3 NameField char(19),
3 PhoneNumber char(21); dcl InArea char(40); open file (Phones) output; on endfile(sysin) Eof=’1’b;
/* start creating phone book */ put list(’Please enter name:’); get edit(NameField)(a(19)); if ¬Eof then do; put list(’Please enter number:’); get edit(PhoneNumber)(a(21)); end; do while (¬Eof); put file(Phones) edit(PhoneBookEntry)(a(40)); put list(’Please enter name:’); get edit(NameField)(a(19)); if ¬Eof then do; put list(’Please enter number:’); get edit(PhoneNumber)(a(21)); end; end; close file(Phones); end INT1;
Figure 13. A sample interactive program
Using record-oriented I/O
PL/I supports various types of data sets with the RECORD attribute. This section covers how to use record-oriented I/O with consecutive data sets.
Table 13 on page 270 lists the data transmission statements and options that you
can use to create and access a consecutive data set using record-oriented I/O.
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
269
Using record-oriented I/O
A CONSECUTIVE file that is associated with a DDM direct or keyed data set can be opened only for INPUT. PL/I raises UNDEFINEDFILE if an attempt is made to open such a file for OUTPUT or UPDATE.
Table 13. Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing consecutive data sets
File Declaration
1
Valid Statements,
You Must Specify
2 with Options Other Options you can
Specify
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
SET(pointer reference)
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
BUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
BUFFERED
LOCATE based-variable
FILE(file-reference);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INPUT(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
REWRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
FROM(reference)
REWRITE FILE(file-reference);
Notes:
1
The complete file declaration would include the attributes FILE, RECORD, and
ENVIRONMENT
2
The statement READ FILE (file-reference); is a valid statement and is equivalent to READ
FILE(file-reference) IGNORE (1);
Defining files using record I/O
You define files for record-oriented data transmission by using a file declaration with the following attributes:
270
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using record-oriented I/O
declare
Filename file record input | output | update sequential buffered | unbuffered environment(options);
The file attributes are described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
ENVIRONMENT options for record-oriented data transmission
The ENVIRONMENT options applicable to consecutive data sets for record-oriented data transmission are: v
CONSECUTIVE v
CTLASA v
ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE) v
RECSIZE v
SCALARVARYING
Creating a data set with record I/O
When you create a consecutive data set, you must open the associated file for
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT. You can use either the WRITE or LOCATE statement to
write records. Table 13 on page 270 shows the statements and options for creating a
consecutive data set.
To create a data set, you must give PL/I certain information either in the
ENVIRONMENT attribute, in a DD:ddname environment variable, or in the TITLE option of the OPEN statement.
Essential information
When you create a consecutive data set you must specify: v
The name of data set to be associated with your PL/I file. A data set with
v
The record length. You can specify the record length using the RECSIZE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute, of the DD:ddname environment variable, or of the TITLE option of the OPEN statement.
For files associated with the terminal device (CON:, STDOUT:, or STDERR:),
PL/I uses a default record length of 120 when the RECSIZE option is not specified.
Accessing and updating a data set with record I/O
Once you create a consecutive data set, you can open the file that accesses it for sequential input, for sequential output, or, for data sets on direct-access devices, for updating. For an example of a program that accesses and updates a consecutive
data set, see Figure 14 on page 273.
If you open the file for output, and wish to extend the data set by adding records at the end, you need not specify APPEND(Y) in the DD:ddname environment variable, since this is the default. If you specify APPEND(N), the data set is overwritten. If you open a file for updating, you can only update records in their existing sequence, and if you want to insert records, you must create a new data set. You cannot change the record length of an existing data set.
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
271
Using record-oriented I/O
When you access a consecutive data set by a SEQUENTIAL UPDATE file, you must retrieve a record with a READ statement before you can update it with a
REWRITE statement. Every record that is retrieved, however, need not be rewritten. A REWRITE statement always updates the last record read.
Consider the following: read file(F) into(A);
.
.
.
read file(F) into(B);
.
.
.
rewrite file(F) from(A);
The REWRITE statement updates the record that was read by the second READ statement. The record that was read by the first statement cannot be rewritten after the second READ statement has been executed.
To access a data set, you must identify it to PL/I using the TITLE option of the
OPEN statement or a DD:ddname environment variable.
Table 13 on page 270 shows the statements and options for accessing and updating
a consecutive data set.
Essential information
When your application accesses an existing RECORD file, PL/I must obtain a record length value for that file. The value can come from one of the following sources: v
The RECSIZE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute v
The RECSIZE option of the DD:ddname environment variable v
The RECSIZE option of the TITLE option of the OPEN statement v
PL/I-supplied default value.
PL/I uses a default record length value for an INPUT file when: v
The file is SYSIN. In this case, the value used is 80.
v
The file is associated with the terminal. In this case, the value used is 120.
Examples of consecutive data sets
Creating and accessing consecutive data sets are illustrated in the program in
Figure 14 on page 273. The program merges the contents of two PL/I files INPUT1
and INPUT2, and writes them onto a new PL/I file, OUT. INPUT1 and INPUT2 are associated with the disk files EVENS.INP and ODDS.INP, respectively, and contain 6-byte records arranged in ASCII collating sequence.
272
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using record-oriented I/O
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
/*
Merge 2 data sets creating a CONSECUTIVE data set.
/*
/*
USAGE
The following commands are required to establish */
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/* the environment variables to run this program:
SET DD:OUT=CON4.DAT
SET DD:INPUT1=EVENS.INP
SET DD:INPUT2=ODDS.INP
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* */
/********************************************************************/
MERGE: proc options(main); put skip list(’START CON4 TEST’); dcl Input1 file record sequential input env(recsize(6)); dcl Input2 file record sequential input env(recsize(6)); dcl Out file record sequential env(recsize(15)); dcl Sysprint file print; /* normal print file dcl Input1_Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl Input2_Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl Out_Eof dcl True dcl False bit(1) init(’0’b); bit(1) init(’1’b); bit(1) init(’0’b);
/* eof flag for Input1
/* eof flag for Input2
/* eof flag for Out
/* constant True
/* constant False
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/ dcl Item1 dcl Item2 dcl A dcl B char(6) based(a); char(6) based(b); pointer; pointer; on endfile(Input1) Input1_Eof = True; on endfile(Input2) Input2_Eof = True; on endfile(Out) Out_Eof = True;
/* item from Input1
/* item from Input2
/* pointer var
/* pointer var
*/
*/
*/
*/ open file(Input1), file(Input2), file(Out) output; read file(Input1) set(A); read file(Input2) set(B);
/* priming read */
Figure 14. Merge Sort—Creating and accessing a consecutive data set
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
273
Using record-oriented I/O
do while ((Input1_Eof = False) & (Input2_Eof = False)); if Item1 > Item2 then do; write file(Out) from(Item2); put file(Sysprint) skip edit(’1>2’, Item1, Item2)
(a(5),a,a); read file(Input2) set(B); end; else do; write file(Out) from(Item1); put file(Sysprint) skip edit(’1<2’, Item1, Item2)
(a(5),a,a); read file(Input1) set(A); end; end; do while (Input1_Eof = False); write file(Out) from(Item1);
/* Input2 is exhausted put file(Sysprint) skip edit(’1’, Item1) (a(2),a); read file(Input1) set(A); end;
*/ do while (Input2_Eof = False); write file(Out) from(Item2); end;
/* Input1 is exhausted put file(Sysprint) skip edit(’2’, Item2) (a(2),a); read file(Input2) set(B);
*/ close file(Input1), file(Input2), file(Out); put file(Sysprint) page; open file(Out) sequential input;
*/ read file(Out) into(Item1); do while (Out_Eof = False);
/* display Out file put file(Sysprint) skip edit(Item1) (a); read file(Out) into(Item1); end; close file(Out); put skip list(’END CON4 TEST’); end MERGE;
Here is a sample of evens.inp:
BBBBBB
DDDDDD
FFFFFF
HHHHHH
JJJJJJ
Here is a sample of odds.inp:
AAAAAA
CCCCCC
EEEEEE
GGGGGG
IIIIII
KKKKKK
Merge Sort—Creating and accessing a consecutive data set
The program in Figure 15 on page 275 uses record-oriented data transmission to
write the table created by the program in Figure 10 on page 263 to a file called
274
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using record-oriented I/O
out.txt
.
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Write a SEQUENTIAL data set created by the SINE program to a
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/* file.
USAGE
The following commands are required to establish */
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/* the environment variables to run this program:
SET DD:TABLE=MYTAB.DAT
SET DD:PRINTER=PRN
/* */
/********************************************************************/
*/
*/
*/
*/
PRT: proc options(main); put skip list(’START CON5 TEST’); dcl Table dcl Output dcl Line file record input sequential; file record output seql env(recsize(200)); char(102) var; dcl Table_Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl True bit(1) init(’1’b); dcl False bit(1) init(’0’b);
/* Eof flag for Table
/* constant True
/* constant False
*/
*/
*/ on endfile(Table) Table_Eof = True; open file(Table), file(Output); read file(Table) into(Line); do while (Table_Eof = False); if Line=’’ then
Line= ’ ’; write file(Output) from(Line); read file(Table) into(Line); end; close file(Table), file(Output); put skip list(’END CON5 TEST’); end PRT;
/* priming read
/* insert blank lines
*/
*/
Figure 15. Printing record-oriented data transmission
Chapter 11. Defining and using consecutive data sets
275
Using record-oriented I/O
276
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
This chapter covers regional data set organization, data transmission statements, and ENVIRONMENT options that define regional data sets. Creating and accessing regional data sets are also discussed.
A data set with regional organization is divided into regions, each of which is identified by a region number, and each of which can contain one record. The regions are numbered in succession, beginning with zero, and a record can be accessed by specifying its region number in a data transmission statement.
Regional data sets are confined to direct-access devices.
Regional organization of a data set allows you to control the physical placement of records in the data set and to optimize the data access time. This type of optimization is not available with consecutive organization, in which successive records are written in strict physical sequence.
You can create a regional data set in a manner similar to a consecutive data set, presenting records in the order of ascending region numbers; alternatively, you can use direct-access, in which you present records in random sequence and insert them directly into preformatted regions. Once you create a regional data set, you can access it by using a file with the attributes SEQUENTIAL or DIRECT as well as
INPUT or UPDATE. You do not need to specify either a region number or a key if the data set is associated with a SEQUENTIAL INPUT or SEQUENTIAL UPDATE file. When the file has the DIRECT attribute, you can retrieve, add, delete, and replace records at random.
Records within a regional data set are either actual records containing valid data or dummy records.
PL/I supports REGIONAL(1) data sets. See Table 14 for a list of the data
transmission statements and options that you can use to create and access a
REGIONAL(1) data set.
Table 14. Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing regional data sets
File
Declaration
1
Valid Statements,
2
With
Options You Must Include
Other Options You
Can Also Include
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
SET(pointer-reference)
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
LOCATE based-variable
FROM(file-reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
277
Regional data sets
Table 14. Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing regional data sets (continued)
File
Declaration
1
Valid Statements,
2
With
Options You Must Include
Other Options You
Can Also Include
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
BUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEYTO(reference)
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
UNBUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
BUFFERED
3
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
KEYTO(reference)
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
DIRECT OUTPUT
DIRECT INPUT
DIRECT UPDATE
REWRITE FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
IGNORE(expression);
REWRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
REWRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
DELETE FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
FROM(reference)
KEYTO(reference)
278
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Regional data sets
Table 14. Statements and options allowed for creating and accessing regional data sets (continued)
File
Declaration
1
Valid Statements,
2
With
Options You Must Include
Other Options You
Can Also Include
Notes:
1
The complete file declaration would include the attributes FILE, RECORD, and
ENVIRONMENT; if you use any of the options KEY, KEYFROM, or KEYTO, you must also include the attribute KEYED.
2
The statement READ FILE(file-reference); is equivalent to the statement READ
FILE(file-reference) IGNORE(1);
3
The file cannot have the UPDATE attribute when creating new data sets.
Defining files for a regional data set
Use a file declaration with the following attributes to define a sequential regional data set: declare
Filename file record input | output | update sequential buffered | unbuffered
[keyed] environment(options);
To define a direct regional data set, use a file declaration with the following attributes: declare
Filename file record input | output | update direct unbuffered
[keyed] environment(options);
File attributes are described in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
Specifying ENVIRONMENT options
The ENVIRONMENT options applicable to regional data sets are:
FIXED
REGIONAL(1)
RECSIZE
SCALARVARYING
These options are described in “Specifying characteristics using the PL/I
ENVIRONMENT attribute” on page 233.
Essential information for creating and accessing regional data sets
To create a regional data set, you must give PL/I certain information, either in the
ENVIRONMENT attribute or in the DD:ddname environment variable.
You must supply the following information when creating a regional data set:
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
279
Defining files for a regional data set
v
The name of the data set associated with your PL/I file. A data set with
REGIONAL(1) organization can exist only on a direct-access storage device (see
“Attempting to use files not associated with data sets” on page 250).
v
The record length. You can specify the record length using the RECSIZE option of the ENVIRONMENT attribute or of the DD:ddname environment variable or in the TITLE option of the OPEN statement.
v The extent (the number of regions) of the data set. You specify this with the
RECCOUNT option of the DD:ddname environment variable.
The default for RECCOUNT is 50.
Using keys with regional data sets
Source keys are used to access REGIONAL(1) data sets. A
source key
is the character value of the expression that appears in the KEY or KEYFROM option of a data transmission statement to identify the record to which the statement refers.
When you access a record in a regional data set, the source key is the region number.
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
In a REGIONAL(1) data set, the region number serves as the sole identification of a particular record. The character value of the source key should represent an unsigned decimal integer that should not exceed 2147483647. If the region number exceeds this figure, it is treated as modulo 2147483648; for instance, 2147483658 is treated as 10.
Only the characters 0 through 9 and the blank character are valid in the source key; leading blanks are interpreted as zeros. Embedded blanks are not allowed in the region number; the first embedded blank, if any, terminates the region number.
If more than 10 characters appear in the source key, only the rightmost 10 are used as the region number; if there are fewer than 10 characters, blanks (interpreted as zeros) are inserted on the left.
Dummy records
Records in a REGIONAL(1) data set are either actual records containing valid data or dummy records. A dummy record in a REGIONAL(1) data set is identified by the constant 'FF'X in its first byte. Although such dummy records are inserted in the data set either when it is created or when a record is deleted, they are not ignored when the data set is read. Your PL/I program must be prepared to recognize them. You can replace dummy records with valid data.
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set
You can create a REGIONAL(1) data set either sequentially or by direct-access.
Table 14 on page 277 shows the statements and options for creating a regional data
set.
When you create the data set, opening the file causes the data set to be filled with dummy records. You must present records in ascending order of region numbers for a SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT file. If there is an error in the sequence, or if you present a duplicate key, the KEY condition is raised. If you use a DIRECT
OUTPUT file to create the data set, you can present records in random order. If you present a duplicate region number, the existing record is overwritten.
280
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
If you create a data set using a buffered file, and the last WRITE or LOCATE statement before the file is closed attempts to transmit a record beyond the limits of the data set, the CLOSE statement might raise the ERROR condition.
Example
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set is illustrated in Figure 16. The data set is a list of
telephone extensions with the names of the subscribers to whom they are allocated.
The telephone extensions correspond with the region numbers in the data set; the data in each occupied region being a subscriber's name.
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Create a REGIONAL(1) data set.
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
The following commands are required to establish the environment variables to run this program:
SET DD:SYSIN=CRG.INP,RECSIZE(30)
SET DD:NOS=NOS.DAT,RECCOUNT(100)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
CRR1: proc options(main); dcl Nos file record output direct keyed env(regional(1) recsize(20)); dcl Sysin file input record; dcl 1 In_Area,
2 Name char(20),
2 Number char( 2); dcl IoField char(20); dcl Sysin_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl Ntemp fixed(15); on endfile (Sysin) Sysin_Eof = ’1’b; open file(Nos); read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); do while(¬Sysin_Eof);
IoField = Name;
Ntemp = Number; write file(Nos) from(IoField) keyfrom(Ntemp); put file(sysprint) skip edit (In_Area) (a); read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); end; close file(Nos); end CRR1;
Figure 16. Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
281
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
The execution time input file, crg.inp, might look like this:
ACTION,G.
BAKER,R.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
CHEESNAME,L.
CORY,G.
ELLIOTT,D.
FIGGINS,E.S.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
HASTINGS,G.M.
KENDALL,J.G.
LANCASTER,W.R.
MILES,R.
NEWMAN,M.W.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.E.
SHEERS,C.D.
SURCLIFFE,M.
TAYLOR,G.C.
WILTON,L.W.
WINSTONE,E.M.
12
13
28
11
36
85
43
25
31
24
64
23
40
55
14
21
42
47
44
37
Creating a REGIONAL(1) data set (continued)
Accessing and updating a REGIONAL(1) data set
Once you create a REGIONAL(1) data set, you can open the file that accesses it for
SEQUENTIAL INPUT or UPDATE, or for DIRECT INPUT or UPDATE. You can
Sequential access
To open a SEQUENTIAL file that is used to process a REGIONAL(1) data set, use either the INPUT or UPDATE attribute. You must not include the KEY option in data transmission statements, but the file can have the KEYED attribute, since you can use the KEYTO option. If the target character string referenced in the KEYTO option has more than 10 characters, the value returned (the 10-character region number) is padded on the left with blanks. If the target string has fewer than 10 characters, the value returned is truncated on the left.
Sequential access is in the order of ascending region numbers. All records are retrieved, whether dummy or actual, and you must ensure that your PL/I program recognizes dummy records.
Using sequential input with a REGIONAL(1) data set, you can read all the records in ascending region-number sequence, and in sequential update you can read and rewrite each record in turn.
The rules governing the relationship between READ and REWRITE statements for a SEQUENTIAL UPDATE file that accesses a REGIONAL(1) data set are identical to those for a consecutive data set. A discussion of using READ and REWRITE
statements can be found in “Accessing and updating a data set with record I/O” on page 271.
282
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
Direct access
To open a DIRECT file that is used to process a REGIONAL(1) data set you can use either the INPUT or the UPDATE attribute. All data transmission statements must include source keys; the DIRECT attribute implies the KEYED attribute.
Use DIRECT UPDATE files to retrieve, add, delete, or replace records in a
REGIONAL(1) data set according to the following conventions:
Retrieval
All records, whether dummy or actual, are retrieved. Your program must recognize dummy records.
Addition
A WRITE statement substitutes a new record for the existing record (actual or dummy) in the region specified by the source key.
Deletion
The record you specify by the source key in a DELETE statement is turned into a dummy record.
Replacement
The record you specify by the source key in a REWRITE statement, whether dummy or actual, is replaced.
Example
Updating a REGIONAL(1) data set is illustrated in Figure 17 on page 284. This
program updates the data set and lists its contents. Before each new or updated record is written, the existing record in the region is tested to ensure that it is a dummy. This is necessary because a WRITE statement can overwrite an existing record in a REGIONAL(1) data set even if it is not a dummy. Similarly, during the sequential reading and printing of the contents of the data set, each record is tested and dummy records are not printed.
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
283
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Update a REGIONAL(1) data set.
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/* USAGE
/*
/*
The following commands are required to establish the environment variables to run this program:
*/
/*
/*
*/
*/
SET DD:SYSIN=ACR.INP,RECSIZE(30)
SET DD:NOS=NOS.DAT,APPEND(Y)
Note: This sample program is using the regional data set,
*/
*/ nos.dat, created by the previous sample program CRR1.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* */
/********************************************************************/
ACR1: proc options(main); dcl Nos file record keyed env(regional(1)); dcl Sysin file input record; dcl Sysin_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl Nos_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl 1 In_Area,
2 Name char(20),
2 (CNewNo,COldNo) char( 2),
2 In_Area_1 char( 1),
2 Code char( 1); dcl IoField char(20); dcl Byte char(1) def IoField; dcl NewNo fixed(15); dcl OldNo fixed(15); on endfile (Sysin) Sysin_Eof = ’1’b; open file (Nos) direct update; read file(Sysin) into(In_Area);
Figure 17. Updating a REGIONAL(1) data set
284
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
do while(¬Sysin_Eof); if CNewNo ¬=’ ’ then
NewNo = CNewNo; else
NewNo = 0; if COldNo ¬=’ ’ then
OldNo = COldNo; else
OldNo = 0; select(Code); when(’A’,’C’) do; if Code = ’C’ then delete file(Nos) key(OldNo); read file(Nos) key(NewNo) into(IoField);
/* we must test to see if the record exists */
/* if it doesn’t exist we create a record there */ if unspec(Byte) = (8)’1’b then write file(Nos) keyfrom(NewNo) from(Name); else put file(sysprint) skip list (’duplicate:’,Name); end; when(’D’) delete file(Nos) key(OldNo); otherwise put file(sysprint) skip list (’invalid code:’,Name); end; read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); close file(Sysin),file(Nos); put file(sysprint) page; open file(Nos) sequential input; on endfile (Nos) nos_Eof = ’1’b; read file(Nos) into(IoField) keyto(CNewNo); do while(¬Nos_Eof); if unspec(Byte) ¬= (8)’1’b then put file(sysprint) skip edit (CNewNo,’ ’,IoField)(a(2),a(1),a); read file(Nos) into(IoField) keyto(CNewNo); end; close file(Nos); end ACR1; end;
At execution time, the input file, ACR.INP, could look like this:
NEWMAN,M.W.
GOODFELLOW,D.T.
MILES,R.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
BARTLETT,S.G.
CORY,G.
READ,K.M.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.F.
ELLIOTT,D.
HASTINGS,G.M.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
5640 C
89
29
13
01
A
23 D
A
A
36 D
A
55 X
14 D
4285 C
31 D
4928 C
Updating a REGIONAL(1) data set (continued)
Chapter 12. Defining and using regional data sets
285
Using REGIONAL(1) data sets
286
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
This chapter describes how you use Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM) data sets on your workstation—including Distributed Data Management (DDM), ISAM, and BTRIEVE data sets—for record-oriented data transmission.
Platform distinction
Three access methods are discussed in connection with the PL/I workstation products; however, not all three methods are supported on every platform. Use the following as a guideline: v
DDM—supported on AIX only v
ISAM—supported on AIX and Windows v
BTRIEVE—supported on Windows only
This chapter also describes the statements you use to access the three types of
VSAM data sets—sequential, keyed, and direct. In many ways, workstation VSAM is similar to the VSAM on the mainframe. On the workstation, the terms sequential, keyed and direct are similar to the VSAM entry-sequenced data set, key-sequenced data set, and relative record data set.
The chapter concludes with a series of examples showing the PL/I statements and
DD:ddname environment variables necessary to create and access workstation
VSAM data sets.
Moving data between the workstation and mainframe
To convert mainframe VSAM files to the corresponding DDM, ISAM, or BTRIEVE files, follow the procedure documented in the prolog for the LODVSAM utility.
Make sure you specify the appropriate access method
AMTHD(DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE).
To convert DDM, ISAM, or BTRIEVE files to corresponding mainframe VSAM files, follow the procedure documented in the prolog for the RELOAD utility. These utilities are supported on PL/I for Windows, but are not currently available on
PL/I for AIX.
Workstation VSAM organization
PL/I supports workstation VSAM sequential, keyed, and direct data sets. These correspond to PL/I consecutive, indexed, and relative data set organizations, respectively.
Both sequential and keyed access are possible with all three types of data sets.
With keyed data sets, the key, which is part of the logical record, is used for keyed access; keyed access is possible for direct data sets using relative record numbers.
Keyed access is also possible for sequential data sets using the sequential record value as a key.
All workstation VSAM data sets are stored on direct-access storage devices. The physical organization of workstation VSAM data sets differs from those used by other access methods.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
287
Workstation VSAM organization
Creating and accessing workstation VSAM data sets
Your PL/I application can create workstation VSAM data sets, or it can access
VSAM data sets created by other programs. When you open a file to be associated with a workstation VSAM data set, and that data set does not exist, PL/I creates it using the attributes and options you specify in the DECLARE statement or in a
DD:ddname environment variable.
When your application accesses an existing VSAM data set, PL/I determines its type—sequential, direct, or keyed.
The operation of writing the initial data into a newly-created VSAM data set is referred to as
loading
in this publication.
Are you using the right access method?
Use each of the access methods, DDM|ISAM|BTRIEVE, to access data sets that were created with that particular access method. For example, you cannot use the
ISAM access method to access data sets you created with the BTRIEVE access method.
Determining which type of workstation VSAM data set you need
Use the three different types of data sets according to the following purposes: v
Use
sequential data sets
for data that you access primarily in the order in which the records were created (or the reverse order).
v
Use
keyed data sets
when you normally access records through keys within the records (for example, a stock-control file where the part number is used to access a record).
v
Use
direct data sets
for data in which each item has a particular number, and you normally access the relevant record by that number (for example, a telephone system with a record associated with each number).
Accessing records in workstation VSAM data sets
You can access records in all types of workstation VSAM data sets either directly by means of a key or sequentially (backward or forward). You can also use a combination of the two ways, in which you select a starting point with a key and then read forward or backward from that point.
Table 15 on page 289 shows how data could be stored in the three different types
of workstation VSAM data sets and illustrates their respective advantages and disadvantages.
288
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM organization
Table 15. Types and advantages of workstation VSAM data sets
Data Set Type Method of
Loading
Method of
Reading
Method of
Updating
Sequential
Keyed
Direct
Pros and Cons
Sequentially
(forward only)
The sequential record value of each record can be obtained and used as a key
Either sequentially or randomly by key
SEQUENTIAL backward or forward
KEYED using the sequential record value
Positioning by key followed by sequential either backward or forward
KEYED by specifying key of record
SEQUENTIAL backward or forward in order of any index
Positioning by key followed by sequential reading either backward or forward
Sequentially starting from slot
1
KEYED specifying numbers as key
New records at end only
Access can be sequential or
KEYED
Record deletion allowed
KEYED specifying a key
SEQUENTIAL following positioning by key
Record deletion allowed
Record insertion allowed
KEYED specifying number of slot
Positioning by key followed by sequential writes
Sequential forward or backward omitting empty records
Advantages
Simple fast creation
Uses
For uses where data is primarily accessed sequentially
Advantages
Complete access and updating
Uses
For uses where access is related to key
Sequentially starting at a specified slot and continuing with next slot
Record deletion allowed
Record insertion into empty slots allowed
Advantages
Speedy access to record by number
Keyed specifying numbers as key
Disadvantages
Structure tied to numbering sequences
Uses
For use where records are accessed by number
Using keys for workstation VSAM data sets
All workstation VSAM data sets can have keys associated with their records. For keyed data sets, the key is a defined field within the logical record. For sequential data sets, the key is the sequential record value of the record. For relative record data sets, the key is a
relative record number
.
Using keys for workstation VSAM keyed data sets
Keys for keyed data sets are part of the logical records recorded on the data set.
You define the length and location of the keys when you create the data set.
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
289
Workstation VSAM organization
The ways you can reference the keys in the KEY, KEYFROM, and KEYTO options are as described under “KEY(expression) Option,” “KEYFROM(expression)
Option,” and “KEYTO(reference) Option” in the
PL/I Language Reference
.
Using sequential record values
Sequential record values allow you to use keyed access on a sequential data set associated with a KEYED SEQUENTIAL file.
BTRIEVE and ISAM
The sequential record values, or keys, are character strings of length 7, and their values are defined by workstation VSAM.
You cannot construct or manipulate sequential record values in PL/I; you can, however, compare their values in order to determine the relative positions of records within the data set. Sequential record values are not normally printable.
You can obtain the sequential record value for a record by using the KEYTO option, either on a WRITE statement when you are loading or extending the data set, or on a READ statement when the data set is being read. You can subsequently use a sequential record value obtained in either of these ways in the KEY option of a READ or REWRITE statement.
Using relative record numbers
Records in a direct data set are identified by a relative record number that starts at
1 and is incremented by 1 for each succeeding record. You can use these relative record numbers as keys for keyed access to the data set.
Keys used as relative record numbers are character strings of length 10. The character value of a source key you use in the KEY or KEYFROM option must represent an unsigned integer. If the source key is not 10 characters long, it is truncated or padded with blanks (interpreted as zeros) on the
left
. The value returned by the KEYTO option is a character string of length 10, with leading zeros suppressed.
Choosing a data set type
When planning your application, you must first decide which type of data set to use. There are three types of workstation VSAM data sets and five types of non-VSAM data sets available to you. Workstation VSAM data sets can provide all the functions of the other types of data sets, plus additional functions available only with workstation VSAM. Workstation VSAM can usually match, or even improve upon, the performance of other data set types. However, workstation
VSAM is more subject to performance degradation through misuse of functions.
Table 15 on page 289 shows you the possibilities available with each type of
workstation VSAM data set. When choosing between the workstation VSAM data set types, you should base your decision on the most common sequence in which your program accesses your data. You can use the following procedure to ensure a combination of data sets and indexes that provide the function you require:
1.
Determine the type of data and how it is accessed.
a.
Primarily sequentially — favors ESDS.
b.
Primarily by key — favors KSDS.
c.
Primarily by number — favors RRDS.
2.
Determine how you load the data set. Note that you must load a KSDS in key sequence; thus an ESDS with an
alternate index
path can be a more practical
290
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Choosing a data set type
alternative for some applications. Table 16 on page 292 shows types of
processing that you can use on alternate index paths
3.
Determine whether you require access through an
alternate index
path. These are only supported on KSDS and ESDS. If you require an
alternate index
path, determine whether the
alternate index
has unique or nonunique keys. The use of nonunique keys can limit key processing. However, it might also be impractical to assume that you use unique keys for all future records; if you attempt to insert a record with a nonunique key in an index that you have created for unique keys, it will cause an error.
4.
When you have determined the data sets and paths that you require, ensure
that the operations you have in mind are supported. Figure 18 shows the
workstation VSAM data sets and the file attributes that you can specify.
Do not try to access a dummy workstation VSAM data set, because you will receive an error message indicating that you have an undefined file.
Table 17 on page 295, Table 18 on page 298, and Table 19 on page 305 show the
statements allowed for sequential data sets, keyed data sets, and direct data sets, respectively.
INPUT
SEQUENTIAL
ESDS
KSDS
RRDS
Path(N)
Path(U)
OUTPUT
ESDS
RRDS
UPDATE
ESDS
KSDS
RRDS
Path(N)
Path(U)
KEYED SEQUENTIAL
ESDS
KSDS
RRDS
Path(N)
Path(U)
ESDS
KSDS
RRDS
ESDS
KSDS
RRDS
Path(N)
Path(U)
DIRECT
KSDS
RRDS
Path(U)
KSDS
RRDS
Path(U)
KSDS
RRDS
Path(U)
Key: ESDS
KSDS
Entry-sequenced data set
Key-sequenced data set
RRDS Relative record data set
Path(N) Alternate index path with nonunique keys
Path(U) Alternate index path with unique keys
You can combine the attributes on the left with those at the top of the figure for the data sets and paths shown.
For example, only an ESDS and an RRDS can be SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT.
PL/I does not support dummy VSAM data sets.
Figure 18. VSAM data sets and allowed file attributes
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
291
Choosing a data set type
Table 16. Processing allowed on alternate index paths
Base Cluster Type Alternate Index Key Type
KSDS Unique key
Processing
As normal KSDS
Nonunique key Limited keyed access
ESDS Unique key
Nonunique key
As KSDS
Limited keyed access
Restrictions
May not modify key of access.
May not modify key of access.
No deletion.
May not modify key of access.
No deletion.
May not modify key of access.
Defining files for workstation VSAM data sets
You define a workstation VSAM sequential data set by using a file declaration with the following attributes: dcl Filename file record input | output | update sequential buffered
[keyed] environment(options);
You define a workstation VSAM keyed data set by using a file declaration with the following attributes: dcl Filename file record input | output | update sequential | direct buffered | unbuffered
[keyed] environment(options);
You define a workstation VSAM direct data set by using a file declaration with the following attributes: dcl Filename file record input | output | update direct | sequential unbuffered | buffered
[keyed] environment(options);
The file attributes are described in the
PL/I Language Reference
for this product.
Options of the ENVIRONMENT attribute are discussed below.
Specifying options of the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute
Many of the options of the PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute affecting data set structure are not needed for workstation VSAM data sets. If you specify them, they are either ignored or are used for checking purposes. If those that are checked conflict with the values defined for the data set, the UNDEFINEDFILE condition is raised when an attempt is made to open the file.
The ENVIRONMENT options applicable to workstation VSAM data sets are:
292
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Defining files for workstation VSAM data sets
CONSECUTIVE
CTLASA
GENKEY
GRAPHIC
KEYLENGTH
KEYLOC
ORGANIZATION(CONSECUTIVE|INDEXED|RELATIVE)
RECSIZE
SCALARVARYING
VSAM
For a complete explanation of these ENVIRONMENT options and how to use
options that can be used with a DD statement, see “Specifying characteristics using
DD:ddname environment variables” on page 239.
Adapting existing programs for workstation VSAM
This section is intended primarily for PL/I for z/OS users who are transferring programs to the workstation.
In most cases, if your PL/I program uses files declared with ENVIRONMENT
(CONSECUTIVE) or ENVIRONMENT(INDEXED) or with no PL/I
ENVIRONMENT attribute, it can access workstation VSAM data sets without alteration. PL/I detects that a workstation VSAM data set is being opened and can provide the correct access.
You can readily adapt existing programs with CONSECUTIVE, INDEXED,
REGIONAL(1) or VSAM files for use with workstation VSAM data sets. Programs with consecutive files might not need alteration, and there is never any necessity to alter programs with indexed files unless the logic depends on EXCLUSIVE files.
Programs with REGIONAL(1) data sets require only minor revision.
The following sections tell you what modifications you might need to make in order to adapt files for the workstation.
Adapting programs using CONSECUTIVE files
There is no concept of fixed-length records in DDM, but there is in ISAM and
BTRIEVE. If your program relies on the RECORD condition to detect incorrect length records, it does not function in the same way using workstation VSAM data sets as it does with non-workstation VSAM data sets.
If the logic of the program depends on raising the RECORD condition when a record of an incorrect length is found, you must write your own code to check for the record length and take the necessary action. This is because records of any length up to the maximum specified are allowed in workstation VSAM data sets.
Adapting programs using INDEXED files
Compatibility is provided for INDEXED files. For files that you declare with the
INDEXED ENVIRONMENT option, PL/I associates the file with a workstation
VSAM keyed data set. UNDEFINEDFILE is raised if the data set is any other type.
Because mainframe ISAM record handling differs in detail from workstation VSAM record handling, workstation VSAM processing might not always give the required result.
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
293
Defining files for workstation VSAM data sets
You should remove dependence on the RECORD condition, and insert your own code to check for record length if this is necessary. You should also remove any checking for deleted records.
Adapting programs using REGIONAL(1) files
You can alter programs using REGIONAL(1) data sets to use workstation VSAM direct data sets. Remove REGIONAL(1) and any other implementation-dependent options from the file declaration and replace them with
ENV(ORGANIZATION(RELATIVE)). You should also remove any checking for deleted records, because workstation VSAM deleted records are not accessible to you.
Adapting programs using VSAM files
If you use the VSAM ENVIRONMENT option, the associated workstation VSAM data set must exist before the file is opened. You can create your data sets with a
simple program. Figure 19 is an example of creating a workstation VSAM keyed
data set.
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* NAME - ISAM0.PLI
/*
*/
*/
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Create an ISAM Keyed data set
/*
/*
*/
*/
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
NewVSAM: proc options(main); declare
NewFile keyed record output file env(organization(indexed) recsize(80) keylength(8) keyloc(17)
); open file(NewFile) title(’/keynames.dat’); close file(NewFile);
End NewVSAM;
Figure 19. Creating a workstation VSAM keyed data set
If the data set named KEYNAMES.DAT does not already exist, PL/I creates it with that name when the OPEN statement is executed.
294
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
The statements and options allowed for files associated with a workstation VSAM
sequential data set are shown in Table 17.
Table 17. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM sequential data sets
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
BUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
BUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
LOCATE based-variable
FILE(file-reference);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
SET(pointer-reference)
KEYTO(reference)
KEYTO(reference) or
KEY(expression)
3
KEYTO(reference) or
KEY(expression)
3
READ FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
2
IGNORE(expression)
KEY(expression)
3
KEYTO(reference) or
IGNORE(expression)
KEYTO(reference) or
KEY(expression)
3
KEYTO(reference) or
KEY(expression)
3
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
2
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
IGNORE(expression)
KEYTO(reference) WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
REWRITE
FILE(file-eference);
FROM(reference) and/or
KEY(expression)
3
DELETE FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEY(expression)
KEY(expression)
3
KEYTO(reference) or
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
IGNORE(expression)
KEYTO(reference)
KEY(expression)
3
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
295
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
Table 17. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM sequential data sets (continued)
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
Notes:
1
The complete file declaration would include the attributes FILE, RECORD, and
ENVIRONMENT; if you use either of the options KEY or KEYTO, it must also include the attribute KEYED.
2
The statement “READ FILE(file-reference);” is equivalent to the statement “READ
FILE(file-reference) IGNORE (1);”
3
The expression used in the KEY option must be a sequential record value, previously obtained by means of the KEYTO option.
Using a sequential file to access a workstation VSAM sequential data set
When a sequential data set is being loaded, the associated file must be opened for
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT. The records are stored in the order in which they are presented.
You can use the KEYTO option to obtain the sequential record value of each record as it is written. You can subsequently use these keys to achieve keyed access to the data set.
You can open a SEQUENTIAL file that is used to access a workstation VSAM sequential data set with either the INPUT or the UPDATE attribute. If you use either of the options KEY or KEYTO, the file must also have the KEYED attribute.
Sequential access occurs in the order that the records were originally loaded into the data set. You can use the KEYTO option on the READ statements to recover the sequential record value of the records that are read. If you use the KEY option, the record that is recovered is the one with the sequential record value you specify.
Subsequent sequential access continues from the new position in the data set.
For an UPDATE file, the WRITE statement adds a new record at the end of the data set. With a REWRITE statement, the record rewritten is the one with the specified sequential record value if you use the KEY option; otherwise, it is the record accessed on the previous READ.
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM sequential data set
Figure 20 on page 297 is an example of a program that defines and loads a
workstation VSAM sequential data set. You can also use this program to process a
DDM or SFS file by modifying the AMTHD specification.
The PL/I program writes the data set using a SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT file and a
WRITE FROM statement.
The sequential record values of the records could have been obtained during the writing for subsequent use as keys in a KEYED file. To do this, a suitable variable would have to be declared to hold the key and the WRITE...KEYTO statement used. For example:
296
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
dcl Chars char(7); /*DDM uses 4; BTRIEVE and ISAM use 7 as shown */ write file(Famfile) from (String) keyto(Chars); dcl Chars char(4); /* DDM uses 4 */ write file(Famfile) from (String) keyto(Chars);
The keys would not normally be printable, but could be retained for subsequent use.
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/*
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
/*
Define and load an ISAM sequential data set.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
The following commands are required to establish the environment variables to run this program:
SET DD:IN=ISAM1.INP,RECSIZE(38)
SET DD:FAMFILE=ISAM1.OUT,AMTHD(ISAM),RECSIZE(38)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* REMARKS: Restrict test to ASCII format.
/*
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
CREATE: proc options(main); put skip list(’START ISAM1 TEST’); dcl
FamFile file sequential output env(organization(consecutive)),
In file record input,
Eof bit(1) init(’0’b), i fixed(15),
String char(38); on endfile(In) Eof = ’1’b; read file(In) into (String); do i=1 by 1 while (¬Eof); put file(sysprint) skip edit (String) (a); write file(FamFile) from (String); read file(In) into (String); end; put skip edit(i-1,’ records processed ’)(a); put skip list(’END ISAM1 TEST’); end CREATE;
The input data for this program might look like this:
Fred
Andy
Susan
69
70
72
M
M
F
Figure 20. Defining and loading a workstation VSAM sequential data set
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
297
Using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
Updating a sequential data set
The program illustrated in Figure 20 on page 297 can be used to update a
workstation VSAM sequential data set. If it is run again, new records are added on the end of the data set.
You can rewrite existing records in a sequential data set, provided that the length of the record is not changed. You can use a SEQUENTIAL or KEYED
SEQUENTIAL update file to do this. If you use keys, they must be sequential record values from a previous WRITE or READ statement.
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
The statements and options allowed for workstation VSAM keyed data sets are
Table 18. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM keyed data sets
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
SET(pointer-reference)
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
BUFFERED
LOCATE based-variable
FILE(file-reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
BUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference);
FROM(reference) and/or
KEY(expression)
DELETE FILE(file-reference) KEY(expression)
298
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
Table 18. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM keyed data sets (continued)
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
KEY(expression)
DIRECT
BUFFERED
DIRECT
UNBUFFERED
DIRECT OUTPUT
BUFFERED
DIRECT OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
DIRECT
3
3
3
INPUT
INPUT
UPDATE
BUFFERED
DELETE
FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference)
KEY(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
KEY(expression)
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference)
KEY(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEY(expression);
DELETE FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
299
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
Table 18. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM keyed data sets (continued)
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
DIRECT
3
UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEY(expression);
DELETE FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
Notes:
1
The complete file declaration could include the attributes FILE and RECORD. If you use any of the options KEY, KEYFROM, or KEYTO, you must also include the attribute KEYED in the declaration.
2
The statement READ FILE(file-reference); is equivalent to the statement READ
FILE(file-reference) IGNORE(1);
3
Do not associate a DIRECT file with a workstation VSAM data set that has duplicate key capability.
Loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set
When a keyed data set is being loaded, you must open the associated file for
KEYED SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT. You must present the records in ascending key order, and you must use the KEYFROM option.
If a keyed data set already contains some records, and you open the associated file with the SEQUENTIAL and OUTPUT attributes, you can add records at the end of the data set only. Again, you must present the records in ascending key order, and you must use the KEYFROM option. In addition, the first record you present must have a key greater than the highest key present on the data set.
Figure 21 on page 301 is an example of a program that loads a workstation VSAM
keyed data set. Within the PL/I program, a KEYED SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT file is used with a WRITE...FROM...KEYFROM statement. The data is presented in ascending key order. A keyed data set must be loaded in this manner. You can also use this program to process a DDM or SFS file by modifying the AMTHD specification.
300
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Load an ISAM keyed data set.
*/
*/
/*
/*
/* USAGE
/* The following commands are required to establish */
/*
/* the environment variables to run this program:
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
SET DD:DIREC=ISAM2.OUT,AMTHD(ISAM)
SET DD:SYSIN=ISAM2.INP,RECSIZE(80)
/* */
/********************************************************************/
*/
*/
*/
*/
NAMELD: proc options(main); put skip list(’START ISAM2 TEST’); dcl Direc file record keyed sequential output env(organization(indexed) recsize(23) keyloc(1) keylength(20)
); dcl Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); dcl 1 IoArea,
5 Name char(20),
5 Number char(3); on endfile(sysin) Eof = ’1’b; open file(Direc); get file(sysin) edit(Name,Number) (a(20),a(3)); do while (¬Eof); write file(Direc) from(IoArea) keyfrom(Name); get file(sysin) edit(Name,Number) (a(20),a(3)); end; close file(Direc); put skip list(’END ISAM2 TEST’); end NAMELD;
Figure 21. Defining and loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
301
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
The input file for this program could be:
ACTION,G.
BAKER,R.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
CHEESMAN,D.
CORY,G.
ELLIOTT,D.
FIGGINS,S.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
HASTINGS,G.M.
KENDALL,J.G.
LANCASTER,W.R.
MILES,R.
NEWMAN,M.W.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.E.
SHEERS,C.D.
SURCLIFFE,M.
TAYLOR,G.C.
WONG, X-G.
WILTON,L.W.
WINSTONE,E.M.
VISWANATHAN, I.
162
152
248
141
336
875
413
205
391
294
624
233
450
515
114
241
472
407
509
404
307
411
Defining and loading a workstation VSAM keyed data set (continued)
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a workstation VSAM keyed data set
You can open a SEQUENTIAL file that is used to access a keyed data set with either the INPUT or the UPDATE attribute.
For READ statements without the KEY option, the records are recovered in ascending key order. You can obtain the key of a record recovered in this way by using the KEYTO option.
If you use the KEY option, the record recovered by a READ statement is the one with the specified key. This READ statement positions the data set at the specified record; subsequent sequential reads recover the following records in key sequence.
WRITE statements with the KEYFROM option are allowed for KEYED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE files. You can make insertions anywhere in the data set, without respect to the position of any previous access. The KEY condition is raised if an attempt is made to insert a record with the same key as a record that already exists on the data set.
REWRITE statements with or without the KEY option are allowed for UPDATE files. If you use the KEY option, the record that is rewritten is the record with the specified key; otherwise, it is the record that was accessed by the previous READ statement.
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation VSAM keyed data set
You can open a DIRECT file that is used to access a workstation VSAM keyed data set with the INPUT, OUTPUT, or UPDATE attribute.
302
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
If you use a DIRECT OUTPUT file to add records to the data set, and if an attempt is made to insert a record with the same key as a record that already exists, the
KEY condition is raised.
If you use a DIRECT INPUT or DIRECT UPDATE file, you can read, write, rewrite, or delete records in the same way as for a KEYED SEQUENTIAL file.
Figure 22 shows one method you can use to update a keyed data set. You can also
use this program to process a DDM or SFS file by modifying the AMTHD specification.
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/*
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
/*
Update an ISAM keyed data set by key.
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
/*
/*
The following commands are required to establish the environment variables to run this program:
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
SET DD:DIREC=ISAM2.OUT,AMTHD(ISAM)
SET DD:SYSIN=ISAM3.INP,RECSIZE(80)
/*
/*
Note: This program is using isam2.out file created by the previous sample program NAMELD.
*/
*/
/********************************************************************/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
DIRUPDT: proc options(main); put skip list(’ISAM3 TEST START’); dcl Direc file record keyed update env(organization(indexed) recsize(23) keyloc(1) keylength(20)
); dcl 1 IoArea,
5 NewArea,
10 Name char(20),
10 Number char(3),
5 Code char(1); dcl oncode builtin; dcl Eof bit(1) init(’0’b); on endfile(sysin) Eof = ’1’b; on key(Direc) begin; if oncode=51 then put file(sysprint) skip edit
(’Not found: ’,Name)(a(15),a); if oncode=52 then put file(sysprint) skip edit
(’Duplicate: ’,Name)(a(15),a); end; open file(Direc) direct update;
Figure 22. Updating a workstation VSAM keyed data set
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
303
Workstation VSAM keyed data sets
get file(sysin) edit (Name,Number,Code) (a(20),a(3),a(1)); do while (¬Eof); put file(sysprint) skip edit (’ ’,Name,’#’,Number,’ ’,Code)
(a(1),a(20),a(1),a(3),a(1),a(1)); select (Code); when(’A’) write file(Direc) from(NewArea) keyfrom(Name); when(’C’) rewrite file(Direc) from(NewArea) key(Name); when(’D’) delete file(Direc) key(Name); end; otherwise put file(sysprint) skip edit
(’Invalid code: ’,Name) (a(15),a); end; get file(sysin) edit (Name,Number,Code) (a(20),a(3),a(1)); close file(Direc); put file(sysprint) page;
*/ /* Display the updated file open file(Direc) sequential input;
Eof = ’0’b; on endfile(Direc) Eof = ’1’b; read file(Direc) into(NewArea); do while(¬Eof); put file(sysprint) skip edit(Name,Number)(a,a); read file(Direc) into(NewArea); end; close file(Direc); put skip list(’ISAM3 TEST END’); end DIRUPDT;
An input file for this program might look like this one:
NEWMAN,M.W.
GOODFELLOW,D.T.
MILES,R.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
BARTLETT,S.G.
CORY,G.
READ,K.M.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.E.
ELLIOTT,D.
HASTINGS,G.M.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
GABRIELLI, M.
516C
889A
D
209A
183A
D
001A
X
D
291C
D
439C
X
Updating a workstation VSAM keyed data set (continued)
The program uses a DIRECT update file and alters the data according to a code that is passed into the records in the file SYSIN:
A
C
D
Add a new record
Change the number of an existing name
Delete a record
The program reads the name, number, and code and takes action according to the value of the code. A KEY ON-unit is used to handle any incorrect keys. When the updating is finished the file DIREC is closed and reopened with the attributes
SEQUENTIAL INPUT. The file is then read sequentially and printed.
304
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
The statements and options allowed for workstation VSAM direct data sets are:
Table 19. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM direct data sets
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
KEYFROM(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
BUFFERED
LOCATE based-variable
FILE(file-reference);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
SET(pointer-reference)
KEYFROM(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
SEQUENTIAL INPUT
UNBUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
BUFFERED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference);
2
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference);
DELETE FILE(file-reference);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference);
READ FILE(file-expression);
2
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference);
DELETE
FILE(file-reference);
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEYFROM(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
FROM(reference) and/or
KEY(expression)
KEY(expression)
KEY(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
IGNORE(expression)
KEYFROM(expression) or
KEYTO(reference)
KEY(expression)
KEY(expression)
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
305
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
Table 19. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM direct data sets (continued)
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
DIRECT OUTPUT
BUFFERED
DIRECT OUTPUT
UNBUFFERED
DIRECT INPUT
BUFFERED
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
DIRECT INPUT
UNBUFFERED
DIRECT UPDATE
BUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference)
KEY(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
DIRECT UPDATE
UNBUFFERED
READ FILE(file-reference)
SET(pointer-reference)
KEY(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEY(expression);
DELETE FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
READ FILE(file-reference)
INTO(reference)
KEY(expression);
REWRITE
FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEY(expression);
DELETE FILE(file-reference)
KEY(expression);
WRITE FILE(file-reference)
FROM(reference)
KEYFROM(expression);
306
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
Table 19. Statements and options allowed for loading and accessing workstation VSAM direct data sets (continued)
File declaration
1
Valid statements, with options you must include
Other options you can also include
Notes:
1
The complete file declaration would include the attributes FILE and RECORD. If you use any of the options KEY, KEYFROM, or KEYTO, your declaration must also include the attribute KEYED.
2
The statement READ FILE(file-reference); is equivalent to the statement READ
FILE(file-reference) IGNORE(1);
Loading a workstation VSAM direct data set
When a direct data set is being loaded, you must open the associated file for
OUTPUT. Use either a DIRECT or a SEQUENTIAL file.
For a DIRECT OUTPUT file, each record is placed in the position specified by the relative record number (or key) in the KEYFROM option of the WRITE statement
(see “Using keys for workstation VSAM data sets” on page 289).
For a SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT file, use WRITE statements with or without the
KEYFROM option. If you specify the KEYFROM option, the record is placed in the specified slot; if you omit it, the record is placed in the slot following the current position. There is no requirement for the records to be presented in ascending relative record number order. If you omit the KEYFROM option, you can obtain the relative record number of the written record by using the KEYTO option.
If you want to load a direct data set sequentially, without use of the KEYFROM or
KEYTO options, you are not required to use the KEYED attribute.
It is an error to attempt to load a record into a position that already contains a record. If you use the KEYFROM option, the KEY condition is raised; if you omit it, the ERROR condition is raised.
Figure 23 on page 308 is an example of a program that defines and loads a
workstation VSAM direct data set. In the PL/I program, the data set is loaded with a DIRECT OUTPUT file and a WRITE...FROM...KEYFROM statement is used.
You can also use this program to process a DDM or SFS file by modifying the
AMTHD specification.
If the data were in order and the keys in sequence, it would be possible to use a
SEQUENTIAL file and write into the data set from the start. The records would then be placed in the next available slot and given the appropriate number. The number of the key for each record could be returned using the KEYTO option.
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
307
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
/**********************************************************************/
/* DESCRIPTION */
/*
/*
Load an ISAM direct data set.
*/
*/
/* USAGE
/* The following commands are required to establish
/*
/* the environment variables to run this program:
*/
*/
/*
/*
SET DD:SYSIN=ISAM4.INP,RECSIZE(80)
SET DD:NOS=ISAM4.OUT,AMTHD(ISAM),RECCOUNT(100)
/*********************************************************************/
CREATD: proc options(main);
*/
*/
*/
*/ put skip list(’ISAM4 TEST START’); dcl Nos file record output direct keyed env(organization(relative) recsize(20) ); dcl Sysin file input record; dcl 1 In_Area,
2 Name char(20),
2 Number char( 2); dcl Sysin_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl Ntemp fixed(15); on endfile (Sysin) Sysin_Eof = ’1’b; open file(Nos); read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); do while(¬Sysin_Eof);
Ntemp = Number; write file(Nos) from(Name) keyfrom(Ntemp); put file(sysprint) skip edit (In_Area) (a); read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); end; close file(Nos); put skip list(’ISAM4 TEST END’); end CREATD;
This could be the input file for this program:
ACTION,G.
12
BAKER,R.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
13
28
CHEESNAME,L.
CORY,G.
ELLIOTT,D.
FIGGINS,E.S.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
11
36
85
43
25
HASTINGS,G.M.
KENDALL,J.G.
LANCASTER,W.R.
MILES,R.
NEWMAN,M.W.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.E.
SHEERS,C.D.
SURCLIFFE,M.
TAYLOR,G.C.
WILTON,L.W.
WINSTONE,E.M.
31
24
64
23
40
55
14
21
42
47
44
37
Figure 23. Loading a workstation VSAM direct data set
308
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
Using a SEQUENTIAL file to access a workstation VSAM direct data set
You can open a SEQUENTIAL file that is used to access a direct data set with either the INPUT or the UPDATE attribute. If you use any of the options KEY,
KEYTO, or KEYFROM, your file must also use the KEYED attribute.
Using READ statements
For READ statements without the KEY option, the records are recovered in ascending relative record number order. Any empty slots in the data set are skipped.
If you use the KEY option, the record recovered by a READ statement is the one with the relative record number you specify. Such a READ statement positions the data set at the specified record; subsequent sequential reads recover the following records in sequence.
Using WRITE statements
WRITE statements with or without the KEYFROM option are allowed for KEYED
SEQUENTIAL UPDATE files. You can make insertions anywhere in the data set, regardless of the position of any previous access. For WRITE with the KEYFROM option, the KEY condition is raised if an attempt is made to insert a record with the same relative record number as a record that already exists on the data set. If you omit the KEYFROM option, an attempt is made to write the record in the next slot, relative to the current position. The ERROR condition is raised if this slot is not empty.
You can use the KEYTO option to recover the key of a record that is added by means of a WRITE statement without the KEYFROM option.
Using the REWRITE or DELETE statements
REWRITE statements, with or without the KEY option, are allowed for UPDATE files. If you use the KEY option, the record that is rewritten is the record with the relative record number you specify; otherwise, it is the record that was accessed by the previous READ statement.
You can also use DELETE statements, with or without the KEY option, to delete records from the data set.
Using a DIRECT file to access a workstation VSAM direct data set
A DIRECT file used to access a direct data set can have the OUTPUT, INPUT, or
UPDATE attribute. You can read, write, rewrite, or delete records exactly as though you were using a KEYED SEQUENTIAL file.
Figure 24 on page 310 shows a direct data set being updated. A DIRECT UPDATE
file is used and new records are written by key. You do not need to check for the records being empty, because the empty records are not available under workstation VSAM. You can also use this program to process a DDM or SFS file by modifying the AMTHD specification.
In the second half of the program, the updated file is printed. Again, you do not need to check for the empty records as there is in REGIONAL(1).
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
309
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
/********************************************************************/
/* */
/*
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
/*
Update an ISAM direct data set by key.
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* USAGE
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/* Note: This sample program is using the direct ISAM data set
/*
The following commands are required to establish the environment variables to run this program.
SET DD:SYSIN=ISAM5.INP,RECSIZE(80)
SET DD:NOS=ISAM4.OUT,AMTHD(ISAM),APPEND(Y)
*/ isam4.out created by the previous sample program CREATD.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* */
/********************************************************************/
UPDATD: proc options(main); put skip list(’ISAM5 TEST START’); dcl Nos file record keyed env(organization(relative)); dcl Sysin file input record; dcl Sysin_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl Nos_Eof bit (1) init(’0’b); dcl 1 In_Area,
2 Name char(20),
2 (CNewNo,COldNo) char( 2),
2 In_Area_1 char( 1),
2 Code char( 1); dcl IoField char(20); dcl NewNo fixed(15); dcl OldNo fixed(15); dcl oncode builtin; on endfile (Sysin) sysin_Eof = ’1’b; open file (Nos) direct update;
Figure 24. Updating a workstation VSAM direct data set by key
310
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
/* trap errors */ on key(Nos) begin; if oncode=51 then put file(sysprint) skip edit
(’Not found:’, Name) (a(15), a); if oncode=52 then put file(sysprint) skip edit
(’Duplicate:’, Name) (a(15), a); end;
/* update the direct data set */ read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); do while(¬Sysin_Eof); if CNewNo¬=’ ’ then
NewNo = CNewNo; else
NewNo = 0; if COldNo¬=’ ’ then
OldNo = COldNo; else
OldNo = 0; select(Code); when (’A’) write file(Nos) keyfrom(NewNo) from(Name); when (’C’) do; delete file(Nos) key(OldNo); write file(Nos) keyfrom(NewNo) from(Name); end; end; read file(Sysin) into(In_Area); end; when(’D’) delete file(Nos) key(OldNo); otherwise put file(sysprint) skip list (’Invalid code:’,Name); close file(Sysin),file(Nos);
/* open and print updated file */ open file(Nos) sequential input; on endfile (Nos) Nos_Eof = ’1’b;
Updating a workstation VSAM direct data set by key (continued)
Chapter 13. Defining and using workstation VSAM data sets
311
Workstation VSAM direct data sets
read file(Nos) into(IoField) keyto(CNewNo); do while(¬Nos_Eof); put file (sysprint) skip edit (CNewNo,IoField)(a(5),a); read file(Nos) into(IoField) keyto(CNewNo); end; close file(Nos); put skip list(’ISAM5 TEST END’); end UPDATD;
An input file for this program might look like this:
NEWMAN,M.W.
GOODFELLOW,D.T.
MILES,R.
HARVEY,C.D.W.
BARTLETT,S.G.
CORY,G.
READ,K.M.
WONG,X-G.
PITT,W.H.
ROLF,D.F.
ELLIOTT,D.
HASTINGS,G.M.
BRAMLEY,O.H.
VISWANATHAN, I.
5640 C
89
29
13
01
20
A
23 D
A
A
36 D
A
C
55 X
14 D
4285 C
31 D
4928 C
4115 D
Updating a workstation VSAM direct data set by key (continued)
312
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 5. Using PL/I with databases
Chapter 14. Open Database Connectivity
Choosing embedded SQL or ODBC .
Environment-specific information.
Using the supplied include files .
Setting licensing information for ODBC Driver
Sample program using supplied include files .
Understanding java Dclgen terminology .
Creating a table declaration and host structure .
Selecting a table and generation a PL/I declaration .
Modifying and saving the generated PL/I declaration .
Including data declarations in your program 327
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
313
314
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 14. Open Database Connectivity
This chapter contains information to help you use the Open Database Connectivity
(ODBC) interface in your PL/I applications. With ODBC, not only can you access data from a variety of databases and file systems that support the ODBC interface, but you can do so dynamically.
Your PL/I applications that use embedded SQL for database access must be processed by a preprocessor for a particular database and have to be recompiled if the target database changes. Because ODBC is a call interface, there is no compile-time designation of the target database as there is with embedded SQL.
Not only can you avoid having multiple versions of your application for multiple databases, but your application can dynamically determine which database to target.
Introducing ODBC
ODBC is a specification for an application program interface (API) that enables applications to access multiple database management systems using Structured
Query Language (SQL).
ODBC permits maximum interoperability: a single application can access many different database management systems. This enables you to develop, compile, and ship an application without targeting a specific type of data source. Users can then add the database drivers, which link the application to the database management systems of their choice.
Background
The X/Open Company and the SQL Access Group jointly developed a specification for a callable SQL interface, referred to as the
X/Open Call Level Interface
. The goal of this interface is to increase portability of applications by enabling them to become independent of any one database vendor's programming interface.
ODBC was originally developed by Microsoft for Microsoft operating systems based on a preliminary draft of X/Open CLI. Since this time, other vendors have provided ODBC drivers that run on other platforms, such as OS/2 and UNIX systems.
The descriptions and examples in this chapter apply to ODBC Version 3.0. For
detailed information about ODBC include files, see “Using the supplied include files” on page 319.
ODBC Driver Manager
When you use the ODBC interface, your application makes calls through a Driver
Manager. The Driver Manager dynamically loads the necessary driver for the database server to which the application connects. The driver, in turn, accepts the call, sends the SQL to the specified data source (database), and returns any result.
Choosing embedded SQL or ODBC
Embedded SQL and ODBC have advantages particular to them. Some of the advantages of embedded SQL are:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
315
Introducing ODBC
v
Static SQL usually provides better performance than dynamic SQL. It does not have to be prepared at run time, thus reducing both processing and network traffic.
v
With static SQL, database administrators have to grant users access to a package only rather than access to each table or view that is used.
Some of the advantages of ODBC are: v It provides a consistent interface regardless of what kind of database server is used.
v
You can have more than one concurrent connection.
v
Applications do not have to be bound to each database on which they execute.
Although PL/I for Windows does this bind for you automatically, it binds automatically to only one database. If you want to choose which database to connect to dynamically at run time, you must take extra steps to bind to a different database.
Using the ODBC drivers
To enable ODBC for data access in PL/I, you must install the ODBC Driver
Manager and drivers by selecting the “ODBC Drivers” component during installation.
Important:
During the installation process, a license file for the ODBC driver is installed on your system.
A file named ivib.lic
is installed in
x
:\
plidir
\ODBC
, where
x
and
plidir
are the drive and directory respectively, where PL/I for Windows is installed.
You must keep this file in the install directory because it is used when you run
how to use a function call to trigger the verification.
Online help
Online help is available for the ODBC drivers, both as a reference book and as context-sensitive help. The specific file names and so on may differ; you should note the names given in this section for the file names for PL/I.
Environment-specific information
The ODBC drivers are 32-bit drivers. The required network software supplied by your database system vendors must be 32-bit compliant.
Driver names
The drivers for Windows should be at the ODBC 3.0 level or higher.
ODBC.INI
is a subkey of the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\\SOFTWARE\\ODBC key in the
Windows registry. The
ODBC.INI
subkey is maintained by the ODBC Administrator, which is located in the main PL/I program group. Since Windows can support multiple users, the ODBC.INI subkey is stored under unique user keys in the registry.
Configuring data sources
A
data source
consists of a DBMS and any remote operating system and network necessary to access it. After the drivers have been installed, the data source must be configured using the ODBC Administrator program, which is located in the
316
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Introducing ODBC
main PL/I program group. Because Windows can host multiple users, each user must configure their own data sources. For detailed configuration information for the specific driver you wish to configure, refer to the appropriate section of the on-line help.
Connecting to a data source
Your ODBC application needs to connect to the data source either using a logon dialog box or a connection string, depending on the data source.
Using a logon dialog box
Some ODBC applications display a logon dialog box when you are connecting to a data source. In these cases, the data source name has already been specified.
In the logon dialog box, do the following:
1.
Type the name of the remote database or select the name of the remote database from the
Database Name
drop-down list.
You must have cataloged any database you want to access from the client.
2.
If required, type your user name (authorization ID).
3.
If required, type your password.
If you leave your user name and password blank, the ODBC application assumes you have already logged on using SQLLOGN2 (under DOS) or using
User Profile Management. If you have not, the application returns an error. You must either type your user name and password in the dialog box or log on using SQLLOGN2 and STARTDRQ (under DOS) or using User Profile
Management.
4.
Click OK to complete the logon and to update the values in ODBC.INI.
Using a connection string
If your application requires a connection string to connect to a data source, you must specify the data source name that tells the driver which ODBC.INI section to use for the default connection information. Optionally, you may specify attribute=value pairs in the connection string to override the default values stored in ODBC.INI. These values are not written to ODBC.INI.
You can specify either long or short names in the connection string. The connection string has the form:
DSN=data_source_name[;attribute=value[;attribute=value]...]
An example of a connection string for INFORMIX 5 is
DSN=INFORMIX TABLES;DB=PAYROLL
Error messages
Error messages can come from the following sources: v
An ODBC driver v
The database system v
The Driver Manager.
An error reported on an ODBC driver has the following format:
[vendor] [ODBC_component] message
ODBC_component is the component in which the error occurred. For example, an error message from INTERSOLV's SQL Server driver would look like this:
[INTERSOLV] [ODBC SQL Server driver] Login incorrect.
Chapter 14. Open Database Connectivity
317
Introducing ODBC
If you get this type of error, check the last ODBC call your application made for possible problems or contact your ODBC application vendor.
An error that occurs in the data source includes the data source name, in the following format:
[vendor] [ODBC_component] [data_source] message
With this type of message, ODBC_component is the component that received the error from the data source indicated. For example, you may get the following message from an Oracle data source:
[INTERSOLV] [ODBC Oracle driver] [Oracle] ORA-0919: specified length too long for CHAR column
If you get this type of error, you did something incorrectly with the database system. Check your database system documentation for more information or consult your database administrator. In this example, you would check your Oracle documentation.
The Driver Manager is an application that establishes connections with drivers, submits requests to drivers, and returns results to applications. An error that occurs in the Driver Manager has the following format:
[vendor] [ODBC DLL] message vendor can be Microsoft or INTERSOLV. For example, an error from the Microsoft
Driver Manager might look like this:
[Microsoft] [ODBC DLL] Driver does not support this function
ODBC APIs from PL/I
Included with VA PL/I are ODBC include files that make it easier for you to access data bases with ODBC drivers using ODBC calls from your PL/I programs. This section describes the supplied ODBC include files, how ODBC API argument types map to PL/I data descriptions, and additional PL/I functions and considerations applicable to ODBC APIs.
For details on the ODBC APIs, see the online help.
For specific information related to an ODBC driver, such as the ODBC level or extensions supported by that driver, please refer to the specifications available with that driver.
The following illustrate how to access ODBC from PL/I programs:
“CALL interface convention” on page 319
“Using the supplied include files” on page 319
“Mapping of ODBC C types” on page 320
“Setting licensing information for ODBC Driver Manager/driver” on page 321
LIB Files:
When you link your ODBC applications, you must include the import library
ODBC32.LIB
, which is included in the ODBC SDK (from Microsoft).
318
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
ODBC APIs from PL/I
CALL interface convention
Programs making ODBC calls must be compiled with the DEFAULT(BYVALUE) and LIMITS(EXTNAME(31)) compile-time options.
Using the supplied include files
The include files described and listed here are for ODBC Version 3.0.
Table 20. Supplied include files for ODBC
File name
ODBCSQL.CPY
ODBCEXT.CPY
ODBCTYPE.CPY
ODBCUCOD.CPY
ODBCSAMP.PLI
Description
Main include for ODBC functions
Include for Microsoft's ODBC extensions
Include for ODBC type definitions
Include unicode
Sample program
The supplied include files define the symbols for constant values described for
ODBC APIs, mapping constants used in calls to ODBC APIs to symbols specified in ODBC guides so that argument (input and output) and function return values can be specified and tested. These files should be included in your PL/I program in order to use ODBC API calls.
In PL/I, names longer than 31 characters are truncated or abbreviated to 31
characters. Table 21 shows the names that are longer than 31 characters, and their
corresponding PL/I names.
Table 21. ODBC names truncated or abbreviated for PL/I
ODBC C #define symbol > 31 characters long
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTRAINT_DEFERRABLE
Corresponding PL/I name
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTR_DEFERRABLE
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_DEFERRED SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTR_INITLY_DEFERD
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_IMMEDIATE SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTR_INITLY_IMMEDT
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTRAINT_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_AD_CONSTRAINT_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_API_ODBC3_ALL_FUNCTIONS_SIZE
SQL_AT_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_DEFERRED
SQL_AD_ADD_CONSTR_NON_DEFERRABL
SQL_AD_CONSTR_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_API_ODBC3_ALL_FUNCTIONS_SZ
SQL_AT_CONSTR_INITIALLY_DEFRD
SQL_AT_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_AT_CONSTRAINT_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_AT_CONSTRAINT_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_AT_DROP_TABLE_CONSTRAINT_CASCADE
SQL_AT_DROP_TABLE_CONSTRAINT_RESTRICT
SQL_CA_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CA_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_CA_CONSTRAINT_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_CDO_CONSTRAINT_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_CDO_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CDO_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_CDO_CONSTRAINT_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_AT_CONSTR_INITIALLY_IMMED
SQL_AT_CONSTR_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_AT_CONSTR_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_AT_DROP_TBL_CONSTR_CASCADE
SQL_AT_DROP_TBL_CONSTR_RESTRICT
SQL_CA_CONSTR_INITLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CA_CONSTR_INITLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_CA_CONSTR_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_CDO_CONSTR_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_CDO_CONSTR_INITLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CDO_CONSTR_INITLY_IMMEDIAT
SQL_CDO_CONSTR_NON_DEFERRABLE
Chapter 14. Open Database Connectivity
319
ODBC APIs from PL/I
Table 21. ODBC names truncated or abbreviated for PL/I (continued)
ODBC C #define symbol > 31 characters long Corresponding PL/I name
SQL_CT_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CT_CONSTRAINT_INITIALLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_CT_CONSTRAINT_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_CT_CONSTRAINT_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_DESC_DATETIME_INTERVAL_PRECISION
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DAY_TO_HOUR
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DAY_TO_MINUTE
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DAY_TO_SECOND
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_HOUR_TO_MINUTE
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_HOUR_TO_SECOND
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_MINUTE_TO_SECOND
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_YEAR_TO_MONTH
SQL_FORWARD_ONLY_CURSOR_ATTRIBUTES1
SQL_FORWARD_ONLY_CURSOR_ATTRIBUTES2
SQL_MAX_ASYNC_CONCURRENT_STATEMENTS
SQL_MAXIMUM_CONCURRENT_ACTIVITIES
SQL_SQL92_FOREIGN_KEY_DELETE_RULE
SQL_SQL92_FOREIGN_KEY_UPDATE_RULE
SQL_SQL92_NUMERIC_VALUE_FUNCTIONS
SQL_SQL92_RELATIONAL_JOIN_OPERATORS
SQL_TRANSACTION_ISOLATION_OPTION
SQL_TRANSACTION_READ_UNCOMMITTED
SQL_CT_CONSTR_INITLY_DEFERRED
SQL_CT_CONSTR_INITLY_IMMEDIATE
SQL_CT_CONSTR_NON_DEFERRABLE
SQL_CT_CONSTR_NAME_DEFINITION
SQL_DESC_DATETIME_INTERVAL_PREC
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DAY_TO_HR
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DY_TO_MIN
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_DY_TO_SEC
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_HR_TO_MIN
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_HR_TO_SEC
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_MN_TO_SEC
SQL_DL_SQL92_INTERVAL_YR_TO_MTH
SQL_FORWARD_ONLY_CURSOR_ATTRIB1
SQL_FORWARD_ONLY_CURSOR_ATTRIB2
SQL_MAX_ASYNC_CONCURRENT_STMTS
SQL_MAXIMUM_CONCURRENT_ACTIVITI
SQL_SQL92_FOREIGN_KEY_DEL_RULE
SQL_SQL92_FOREIGN_KEY_UPD_RULE
SQL_SQL92_NUMERIC_VALUE_FUNCT
SQL_SQL92_RELATIONAL_JOIN_OPER
SQL_TRANSACTION_ISOLATION_OPTN
SQL_TRANSACTION_READ_UNCOMMITTD
Mapping of ODBC C types
The data types specified in ODBC APIs are defined in terms of ODBC C types in the API definitions. The following table shows corresponding PL/I declarations for the indicated ODBC C types of the arguments.
Table 22. Mapping of ODBC C Type to PL/I Data Declarations
ODBC C type PL/I form
SQLSMALLINT FIXED BIN(15)
SQLUSMALLINT FIXED BIN(16)
UNSIGNED
SQLINTEGER FIXED BIN(31)
SQLUINTEGER FIXED BIN(31)
UNSIGNED
SQLREAL
SQLFLOAT
FLOAT
DOUBLE
SQLDOUBLE
SQLCHAR *
SQLHDBC
DOUBLE
CHAR(*) VARZ
BYADDR
POINTER
Description
Signed short integer (2 byte binary)
Unsigned short integer (2 byte binary)
Signed long integer (4 byte binary)
Unsigned long integer (4 byte binary)
Floating point (4 bytes)
Floating point (8 bytes)
Floating point (8 bytes)
Pointer to unsigned character.
Connection handle
320
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
ODBC APIs from PL/I
Table 22. Mapping of ODBC C Type to PL/I Data Declarations (continued)
ODBC C type PL/I form Description
SQLHENV
SQLHSTMT
SQLHWND
POINTER
POINTER
POINTER
Environment handle
Statement handle
Window handle
Setting licensing information for ODBC Driver Manager/driver
When using the ODBC Driver Manager/drivers , you need to call ibmODBCLicInfo immediately following a call to the
SQLConnect
,
SQLDriverConnect
, or
SQLBrowseConnect functions. You need to pass the argument 'hdbc' to ibmODBCLicInfo like this: sql_rc = ibmODBCLicInfo(myHDBC);
The ibmODBCLicInfo routine is included in the ibmodlic.lib
library which must be included in the link step of your program. Refer to the sample program, odbcsamp.pli
for more information.
Sample program using supplied include files
A sample PL/I program is supplied illustrating the use of some common ODBC functions, including:
SQLAllocEnv
SQLAllocConnect
SQLAllocStmt
SQLBindCol
SQLBindParameter
SQLConnect
SQLDisconnect
SQLError
SQLExecDirect
SQLExecute
SQLFetch
SQLFreeConnect
SQLFreeEnv
SQLFreeStmt
SQLGetInfo
SQLNativeSQL
SQLPrepare
SQLTransact
Example Notes:
1.
Use the DEFAULT(BYVALUE) and LIMITS(EXTNAME(31)) options to compile
ODBC programs.
2.
For Windows, a sample PL/I program is supplied in the ..
\samples\ directory.
Use the command file bldodbc.bat
found in the same directory to compile and link the test program.
3.
The ODBC include files are available in the
\include\ subdirectory.
Chapter 14. Open Database Connectivity
321
Sample program
322
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 15. Using java Dclgen
PL/I for Windows comes with a declarations generator (java Dclgen) that produces
DECLARE statements you can use in your PL/I applications.
java Dclgen users
In order to use java Dclgen in the Windows environment, you must have the Java
Developer's Toolkit (V1.3 or later) and DB2 installed on your system.
The java Dclgen tool: v
Generates a table declaration and puts it into a file that you can include in your program.
v
Gets information about the definition of the table and each column within the table from the database catalog.
The java Dclgen now supports Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory services when you upgrade to DB2 Universal Database Version 8 or later.
v
Uses the information to produce a complete SQL DECLARE statement for the table (or view) and a matching PL/I structure declaration.
To use the declarations in your program, use the SQL INCLUDE statement.
If you wish to invoke java Dclgen and your table names include DBCS characters, you need to use a terminal that can input and display double-byte characters.
Understanding java Dclgen terminology
The following information explains the terms used in java Dclgen dialog boxes:
Tables
The unqualified table name for which you want java Dclgen to produce SQL data declarations. Optionally, you can qualify the table name by entering the table qualifier in the
Table Qualifier
entry field. The tool generates a two-part table name from the table name and table qualifier.
Table qualifier
The table name qualifier. If you do not specify this value, your logon ID is assumed to be the table qualifier.
Output Path for Save
The path targeted for the declarations that java Dclgen produces.
Output Filename for Save
The filename targeted for the declarations that java Dclgen produces.
Structure name
Name of the generated data structure which can be up to 31 characters in length.
If you leave this field blank, java Dclgen generates a name that contains the table or view name with a DCL prefix. If the table or view name consists of a
DBCS string, the prefix consists of DBCS characters.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
323
Understanding java Dclgen terminology
Field Name Prefix
Prefix name generated for fields in the javaDclgen output. The value you choose can be up to 28 characters in length and is used as the prefix for the field name.
For example, if you choose ABCDE, the field names generated are ABCDE001,
ABCDE002, and so on.
If you leave this field blank, the field names are the same as the column names in the table or view. If the name is a DBCS string, DBCS equivalents of the suffix numbers are generated.
A table or column name in the DECLARE statement is generated as a non-delimited identifier unless the name contains special characters and is not a
DBCS string.
If you are using an SQL reserved word as an identifier, you must edit the java
Dclgen output in order to add the appropriate SQL delimiters.
PL/I java Dclgen support
Variable names and data attributes generated by java Dclgen are derived from the information contained in databases.
Table 23. Declarations generated by java Dclgen
SQL Data Type
SMALLINT
INTEGER
DECIMAL(p,s) or NUMERIC(p,s)
FLOAT
CHAR(1)
CHAR(n)
VARCHAR(n)
LONG VARCHAR
GRAPHIC(n)
VARGRAPHIC(n)
LONG VARGRAPHIC
DATE
TIME
TIMESTAMP
CLOB(nnn)
BLOB(nnn)
DBCLOB(nnn)
PL/I
BIN FIXED(15)
BIN FIXED(31)
DEC FIXED(p,s)
BIN FLOAT(53)
CHAR(1)
CHAR(n)
CHAR(n) VARYING
CHAR(32700) VARYING
GRAPHIC(n)
GRAPHIC(n) VARYING
GRAPHIC(16350) VARYING
CHAR(10)
CHAR(8)
CHAR(26)
SQL TYPE IS CLOB(nnn)
SQL TYPE IS BLOB(nnn)
SQL TYPE IS DBCLOB(nnn)
Creating a table declaration and host structure
You can start java Dclgen in one of two ways:
1.
Enter 'java javaDclgen' at the MS/DOS prompt.
2.
Double-click on the java Dclgen icon in the main PL/I program group.
324
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Creating a table declaration and host structure
Selecting a database
A window appears and gives you a list of available databases in the
Databases
list box. To select a database, move your mouse pointer to the database entry and click your left mouse button once. This should highlight your selection.
Just below the
Databases
list box is the
Table Qualifier (Required)
entry field.
Figure 25. Selecting a database
This field is filled in with the current user's ID. You can use this default table qualifier or you can replace it with another valid table qualifier.
To continue, click on the
Get a List of Tables for the Database
button.
Selecting a table and generation a PL/I declaration
The
Tables
list box should be populated with the tables created in the database by the table qualifier. You can select a table in the database by clicking on it with your mouse pointer.
Chapter 15. Using java Dclgen
325
Creating a table declaration and host structure
Figure 26. Display of tables created by the qualifier
You can also choose to specify a level 1 name in the
Structure Name
field as well as a field name prefix to be used in each level 2 name in the structure. For example, if you specify MYSTRUCT as the field name prefix, the level 2 names are
MYSTRUCT001, MYSTRUCT002, and so on.
Click on the
Generate Include Structure for Table
button to continue.
Modifying and saving the generated PL/I declaration
The next window you should see has a text area containing the generated PL/I declaration. You can edit the contents of this area directly if needed.
326
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Creating a table declaration and host structure
Figure 27. Generated PL/I declarations
For PL/I, java Dclgen saves the contents of the text area in a file in the ibmpliw\include using the table name as the filename with an extension of
.CPY
.
If you decide to save the generated declaration somewhere other than this directory, click on the
Change Location and Save
button. You can change the output directory and filename using the
Save As...
dialog.
You can change the table qualifier or editor name (including any extensions) by typing over the default information.
Note:
If the table name contains any special characters that are not part of a filename, you should specify a new filename.
Exiting java Dclgen
To exit or quit java Dclgen, click on the
End
buttons successively until the application ends.
Including data declarations in your program
Use the following SQL INCLUDE statement to insert the table declaration and
PL/I structure declaration produced by java Dclgen into your source program: exec sql include name ;
For example, to include a description for the table BALKBJ.ORG, code: exec sql include org ;
If for some reason java Dclgen produces some unexpected results, you can use the editor to tailor the output to your specific needs.
Chapter 15. Using java Dclgen
327
Creating a table declaration and host structure
328
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 6. Advanced topics
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance
Display modification dates (/D) .
Override environment variables (/E) .
Specify description file (/F) .
Suppress sign-on banner (/NOLOGO) .
Print macro and target definitions (/P) .
Suppress command display (/S) .
Change target modification dates (/T) .
Targets in several description blocks.
Characters that modify special macros .
Modified special macros example.
Inference-rule path specifications .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
Characters that modify commands .
Dash command modifier examples .
Suppress command display (@) .
At sign (@) command modifier example .
Execute command for dependents (!) .
Exclamation point (!) command modifier examples .
Macros and inference rules in TOOLS.INI .
Chapter 17. Improving performance
Selecting compile-time options for optimal performance .
Summary of compile-time options that improve performance .
Coding for better performance .
DATA-directed input and output .
PACKAGEs versus nested PROCEDUREs .
Example with nested procedures .
Named constants versus static variables .
Example with optimal code but no meaningful names .
Avoiding calls to library routines .
329
Using the compiler user exit .
Procedures performed by the compiler user exit 369
Activating the compiler user exit .
The IBM-supplied compiler exit, IBMUEXIT .
Customizing the compiler user exit .
Writing your own compiler exit .
Structure of global control blocks .
Writing the initialization procedure .
Writing the message filtering procedure .
Writing the termination procedure .
Using the CICS run-time user exit .
Using data conversion tables .
Chapter 19. Building dynamic link libraries
Specifying exported names under Windows .
Sample program to build a DLL .
Using FETCH and RELEASE in your main program .
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on
Using the ILIB environment variable .
Windows 98 AUTOEXEC.BAT file .
Examples specifying ILIB parameters .
330
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
Understanding linkage considerations .
General-purpose register implications .
Examples of passing parameters .
Passing conforming parameters to a routine 398
Example using SYSTEM linkage .
STDCALL linkage (Windows only) .
Examples using the STDCALL convention.
Using WinMain (Windows only) .
Examples using the CDECL convention .
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications
Maintaining your environment .
Invoking non-PL/I routines from a PL/I MAIN 415
Invoking PL/I routines from a non-PL/I main .
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
What is the Java Native Interface (JNI)?
JNI Sample Program #1 - 'Hello World' .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Useful PL/I Compiler Options .
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Linking the Dynamic Link Library .
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
JNI Sample Program #2 - Passing a String .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Linking the Dynamic Link Library .
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
JNI Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer .
Step 1: Writing the Java Program .
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program .
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program .
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I
Linking the Dynamic Link Library .
Step 5: Running the Sample Program .
Determining equivalent Java and PL/I data types 431
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
Comparing S/390 and workstation sort programs 433
Specifying the sorting field .
Specifying the records to be sorted .
Determining whether the sort was successful .
Getting diagnostic information .
The IBM_SORT_RC environment variable .
The IBM_SORT_DIR environment variable .
The IBM_SORT_MSGFILE environment variable 441
E15 — input-handling routine (sort exit E15) 442
E35 — output-handling routine (sort exit E35) 444
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
The PLISAXA built-in subroutine .
The PLISAXB built-in subroutine .
. 455 standalone_declaration .
. 455 document_type_declaration.
. 456 attribute_predefined_reference.
. 456 attribute_character_reference .
. 456 start_of_CDATA_section .
. 457 content_predefined_reference .
. 457 content_character_reference.
. 457 processing_instruction .
. 457 unknown_attribute_reference .
. 458 start_of_prefix_mapping .
Parameters to the event functions .
Coded character sets for XML documents .
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications
Applying attributes and options .
Using built-in functions with MLE .
Performing date calculations and comparisons .
Comparing dates with like patterns .
Comparing dates with differing patterns .
Comparisons involving the DATE attribute and a literal .
Comparisons involving the DATE attribute and a non-literal .
Part 6. Advanced topics
331
332
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
The Program Maintenance Utility (NMAKE) automates the process of updating project files. NMAKE compares the modification dates for one set of files (the target files) with those of another set of files (the dependent files). If any dependent files have changed more recently than the target files, NMAKE executes a series of commands to bring the targets up-to-date.
Why use NMAKE?
The most common use of NMAKE is to automate the process of updating a project after you make a change to a source file. Large projects tend to have many source files. Often, only a few of your source files need to be compiled when you make a change. You set up a special text file, called a
description
file (or
makefile
), that tells
NMAKE: v
Which files depend on others v
Which commands, such as compile and link commands, need to be carried out to bring your program up-to-date.
This use of NMAKE is only one example of its power. By building suitable description files, you can use NMAKE to: v
Make backups v
Configure data files v
Run programs when data files are modified.
Running NMAKE
Run NMAKE by typing nmake on the operating-system command line. Supply input to NMAKE by either of two methods: v Enter the input directly on the command line.
v Put your input into a
command file
(a text file, also called a
response file
) and enter the file name on the command line.
Press
Ctrl+C
at any time during an NMAKE run to return to the operating system.
Using the command line
When using NMAKE at the command line, keep the following in mind: v
All fields are optional.
v
NMAKE always looks first in the current directory for a description file called makefile
. If makefile does not exist, NMAKE uses the
filename
given with the /F
(specify description file) option (see “Specify description file (/F)” on page 336).
Command-line syntax
nmake
options macrodefinitions targets
/F
filename
options
Specifies options that modify NMAKE's actions.
macrodefinitions
Lists macro definitions for NMAKE to use. Macro definitions that contain spaces must be enclosed by double quotation marks.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
333
Running NMAKE targets
Specifies the names of one or more target files to build. If you do not list any targets, NMAKE builds the first target in the description file.
/F
filename
Gives the name of the description file where you specify file dependencies and which commands to execute when a file is out-of-date.
The following example: nmake /s "program = flash" sort.exe search.exe
v Invokes NMAKE with the /s option v
Defines a macro, assigning the string "flash" to the macro "program" v
Specifies two targets: sort.exe
and search.exe
By default, NMAKE uses the file named makefile as the description file.
Command-line help
To display NMAKE help, type nmake /?
at the prompt. The appropriate copyright statement appears, along with the following:
Usage:
NMAKE @commandfile
NMAKE /help
NMAKE [/nologo] [/acdeinpqrst?] [/f makefile] [/x stderrfile]
[macrodefs][targets]
What the options stand for
/a Force all targets to be built
/c
/d
/e
/i
Cryptic mode; suppress sign-on banner & warning messages
Display modification dates
Environment variables override macros in the makefile
Ignore exit codes of commands invoked
/n
/p
/q
/r
No execute mode; display commands only
Print macro definitions & target descriptions
Query if target is up to date; for use in batch files
Inference Rules from ’TOOLS.INI’ to be ignored
/s
/t
/?
/help
Silent execution of commands
Touch targets with current date & time
Help message
Help message
/nologo Do not display sign-on banner
Using NMAKE command files
A command file is a
response file
used to extend command-line input to NMAKE.
You can split input to NMAKE between the command line and a command file.
Use the name of a command file (preceded by @) where you normally type the input information on the command line.
Why use a command file?
Use a command file for: v
Complex and long commands you type frequently v
Strings of command-line arguments, such as macro definitions, that exceed the limit for command-line length.
A command file is not the same as a description file. For information about
description files, see “Description files” on page 337.
334
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Running NMAKE
Command file syntax
To provide input to NMAKE with a command file, type nmake @
commandfile
In the
commandfile
field, enter the name of a file containing the same information as is normally entered on the command line.
NMAKE treats line breaks that occur between arguments as spaces. Macro definitions can span multiple lines if you end each line except the last with a backslash (\). Macro definitions that contain spaces must be enclosed by quotation marks, just as if they were entered directly on the command line.
Example
The following is a command file called update
:
/s "program \
= flash" sort.exe search.exe
You can use this command file by typing the following command: nmake @update
This runs NMAKE using: v The /s option v The macro definition "program = flash" v
The targets specified as sort.exe
and search.exe
v
The description file makefile by default
The backslash allows the macro definition to span two lines.
NMAKE options
You can use several options with NMAKE. Keep the following in mind when using options: v Option characters are not case sensitive; /I and /i are equivalent.
v You can use either a slash or dash before the option characters; -a and /a are equivalent.
Produce error file (/X)
Syntax:
/X stderrfile
This option produces a standard error file.
Build all targets (/A)
Syntax:
/A
This option builds all specified targets even if they are not out-of-date with respect to their dependent files.
See “Description files” on page 337.
Suppress messages (/C)
Syntax:
/C
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
335
NMAKE options
This option suppresses display of the NMAKE sign-on banner, nonfatal error messages, and warning messages. To suppress the sign-on banner without suppressing other messages, use the /NOLOGO option.
Display modification dates (/D)
Syntax:
/D
This option displays the modification date of each file when the dates of target and dependent files are checked.
See “Description files” on page 337.
Override environment variables (/E)
Syntax:
/E
This option disables inherited macro redefinition.
NMAKE
inherits
all current environment variables as macros, which can be redefined in a description file. The /E option disables any redefinition — the inherited macro always has the value of the environment variable.
Specify description file (/F)
Syntax:
/F
filename
This option specifies
filename
as the name of the description file to use. If a dash (-) is entered instead of a file name, NMAKE reads a description file from the standard input device, typically the keyboard.
If a filename is not specified, it defaults to makefile
.
Display help (/HELP or /?)
Syntax:
/HELP or /?
This option displays a brief summary of NMAKE syntax.
Ignore exit codes (/I)
Syntax:
/I
This option ignores exit codes (also called error level or return codes) returned by programs such as compilers or linkers called by NMAKE. If this option is not specified, NMAKE ends when any program returns a nonzero exit code.
Display commands (/N)
Syntax:
/N
This option causes NMAKE commands to be displayed but not executed. Use the
/N option to: v
Check which targets are out-of-date with respect to their dependents v
Debug description files
Suppress sign-on banner (/NOLOGO)
Syntax:
/NOLOGO
336
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
NMAKE options
This option suppresses the sign-on banner display when NMAKE is started. If you want to suppress nonfatal error messages and warnings as well, use the suppress messages (/C) option.
Print macro and target definitions (/P)
Syntax:
/P
This option writes out all macro definitions and target definitions. Output is sent to the standard output device (typically the display).
Return exit code (/Q)
Syntax:
/Q
This option causes NMAKE to return either of the following: v
An exit code of zero if all targets built during an NMAKE run are up-to-date v
An exit code other than zero if they are not up-to-date
Use this option to run NMAKE from within a batch file.
Ignore TOOLS.INI file (/R)
Syntax:
/R
This option ignores the following: v
All inference rules and macros contained in the
TOOLS.INI
file v
All predefined inference rules and macros
Suppress command display (/S)
Syntax:
/S
This option suppresses the display of commands as they are executed by NMAKE.
It does not suppress the display of messages generated by the commands themselves.
The /N command (Display Commands) takes precedence over the /S option. If you use /N and /S together, commands are displayed but not executed.
Change target modification dates (/T)
Syntax:
/T
This option changes or “touches” the modification dates for out-of-date target files to the current date. No commands are executed, and the target file is left unchanged.
Description files
NMAKE uses a description file to determine what to do. In its simplest form, a description file tells NMAKE which files depend on others and which commands need to be executed if a file changes.
A description file looks like this:
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
337
Description files
targets
...:
dependents
...
command
:
targets
... :
dependents
...
command
Description blocks
A dependent relationship between files is defined in a
description block
. A description block indicates the relationship among various parts of the program. It contains commands to bring all components up to date. The description file can contain up to 1048 description blocks.
Description File
┌──────────────┐
│ Description │
│ Block 1 │ │
├──────────────┼─────┘
┌──────── 1
│
│ Descr Blk 2 │
├──────────────┼─────┐
│ : │
├──────────────┤
│ Descr Blk n │
│ │
└──────────────┘
│
│
│
│
└───────── 2
Description Block
┌────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│targets... : dependents...
│
│ command
│ command
│ command
│ :
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ │
└────────────────────────────┘
│
│
Special features
The following are special features of description files and blocks: v
Description files can contain macro definitions and use macros in description blocks. Macros allow easy substitution of one text string for another.
v
Description files can contain inference rules. Inference rules allow NMAKE to infer which commands to execute based on the filename extensions used for targets and dependents.
v
You can specify directories for NMAKE to search for dependent files by using the following syntax: targets : {directory1;directory2...}dependents
NMAKE searches the current directory first, then
directory1
,
directory2
, and so on.
v A command can be placed on the same line as the target and dependent files by using a semicolon (;) as depicted below: targets... : dependents... ; command v
A long command can span several lines if each line ends with a backslash ( \ ): command \ continuation of command v
The execution of a command can be modified if you precede the command with special characters.
v
If you do not specify a command in a description block, NMAKE looks for an inference rule to build the target.
v
Wild card characters (* and ?) can be used in description blocks. For example, the following description block compiles all source files with the .
PLI extension: astro.exe : *.pli
pli $**
338
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Description files
v
NMAKE expands the *.
pli specification into the complete list of PL/I files in the current directory. $** is a complete list of dependents specified for the current target.
v
NMAKE uses several punctuation characters in its syntax. To use one of these characters as a literal character, place an escape character ( ^ ) in front of it. For
a list of punctuation characters, see “Escape characters” on page 351.
v Normally a target file can appear in only one description block. A special syntax allows you to use a target in several description blocks.
v
A special syntax allows you to determine the drive, path, base name, and extension of the first dependent file in a description block.
Targets in several description blocks
Using a file as a target in more than one description block causes NMAKE to end.
You can overcome this limitation by using two colons (::) as the target/dependent separator instead of one colon.
The following description block is permissible:
X :: A command
X :: B command
The following causes NMAKE to end:
X : A command
X : B command
It is permissible to use single colons if the target/dependent lines are grouped above the same commands. The following is permissible:
X : A
X : B command
Double colon (::) target/dependent separator example
target.lib :: a.asm b.asm c.asm
ml a.asm b.asm c.asm
ilib target a.obj b.obj c.obj
target.lib :: d.pli e.pli
pli d.pli
pli e.pli
ilib target d.obj e.obj
These two description blocks both update the library named target.lib
. If any of the assembly-language files have changed more recently than the library file,
NMAKE executes the commands in the first block to assemble the source files and update the library. Similarly, if any of the PL/I language files have changed,
NMAKE executes the second group of commands to compile the PL/I files and update the library.
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
339
Using macros
Using macros
Macros provide a convenient way to replace one string with another in the description file. The text is automatically replaced each time NMAKE is run. This feature makes it easy to change text throughout the description file without having to edit every line that uses the text.
Two common uses of macros are: v To create a standard description file for several projects. The macro represents the file names in commands. These file names are defined when you run
NMAKE. When you switch to a different project, changing the macro changes the file names NMAKE uses throughout the description file.
v
To control the options that NMAKE passes to the compiler, assembler, or linker.
When using a macro to specify the options, you can quickly change the options throughout the description file in one easy step.
A macro can be defined:
In a description file
On the command line
In TOOLS.INI
Through inheritance from environment variables
Macros example
program = flash c = ilink options =
$(program).exe : $(program).obj
$c $(options) $(program).obj;
The example above defines three macros. The description block executes the following commands: flash.exe : flash.obj
ilink flash.obj;
Special features
Macros have the following special features: v
When using a macro, you can substitute text in the macro itself.
v
Several macros have been predefined for special purposes.
v
If a macro is defined more than once, precedence rules govern which definition is used.
v
You can also put macros into your
TOOLS.INI
file.
Macros in a description file
Before using a macro, you need to define it, either on the NMAKE command line or in your description file. Description file macro definitions look like this: macroname = macrostring
Macro names can be any combination of alphanumeric characters and the underscore character (_), and they are case-sensitive. A macro string can be any string of characters.
The first character of the macro name must be the first character on the line.
NMAKE ignores any spaces before or after the equal sign (=).
340
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using macros
The macro string can be a null string and can contain embedded spaces. Do not enclose the macro string in quotation marks in the description file; quotation marks are used only when you define macros on the command line.
Macros on the command line
Before using a macro, you need to define it, either on the NMAKE command line or in your description file. Command-line macro definitions look like this: macroname=macrostring
No spaces can surround the equal sign. If you embed spaces, NMAKE might misinterpret your macro. If your macro string contains embedded spaces, enclose it in double quotation marks (") like this: macroname="macro string"
You can also enclose the entire macro definition in double quotation marks (") like this:
"macroname = macro string"
Macro names can be any combination of alphanumeric characters and the underscore character (_), and they are case-sensitive. A macro string can be any string of characters or a null string.
Inherited macros
NMAKE
inherits
all current environment variables as macros. For example, if you have a PATH environment variable defined as
PATH = C:\TOOLS\BIN, the string
C:\TOOLS\BIN is substituted when you use PATH in the description file.
You can redefine inherited macros by including a line such as the example above in a description file. While NMAKE is executing, the macro takes on the redefined definition. When NMAKE terminates, however, the environment variable resumes its original value.
The Override Environment Variables (/E) option disables inherited macro redefinition. If you use this option, NMAKE ignores any attempt to redefine an inherited macro.
The macro name, for any macros that you define, is case sensitive. For example, consider this macro:
UPPER=UpperCase
In this example, $(UPPER) returns the value, but $(upper) does not. Inherited macro names (i.e. those created automatically from environment variables) must always be UPPERCASE.
Defined macros
After you have defined a macro, you can use it anywhere in your description file with the following syntax:
$(macroname)
The parentheses are not required if the macro name is only one character long. To use a dollar sign ($) without using a macro, enter two dollar signs ($$), or use the caret (^) before the dollar sign as an escape character.
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
341
Using macros
When NMAKE runs, it replaces all occurrences of $(macroname) with the defined macro string. If the macro is undefined, nothing is substituted. After a macro is defined, you can cancel it only with the !UNDEF directive.
Macro substitutions
Just as you use macros to substitute text within a description file, you use the following syntax to substitute text within a macro:
$(macroname: string1 = string2)
Every occurrence of
string1
is replaced by
string2
in
macroname
. Spaces between the colon and
string1
are considered part of
string1
. If
string2
is a null string, all occurrences of
string1
are deleted from the macro. The colon (:) must immediately follow
macroname
.
The replacement of
string1
with
string2
in the macro is not a permanent change. If you use the macro again without a substitution, you get the original unchanged macro.
Example
SOURCES = one.pli two.pli three.pli
program.exe : $(SOURCES:.pli=.obj) ilink $**;
The example above defines a macro called SOURCES, which contains the names of three PL/I source files. With this macro, the target/dependent line substitutes the
.
obj extension for the .
pli extension. Thus, NMAKE executes the following command: ilink one.obj two.obj three.obj;
$** is a special macro that translates to all dependent files for a given target.
Special macros
NMAKE predefines several macros. The first six macros below return one or more file specifications for the files in the target/dependent line of a description block.
Except where noted, the file specification includes the path of the file, the base filename, and the filename extension.
Macro Value
$@
The specification of the target file.
$*
$**
$?
The base name (without extension) of the target file. Path information is also returned if the path was specified as part of the target filename. This macro cannot be used in a dependent list.
The specifications of the dependent files.
$<
The specifications for only those dependent files that are out-of-date with respect to the targets.
The specification of a single dependent file that is out-of-date with respect to the targets. This macro is used only in inference rules.
$$@
The file specification of the target that NMAKE is currently evaluating.
This is a dynamic dependency parameter, used only in dependent lists.
$(AS)
The string MASM, which is the command to run the Macro Assembler
(MASM). You can redefine this macro to use a different command.
342
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Special macros
$(MAKE)
The command name used to run NMAKE. This macro is used to invoke
NMAKE recursively. If you redefine this macro, NMAKE issues a warning message.
NMAKE executes the command line in which $(MAKE) appears, even if the display commands (/N) option is on.
$(MAKEFLAGS)
The NMAKE options currently in effect. You cannot redefine this macro.
The special macros $** and $$@ are the only exceptions to the rule that macro names longer than one character must be enclosed in parentheses.
You can append characters to any of the first six macros in this list to modify the meaning of the macro. However, you cannot use macro substitutions in these macros.
Special macros examples
trig.lib : sin.obj cos.obj arctan.obj
!ilib trig.lib $?
In this example, the macro $? represents the names of all dependent files that are out-of-date with respect to the target file. The exclamation point (!) preceding the
ILIB command causes NMAKE to execute the ILIB command once for each dependent file in the list. As a result of this description, the ILIB command causes
NMAKE to execute the ILIB command once for each dependent file in the list. As a result of this description, the ILIB command is executed up to three times, each time replacing a module with a newer version.
DIR=c:\include
$(DIR)\globals.inc : globals.inc
copy globals.inc $@
$(DIR)\types.inc : types.inc
copy types.inc $@
$(DIR)\macros.inc : macros.inc
copy macros.inc $@
This example shows how to update a group of include files. Each of the files, globals.inc
, types.inc
, and macros.inc
, in the directory c:\include depends on its counterpart in the current directory. If one of the include files is out-of-date,
NMAKE replaces it with the file of the same name from the current directory.
The following description file, which uses the special macro $$@, is equivalent:
DIR=c:\include
$(DIR)\globals.inc $(DIR)\types.inc $(DIR)\macros.inc : $$(@F)
!copy $? $@
The special macro $$(@F) signifies the file name (without the path) of the current target.
When NMAKE evaluates the description block, it evaluates the three targets, one at a time, with respect to their dependents. Thus, NMAKE first checks whether c:\include\globals.inc
is out-of-date compared with globals.inc
in the current directory. If so, it executes the command to copy the dependent file globals.inc
to the target. NMAKE repeats the procedure for the other two targets.
Note that on the command line, the macro $? refers to the dependent for this target. The macro $@ specifies the full file specification of the target file.
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
343
Special macros
File-specification parts
A full file specification gives the base name of the file, the file-name extension, and the path. The path provides the disk-drive identifier and the sequence of directories needed to locate the file on the disk.
For example, the file specification c:\source\prog\sort.obj
has the following parts:
Path Name
Base File Name c:\source\prog sort
File-Name Extension .obj
Characters that modify special macros
The following six macros all resolve to a file specification (or possibly several file specifications for $** and $?):
$* $@ $** $< $?
$$@
You can append characters to any of these macros to modify the file name returned by the macro. Depending on which character you use, parts of the full file specification are returned:
File Part Returned D
Appended Character
F B R
File Path
Base File Name
File Name Extension
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Modified special macros example
If the macro $@ has the value c:\source\prog\sort.obj
then the following values are returned for the modified macro:
Macro Value
$(@D)
c:\source\prog
$(@F)
sort.obj
$(@B)
sort
$(@R)
c:\source\prog\sort
Modified macros are always longer than a single character — they must be enclosed by parentheses when used.
Macro precedence rules
When the same macro is defined in more than one place, the definition with the highest priority is used:
2
3
Priority
Definition
1 (Highest)
Command line
Description file
Environment variables
344
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Special macros
4
TOOLS.INI
file
5 (Lowest)
Predefined macros (such as CC and AS)
If you invoke NMAKE with the Overriding Macro Definitions (/E) option, macros defined by environment variables take precedence over those defined in a description file.
Inference rules
Inference rules are templates from which NMAKE infers what to do with a description block when no commands are given. Only those extensions defined in a .SUFFIXES list can have inference rules. The extensions .
c
, .
obj
, .
asm
, and .
exe are automatically included in .SUFFIXES.
PL/I programmers
You must add PL/I file extensions manually using the .SUFFIXES pseudotarget.
See “.SUFFIXES Pseudotarget” on page 350.
When NMAKE encounters a description block with no commands, it looks for an inference rule that specifies how to create the target from the dependent files, given the two file extensions. Similarly, if a dependent file does not exist, NMAKE looks for an inference rule that specifies how to create the dependent from another file with the same base name.
NMAKE applies an inference rule only if the base name of the file it is trying to create matches the base name of a file that already exists.
In effect, inference rules are useful only when there is a one-to-one correspondence between the files with the "from" extension and the files with the "to" extension.
You cannot, for example, define an inference rule that inserts a number of modules into a library.
The use of inference rules eliminates the need to put the same commands in several description blocks. For example, you can use inference rules to specify a single pli command that changes any PL/I source file (with a .
pli extension) to an object file (with a .
obj extension).
You define an inference rule by including text of the following form in your description file or in your
TOOLS.INI
file — see “Special Features”.
.fromext.toext: commands
:
The elements of the inference rule are:
fromext
The file-name extension for dependent files to build a target
toext
The file-name extension for target files to be built
commands
The commands to build the
toext
target from the
fromext
dependent.
For example, an inference rule to convert PL/I source files (with the .
pli extension) to PL/I object files (with the .
obj extension) is
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
345
Inference rules
.pli.obj: pli $<
The special macro $< represents the name of a dependent out-of-date relative to the target.
Special features
v You can specify a path where NMAKE should look for target and dependent files used in inference rules.
v
Inference rules are predefined for compiling and linking C programs, and for assembling programs.
v
NMAKE looks for inference rules in the
TOOLS.INI
file if it cannot find a rule in a description file.
v
Only those extensions defined in a .SUFFIXES list can have inference rules. The extensions .
c
, .
obj
, .
asm
, and .
exe are automatically included in .SUFFIXES.
v
You must add PL/I file extensions manually using the .SUFFIXES pseudotarget.
See “.SUFFIXES Pseudotarget” on page 350.
Inference rules example
.obj.exe: ilink $<; example1.exe: example1.obj
example2.exe: example2.obj
ilink /co example2,,,libv3.lib
The first line above defines an inference rule that causes the ILINK command to create an executable file whenever a change is made in the corresponding object file. The file name in the inference rule is specified with the special macro $< so that the rule applies to any .
obj file with an out-of-date executable file.
When NMAKE does not find any commands in the first description block, it checks for a rule that might apply and finds the rule defined on the first two lines of the description file. NMAKE applies the rule, replacing $< with example1.obj
when it executes the command, so that the ILINK command becomes ilink example1.obj;
NMAKE does not search for an inference rule when examining the second description block, because a command is explicitly given.
Inference-rule path specifications
When defining an inference rule, you can indicate to NMAKE where to look for target and dependent files. Use the following syntax:
{frompath}.fromext{topath}.toext
commands
:
NMAKE looks in the directory specified by
frompath
for files with the
fromext
extension. It executes the commands to build files with the
toext
extension in the directory specified by
topath
.
346
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Inference rules
Predefined inference rules
NMAKE predefines several inference rules:
Table 24. NMAKE Predefined Inference Rules
Inference Rule
.c.obj
.c.exe
.asm.obj
Command Action
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) /c $*.c
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) $*.c
$(AS) $(AFLAGS) $*;
Default
icc /c $*.c
icc $*.c
masm $*; v
The first two rules automatically compile and link C programs.
v
The last rule automatically assembles programs.
v
The above are the most often used predefined inference rules. For a complete list of predefined inference rules, execute a makefile and specify the
/p option. All available inference rules will be displayed.
Directives
Using directives, you can construct description files similar to batch files. NMAKE provides directives that: v
Conditionally execute commands v
Display error messages v
Include the contents of other files v
Turn some NMAKE options on or off
Each directive begins with an exclamation point ( ! ) in the first column of the description file. Spaces can be placed between the exclamation point and the directive keyword.
The list below describes the directives:
!IF
expression
Executes the statements between the !IF keyword and the next !ELSE or
!ENDIF directive if
expression
evaluates to a nonzero value.
The
expression
used with the !IF directive can consist of integer constants, string constants, or exit codes returned by programs. Integer constants can use the C unary operators for numerical negation ( - ), one's complement
( ~ ), and logical negation ( ! ). You can also use any of the C binary operators listed below:
+
-
Operator
Description
Addition
Subtraction
/
*
%
&
|
^^
Multiplication
Division
Modulus
Bitwise AND
Bitwise OR
Bitwise XOR
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
347
Directives
&&
||
<<
>>
Logical AND
Logical OR
Left shift
Right shift
==
!=
Equality
Inequality
<
>
Less than
Greater than
<=
Less than or equal to
>=
Greater than or equal to v
You can use parentheses to group expressions.
v
Values are assumed to be decimal values unless specified with a leading
0 (octal) or leading 0x (hexadecimal).
v
Strings are enclosed by quotation marks ( " ). You can use the equality
( == ) and inequality ( != ) operators to compare two strings.
v
You can invoke a program in an expression by enclosing the program name in square brackets ( [ ] ). The exit code returned by the program is used in the expression.
!ELSE
Executes the statements between the !ELSE and !ENDIF directives if the statements preceding the !ELSE directive were not executed.
!ENDIF
Marks the end of the !IF, !IFDEF, or !IFNDEF block of statements.
!IFDEF
macroname
Executes the statements between the !IFDEF keyword and the next !ELSE
or !ENDIF directive if
macroname
is defined in the description file. If a macro has been defined as null, it is still considered to be defined.
!IFNDEF
macroname
Executes the statements between the !IFNDEF keyword and the next !ELSE
or !ENDIF directive if
macroname
is not defined in the description file.
!UNDEF
macroname
Undefines a previously defined macro.
!ERROR
text
Prints text and then stops execution.
!INCLUDE
filename
Reads and evaluates the file
filename
before continuing with the current description file. If
filename
is enclosed by angle brackets (<>), NMAKE searches for the file in the directories specified by the INCLUDE macro; otherwise, it looks only in the current directory. The INCLUDE macro is initially set to the value of the INCLUDE environment variable.
!CMDSWITCHES {+|-}
opt
Turns on or off one of four NMAKE options: /D, /I, /N, and /S. If no options are specified, the options are reset to the values they had when
NMAKE was started. To turn an option on, precede it with a plus sign (+); to turn it off, precede it with a minus sign (-). This directive updates the
MAKEFLAGS macro.
See “Special macros” on page 342.
348
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Directives
Directives example
!INCLUDE <infrules.txt>
!CMDSWITCHES +D winner.exe:winner.obj
!IFDEF DEBUG
! IF "$(DEBUG)"=="y" ilink /de winner.obj;
! ELSE ilink winner.obj;
! ENDIF
!ELSE
! ERROR Macro named DEBUG is not defined.
!ENDIF
The directives in this example do the following: v
The !INCLUDE directive causes the file infrules.txt
to be read and evaluated as if it were part of the description file.
v
The !CMDSWITCHES directive turns on the /D option, which displays the dates of the files as they are checked.
v
If winner.exe
is out-of-date with respect to winner.obj
, the !IFDEF directive checks to see whether the macro DEBUG is defined. If it is defined, the !IF
directive checks to see whether it is set to y. If it is, the linker is invoked with the /DE option; otherwise, it is invoked without the /DE. If the DEBUG macro is not defined, the !ERROR directive prints the message and NMAKE stops executing.
Pseudotargets
A
pseudotarget
is a target in a description block that is not a file. Instead, it is a name that serves as a "handle" for building a group of files or executing a group of commands. In the following example, UPDATE is a pseudotarget:
UPDATE: *.*
!copy $** a:\product
When NMAKE evaluates a pseudotarget, it always considers the dependents to be out-of-date. In the description above, NMAKE copies each of the dependent files to the specified drive and directory.
NMAKE predefines several pseudotargets for special purposes.
See “Predefined pseudotargets.”
Predefined pseudotargets
NMAKE predefines several pseudotargets that provide special rules within a description file:
.SILENT Pseudotarget
Syntax:
.SILENT : dependents...
This pseudotarget suppresses the display of executed commands for a single description block. The /S option does the same thing for all description blocks.
See “Suppress command display (/S)” on page 337.
.IGNORE Pseudotarget
Syntax:
.IGNORE : dependents...
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
349
Directives
This pseudotarget ignores exit codes returned by programs for a single description block. The /I option does the same thing for all description blocks.
See “Ignore exit codes (/I)” on page 336.
.SUFFIXES Pseudotarget
Syntax:
.SUFFIXES : extensions...
This pseudotarget defines file extensions to try when NMAKE needs to build a target file for which no dependents are specified. NMAKE searches the current directory for a file with the same name as the target file and an extension in
<extensions...>. If NMAKE finds such a file, and if an inference rule applies to the file, NMAKE treats the file as a dependent of the target.
The .SUFFIXES pseudotarget is predefined as
.SUFFIXES : .obj .exe .c .asm
To add extensions to the list, specify .SUFFIXES : followed by the new extensions.
For example, the following would enable you to write interence rules for PL/I source files.
.SUFFIXES: .pli
To clear the list, specify
.SUFFIXES:
Only those extensions specified in .SUFFIXES can have inference rules. NMAKE ignores inference rules unless the extensions have been specified in a .SUFFIXES
list.
.PRECIOUS Pseudotarget
Syntax:
.PRECIOUS : targets...
This pseudotarget tells NMAKE not to delete a target even if the commands that build it are terminated or interrupted. This pseudotarget overrides the NMAKE default. By default, NMAKE deletes the target if it cannot be sure that the target was built successfully.
For example,
.PRECIOUS : tools.lib
tools.lib : a2z.obj z2a.obj
command
:
If the commands to build tools.lib
are interrupted, leaving an incomplete file,
NMAKE does not delete the partially built tools.lib
.
The pseudotarget .PRECIOUS is useful only in limited circumstances. Most professional development tools have their own interrupt handlers and "clean up" when errors occur.
Inline files
You may need to issue a command in the description file with a list of arguments exceeding the command-line limit of the operating system. Just as NMAKE supports the use of command files, it can also generate inline files which are read as response files by other programs.
350
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Inline files
To generate an inline file, use the following syntax for your description block: target : dependents command @<<[
filename
] inline file text
<< [KEEP | NOKEEP]
All of the text between the two sets of double less than signs (<<) is placed into an inline file and given the name
filename
. You can refer to the inline file at a later time by using
filename
. If
filename
is not given, NMAKE gives the file a unique name in the directory specified by the TMP environment variable if it is defined.
Otherwise, NMAKE creates a unique file name in the current directory.
The inline file can be temporary or permanent. If you do not specify otherwise, or if you specify the keyword NOKEEP, the inline file is temporary. Specify KEEP to retain the file.
The at sign (@) is not part of the NMAKE syntax but is the typical character used by utilities to designate a file as a response file.
Inline files example
math.lib : add.obj sub.obj mul.obj div.obj
ilib @<< math.lib
add.obj
sub.obj
mul.obj
div.obj
/L:listing
<<
The above example creates an inline file and uses it to invoke the Library Manager
(ILIB). The inline file is used as a response file by (ILIB). It specifies which library to use, the commands to execute, and the listing file to produce. The inline file contains the following: math.lib
add.obj
sub.obj
mul.obj
div.obj
/L:listing
Because no file name is listed after the ILIB command, the inline file is given a unique name and placed into the current directory (or the directory defined by the
TMP environment variable).
Escape characters
NMAKE uses the following punctuation characters in its syntax:
{
(
}
)
!
# $
@ -
^ \
To use one of these characters in a command and not have it interpreted by
NMAKE, use a caret ( ^ ) in front of the character.
For example,
BIG^#.PLI
is treated as
BIG#.PLI
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
351
Inline files
With the caret, you can include a literal newline character in a description file. This capability is useful in macro definitions, as in the following example:
XYZ=abc^<ENTER> def
The effect is equivalent to the effect of assigning the C-style string abc\ndef to the
XYZ macro. Note that this effect differs from the effect of using the backslash ( \ ) to continue a line. A newline character that follows a backslash is replaced with a space.
NMAKE ignores a caret that is not followed by any of the characters it uses in its syntax. A caret that appears within quotation marks is not treated as an escape character.
The escape character cannot be used in the command portion of a dependency block.
Characters that modify commands
Any of three characters can be placed in front of a command to modify how the command is run:
— (dash)
Turns off error checking for the command
@ (at sign)
Suppresses display of the command
! (exclamation point)
Executes the command for each dependent file
Spaces can separate the modifying character from the command. Any command on a separate line — whether modified or not — must be indented by one or more spaces or tabs.
You can use more than one character to modify a single command.
Turn error checking off (-)
Syntax:
-[n] command
The /I option globally turns command error-checking off. The dash (-) command modifier overrides the global setting to turn error checking off for commands individually. This modifier is used in two ways: v
A dash without a number turns off all error checking.
v
A dash followed by a number causes NMAKE to abort only if the exit code returned by the command is greater than the number.
See “Ignore exit codes (/I)” on page 336.
Dash command modifier examples
light.lst : light.txt
- flash light.txt
In the example above, NMAKE never ends, regardless of the exit code returned by flash
.
352
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Characters that modify commands
light.lst : light.txt
-1 flash light.txt
In the example above, NMAKE ends if the exit code returned by flash is greater than 1.
Suppress command display (@)
Syntax:
@ command
The /S option globally suppresses the display of commands while NMAKE is running. The at sign (@) modifier suppresses the display for individual commands.
Regardless of the /S option or the @ modifier, output generated by the command itself always appears.
See “Suppress command display (/S)” on page 337.
At sign (@) command modifier example
Suppress Command Display (@) sort.exe:sort.obj
@ echo sorting
The command line calling the echo command is not displayed. The output of the echo command, however, is displayed.
Execute command for dependents (!)
Syntax:
! command
The exclamation-point command modifier causes the command to be executed for each dependent file if the command uses one of the special macros $? or $**. The
$? macro refers to all dependent files out-of-date with respect to the target. The $** macro refers to all dependent files in the description block.
See “Special macros” on page 342.
Exclamation point (!) command modifier examples
leap.txt : hop.asm skip.c jump.pli
! print $** lpt1:
The example above executes the following three commands, regardless of the modification dates of the dependent file: print hop.asm lpt1: print skip.c lpt1: print jump.pli lpt1: leap.txt : hop.asm skip.c jump.pli
! print $? lpt1:
The example above executes the print command only for those dependent files with modification dates later than that of the leap.txt
file. If hop.asm
and jump.pli
have modification dates later than leap.txt
, the following two commands are executed: print hop.asm lpt1: print jump.pli lpt1:
Chapter 16. Using the Program Maintenance Utility, NMAKE
353
Characters that modify commands
EXTMAKE Syntax
Description files can use a special syntax to determine the drive, path, base name, and extension of the first dependent file in a description block. This syntax is called the
extmake
syntax.
The characters
%s represent the complete file specification of the first dependent file. Various parts of the file specification are represented using the following syntax:
%<parts>
<parts> f e d p
A combination of the following letters:
Drive
Path
Base name
Extension
For example, to specify the drive and path name of the first dependent file in a description block, use:
%<dp>
The percent symbol (%) is a replacement in DOS and Windows command lines. To use the percent symbol in command-line arguments, use a double percent (%%).
Macros and inference rules in TOOLS.INI
You can place either macros or inference rules in your
TOOLS.INI
file. NMAKE looks for the
TOOLS.INI
file first in the current directory and then in the directory indicated by the INIT environment variable.
If NMAKE finds a
TOOLS.INI
file, it looks for the following tag:
[nmake]
You can place macros and inference rules below this tag in the same format you would use in a description file.
If a macro or inference rule is defined in both the
TOOLS.INI
file and the description file, the definition in the description file takes precedence. Also, if you use the /R option, the
TOOLS.INI
file is ignored.
TOOLS.INI example
[nmake]
.SUFFIXES: .pli
COMPILE_OPTS = gonumber source
.pli.obj:
PLI $*.pli ($(COMPILE_OPTS)
These lines in the TOOLS.INI
file do the following: v
Add the
.pli
file extension to the list of extensions that can have inference rules.
v
Define the COMPILE_OPTS macro as gonumber source
.
v
Define an inference rule to build
.obj
files from
.pli
source files.
354
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 17. Improving performance
Many considerations for improving the speed of your program are independent of the compiler that you use and the platform on which it runs. This chapter, however, identifies those considerations that are unique to the workstation PL/I compiler and the code it generates.
Selecting compile-time options for optimal performance
The compile-time options you choose can greatly improve the performance of the code generated by the compiler. However, like most performance considerations, there are trade-offs associated with these choices. Fortunately, you can weigh the trade-offs associated with compile-time options without editing your source code because these options can be specified on the command line or in the environment variable IBM.OPTIONS.
If you want to avoid details, the least complex way to improve the performance of generated code is to specify the following (non-default) compile-time options:
PREFIX(NOFOFL)
IMPRECISE
OPT(2)
DFT(REORDER)
The first two options can affect the semantics of your program, but generally only do so in unusual situations. If you specify the first two options, your code is improved even when compiled with optimization turned off. By using these options, the compiler is also less likely to make errors.
The following sections describe, in more detail, performance improvements and trade-offs associated with specific compile-time options.
OPTIMIZE
You can specify the OPTIMIZE option to improve the speed of your program, otherwise, the compiler makes only basic optimization efforts.
Choosing OPTIMIZE(2) directs the compiler to generate code for better performance. Usually, the resultant code is shorter than when the program is compiled under NOOPTIMIZE. Sometimes, however, a longer sequence of instructions runs faster than a shorter sequence. This can occur, for instance, when a branch table is created for a SELECT statement where the values in the WHEN clauses contain gaps. The increased number of instructions generated in this case is usually offset by the execution of fewer instructions in other places.
IMPRECISE
When you select this option, the compiler generates smaller and faster sequences of instructions for floating-point operations. This can have a significant effect on the performance of programs that contain floating-point expressions, either separately or in loops.
However, when programs are compiled with the IMPRECISE option, floating-point exceptions might not be reported at the precise location where they occur. (This is
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
355
Improving performance
especially true when the OPTIMIZE option is in effect.) In addition, floating-point operations can produce results that are not precisely IEEE conforming.
GONUMBER
Using this option results in a statement number table used for debugging. This added information can be extremely helpful when debugging, but including statement number tables increases the size of your executable file. Larger executable files can take longer to load.
By using one of the linker options, you can include the statement number tables in your executable during development to help with debugging. The /DEBUG (/DE) option directs the linker to include these tables in the executable file, so by not specifying /DE with the ILINK command, you can better control the size of your executable files. If the size of your executable file is a consideration, you can leave the tables out during production mode.
SNAP
When you use the SNAP option, the compiler generates extra instructions in the prolog and epilog code for every block. These instructions ensure that the run-time traceback messages (produced by PLIDUMP and the SNAP option on an ON statement) include all procedures that were active when the traceback was requested.
A trade-off of using the SNAP option and creating these additional instructions is that it can have a negative impact on the performance of your application. This is especially true for procedures that are called frequently.
RULES
When you use the RULES(IBM) option, the compiler supports scaled FIXED
BINARY and, what is more important for performance, generates scaled FIXED
BINARY results in some operations. Under RULES(ANS), scaled FIXED BINARY is not supported and scaled FIXED BINARY results are never generated. This means that the code generated under RULES(ANS) always runs at least as fast as the code generated under RULES(IBM), and sometimes runs faster.
For example, consider the following code fragment: dcl (i,j,k) fixed bin(15);
.
.
.
i = j / k;
Under RULES(IBM), the result of the division has the attributes FIXED BIN(31,16).
This means that a shift instruction is required before the division and several more instructions are needed to perform the assignment.
Under RULES(ANS), the result of the division has the attributes FIXED BIN(15,0).
This means that a shift is not needed before the division, and no extra instructions are needed to perform the assignment.
When you use the RULES(LAXCTL) option, the compiler allows you to declare a
CONTROLLED variable with a constant extent and then ALLOCATE it with a different extent, as in
356
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Improving performance
DECLARE X BIT(1) CTL;
ALLOCATE X BIT(63);
However, this programming practice forces the compiler to assume that no
CONTROLLED variable has constant extents, and consequently it will generate much less efficient code when these variables are referenced.
But, if you specify a constant extent for a CONTROLLED variable only when it will always have that length (or bound), then you will get much better performance if you specify the option RULES(NOLAXCTL).
PREFIX
This option determines if selected PL/I conditions are enabled by default. The default suboptions for PREFIX are set to conform to the PL/I language definition.
However, overriding the defaults can have a significant effect on the performance of your program. The default suboptions are:
CONVERSION
INVALIDOP
FIXEDOVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
INVALIDOP
NOSIZE
NOSTRINGRANGE
NOSTRINGSIZE
NOSUBSCRIPTRANGE
UNDERFLOW
ZERODIVIDE
By specifying the SIZE, STRINGRANGE, STRINGSIZE, or SUBSCRIPTRANGE suboptions, the compiler generates extra code that helps you pinpoint various problem areas in your source that would otherwise be hard to find. This extra code, however, can slow program performance significantly.
CONVERSION
When you disable the CONVERSION condition, some character-to-numeric conversions are done inline and without checking the validity of the source.
Therefore, specifying NOCONVERSION also affects program performance.
FIXEDOVERFLOW
On some platforms, the FIXEDOVERFLOW condition is raised by the hardware and the compiler does not need to generate any extra code to detect it. With personal computers, however, the hardware does not raise this condition so the compiler must generate extra code. This extra code can negatively impact the performance of your program; and unless your program requires (or expects) this condition to be raised, specify PREFIX(NOFIXEDOVERFLOW) to improve performance.
DEFAULT
Using the DEFAULT option, you can select attribute defaults. As is true with the
PREFIX option, the suboptions for DEFAULT are set to conform to the PL/I language definition. Changing the defaults in some instances can affect performance. The default suboptions are:
IBM
BYADDR
RETURNS(BYVALUE)
Chapter 17. Improving performance
357
Improving performance
NONCONNECTED
DESCRIPTOR
ORDER
ASSIGNABLE LINKAGE(OPTLINK)
ASCII
IEEE
NATIVE
NODIRECTED
NOINLINE
The IBM/ANS, ASSIGNABLE/NONASSIGNABLE, and DIRECTED/
NODIRECTED suboptions have no effect on program performance. All of the other suboptions can affect performance to varying degrees and, if applied inappropriately, can make your program invalid.
BYADDR or BYVALUE
When the DEFAULT(BYADDR) option is in effect, arguments are passed by reference (as required by PL/I) unless an attribute in an entry declaration indicates otherwise. As arguments are passed by reference, the address of the argument is passed from one routine (calling routine) to another (called routine) as the variable itself is passed. Any change made to the argument while in the called routine is reflected in the calling routine when it resumes execution.
Program logic often depends on passing variables by reference. However, passing a variable by reference can hinder performance in two ways:
1.
Every reference to that parameter requires an extra instruction.
2.
Since the address of the variable is passed to another routine, the compiler is forced to make assumptions about when that variable might change and generate very conservative code for any reference to that variable.
Consequently, you should pass parameters by value using the BYVALUE suboption whenever your program logic allows. Even if you use the BYADDR attribute to indicate that one parameter should be passed by reference, you can use the DEFAULT(BYVALUE) option to ensure that all other parameters are passed by value.
If a procedure receives and modifies only one parameter that is passed by
BYADDR, consider converting the procedure to a function that receives that parameter by value. The function would then end with a RETURN statement containing the updated value of the parameter.
Procedure with BYADDR parameter
a: proc( parm1, parm2, ..., parmN ); dcl parm1 byaddr ...; dcl parm2 byvalue ...;
.
.
.
dcl parmN byvalue ...;
/* program logic */ end;
358
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Improving performance
Faster, equivalent function with BYVALUE parameter
a: proc( parm1, parm2, ..., parmN ) returns( ... /* attributes of parm1 */ ); dcl parm1 byvalue ...; dcl parm2 byvalue ...;
.
.
.
dcl parmN byvalue ...;
/* program logic */ return( parm1 ); end;
(NON)CONNECTED
The DEFAULT(NONCONNECTED) option indicates that the compiler assumes that any aggregate parameters are NONCONNECTED. References to elements of
NONCONNECTED aggregate parameters require the compiler to generate code to access the parameter's descriptor, even if the aggregate is declared with constant extents.
The compiler does not generate these instructions if the aggregate parameter has constant extents and is CONNECTED. Consequently, if your application never passes nonconnected parameters, your code is more optimal if you use the
DEFAULT(CONNECTED) option.
RETURNS(BYVALUE) or RETURNS(BYADDR)
When the DEFAULT(RETURNS(BYVALUE)) option is in effect, the BYVALUE attribute is applied to all RETURNS description lists that do not specify BYADDR.
This means that these functions return values in registers, when possible, in order to produce the most optimal code.
(NO)DESCRIPTOR
The DEFAULT(DESCRIPTOR) option indicates that, by default, a descriptor is passed for any string, area, or aggregate parameter. However, the descriptor is used only if the parameter has nonconstant extents or if the parameter is an array with the NONCONNECTED attribute.
In this case, the instructions and space required to pass the descriptor provide no benefit and incur substantial cost (the size of a structure descriptor is often greater than size of the structure itself). Consequently, by specifying
DEFAULT(NODESCRIPTOR) and using OPTIONS(DESCRIPTOR) only as needed on PROCEDURE statements and ENTRY declarations, your code runs more optimally.
(RE)ORDER
The DEFAULT(ORDER) option indicates that the ORDER option is applied to every block, meaning that variables in that block referenced in ON-units (or blocks dynamically descendant from ON-units) have their latest values. This effectively prohibits almost all optimizations on such variables. Consequently, if your program logic allows, use DEFAULT(REORDER) to generate superior code.
LINKAGE
This suboption tells the compiler the default linkage to use when the LINKAGE suboption of the OPTIONS attribute or option for an entry has not been specified.
Chapter 17. Improving performance
359
Improving performance
The compiler supports various linkages, each with its unique performance characteristics. When you invoke an ENTRY provided by an external entity (such as an operating system), you must use the linkage previously defined for that
ENTRY.
As you create your own applications, however, you can choose the linkage convention. The OPTLINK linkage is strongly recommended because it provides significantly better performance than other linkage conventions.
ASCII or EBCDIC
The DEFAULT(ASCII) option indicates that, by default, character data is held in native Intel style. When you specify the EBCDIC suboption, the compiler must generate extra instructions for most operations involving the input or output of character variables.
IEEE or HEXADEC
The DEFAULT(IEEE) option indicates that, by default, float data is to be held in native Intel style. When you specify the HEXADEC suboption, the compiler must execute significantly more instructions for most operations involving floating-point variables.
(NON)NATIVE
The DEFAULT(NATIVE) option indicates that, by default, fixed binary data, offset data, ordinal data, and the length prefix of varying strings are held in native Intel style. When you specify NONNATIVE, extra instructions are generated for operations involving those data types previously listed.
(NO)INLINE
The suboption NOINLINE indicates that procedures and begin blocks should not be inlined.
Inlining occurs only when you specify optimization.
Inlining user code eliminates the overhead of the function call and linkage, and also exposes the function's code to the optimizer, resulting in faster code performance. Inlining produces the best results when the overhead for the function is nontrivial, for example, when functions are called within nested loops. Inlining is also beneficial when the inlined function provides additional opportunities for optimization, such as when constant arguments are used.
For programs containing many procedures that are not nested: v
If the procedures are small and only called from a few places, you can increase performance by specifying INLINE.
v
If the procedures are large and called from several places, inlining duplicates code throughout the program. This increase in the size of the program might offset any increase of speed. In this case, you might prefer to leave NOINLINE as the default and specify OPTIONS(INLINE) only on individually selected procedures.
When you use inlining, you need more stack space. When a function is called, its local storage is allocated at the time of the call and freed when it returns to the calling function. If that same function is inlined, its storage is allocated when the function that calls it is entered, and is not freed until that calling function ends.
Ensure that you have enough stack space for the local storage of the inlined functions.
360
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Improving performance
Summary of compile-time options that improve performance
In summary, the following options (if appropriate for your application) can improve performance: v
OPTIMIZE(2) v
IMPRECISE v
NOSNAP v PREFIX(NOFIXEDOVERFLOW) v RULES(ANS NOLAXCTL) v DEFAULT with the following suboptions
(BYVALUE
RETURNS(BYVALUE)
CONNECTED
NODESCRIPTOR
REORDER
ASCII
IEEE
NATIVE
LINKAGE(OPTLINK)
Coding for better performance
As you write code, there is generally more than one correct way to accomplish a given task. Many important factors influence the coding style you choose, including readability and maintainability. The following sections discuss choices that you can make while coding that potentially affect the performance of your program.
DATA-directed input and output
Using GET DATA and PUT DATA statements for debugging can prove very helpful. When you use these statements, however, you generally pay the price of decreased performance. This cost to performance is usually very high when you use either GET DATA or PUT DATA without a variable list.
Many programmers use PUT DATA statements in their ON ERROR code as illustrated in the following example: on error begin; on error system;
.
.
.
put data;
.
.
.
end;
In this case, the program would perform more optimally by including a list of selected variables with the PUT DATA statement.
The ON ERROR block in the previous example contained an ON ERROR system statement before the PUT DATA statement. This prevents the program from getting caught in an infinite loop if an error occurs in the PUT DATA statement (which could occur if any variables to be listed contained invalid FIXED DECIMAL values) or elsewhere in the ON ERROR block.
Chapter 17. Improving performance
361
Coding for better performance
Input-only parameters
If a procedure has a BYADDR parameter which it uses as input only, it is best to declare that parameter as NONASSIGNABLE (rather than letting it get the default attribute of ASSIGNABLE). If that procedure is later called with a constant for that parameter, the compiler can put that constant in static storage and pass the address of that static area.
This practice is particularly useful for strings and other parameters that cannot be passed in registers (input-only parameters that can be passed in registers are best declared as BYVALUE).
In the following declaration, for instance, the first parameter to dosScanEnv is an input-only CHAR VARYINGZ string: dcl dosScanEnv entry( char(*) varyingz nonasgn byaddr, pointer byaddr ) returns( native fixed bin(31) optional ) options( nodescriptor linkage(system) );
If this function is invoked with the string 'IBM.OPTIONS', the compiler can pass the address of that string rather than assigning it to a compiler-generated temporary storage area and passing the address of that area.
String assignments
When one string is assigned to another, the compiler ensures that: v
The target has the correct value even if the source and target overlap v
The source string is truncated if it is longer than the target.
This assurance comes at the price of some extra instructions. The compiler attempts to generate these extra instructions only when necessary, but often you, as the programmer, know they are not necessary when the compiler cannot be sure.
For instance, if the source and target are based character strings and you know they cannot overlap, you could use the PLIMOVE built-in function to eliminate the extra code the compiler would otherwise be forced to generate.
In the example which follows, faster code is generated for the second assignment statement: dcl based_Str char(64) based( null() ); dcl target_Addr pointer; dcl source_Addr pointer; target_Addr->based_Str = source_Addr->based_Str; call plimove( target_Addr, source_Addr, stg(based_Str) );
If you have any doubts about whether the source and target might overlap or whether the target is big enough to hold the source, you should not use the
PLIMOVE built-in.
Loop control variables
Program performance improves if your loop control variables are one of the types in the following list. You should rarely, if ever, use other types of variables.
FIXED BINARY with zero scale factor
FLOAT
ORDINAL
HANDLE
362
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Coding for better performance
POINTER
OFFSET
Performance also improves if loop control variables are not members of arrays, structures, or unions. The compiler issues a warning message when they are. Loop control variables that are AUTOMATIC and not used for any other purpose give you the optimal code generation.
Performance is decreased if your program depends not only on the value of a loop control variable, but also on its address. For example, if the ADDR built-in function is applied to the variable or if the variable is passed BYADDR to another routine.
PACKAGEs versus nested PROCEDUREs
Calling nested procedures requires that an extra “hidden parameter” (the backchain pointer) is passed. As a result, the fewer nested procedures that your application contains, the faster it runs.
To improve the performance of your application, you can convert a mother-daughter pair of nested procedures into level-1 sister procedures inside of a package. This conversion is possible if your nested procedure does not rely on any of the automatic and internal static variables declared in its parent procedures.
If procedure b in “Example with nested procedures” does not use any of the
variables declared in a, you can improve the performance of both procedures by
reorganizing them into the package illustrated in “Example with packaged procedures.”
Example with nested procedures
a: proc; dcl (i,j,k) fixed bin; dcl ib based fixed bin;
.
.
.
call b( addr(i) );
.
.
.
b: proc( px ); dcl px pointer; display( px->ib ); end; end;
Example with packaged procedures
p: package exports( a ); dcl ib a: proc; based fixed bin; dcl (i,j,k) fixed bin;
.
.
.
call b( addr(i) );
.
.
.
Chapter 17. Improving performance
363
Coding for better performance
end; b: proc( px ); dcl px pointer; display( px->ib ); end; end p;
REDUCIBLE functions
REDUCIBLE indicates that a procedure or entry need not be invoked multiple times if the argument(s) stays unchanged, and that the invocation of the procedure has no side effects.
For example, a user-written function that computes a result based on unchanging data should be declared REDUCIBLE. A function that computes a result based on changing data, such as a random number or time of day, should be declared
IRREDUCIBLE.
In the following example,
f
is invoked only once since REDUCIBLE is part of the declaration. If IRREDUCIBLE had been used in the declaration,
f
would be invoked twice.
dcl (f) entry options( reducible ) returns( fixed bin ); select; when( f(x) < 0 )
.
.
.
when( f(x) > 0 )
.
.
.
otherwise
.
.
.
end;
DEFINED versus UNION
The UNION attribute is more powerful than the DEFINED attribute and provides more function. In addition, the compiler generates better code for union references.
In the following example, the pair of variables b3 and b4 perform the same function as b1 and b2
, but the compiler generates more optimal code for the pair in the union.
dcl b1 bit(31); dcl b2 bit(16) def b1; dcl
1 * union,
2 b3 bit(32),
2 b4 bit(16);
Code that uses UNIONs instead of the DEFINED attribute is subject to less misinterpretation. Variable declarations in unions are in a single location making it easy to realize that when one member of the union changes, all of the others change also. This dynamic change is less obvious in declarations that use
DEFINED variables since the declare statements can be several lines apart.
364
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Coding for better performance
Named constants versus static variables
You can define named constants by declaring a variable with the VALUE attribute.
If you use static variables with the INITIAL attribute and you do not alter the variable, you should declare the variable a named constant using the VALUE attribute. However, the compiler does not treat NONASSIGNABLE scalar STATIC variables as true named constants.
The compiler generates better code whenever expressions are evaluated during compilation, so you can use named constants to produce efficient code with no loss in readability. For example, identical object code is produced for the two usages of the VERIFY built-in function in the following example: dcl numeric char value(’0123456789’); jx = verify( string, numeric ); jx = verify( string, ’0123456789’ );
The following examples illustrate how you can use the VALUE attribute to get optimal code without sacrificing readability.
Example with optimal code but no meaningful names
dcl x bit(8) aligned; select( x ); when( ’01’b4 )
.
.
.
when( ’02’b4 )
.
.
.
when( ’03’b4 )
.
.
.
end;
Example with meaningful names but not optimal code
dcl ( a1 init( ’01’b4)
,a2 init( ’02’b4)
,a3 init( ’03’b4)
,a4 init( ’04’b4)
,a5 init( ’05’b4)
) bit(8) aligned static nonassignable; dcl x bit(8) aligned; select( x ); when( a1 )
.
.
.
when( a2 )
.
.
.
when( a3 )
.
.
.
end;
Chapter 17. Improving performance
365
Coding for better performance
Example with optimal code AND meaningful names
dcl ( a1 value( ’01’b4)
,a2 value( ’02’b4)
,a3 value( ’03’b4)
,a4 value( ’04’b4)
,a5 value( ’05’b4)
) bit(8); dcl x bit(8) aligned; select( x ); when( a1 )
.
.
.
when( a2 )
.
.
.
when( a3 )
.
.
.
end;
Avoiding calls to library routines
The bitwise operations (prefix NOT, infix AND, infix OR, and infix EXCLUSIVE
OR) are often evaluated by calls to library routines. These operations are, however, handled without a library call if either of the following conditions is true: v
Both operands are bit(1) v
Both operands are aligned bit(8n) where n is a constant.
For certain assignments, expressions, and built-in function references, the compiler generates calls to library routines. If you avoid these calls, your code generally runs faster.
To help you determine when the compiler generates such calls, the compiler generates a message whenever a conversion is done using a library routine. The
conversions done with code generated inline are shown in Table 25.
Table 25. Conditions under which conversions are handled inline
Target
fixed bin(p1,q1)
Source
fixed bin(p2,q2) float(p2) bit(1) bit(n) aligned char(1) pic'(n)9' pic'(n)Z(m)9'
Condition
always if SIZE is disabled always if n is known and n
≤
31 if CONV is disabled if n ≤ 6 fixed dec(p1,q1) fixed dec(p2,q2) if n + m ≤ 6 done using an especially fast library routine
366
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Coding for better performance
Table 25. Conditions under which conversions are handled inline (continued)
Target Source Condition
float(p1) fixed bin(p2,q2) float(p2) bit(1) bit(n) aligned char(1) pic'(n)9' pic'(n)Z(m)9' always always always if n is known and n ≤ 31 if CONV is disabled if n
≤
6 pictured fixed pictured float char pictured fixed pictured float char nonvarying char varying char varyingz pictured fixed pictured float pictured char pictured char bit(1) nonvarying pictured char bit(1) nonvarying bit(n) nonvarying bit(m) nonvarying
Note:
If all of the following apply:
1) source and target are byte-aligned
2) n and m are known
3) mod(m,8)=0 or n=m or source is a constant
4) mod(n,8)=0 or target is a scalar with STATIC,
AUTOMATIC, or CONTROLLED attributes if n + m
≤
6 if pictures match if pictures match always always always always always always if pictures match always see note
Many string-handling built-in functions are evaluated through calls to library
routines, but some are handled without a library call. Table 26 lists these built-in
functions and the conditions under which they are handled inline.
Table 26. Conditions under which string built-in functions are handled inline
String function
BOOL
COPY
EDIT
HIGH
INDEX
LENGTH
LOW
MAXLENGTH
SEARCH
Comments and conditions
When the third argument is a constant. The first two arguments must also be either both bit(1) or both aligned bit(n) where n is 8,
16 or 32. The function is also handled inline if it can be reduced to a bitwise infix operation and both arguments are aligned bit.
When the first argument has type character.
When the first argument is REAL FIXED BIN, the SIZE condition is disabled, and the second argument is a constant string consisting of all 9's.
Always
When only two arguments are supplied and they have type character.
Always
Always
Always
When only two arguments are supplied and they have type character.
Chapter 17. Improving performance
367
Coding for better performance
Table 26. Conditions under which string built-in functions are handled inline (continued)
String function Comments and conditions
SEARCHR
SUBSTR
TRANSLATE
TRIM
UNSPEC
VERIFY
VERIFYR
When only two arguments are supplied and they have type character.
When STRINGRANGE is disabled.
When the second and third arguments are constant.
When only one argument is supplied and it has type character.
Always
When only two arguments are supplied and they have type character.
When only two arguments are supplied and they have type character.
368
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 18. Using user exits
PL/I provides a number of user exits that allow you to customize the PL/I product to suit your needs. The workstation PL/I and PL/I for AIX products supply default exits and the associated source files.
If you want the exits to perform functions that are different from those supplied by the default exits, we recommend that you modify the supplied source files as appropriate.
The types of files provided include: v
PL/I source files with the extension PLI that are located in ..
\samples
.
v
PL/I include files with the extension CPY that are located in
..\include
. When compiling the user exits, make sure to set the INCLUDE or IBM.SYSLIB
environment variables so that the CPY files can be found.
v
Linker definition files with the extension DEF that are located in
..\samples
.
v
Control files (if applicable to the exit) with the extension INF that are located in
..\samples
. When using the user exits, make sure the directory containing the
INF files is specified using the appropriate environment variables (usually
DPATH).
Using the compiler user exit
At times, it is useful to be able to tailor the compiler to meet the needs of your organization. For example, you might want to suppress certain messages or alter the severity of others. You might want to perform a specific function with each compilation, such as logging statistical information about the compilation into a file.
A compiler user exit handles this type of functions. With PL/I, you can write your own user exit or use the exit provided with the product, either 'as is' or slightly modified depending on what you want to do with it. The purpose of this chapter is to describe: v
Procedures that the compiler user exit supports v
How to activate the compiler user exit v
IBMUEXIT, the IBM-supplied compiler user exit v
Requirements for writing your own compiler user exit.
Procedures performed by the compiler user exit
The compiler user exit performs three specific procedures: v Initialization v Interception and filtering of compiler messages v Termination
As illustrated in Figure 28 on page 370, the compiler passes control to the
initialization procedure, the message filter procedure, and the termination procedure. Each of these three procedures, in turn, passes control back to the compiler when the requested procedure is completed.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
369
Using the compiler user exit
│
│
┌───────┐
│ │
│ C
│ O
│ ┌───────────────┐
│──────│Initialization │
│──────│procedure
│
│
└───────────────┘
│ M
│ P
│ I
│ L
│
│
┌───────────────┐
│──────│Message filter │
│──────│procedure │
└───────────────┘
│
│
│ E
│ R
│ │
└───────┘
│ ┌───────────────┐
│──────│Termination │
│──────│procedure
│
│
└───────────────┘
Figure 28. PL/I compiler user exit procedures
Each of the three procedures is passed two different control blocks: v
A
global control block
that contains information about the compilation. This is passed as the first parameter. For specific information on the global control
block, see “Structure of global control blocks” on page 372.
v
A
function-specific control block
that is passed as the second parameter. The content of this control block depends upon which procedure has been invoked.
For detailed information, see “Writing the initialization procedure” on page 373,
Activating the compiler user exit
In order to activate the compiler user exit, you must specify the EXIT compile-time
option. For more information on the EXIT option, see “EXIT” on page 57.
The EXIT compile-time option allows you to specify a user-option-string which specifies the message control file. If you do not specify a string, IBMUEXIT.INF is
used (see “Modifying IBMUEXIT.INF” on page 371) but you have to tell the
computer where to find it. The default behavior, provided you do not change the
IBMUEXIT.PLI sample program, is that the compiler looks for IBMUEXIT.INF in the current directory first and then in the directories specified in DPATH.
The user-option-string is passed to the user exit functions in the global control
The IBM-supplied compiler exit, IBMUEXIT
IBM supplies you with the sample compiler user exit, IBMUEXIT, which filters messages for you. It monitors messages and, based on the message number that you specify, suppresses the message or changes the severity of the message.
There are several files that comprise IBMUEXIT:
IBMUEXIT.PLI
Contains the PL/I source code.
IBMUEXIT.DLL
Executable DLL of IBMUEXIT.PLI. In order to build this file, issue the following commands from the command line:
370
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler user exit
On Windows: pli ibmuexit ilib /geni ibmuexit.def
ilink /dll ibmuexit.obj ibmuexit.exp
IBMUEXIT.DEF
DEF file that is used to build IBMUEXIT.DLL.
IBMUEXIT.INF
Control file that specifies filtering of messages.
The PLI source file is provided for your information and modification. The INF control file contains the message numbers that should be monitored, and tells
IBMUEXIT what actions to take for them. The executable module reads the INF control file, and either ignores the message or changes its severity.
Customizing the compiler user exit
As was mentioned earlier, you can write your own compiler user exit or simply modify IBMUEXIT.PLI. In either case, the name of the executable file for the compiler user exit must be IBMUEXIT.DLL.
This section describes how to: v
Modify IBMUEXIT.INF for customized message filtering v
Create your own compiler user exit
Modifying IBMUEXIT.INF
Rather than spending the time to write a completely new compiler user exit, you can modify the sample program, IBMUEXIT.INF.
Edit the INF file to indicate which message numbers you want to suppress, and which message number severity levels you would like changed. A sample
IBMUEXIT.INF file is shown in Figure 29.
Fac Id Msg No Severity Suppress Comment
+--------+--------+----------+----------+--------------------------------
’IBM’
’IBM’
1041
1044
-1
-1
1
1
Comment spans multiple lines
FIXED BIN 7 mapped to 1 byte
’IBM’
’IBM’
’IBM’
’IBM’
’IBM’
’IBM’
1172
1052
1047
8009
1107
1169
0
-1
12
-1
12
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Select without OTHERWISE
Nodescriptor with * extent args
Reorder inhibits optimization
Semicolon in string constant
Undeclared ENTRY
Precision of result determined by arg
Figure 29. Example of an IBMUEXIT.INF file
The first two lines are header lines and are ignored by IBMUEXIT. The remaining lines contain input separated by a variable number of blanks.
Each column of the file is relevant to the compiler user exit: v
The first column must contain the letters 'IBM' in single quotes, which is the message prefix.
v
The second column contains the four digit message number.
v
The third column shows the new message severity. Severity -1 indicates that the severity should be left as the default value.
Chapter 18. Using user exits
371
Using the compiler user exit
v
The fourth column indicates whether or not the message is to be suppressed. A
'1' indicates the message is to be suppressed, and a '0' indicates that it should be printed.
v
The comment field, found in the last column, is for your information, and is ignored by IBMUEXIT.
Writing your own compiler exit
To write your own user exit, you can use IBMUEXIT (provided as one of the sample programs with the product) as a model. As you write the exit, make sure it covers the areas of initialization, message filtering, and termination.
Structure of global control blocks
The global control block is passed to each of the three user exit procedures
(initialization, filtering, and termination) whenever they are invoked. The following code and accompanying explanations describe the contents of each field in the global control block.
Dcl
1 Uex_UIB
2 Uex_UIB_Length native based( null() ), fixed bin(31),
2 Uex_UIB_Exit_token pointer, /* for user exit’s use */
2 Uex_UIB_User_char_str pointer,
2 Uex_UIB_User_char_len fixed bin(31),
/* to exit option str */
2 Uex_UIB_Filename_str pointer,
2 Uex_UIB_Filename_len fixed bin(31),
/* to source filename */
2 Uex_UIB_return_code fixed bin(31),
2 Uex_UIB_reason_code fixed bin(31),
2 Uex_UIB_Exit_Routs,
3 ( Uex_UIB_Termination,
Uex_UIB_Message_Filter,
*, *, *, * ) limited entry (
*,
*,
);
/* set by exit procs
/* set by exit procs
/* exit entries set at initialization
/* call for each msg
/* to Uex_UIB
/* to a request area
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
Data Entry Fields
v
Uex_UIB_ Length
: Contains the length of the control block in bytes. The value is storage (Uex_UIB)
.
v
Uex_UIB_Exit_token
: Used by the user exit procedure. For example, the initialization may set it to a data structure which is used by both the message filter, and the termination procedures.
v
Uex_UIB_User_char_str
: Points to an optional character string, if you specify it.
For example, in pli filename (EXIT (’string’))...fn
can be a character string up to thirty-one characters in length.
v
Uex_UIB_char_len
: Contains the length of the string pointed to by the
User_char_str
. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_UIB_Filename_str
: Contains the name of the source file that you are compiling, and includes the drive and subdirectories as well as the filename. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_UIB_Filename_len
: Contains the length of the name of the source file pointed to by the
Filename_str
. The compiler sets this value.
372
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler user exit
v
Uex_UIB_return_code
: Contains the return code from the user exit procedure.
The user sets this value.
v
Uex__UIB_reason_code
: Contains the procedure reason code. The user sets this value.
v
Uex_UIB_Exit_Routs
: Contains the exit entries set up by the initialization procedure.
v
Uex_UIB_Termination
: Contains the entry that is to be called by the compiler at termination time. The user sets this value.
v
Uex_UIB_Message_Filter
: Contains the entry that is to be called by the compiler whenever a message needs to be generated. The user sets this value.
Writing the initialization procedure
Your initialization procedure should perform any initialization required by the exit, such as opening files and allocating storage. The initialization procedure-specific control block is coded as follows:
Dcl 1 Uex_ISA native based( null() ),
2 Uex_ISA_Length_fixed bin(31); /* storage(Uex_IS A) */
The global control block syntax for the initialization procedure is discussed in the
section “Structure of global control blocks” on page 372.
Upon completion of the initialization procedure, you should set the return/reason codes to the following:
0/0
Continue compilation
4/n
Reserved for future use
8/n
Reserved for future use
12/n
Reserved for future use
16/n
Abort compilation
Writing the message filtering procedure
The message filtering procedure permits you to either suppress messages or alter the severity of messages. You can increase the severity of any of the messages but you can decrease the severity only of
ERROR
(severity code 8) or
WARNING
(severity code 4) messages.
The procedure-specific control block contains information about the messages. It is used to pass information back to the compiler indicating how a particular message should be handled.
The following is an example of a procedure-specific message filter control block:
Dcl 1 Uex_MFX native based( null() ),
2 Uex_MFX_Length fixed bin(31),
2 Uex_MFX_Facility_Id char(3), /* of component writing message */
2 * char(1),
2 Uex_MFX_Message_no fixed bin(31),
2 Uex_MFX_Severity fixed bin(15),
2 Uex_MFX_New_Severity fixed bin(15), /* set by exit proc */
Chapter 18. Using user exits
373
Using the compiler user exit
2 Uex_MFX_Inserts fixed bin(15),
2 Uex_MFX_Inserts_Data( 6 refer(Uex_MFX_Inserts) ),
3 Uex_MFX_Ins_Type fixed bin(7),
3 Uex_MFX_Ins_Type_Data union unaligned,
4 *
4 Uex_MFX_Ins_Bin char(8), fixed bin(31),
4 Uex_MFX_Ins_Str,
5 Uex_MFX_Ins_Str_Len
5 Uex_MFX_Ins_Str_Addr
4 Uex_MFX_Ins_Series, fixed bin(15), pointer,
5 Uex_MFX_Ins_Series_Sep char(1),
5 Uex_MFX_Ins_Series_Addr pointer;
Data Entry Fields
v
Uex_MFX_Length
: Contains the length of the control block in bytes. The value is storage (Uex_MFX).
v
Uex_MFX_Facility_Id
: Contains the ID of the facility; for the compiler, the ID is
IBM. For the SQL side of the SQL preprocessor, the id is SQL. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Message_no
: Contains the message number that the compiler is going to generate. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Severity
: Contains the severity level of the message; it can be from one to fifteen characters in length. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_New_Severity
: Contains the new severity level of the message; it can be from one to fifteen characters in length. The user sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Inserts
: Contains the number of inserts for the message; it can range from zero to six. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Inserts_Data
: Contains fields to describe each of the inserts. The compiler sets these values.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Type
: Contains the type of the insert. The possible insert types are:
–
Uex_Ins_Type_Xb31
: Used for an integer type and has the value 1.
–
Uex_Ins_Type_Char
: Used for an integer type and has the value 2.
–
Uex_Ins_Type_Series
: Used for an integer type and has the value 3.
The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Bin
: Contains the integer value for an insert that has integer type. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Str_Len
: Contains the length (in bytes) for an insert that has character type. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Str_Addr
: Contains the address of the character string for an insert that has character type. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Series_Sep
: Contains the character that should be inserted between each element for an insert that has series type. Typically, this is a blank, period or comma. The compiler sets this value.
v
Uex_MFX_Ins_Series_Addr
: Contains the address of the series of varying character strings for an insert that has series type. The address points to a FIXED
BIN(31) field holding the number of strings to concatenate followed by the adrresses of those strings. The compiler sets this value.
Upon completion of the message filtering procedure, set the return/reason codes to one of the following:
0/0
Continue compilation, output message
374
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using the compiler user exit
0/1
Continue compilation, do not output message
4/n
Reserved for future use
8/n
Reserved for future use
16/n
Abort compilation
Writing the termination procedure
You should use the termination procedure to perform any cleanup required, such as closing files. You might also want to write out final statistical reports based on information collected during the error message filter procedures and the initialization procedures.
The termination procedure-specific control block is coded as follows:
Dcl 1 Uex_ISA native based,
2 Uex_ISA_Length_fixed bin(31); /* storage(Uex_ISA) */
The global control block syntax for the termination procedure is discussed in
“Structure of global control blocks” on page 372. Upon completion of the
termination procedure, set the return/reason codes to one of the following:
0/0
Continue compilation
4/n
Reserved for future use
8/n
Reserved for future use
12/n
Reserved for future use
16/n
Abort compilation
Using the CICS run-time user exit
One of the key functions of the CICS run-time exit, CEEFXITA, is to let you control whether or not the CICS Dynamic Transaction Backout (DTB) occurs when PL/I transactions fail. The CICS run-time exit is driven immediately before and immediately after the invocation of each PL/I program within a transaction under
CICS. Each time the exit is called, the typed structure CXIT (part of the include file
IBMVCXT.INC) is used for communication between the PL/I run-time and the exit.
It is strongly recommended that you review and modify (if necessary) the user exit.
This structure contains information pertinent to the PL/I program, including: v
The reason for invocation (initialization or termination) of the exit.
v
A reason code which indicates how the program terminated when invoked after program termination.
v
Pointers to key CICS control blocks.
Chapter 18. Using user exits
375
Using the CICS run-time user exit
Prior to program invocation
When the exit is invoked before the invocation of the PL/I program, the exit can tell the PL/I run-time to bypass the program invocation. In this case, DTB occurs if necessary.
During this invocation of the exit, other functions (such as interrogation of or setting of run-time options) cannot be performed.
The IBM supplied exit merely returns allowing the PL/I program invocation to proceed.
After program termination
When the exit is invoked after the PL/I program invocation, the exit can examine the reason for program termination and can request DTB. The termination reason code indicates why the program ended. The file IBMVCXT.INC contains detailed information.
In this case, the IBM supplied exit requests DTB if: v The PL/I program return code (set via PLIRETC) is non-zero v
The reason for termination is anything other than normal termination
Modifying CEEFXITA
The following source files are supplied:
CEEFXITA.PLI
PL/I source code.
To recompile the exit, set the INCDIR compile-time option to include the directory for IBMVCXT.INC. Enter the following command at the command line: pli CEEFXITA
IBMVCXT.INC
CXIT typed structure and other interface information.
CEEFXITA.DLL
Executable DLL.
To rebuild this DLL, issue the following command from the command line: ilink /dll ceefxita.obj ceefxita.def
CEEFXITA.DEF
DEF file used to build CEEFXITA.DLL.
Using data conversion tables
The compiler, preprocessor, library, and debugger can convert both single and double bytes from ASCII to EBCDIC, and from EBCDIC to ASCII. The conversion routines are found in DLL files.
For Windows, the routines are found in these two files: v ibmwstb.dll (non-multithreading) v ibmwmtb.dll (multithreading)
The source for these routines, including the tables that they use, is shipped with the product so that you can use different tables if necessary. The tables are in the
376
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using data conversion tables
product sample directory,
/usr/lpp/pli/samples
. If files are translated from
EBCDIC to ASCII as you download them, you might want to use a different table from the one that is included.
The names of the conversion routines are IBMPBE2A (EBCDIC to ASCII),
IBMPBA2E (ASCII to EBCDIC), IBMPBE4A (DBCS EBCDIC to ASCII), and
IBMPBA4E (DBCD ASCII to EBCDIC). Do not change the names of the files that are included with the product.
Definition files are also supplied with the product:
For Windows, the definition files are: v ibmwstb.def
v ibmwmtb.def
You should use these definition files when creating the corresponding DLLs.
Chapter 18. Using user exits
377
Using data conversion tables
378
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 19. Building dynamic link libraries
Dynamic linking is the process of resolving external references using dynamic link libraries (DLLs). Some advantages of dynamic linking are: v Reduced memory requirements v Simplified application modification v Flexible software support v Transparent migration of function v
Multiple programming language support v
Application-controlled memory usage.
DLLs are typically used to provide common functions that can be used by a number of applications. An application using a DLL can use either load-time dynamic linking or run-time dynamic linking.
You can dynamically link with the supplied run-time DLLs, as well as with your own DLLs. The following steps for creating and using a dynamic link library are described in this chapter: v Creating the source files for a DLL v
Creating a module definition file (.DEF) for the DLL v
Compiling the source files and linking the resulting object files to build a DLL file v
Writing a module definition file to use when linking the external module that identifies what is in the DLL.
Each section contains a relevant example from the sample program SORT.PLI, which is packaged with the compiler.
Creating DLL source files
To build a DLL, you must first create source files containing the data or routines that you want to include in your DLL. No special file extension is required for
DLL source files.
Each routine that you want to export from the DLL (that is, a routine that you plan to call from other executable modules or DLLs) must be an external routine, either by default or by being qualified with the external keyword.
Compiling your DLL source
You can compile your source files to create a DLL in the same way that you would compile any other file (using the PLI command) with one exception—you must compile at least one file with the DLLINIT option. You can compile every routine in a DLL with the DLLINIT option; however, no routine compiled with DLLINIT can be linked into an EXE.
You might also want to compile your programs with the option XINFO(DEF). This option creates a .DEF file for each program. These .DEF files are essential to preparing to link your DLL.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
379
Preparing to link your DLL
Preparing to link your DLL
When you link your DLL, you must tell the linker what names are to be exported out of the DLL.
Specifying exported names under Windows
Under Windows, you tell the linker what parts are exported using an .EXP file.
The .EXP file is a binary file that is built by invoking ilib with the /GENI option and using either of the following as input: v
The .DEF file for the DLL v
All the .OBJ containing names to be exported by the DLL
Using .DEF files is preferable since it gives you control of exactly what is exported by the DLL. If you specify .OBJ names, all of the external names in the object files named are exported.
The following example shows a command you could use to create an .EXP file: ilib /geni myliba.def
The Windows .DEF file created for has these characteristics: v The Windows version contains only an EXPORTS statement v The Windows version contains names that have been 'decorated'
The name 'decoration' depends on a routine's linkage, but if you use the .DEF files created by the compiler, you do not need to be concerned about this.
Linking your DLL
To link your DLL, use the following options and input files:
Linker options
v
/dll, v /out: followed by the name of your dll
Input files
v All of the OBJs comprising your DLL v The .DEF or .EXP file specifying what is to be exported
For example, to link mydlla.obj
and mydllb.obj
into mydlla.dll
, issue the following link command under Windows: ilink /dll /out:mydlla.dll mydlla.obj mydllb.obj mydlla.exp
Using your DLL
Once you have built your DLL, other routines in your application can access the variables and routines exported by that DLL using one of the following methods: v A FETCH statement v
Linking with an import library
If your application accesses an element of a DLL using a FETCH statement, you do not need to take any special action when you link. Unless your application executes that FETCH statement, the DLL does not even need to exist.
If your application accesses an element of a DLL as if it were statically linked with that DLL, then the linker must be able to resolve the name of that element.
380
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Linking your DLL
Under Windows, the linker can resolve names from a DLL if you link with a import library for that DLL. In fact, that is how the names of PL/I library routines are resolved. For example, when you link with ibmws20i.lib
, you are linking with the import library for ibmws20.dll
.
Under Windows, the import library for the DLL is built when you create the .EXP
file when preparing to link the DLL.
Note:
In order for the loader to find a DLL, the DLL must reside either in your current working directory or in one of the directories listed in the PATH environment variable under Windows.
Sample program to build a DLL
The sample programs SORT.PLI and DRIVER1.PLI show how to build and use a
DLL that contains three different sorting functions. These functions keep track of the number of swap and compare operations required to do the sorting.
The files for the sample program are:
SORT.PLI
The source file for the DLL.
SORT.DEF
The module definition file for the DLL.
DRIVER1.DEF
The module definition file for the executable.
EXTDCL.CPY
The user include file.
DRIVER1.PLI
The main program that uses SORT.DLL.
If you installed the sample programs, these files are found in the ..\SAMPLES\ directory.
Use the following sequence of commands to compile, link, and run the program:
1.
pli sort
2.
ilib /geni sort.def
3.
ilink /dll /out:sort.dll sort.obj sort.exp
4.
pli driver1
5.
ilink driver1.obj /stack:80000 sort.lib
6.
driver1
Using FETCH and RELEASE in your main program
The SAMPLES directory also contains DRIVER2.PLI which is a modified version of
DRIVER1.PLI that uses FETCH and RELEASE statements to dynamically link the
SORT.DLL routines at run time instead of at load time.
The main advantage of using this version of the DRIVER program is that you can control when the sort routines are brought into and released from memory. Using
FETCH and RELEASE statements, however, might increase your program's execution time.
Chapter 19. Building dynamic link libraries
381
Using FETCH and RELEASE
Use the following sequence of commands to compile, link, and run this version of the DRIVER program under Windows:
1.
pli sort
2.
ilib /geni sort.def
3.
ilink /dll /out:sort.dll sort.obj sort.exp
4.
pli driver2
5.
ilink driver2.obj /stack:80000
6.
driver2
Exporting data from a DLL
The preceding discussion described how to export external entrys from a DLL. You can also export external data from a DLL. To export external data from a DLL, the data must be declared as RESERVED throughout your application. The following conditions must also apply: v
The DLL that exports a variable must name that variable in the RESERVES option of some package in that DLL.
v
All DLLs and EXEs importing a variable from another DLL must also declare that variable as RESERVED(IMPORTED).
For example, to create a DLL exporting just the variable datatab , the following routine would be used:
*process dllinit; edata: package reserves( datatab ); dcl datatab char(256) reserved external init( .... ); end;
To import datatab into a procedure outside this DLL, it would be declared as: dcl datatab char(256) reserved(imported) external;
382
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
Use the IBM Library Manager (also referred to as ILIB) to create and maintain libraries of object code, create import libraries and export object pairs, and generate module definition (.
def ) files. Using the ILIB utility, you can: v
Create a new library from a collection of objects v Maintain a library
– Add objects to an existing library
– Delete objects from an existing library
– Copy objects from an existing library
– Replace objects in an existing library v
List the contents of a new or existing library v
Create import library/export object pairs from:
– Module definition (.
def
) files
– Objects generated from source files containing
#pragma export and
_Export statements
– A combination of the above v Generate module definition (.
def ) files from:
– An existing DLL
– Objects generated from source files containing
#pragma export and
_Export statements
– A combination of the above
Running ILIB
Run ILIB by typing ilib at the command prompt.
You can specify parameters in the following ways:
1.
Enter them directly on the command line
2.
Use the ILIBenvironment variable
3.
Put them in a text file, called a response file and specify the file name after the ilib command.
4.
A combination of the above
You can press Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Break at any time while running ILIB to return to the operating system. Interrupting ILIB before completion restores the original library from a backup.
Notes:
1.
When started, ILIB makes a backup copy of the original library in case it is interrupted or a mistake is made. Make sure you have enough disk space for both your original library and the modified copy.
2.
The library must end with the extension .
lib
. If an extension is not specified, the default extension, .
lib
, will be appended. High
Performance File System (HPFS) file names are supported. Hence, mylibraryname
.
new
.
lib is still a valid library.
Using the command line
You can specify all the input ILIB needs on the command line. The syntax of the command line is: ilib [options] [libraries] [@responsefile] [objects]
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
383
Using ILIB on Windows
Options
Options that affect the behavior of ILIB
Libraries
The input library to be created or modified
Response file
The name of a text file containing ILIB options
Objects
Commands used to add, delete, replace, copy, and move object modules within the library
The ILIB command line is a free format command line; that is, the input arguments can be specified any number of times, in any order. The only exception is the
/FREEFORMAT option, which does have a position restriction. See
“/FREEFORMAT” on page 392 for more information.
Note:
For compatibility with the OS/2 release of ILIB, a fixed format command line is also supported. To use the fixed format command line, the
/NOFREEFORMAT option must be specified immediately following ilib on the command line, or as the first parameter in the ILIB environment variable. The default command line format is free format.
For the purposes of this document, only the free format command line will be described in detail.
Using the ILIB environment variable
You can use the ILIB environment variable to specify any default ILIB options.
When the ilib command is invoked, the environment variable will be parsed before the command line.
Use the
SET command to give value to the ILIB environment variable. You can do this in the following ways:
Command line
When the
SET command is used on the command line, the values you specify are in effect for only that session. They override values previously specified.
You can append the original value of the variable using %
variable
%. The following example would cause the ILIB environment variable to be set to the original value of the ILIB environment variable, with the /NOFREEFORMAT option specified ahead of any existing options.
SET ILIB=/FREEFORMAT %ILIB%
Windows control panel
Windows allows you to update environment variables and have them take effect immediately (that is, no reboot required) using the Windows Control Panel.
To set the ILIB environment variable: v
Select the
Main
group by double-clicking on the
Main
icon.
v
Select the
System
icon from the
Main
group by double-clicking on it.
v
Enter
ILIB in the
Variable
field.
v
Enter the value for the ILIB environment variable in the
Value
field.
v
Choose
Set
.
384
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using ILIB on Windows
Windows 98 AUTOEXEC.BAT file
Windows 98 allows you to set environment variables in the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
file. Any environment variables set in this fashion are available in every user session.
Add a line to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT
file that sets the environment variable to the value you want. Consider the following example:
SET ILIB=/NOBACKUP
Because environment variables specified in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file are in effect for every session you start, this is a good place to specify options that you want to apply each time you invoke ILIB. However, after you make a change to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT
file, you must reboot your system to have the change take effect.
Using an ILIB response file
To provide input to ILIB with a response file, type: ilib @
responsefile
The
responsefile
is the name of a file containing the same information that can be specified on the command line.
Why use a response file?
Use a response file for: v
Complex and long commands you type frequently v
Strings of commands that exceed the limit for command line length.
A response file extends the command line to include everything in the response file. To split input to ILIB between the command line and a response file, put part of your input on the command line and specify a response file (preceding the response file name with the at sign (
@
)). No space can appear between the at sign and the file name.
The response file name can be any valid Windows file name. To use special characters in the file name, such as a space or the @ symbol, the file name must be enclosed in quotes.
ILIB responds to input you place in a response file just as it does to input you enter on a command line. Any newline characters that occur between arguments are treated as spaces. This allows you to extend an ILIB command to multiple lines.
Note:
The options which specify which format command line to use
(/FREEFORMAT or /NOFREEFORMAT) must be specified as the first parameter following ilib on the command line or as the first parameter in the ILIB environment variable. They cannot be specified inside the response file.
Examples specifying ILIB parameters
The following examples show different methods for specifying parameters to ILIB.
The operations shown in each example create a new library, newlib.lib
, and its listing file, newlib.lst
, from the existing mylib.lib
library.
mylib.lib
is unchanged, but newlib.lib
has these changes: v
The module text is deleted
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
385
Using ILIB on Windows
v
The object file root.obj
is appended as an object module with the name root v
The module table is deleted and is replaced by a new table which is appended after root v
The module string is copied into an object file named string.obj
Command Line Method
At the command line prompt, enter the following: ilib /out:newlib.lib /list:newlib.lst mylib.lib /remove:text root table
/extract:string
Response File Method
First, create a response file with the following contents:
/out:newlib.lib
/list:newlib.lst
mylib.lib
/remove:text root table
/extract:string
Then, assuming the name of the response file is response.fil
, invoke ILIB with: ilib @response.fil
Controlling ILIB input
ILIB determines the format of any input files by examining the file contents. Most file formats can be identified by the file header information. If the format of an input file is not recognized and seems to contain only ASCII, it is assumed to be a module definition (
.def
) file.
ILIB allows you to place any extension you choose on a file and still have it dealt with correctly.
Controlling ILIB output
ILIB determines what output is to be produced by examining the options that you supply on the command line. The following options control ILIB output:
Option Description
/O[UT]:
filename
A static library is produced.
/GEND[EF]:
filename
A module definition (
.def
) file is produced. The short form,
/gd
, may also be used.
/GENI[MPLIB]:
filename
An import library/export object pair is produced. The short form,
/gi
, may also be used.
/L[IST]:
filename
A list file is produced.
If none of the above are specified, ILIB will determine what is to be produced, as follows: v
If a DEF file is input to ILIB, an import library/export object pair will be produced.
386
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using ILIB on Windows
Note:
If there are no exported symbols, then no import library will be produced.
v
If a library and/or object(s) are input to ILIB, a library combining them will be produced.
ILIB will allow you to generate a DEF file directly from a DLL. However, since the only information that a DLL has in it is the undecorated (exported) names, symbol decoration (calling convention) and type information (function or data) cannot be determined. ILIB will assume that all symbols exported from the DLL are _Optlink
(the default linkage convention), unless an object file is provided that indicates otherwise.
The best way of using ILIB with a DLL is to use ILIB to create a DEF file using the
/gd
option. Edit the DEF file to change decorations, where appropriate, and then run the DEF file through ILIB using the
/gi
option to produce an import library/export object pair.
If an import library/export object pair is requested, and only a DLL is specified as input, ILIB will generate an error.
Controlling ILIB output
The following are examples showing how to control ILIB output.
Library
The following example creates create the library newlib.lib
out of the objects in text
.
obj and mylib
.
lib
.
ilib /out:newlib.lib text.obj mylib.lib
Note:
Unless newlib.lib
is specified as an input file, its contents will not be included in the library. If an output file already exists, and is not used as an input file, it will be replaced.
DEF File
This example creates the module definition file winner
.
def from the DLL winner
.
dll
.
ilib /gd:winner.def winner.dll
Import Library/Export Oject Pair
The following example creates an import library named winner
.
lib and an export object named winner
.
exp
. However, if no exported symbols are contained in winner
.
def
, then winner
.
lib will not be produced.
ilib /gi winner.def
List File
The following example generates the list will generate the list file mylib
.
lst
, based on the library mylib
.
lib
, in the current directory.
ilib /list:mylib.lst mylib.lib
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
387
Using ILIB on Windows
ILIB objects
ILIB objects are used to manipulate modules in a library. When you run ILIB, you can specify multiple objects in any order.
Each object consists of the ILIB command, followed by the name of the object module that is the subject of the command. Separate objects on the command line with a space or tab character.
Summary of ILIB objects
The following is a summary of ILIB objects on Windows.
Table 27. ILIB objects on Windows
Syntax Description
filename
Add/replace the named object in the library
Default
None
Page
/E[XTRACT]:
obj
/R[EMOVE]:
obj
Copy the named object into the current directory and overwrite it if it already exists
Remove the named object from the list of objects to be placed in the output library
None
None
Notes:
1.
ILIB objects are not case sensitive, so you can specify them in lower-, upper-, or mixed-case.
You can also substitute a dash (-) for the slash (/) preceding the object.
For example, -REMOVE:
filename
is equivalent to /REMOVE:
filename
.
2.
You can specify objects in either short or long form. For example,
/R:
filename
and /RE:
filename
are equivalent to /REMOVE:
filename
.
3.
The order of operations when processing the command line is left to right.
4.
ILIB never makes changes to your input library while it runs. It copies the library and makes changes to the copy. If ILIB is interrupted, your original library will be restored.
If you do not specify an output library, ILIB will not produce any output.
Add/Replace
filename
The default action, when
filename
is specified on the command line without an associated object, is to add it to the library. If
filename
already exists in the library, it will be replaced.
Adding an Object Module to a Library
Type the name of the object file to be added on the command line. The .obj
extension may be omitted.
388
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using ILIB on Windows
ILIB uses the base name of the object file as the name of the object module in the library. For example, if the object file cursor.obj
is added to a library file, the name of the corresponding object module is cursor
.
Object modules are always added to the end of a library file.
Replacing an Object Module in a Library
Type the name of the object module to be replaced on the command line. The .
obj extension may be omitted.
If the object module already exists in the library, ILIB will replace it with the new copy.
Combining Two Libraries
Specify the name of the library file to be added, including the
.lib
extension, on the command line. A copy of the contents of that library is added to the library file being modified. If both libraries contain a module with the same name, ILIB generates a warning message, and uses only the first module with that name.
ILIB adds the modules of the library to the end of the library being changed. The added library still exists as an independent library because ILIB copies the modules without deleting them.
Examples
The following command adds the file sample.obj
to the library mylib.lib
. If sample.obj
already exists in the library mylib.lib
, ILIB will replace it.
ilib /out:mylib.lib mylib.lib sample.obj
This example adds the contents of the library mylib.lib
to the library newlib.lib
.
The library mylib.lib
is unchanged after this command is executed.
ilib /out:newlib.lib newlib.lib mylib.lib
/EXTRACT
/E[XTRACT]:
obj
Use /EXTRACT to copy a module from the library into an object file of the same name. The module remains in the library.
When ILIB copies the module to an object file, it adds the
.obj
extension to the module name and places the file in the current directory. If a file with this name already exists, ILIB overwrites it.
Example
The command above copies the module sample from the mylib.lib
library to a file called sample.obj
in the current directory. The module sample in mylib.lib
is not altered.
ilib mylib.lib /extract:sample
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
389
Using ILIB on Windows
/REMOVE
/R[EMOVE]:
obj
Use /REMOVE to delete an object module from a library. After /REMOVE, specify the name of the module to be deleted. Module names do not have path names or extensions.
Example
The following command deletes the module sample from the library mylib.lib
.
ilib /out:mylib.lib mylib.lib /remove:sample
This next command copies sample.obj
from the mylib.lib
library to an object file in the current directory. Then sample.obj
is deleted from the library.
ilib /out:mylib.lib mylib.lib /extract:sample /remove:sample
ILIB options
ILIB options affect the behavior of ILIB. When you run ILIB, you can specify multiple options in any order. The only exception is the /FREEFORMAT option, which has a position restriction.
Separate options on the command line with a space or tab character.
Summary of ILIB options
The following is a summary of ILIB options on Windows.
Table 28. ILIB options on Windows
Syntax Description
Display help
Default Page
None
/?
/BA[CKUP]
/NOBA[CKUP]
Back up the output file (if it exists) before overwriting it
/BA
/DEF:
def
/F[REEFORMAT]
/NOF[REEFORMAT]
Specify the name of a .
def file to use to get information about exported symbols and linker parameters
Use the free format command line
None
/F
/GEND[EF]:
filename
Generate a .
def file
Generate an import library
None
None
/GENI[MPLIB]:
filename
/H[ELP]
/L[IST]:
filename
Display help
Generate a list file
None
None
390
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using ILIB on Windows
Table 28. ILIB options on Windows (continued)
Syntax Description
/NOE[XTDICTIONARY]
/EXTD[ICTIONARY]
Do not generate an extended dictionary in an
OMF library
Specify the name of the output library
/O[UT]:
filename
Do not display the banner on startup
/Q[UIET], /NOL[OGO]
/LO[GO], /NOQ[UIET]
/W[ARN:
msgnum
,
msgnum
[,...]]
/NOW[ARN:
msgnum
,
msgnum
[,...]]
Enable printing of warning message number
msgnum
Default Page
/EXTD
None
/LO
None
Notes:
1.
ILIB options are not case sensitive, so you can specify them in lower-, upper-, or mixed-case.
You can also substitute a dash (-) for the slash (/) preceding the option.
For example, -FREEFORMAT is equivalent to /FREEFORMAT.
2.
You can specify options in either short or long form. For example, /F,
/FR, and /FREE are equivalent to /FREEFORMAT.
See below for detailed information on each ILIB option.
/?
/?
Use /? to display a list of valid ILIB options. This option is equivalent to /HELP.
/BACKUP
/BA[CKUP]
/NOBA[CKUP]
/DEF
Use /BACKUP to back up the output file (if it exists) before overwriting it.
ILIB uses the base name of the library as the name of the backup library, and then appends the .
bak extension. For example, if the library being modified is mylib.lib
and a backup is requested, ILIB will create mylib.bak
in the current directory.
/DEF
:filename
Use /DEF to specify the name of the .
def file to use to get information about exported symbols and linker parameters.
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
391
Using ILIB on Windows
This option is not required, since ILIB will recognize .
def files by their contents if they are placed with other input files on the command line.
/FREEFORMAT
/F[REEFORMAT]
/NOF[REEFORMAT]
Use the /FREEFORMAT option to tell ILIB that you are using the free format command line. The free format command line allows you to specify ILIB input arguments any number of times, in any order.
Note:
This option must be specified immediately following ilib on the command line, or as the first argument in the ILIB environment variable. If you don't specify either /FREEFORMAT or /NOFREEFORMAT, ILIB will default to the free format command line.
/GENDEF
/GEND[EF]:
filename
Use the /GENDEF option to create a module definition (.
def
) file.
Example
The following command creates the module definition file sample
.
def from the
DLL sample
.
dll
.
ilib /gd:sample.def sample.dll
/GI
/GENI[IMPLIB]
:filename
/HELP
Use the /GENIMPLIB option to create an import library/export object pair.
Example
The command above will create an import library named sample
.
lib and an export object named sample
.
exp from the module definition file sample
.
def
. However, if no exported symbols are contained, then sample .
lib will not be produced.
ilib /gi sample.def
/H[ELP]
Use /HELP to display a list of valid ILIB options. This option is equivalent to /?.
392
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Using ILIB on Windows
/LIST
/L[IST]
filename
Use the /LIST option to generate a list file. If filename is not specified, ILIB will add the extension
.lst
to the input filename.
Example
The following command directs ILIB to place a listing of the contents of mylib.lib
into the file mylib.lst
. No path specification is given for mylib.lst
. By default, the file created is put into the current directory.
ilib mylib /list:mylib.lst
Note:
The /LISTLEVEL option is not supported in the Windows release of ILIB.
/NOEXT
/NOE[XTDICTIONARY]
/EXTD[ICTIONARY]
/OUT
Use /NOEXTDICTIONARY to disable generation of the extended dictionary.
The extended dictionary is an optional part of the library that increases linking speed. However, using an extended dictionary requires more memory. The space reserved for the extended dictionary is limited to 64K. If ILIB reports an
out-of-memory
error, you may want to use this option. As an alternative, you can split large libraries into smaller libraries to use in linking.
/QUIET
/WARN
Use the /QUIET or /NOLOGO options to suppress the ILIB copyright notice.
Use the /WARN option to enable printing of the message number specified in the
msgnum
parameter.
Chapter 20. Using IBM Library Manager on Windows
393
394
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
This chapter discusses the calling conventions used by PL/I for Windows:
OPTLINK
SYSTEM
STDCALL
CDECL
The OPTLINK linkage convention (see “OPTLINK linkage” on page 396 for
details) is also supported by VisualAge for C++ (OS/2 and Windows) and is the fastest method of calling PL/I procedures, C functions, or assembler routines.
OPTLINK is not, however, standard for all Windows applications.
On Windows, specifying SYSTEM linkage is synonymous with STDCALL linkage and is implemented the same as STDCALL. The compiler, however, considers the names SYSTEM and STDCALL to be distinct and complains if you mix them. The
STDCALL linking convention is described in “STDCALL linkage (Windows only)” on page 405.
You can specify the calling convention for all functions within a program using the
LINKAGE suboption of the DEFAULT compile-time option. You can also use the
LINKAGE option of the OPTIONS attribute to specify the linkage for individual functions.
Note:
You cannot call a function using a different calling convention than the one with which it is compiled. For example, if a function is compiled with
SYSTEM linkage, you cannot later call it specifying OPTLINK linkage.
Understanding linkage considerations
On Windows, there are three primary linkages that the PL/I compiler supports:
OPTLINK, CDECL, and STDCALL. On Windows, all the system services use the
STDCALL linkage.
These linkages differ in their parameter passing conventions: v
The OPTLINK linkage is the only one that attempts to pass some parameters in registers; the other linkages pass all the parameters on the stack.
v
The STDCALL linkage is the only one that makes the callee responsible for cleaning up the stack; the other linkages make the caller responsible.
The PL/I for Windows compiler interprets any specification of the SYSTEM linkage as if the STDCALL linkage were intended. The VisualAge C compiler does the same.
On Windows, all external names are decorated. If the external attribute does not specify a name, the name decoration depends on the linkage: v
Routines with the CDECL linkage have a '_' added as a prefix so that, for example, the name FUNKY would become _FUNKY.
v
Routines with the OPTLINK linkage have a '?' added as a prefix so that, for example, the name FUNKY would become ?FUNKY.
v
Routines with the STDCALL linkage have a '_' added as a prefix and a '@' followed by the bytes used by its parameters added as a suffix. For example,
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
395
Understanding linkage considerations
then, if the name FUNKY had two byvalue pointers or any two byaddr parameters, it would become _FUNKY@8.
One consequence of these name decorations is that if a caller of a routine specifies the wrong linkage for that routine, the program fails to link.
So far, the discussion of name decoration has applied only to routines for which the external attribute did not specify a name. It also applies when the external attribute specifies a name that differs only in case from the declared name. In these situations, the name specified as part of the external attribute is decorated.
For example, given the following declare, the name that the linker sees is
?getenv
.
dcl getenv ext(’getenv’) entry( char(*) varz byaddr nonasgn ) returns( pointer ) options( nodescriptor linkage(optlink) );
Similarly, for the following declare (for the Windows system routine that loads a
DLL), the name specified as part of the external attribute is decorated, and the linker sees the name as
_LoadLibraryA@4
.
dcl loadlibrarya ext(’LoadLibraryA’) entry( char(*) varz byaddr nonasgn ) returns( pointer byvalue ) options( linkage(stdcall) nodescriptor );
If, however, a name is specified as part of the external attribute and that name differs from the declared name by more than its case, then no name decoration occurs.
For example, given the following declare, no name decoration occurs and the name that the linker sees is
?getenv
.
dcl getenv ext(’?getenv’) entry( char(*) varz byaddr nonasgn ) returns( pointer ) options( nodescriptor linkage(optlink) );
Performing name decoration yourself as illustrated in this last example usually makes your code less portable. For instance, only the first declare for getenv in the preceding examples is valid for Windows and AIX.
OPTLINK linkage
This is the default calling convention. It is an alternative to SYSTEM linkage that is normally used for calls to the operating system. This linkage provides better total performance than SYSTEM linkage.
Features of OPTLINK
The OPTLINK convention has the following features: v
Parameters are pushed from right to left onto the stack.
v
The caller cleans up the stack.
v
The general-purpose registers EBX, EDI, and ESI are preserved across the call.
v
The general-purpose registers EAX, ECX, and EDX are not preserved across the call.
v
Floating-point registers are not preserved across the call.
396
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
OPTLINK linkage
v
The three conforming parameters that are lexically leftmost (conforming parameters are the addresses for all BYADDR parameters and the following
BYVALUE parameters: pointer, handle, ordinal, offset, limited entry, real fixed binary, character(1), and nonvarying bits occupying 1 byte or less) are passed in the three unpreserved general-purpose registers.
v
Up to four real floating-point or two complex parameters (the lexically first four) are passed in extended precision format (80-bit) in the floating-point register stack.
v All conforming parameters not passed in registers and all nonconforming parameters are passed on the 80386 stack.
v
Space for the parameters in registers is allocated on the stack, but the parameters are not copied into that space.
v
Conforming return values are returned in EAX.
v
Real floating-point return values are returned in extended precision format in the topmost register of the floating-point stack.
v
Complex floating-point return values are returned in extended precision format in the topmost two registers of the floating-point stack.
v
When you are calling external functions, the floating-point register stack contains only valid parameter registers on entry, and valid return values on exit.
v
Functions returning aggregates pass the address of a storage area determined by the caller as a hidden parameter. This area becomes the returned aggregate. The address of this aggregate is returned in EAX.
v
The direction flag must be clear upon entry to functions, and clear on exit from functions. The state of the other flags is ignored on entry to a function, and undefined on exit.
v
The compiler does not change the contents of the floating-point control register.
If you want to change the control register contents for a particular operation, save the contents before making the changes and restore them after the operation.
Tips for using OPTLINK
By following the tips given below when you use OPTLINK linkage, you can improve the performance of your applications.
v
The conforming and floating-point parameters that are most heavily used should be lexically leftmost in the parameter list so they will be considered for registers first. If they are adjacent to each other, the preparation of the parameter list will be faster.
v
If you have a parameter that is used near the end of a function, put it at or near the end of the parameter list. If all of your parameters are used near the end of functions, consider using SYSTEM linkage.
v
Compile with OPTIMIZE. (See “OPTIMIZE” on page 99.)
General-purpose register implications
Parameters
EAX, EDX, and ECX are used for the lexically first three conforming parameters with EAX containing the first parameter, EDX the second, and ECX the third. Four bytes of stack storage are allocated for each register parameter that is present, but the parameters exist only in the registers at the time of the call.
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
397
General-purpose register implications
Examples of passing parameters
The following examples are included only for purposes of illustration and clarity and have not been optimized. These examples assume that you are familiar with programming in assembler. In each example, the stack grows toward the bottom of the page, and ESP always points to the top of the stack.
Passing conforming parameters to a routine
The following example shows the code sequences and a picture of the stack for a call to the function FUNC1. It is assumed that this program is compiled with the
PREFIX(NOFIXEDOVERFLOW) option.
dcl func1 entry( char(1), fixed bin(15), fixed bin(31), fixed bin(31) ) returns( fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor ); dcl x fixed bin(15); dcl y fixed bin(31); y = func1(’A’, x, y+x, y); caller’s Code Up Until Call:
PUSH
SUB
MOV
MOV
MOVSX
ADD
CALL y
ESP, 12
AL, ’A’
DX, x
ECX, DX
ECX, y
FUNC1
; Push p4 onto the 80386 stack
; Allocate stack space for
; register parameters
; Put p1 into AL
; Put p2 into DX
; Sign-extend x to long
; Calculate p3 and put it into ECX
; Make call
Stack Just After Call
.
│ caller’s Local
├───────────────────┤
│ p4 │
.
│
├───────────────────┤
│ Blank Slot For p3 │
├───────────────────┤
│ Blank Slot For p2 │
├───────────────────┤
│ Blank Slot For p1 │
├───────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
ESP ─── └───────────────────┘
Register Set Just After Call
┌─────────┬────┬───┐
EAX │ undefined │p1 │
├─────────┼────┼───┤
EBX │ caller’s EBX │
├─────────┼────┼───┤
ECX │ p3 │ │
├─────────┼────┼───┤
EDX │undefined│ p2 │
├─────────┼────┴───┤
EDI │ caller’s EDI │
├─────────┼────────┤
ESI │ caller’s ESI │
└─────────┴────────┘ callee’s Prolog Code:
PUSH
MOV
SUB
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
EBP
EBP, ESP
; Save caller’s EBP
; Set up callee’s EBP
ESP, callee’s local size ; Allocate callee’s Local
EBX
EDI
ESI
Stack After Prolog
; Save preserved registers -
; will optimize to save
; only registers callee uses
Register Set After Prolog
.
.
│ caller’s Local │
├──────────────────┤
┌──────────┬────┬────┐
EAX │ undefined │p1 │
├──────────┼────┼────┤
398
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
General-purpose register implications
│ p4 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p3 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p2 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p1 │
├──────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
├──────────────────┤
│
.
│ caller’s EBP │
├──────────────────┤
│
.
.
callee’s Local .
.
.
│ │
├──────────────────┤
│ Saved EBX │
├──────────────────┤
│ Saved EDI │
├──────────────────┤
│ Saved ESI │
ESP ─── └──────────────────┘ callee’s Epilog Code:
MOV
POP
POP
POP
MOV
POP
RET
EBX │ undefined │
├──────────┼────┴────┤
ECX │ p3 │
├──────────┼────┬────┤
EDX │undefined │ p2 │
├──────────┼────┴────┤
EDI │ undefined │
├──────────┼─────────┤
ESI │ undefined │
└──────────┴─────────┘
The term "undefined" in registers EBX, EDI and ESI refers to the fact that they can be safely overwritten by the code in FUNC1.
EAX, RetVal ; Put return value in EAX
ESI ; Restore preserved registers
EDI
EBX
ESP, EBP
EBP
; Deallocate callee’s local
; Restore caller’s EBP
; Return to caller
ESP ───
Stack After Epilog
.
.
│ caller’s Local │
├──────────────────┤
│ p4 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p3 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p2 │
├──────────────────┤
│Blank Slot For p1 │
│ │
└──────────────────┘
Register Set After Epilog
┌─────────┬────┬──┐
EAX │ Return │Value │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
EBX │ caller’s EBX │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
ECX │ undefined │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
EDX │ undefined │
├─────────┼────┴──┤
EDI │ caller’s EDI │
├─────────┼───────┤
ESI │ caller’s ESI │
└─────────────────┘ caller’s Code Just After Call:
ADD
MOV
ESP, 16 y, EAX
; Remove parameters from stack
; Use return value.
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
399
General-purpose register implications
ESP ───
Stack After Cleanup
.
.
│caller’s Local │
└───────────────┘
Register Set After Cleanup
┌─────────┬────┬──┐
EAX │ Return │Value │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
EBX │ caller’s EBX │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
ECX │ undefined │
├─────────┼────┼──┤
EDX │ undefined │
├─────────┼────┴──┤
EDI │ caller’s EDI │
├─────────┼───────┤
ESI │ caller’s ESI │
└─────────────────┘
Passing floating-point parameters to a routine:
The following example shows code sequences, 80386 stack layouts, and floating-point register stack states for a call to the routine FUNC2. For simplicity, the general-purpose registers are not shown. It is assumed that this program is compiled with the IMPRECISE option.
dcl func2 entry( float bin(21), float bin(53), float bin(64), float bin(21), float bin(53) ) returns( float bin(53) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor ); dcl (a, b, c) float bin(53); dcl (d, e) float bin(21); a = b + func2(a, d, prec(a + c, 53), e, c); caller’s Code Up Until Call:
PUSH
PUSH
FLD
FLD
FADD
FLD
FLD
FSTP
FLD
SUB
CALL
2ND DWORD OF c
1ST DWORD OF c
DWORD_PTR e
FUNC2
; Push upper 4 bytes of c onto stack
; Push lower 4 bytes of c onto stack
; Load e into 80387, promotion
; requires no conversion code
QWORD_PTR a ; Load a to calculate p3
ST(0), QWORD_PTR c ; Calculate p3, result is float bin(64)
QWORD_PTR d
QWORD_PTR a
; from nature of 80387 hardware
; Load d, no conversion necessary
; Load a, demotion requires conversion
DWORD_PTR [EBP - T1] ; Store to a temp (T1) to convert to float
DWORD_PTR [EBP - T1] ; Load converted value from temp (T1)
ESP, 32 ; Allocate the stack space for
; parameter list
; Make call
400
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
General-purpose register implications
Stack Just After Call
┌
│ caller’s Local
├────────────────────┤
│Upper Dword of p5 │
┐
│
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│Lower Dword of p5 │
├────────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p4 │
├────────────────────┤
│ Four │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Dwords │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ for p3 │
├────────────────────┤
│ Two Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Dwords for p2 │
├────────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p1 │
├────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
ESP ─── └────────────────────┘
80387 Register Set Just After Call
┌──────────────────┐
ST(7) │ Empty │
├──────────────────┤
ST(6) │ Empty │
├──────────────────┤
ST(5) │ Empty │
├──────────────────┤
ST(4) │ Empty │
├──────────────────┤
ST(3) │ p4 (e) │
├──────────────────┤
ST(2) │ p3 (a + c) │
├──────────────────┤
ST(1) │ p2 (d) │
├──────────────────┤
ST(0) │ p1 (a) │
└──────────────────┘ callee’s Prolog Code:
PUSH
MOV
SUB
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
EBP
EBP, ESP
; Save caller’s EBP
; Set up callee’s EBP
ESP, callee’s local size ; Allocate callee’s Local
EBX ; Save preserved registers -
EDI
ESI
; will optimize to save
; only registers callee uses
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
401
General-purpose register implications
Stack After Prolog
.
.
│ caller’s Local │
├───────────────────┤
│Upper Dword of p5 │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ──┤
│Lower Dword of p5 │
├───────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p4 │
├───────────────────┤
│ Four │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ──┤
│ Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ──┤
│ Dwords │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ──┤
│ for p3 │
├───────────────────┤
│ Two Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ──┤
│ Dwords for p2 │
├───────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p1 │
├───────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
├───────────────────┤
│ caller’s EBP │
├───────────────────┤
│ │
.
│
.
.
.
callee’s Local .
├───────────────────┤
│ Saved EBX │
.
│
├───────────────────┤
│ Saved EDI │
├───────────────────┤
│ Saved ESI │
ESP ─── └───────────────────┘ callee’s Epilog Code:
FLD
POP
POP
POP
MOV
POP
RET
RETVAL
ESI
EDI
EBX
ESP, EBP
EBP
80387 Register Set After Prolog
┌────────────────┐
ST(7) │ Empty │
├────────────────┤
ST(6) │ Empty │
├────────────────┤
ST(5) │ Empty │
├────────────────┤
ST(4) │ Empty │
├────────────────┤
ST(3) │ p4 │
├────────────────┤
ST(2) │ p3 │
├────────────────┤
ST(1) │ p2 │
├────────────────┤
ST(0) │ p1 │
└────────────────┘
; Load return value onto floating-point stack
; Restore preserved registers
; Deallocate callee’s local
; Restore caller’s EBP
; Return to caller
402
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
General-purpose register implications
Stack After Epilog
.
│ caller’s Local
├────────────────────┤
│Upper Dword of p5 │
.
│
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│Lower Dword of p5 │
├────────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p4 │
├────────────────────┤
│ Four │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Dwords │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ for p3 │
├────────────────────┤
│ Two Blank │
├─ ── ── ── ── ── ─ ─┤
│ Dwords for p2 │
├────────────────────┤
│Blank Dword for p1 │
ESP ─── └────────────────────┘
80387 Register Set After Epilog
┌─────────────────┐
ST(7) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(6) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(5) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(4) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(3) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(2) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(1) │ Empty │
├─────────────────┤
ST(0) │ Return Value │
└─────────────────┘ caller’s Code Just After Call:
ADD
FADD
FSTP
ESP, 40 ; Remove parameters from stack
QWORD_PTR b ; Use return value
QWORD_PTR a ; Store expression to variable a
Stack After Cleanup
.
.
│ caller’s Local │
│ │
ESP ─── └────────────────┘
80387 Register Set After Cleanup
┌───────────────────┐
ST(7) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(6) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(5) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(4) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(3) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(2) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(1) │ Empty │
├───────────────────┤
ST(0) │ Return Value │
└───────────────────┘
SYSTEM linkage
To use this linkage convention, you must specify the
OPTIONS(LINKAGE(SYSTEM)) attribute in the declaration of the function, or specify the DEFAULT(LINKAGE(SYSTEM)) compile-time option.
Features of SYSTEM
The following rules apply to the SYSTEM linkage convention: v
All parameters are passed on the 80386 stack.
v
Parameters are pushed onto the stack in right-to-left order.
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
403
SYSTEM linkage
v
The calling function is responsible for removing parameters from the stack.
v
All parameters are doubleword (4-byte) aligned.
v
Values are returned in the same manner as the OPTLINK linkage.
v
The direction flag must be clear upon entry to functions and clear on exit from functions. The state of the other flags is ignored on entry to a function, and undefined on exit.
v The compiler does not change the contents of the floating-point control register.
If you want to change the control register contents for a particular operation, save the contents before making the changes and restore them after the operation.
Example using SYSTEM linkage
The following example is included only for purposes of illustration and clarity and has not been optimized. The example assumes that you are familiar with programming in assembler. In the example, the stack grows toward the bottom of the page, and ESP always points to the top of the stack.
The following example shows the code sequences and a picture of the stack for a call to the function FUNC3 which has two local variables, x and y (both fixed bin(31)). For the call dcl func3 entry( fixed bin(31), fixed bin(31), fixed bin(31) ) returns( fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor linkage(system) ); m = func3(a,b,c); the stack for the call to FUNC3 would look like this:
Stack
EBP ─────→
ESP ─────→
┌───────────────────────┐
│ c │
├───────────────────────┤
│ b │
├───────────────────────┤
│ a │
├───────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
├───────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EBP │
├───────────────────────┤
│ x │
├───────────────────────┤
Higher Memory
│ y │
├───────────────────────┤ ─┐
│ Saved EDI │
├───────────────────────┤
│
│These would only
│ Saved ESI │
├───────────────────────┤
│be pushed if they
│were used in this
│ Saved EBX │ │function.
└───────────────────────┘ ←─┘
Lower Memory
The instructions used to build this activation record on the stack look like this on the calling side:
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH c b a
404
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
SYSTEM linkage
MOV
CALL
.
.
ADD
.
.
MOV
.
.
AL, 3H func3
ESP, 12 m, EAX
; Cleaning up the parameters
For the callee, the code looks like this: func3 PROC
PUSH
MOV
SUB
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
.
.
MOV
MOV
.
.
XOR
POP
POP
POP
LEAVE
EBP
EBP, ESP
ESP, 8
EDI
ESI
EBX
EAX, EAX
EBX
ESI
EDI
; Allocating 8 bytes of storage
; for two local variables.
; These would only be
; pushed if they were used
; in this function.
EAX, [EBP - 8] ; Load y into EAX
EBX, [EBP + 12] ; Load b into EBX
; Zero the return value
; Restore the saved registers
; Equivalent to MOV ESP, EBP
; POP EBP
RET func3 ENDP
The saved register set is EBX, ESI, and EDI. The other registers (EAX, ECX, and
EDX) can have their contents changed by a called routine.
Under some circumstances, the compiler does not use EBP to access automatic and parameter values, thus increasing the application's efficiency. Whether it is used or not, EBP does not change across the call.
When passing aggregates by value, the compiler generates code to copy the aggregate on to the 80386 stack. If the size of the aggregate is larger than an 80386 page size (4K), the compiler generates code to copy the aggregate backward (that is, the last byte in the aggregate is the first to be copied).
Aggregates are not returned on the stack. The caller pushes the address where the returned aggregate is to be placed as a lexically first hidden parameter. A function that returns an aggregate must be aware that all parameters are 4 bytes farther away from EBP than they would be if no aggregate return were involved. The address of the returned aggregate is returned in EAX.
STDCALL linkage (Windows only)
To use this linkage convention, you must specify the
OPTIONS(LINKAGE(STDCALL)) attribute in the declaration of the function, or specify the DEFAULT(LINKAGE(STDCALL)) compile-time option.
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
405
STDCALL linkage
Features of STDCALL
The following rules apply to the STDCALL calling convention: v
All parameters are passed on the stack.
v
The parameters are pushed onto the stack in a lexical right-to-left order.
v
The
called
function removes the parameters from the stack.
v Floating point values are returned in ST(0) , the top register of the floating point register stack. Functions returning aggregate values return them as follows:
Size of Aggregate
Value Returned in
8 bytes
EAX-EDX pair
5, 6, 7 bytes
EAX The address to place the return values is passed as a hidden parameter in EAX.
4 bytes
EAX
3 bytes
EAX The address to place the return values is passed as a hidden parameter to EAX.
2 bytes
AX
1 byte
AL
For functions that return aggregates 5, 6, 7 or more than 8 bytes in size, the address to place the return values is passed as a hidden parameter, and the address is passed back in
EAX
.
v
STDCALL has the restriction that an unprototyped STDCALL function with a variable number of arguments will not work.
v
Function names are decorated with an underscore prefix, and a suffix which consists of an at sign (@), followed by the number of bytes of parameters (in decimal). Parameters of less than four bytes are rounded up to four bytes.
Structure sizes are also rounded up to a multiple of four bytes. For example, consider a function fred prototyped as follows: dcl fred ext entry (fixed bin(31) byvalue, fixed bin(31) byvalue, fixed bin(15) byvalue);
It would appear as follows in the object module:
_FRED@12
When building export lists in
.DEF
files, the decorated version of the name should be used. If you use undecorated names in the DEF file, you must give the object files to ILIB along with the DEF file. ILIB uses the object files to determine how each name ended up after decoration.
Examples using the STDCALL convention
The following examples are included for purposes of illustration and clarity only.
The examples assume that you are familiar with programming in assembler. In the examples, the stack grows toward the bottom of the page, and
ESP always points to the top of the stack.
406
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
STDCALL linkage
For the following call, a, b, and c are 32-bit integers and func has two local variables, x and y
(both 32-bit integers): m = func(a,b,c)
The stack for the call to FUNC would look like this:
Stack
EBP ─────
ESP ─────
┌───────────────────────┐
│ c │
├───────────────────────┤
│ b │
├───────────────────────┤
│ a │
├───────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
├───────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EBP │
├───────────────────────┤
│ x │
├───────────────────────┤
│ y │
├───────────────────────┤ ─┐
│ Saved EDI │ │
Higher Memory
├───────────────────────┤
│ Saved ESI │
├───────────────────────┤
│ Saved EBX │
└───────────────────────┘ ─┘
│These would only
│be pushed if they
│were used in this
│function.
Lower Memory
The instructions used to create this activation record on the stack look like this on the calling side:
PUSH c
PUSH b
PUSH a
CALL _func@12
.
.
MOV m, EAX
.
.
For the callee, the code looks like this:
_func@12 PROC
PUSH
MOV
SUB
PUSH
.
.
PUSH
PUSH
.
.
MOV
MOV
XOR
POP
POP
POP
LEAVE
EBP
EBP, ESP
ESP, 8
EDI
ESI
EBX
; Allocating 8 bytes of storage
; for two local variables.
; These would only be
; pushed if they were used
; in this function.
EAX, [EBP - 8] ; Load y into EAX
EBX, [EBP + 12] ; Load b into EBX
EAX, EAX
EBX
ESI
EDI
; Zero the return value
; Restore the saved registers
; Equivalent to MOV ESP, EBP
; POP EBP
RET
_func@12 ENDP
0CH
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
407
STDCALL linkage
The saved register set is EBX, ESI, and EDI.
Structures are not returned on the stack. The caller pushes the address where the returned structure is to be placed as a lexically first hidden parameter. A function that returns a structure must be aware that all parameters are four bytes farther away from EBP than they would be if no structure were involved. The address of the returned structure is returned in EAX.
Using WinMain (Windows only)
You can use WinMain by specifying OPTIONS(WINMAIN) on the procedure statement (see the PL/I Language Reference for syntax). This automatically implies
LINKAGE(STDCALL) and EXT('WinMain').
Your WinMain routine needs four parameters: v
An instance handle v
A previous handle v
A pointer to the command line v
An integer to be passed to ShowWindow
These are the same four parameters expected by WinMain in C. The calls made inside this routine are the same as those expected from a C routine.
An example guisamp.pli
is provided in the samples directory (see the program prolog for more details)
CDECL linkage
To use this linkage convention, you must specify the
OPTIONS(LINKAGE(CDECL)) attribute in the declaration of the function, or specify the DEFAULT(LINKAGE(CDECL)) compile-time option.
Features of CDECL
The following rules apply to the CDECL calling convention: v
All parameters are passed on the stack.
v
The parameters are pushed onto the stack in a lexical right-to-left order.
v
The
calling
function removes the parameters from the stack.
v
Floating point values are returned in
ST(0)
. All functions returning non-floating point values return them in
EAX
, except for the special case of returning aggregates less than or equal to eight bytes in size. For functions that return aggregates less than or equal to four bytes in size, the values are returned as follows:
Size of Aggregate
Value Returned in
8 bytes
EAX-EDX pair
5, 6, 7 bytes
EAX The address to place return values is passed as a hidden parameter in EAX.
4 bytes
EAX
408
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
CDECL linkage
3 bytes
EAX The address to place return values is passed as a hidden parameter to EAX.
2 bytes
AX
1 byte
AL
For functions that return aggregates 5, 6, 7 or more than 8 bytes in size, the address to place the return values is passed as a hidden parameter, and the address is passed back in
EAX
.
v
Function names are decorated with an underscore prefix when they appear in object modules. For example, a function named fred in the source program will appear as
_fred in the object.
When building export or import lists in
.DEF
files, the decorated version of the name should be used. If you used undecorated names in the DEF file, you must give the object files to ILIB along with the DEF file. ILIB uses the object files to determine how each name ended up after decoration.
Examples using the CDECL convention
The following examples are included for purposes of illustration and clarity only.
They have not been optimized. The examples assume that you are familiar with programming in assembler. In the examples, the stack grows toward the bottom of the page, and
ESP always points to the top of the stack.
Consider the following call: m = func(a,b,c);
The variables a, b, and c are 32-bit integers and FUNC has two local variables, x and y
(both 32-bit integers).
The stack for the call to FUNC would look like this:
Stack
EBP ─────
ESP ─────
┌───────────────────────┐
│ c │
├───────────────────────┤
│ b │
├───────────────────────┤
│ a │
├───────────────────────┤
│ caller’s EIP │
├───────────────────────┤
Higher Memory
│ caller’s EBP │
├───────────────────────┤
│ x │
├───────────────────────┤
│ y │
├───────────────────────┤ ─┐
│ Saved EDI │
├───────────────────────┤
│
│These would only
│ Saved ESI │
├───────────────────────┤
│be pushed if they
│were used in this
│ Saved EBX │ │function.
└───────────────────────┘ ─┘
Lower Memory
Chapter 21. Calling conventions
409
CDECL linkage
The instructions used to create this activation record on the stack look like this on the calling side:
PUSH c
PUSH b
PUSH a
CALL _func
.
.
ADD ESP, 12 : cleaning up the parameters
.
.
MOV m, EAX
.
.
For the callee, the code looks like this:
_func PROC
PUSH
MOV
SUB
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
.
.
MOV
MOV
.
.
XOR
POP
POP
POP
LEAVE
EBP
EBP, ESP
ESP, 08H
EDI
ESI
EBX
EAX, EAX
EBX
ESI
EDI
; Allocating 8 bytes of storage
; for two local variables.
; These would only be
; pushed if they were used
; in this function.
EAX, [EBP - 8] ; Load y into EAX
EBX, [EBP + 12] ; Load b into EBX
; Zero the return value
; Restore the saved registers
; Equivalent to MOV ESP, EBP
; POP EBP
RET
_func ENDP
The saved register set is EBX, ESI, and EDI. In the case where the structure is passed as a value parameter and the size of the structure is 5, 6, 7, or more than 8 bytes in size, the address to place the return values is passed as a hidden parameter, and the address passed back in EAX.
410
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications
Within the workstation environment, there are occasions when you want to develop mixed-language applications with PL/I being one of the languages involved. For example, an application could be constructed with the main program written in C and a dynamic link library (DLL) written in PL/I. Another possibility is an application using REXX which can load and call PL/I routines packaged in a
PL/I DLL.
Perhaps you want to construct an application using software from an outside vendor. Using a vendor's prepackaged program, you can supply a user exit in the form of a DLL written in PL/I.
Creating mixed-language applications is generally challenging and you have to consider many factors that do not exist when coding in a single language.
Typically, high level programming languages from different vendors (for example,
C, C++, COBOL, and PL/I) require the use of specific run-time environments as implemented by the run-time libraries of the distinct languages. Areas in which these languages might not work well together include: v
Implementations and usages of data types v
Data alignments v
Exception handling facilities v
Run-time environment initialization and termination v
User exit routines v
Input and output facilities
These inconsistencies in behavior can cause unexpected run-time behavior that can arise in some mixed-language program execution scenarios.
Matching data and linkages
For any routine to invoke another routine successfully, the two routines should have matching views of shared interfaces. When one of the routines is not coded in
PL/I, these interfaces are limited by v
What data is passed v
How data is passed v
Where data is passed
The sections that follow describe these situations in more detail. Mismatched views of shared interfaces is a common problem in mixed language applications.
Important points to remember are: v
Arguments and parameters must match v Data that is meant to be received by value should be passed by value v Both the called and calling routines should use the same linkage.
What data is passed
PL/I and C routines communicate by passing and returning data of equivalent data types. PL/I and non-PL/I routines should
not
communicate by using external
static variables. Table 29 on page 412 lists the scalar data types which are
equivalent between PL/I and C.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
411
Matching data and linkages
Table 29. Equivalent data types between C and PL/I
C Data Type PL/I Data Type
signed char unsigned char signed short unsigned short signed (long) int unsigned (long) int float double long double enum
<non-function-type> *
<function-type> *
FIXED BIN(7,0)
UNSIGNED FIXED BIN(8,0) or CHAR(1)
FIXED BIN(15,0)
UNSIGNED FIXED BIN(16,0)
FIXED BIN(31,0)
UNSIGNED FIXED BIN(31,0)
FLOAT BIN(21) FLOAT DEC(6)
FLOAT BIN(53) FLOAT DEC(16)
FLOAT BIN(64) FLOAT DEC 18)
ORDINAL
POINTER or HANDLE
ENTRY LIMITED
As is illustrated in the last row of the table, a C function pointer is not equivalent to a PL/I entry variable unless the entry variable is LIMITED. Errors caused by this mistake are hard to detect.
Arrays of equivalent types are equivalent as long as they have the same number of dimensions and the same lower and upper bounds. In C, you cannot specify lower bounds, and the actual upper bound is one less than the number you specify. For example, consider this array declared in C: short x [ 6 ];
In PL/I, the array would be declared as follows: dcl x(0:5) fixed bin(15);
Structures and unions of equivalent types are also equivalent if their elements are mapped to the same offsets. The offsets are the same if there is no padding between elements. If the elements of a structure (or union) are all UNALIGNED,
PL/I does not use padding. When some elements are ALIGNED, you can determine if there is any padding by examining the AGGREGATE listing. PL/I regards strings as scalars but C does not; therefore, none of the previous discussion applies to strings.
C bit fields have only nominal resemblance to PL/I bit strings.
v
C bit fields are limited to 32 bits, but PL/I bit strings can be as long as 32767 bits v
C bit fields are not always mapped in left-to-right order. Some Intel C compilers would map the following C structure so that it is equivalent to the PL/I structure:
C Structure
struct { unsigned byte1 :8; unsigned byte2 :8; unsigned byte3 :8; unsigned byte4 :8;
} bytes;
PL/I Structure
412
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Matching data and linkages
dcl
1 bytes,
2 byte1 bit(8),
2 byte2 bit(8),
2 byte3 bit(8),
2 byte4 bit(8);
Other C compilers would map the original structure with the bytes reversed so that it would be equivalent to this PL/I structure.
PL/I Structure
dcl
1 bytes,
2 byte4 bit(8),
2 byte3 bit(8),
2 byte2 bit(8),
2 byte1 bit(8);
Strictly speaking, C has no character strings, but only pointers to char. However, by common usage, a C string is a sequence of characters the last of which has the value '00'X. Thus, in the example below,
address
is a C 'string' that could hold up to
30 non-null characters.
char address [ 31 ];
The following PL/I declare most closely resembles the C 'string'.
dcl address char(30) varyingz;
In the declarations of C functions, strings are usually declared as char*
. For example, the C library function
strcspn
could be declared as: int strcspn( char * string1, char * string2 );
The PL/I declare for the same function would be: dcl strcspn entry( char(*) varyingz, char(*) varyingz ) returns( fixed bin(31) );
In the preceding examples, both the C and PL/I declarations are incomplete.
Complete versions are given and explained later in this chapter.
How data is passed
Both PL/I and C support various methods of passing data. To understand these methods, you must know the following terms:
Parameter
A variable declared in a PL/I procedure or function definition. For example,
seed
is a parameter in the following PL/I function definition.
funky: proc( seed ) returns( fixed bin(31) ); dcl seed fixed bin(31);
.
.
.
end funky;
Argument
A variable or value actually passed to a routine. When the function
funky
(from the preceding example) is invoked by rc = funky( seed );
,
seed
is an argument.
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications
413
Matching data and linkages
By value
The value of the argument is passed. When a calling routine passes an argument by value, the called routine
cannot
alter the original argument.
By address
The address of the argument is passed. When a calling routine passes an argument by address, the called routine
can
alter the caller's argument.
C passes all parameters by value, but PL/I (by default) passes parameters by address. PL/I also supports passing parameters by value except for arrays, structures, unions, and strings with length declared as *.
As is described in more detail in the
PL/I Language Reference
, you can indicate if a parameter is passed by address or by value by declaring it with the BYADDR or
BYVALUE attribute. In the following example, the first parameter to
modf
is passed by value, while the second is passed by address.
dcl modf entry( float bin(53) byvalue, float bin(53) byaddr ) returns( float bin(53) );
The corresponding C declaration is: double modf( double x, double * intptr );
If the BYADDR or BYVALUE attributes are not explicit in the declaration, you can specify them in the options list for that entry. The following declare uses the options list making it equivalent to the previous example.
dcl modf entry( float bin(53), float bin(53) byaddr ) returns( float bin(53) ) options( byvalue );
Even when a parameter is passed by address, its value might not be changed by the receiving routine. You can indicate this in PL/I by adding the attribute
NONASSIGNABLE (or NONASGN) to the declaration for that parameter. The following partial declaration indicates that neither of the arguments to the function
strcspn
is altered by that function: dcl strcspn entry( nonasgn char(*) varyingz, nonasgn char(*) varyingz ) returns( fixed bin(31) );
The corresponding C declaration is: int strcspn( const char * string1, const char * string2 );
A routine must agree with any routines that call it about how data is passed between them. You can avoid potential problems by giving the compiler enough information to detect these kinds of mismatches. For example, while the following declare is technically equivalent to the declare for
modf
in the sample code shown earlier, it allows the address of any argument to be passed as the second argument.
The earlier declares would require the second argument to have the correct type.
dcl modf entry( float bin(53), pointer ) returns( float bin(53) ) options( byvalue );
Finally, when PL/I passes some data types (strings, arrays, structures, and unions), it also, by default, passes a
descriptor
that describes data extents (maximum string length, array bounds, etc.). Since C routines cannot consume PL/I descriptors, you
414
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Matching data and linkages
should keep descriptors from being passed between C and PL/I routines. You can do this by adding the NODESCRIPTOR option to the OPTIONS attribute in the declaration for the C entry, for example: dcl strcspn entry( nonasgn byaddr char(*) varyingz, nonasgn byaddr char(*) varyingz ) returns( fixed bin(31) ) options( nodescriptor );
Where data is passed
It is as important for interacting routines to agree on what and where data is passed as it is for them to agree on how data is passed. With both PL/I and C, data can be passed on the stack, in general registers, or in floating-point registers.
In PL/I, the LINKAGE option (in the OPTIONS option of the procedure statement and entry declaration) determines where data is passed. One common way that errors in data location occur is if you specify mismatched linkage types (or fail to specify a linkage type when the default is incorrect).
PL/I for Windows supports three 32-bit linkage types— OPTLINK, CDECL and
STDCALL. The following PL/I declaration indicates that the function
dosSleep
uses the SYSTEM linkage: dcl dosSleep entry( fixed bin(31) byvalue ) returns( fixed bin(31) ) options( linkage(system) );
The options list should specify the linkage used by any C routines you call. Both the PL/I and VisualAge for C++ compilers use OPTLINK as their default linkage.
Many C routines on Windows use the STDCALL linkage, and for these routines,
LINKAGE(STDCALL) should be specified in the OPTIONS attribute. For instance, you would declare the Windows equivalent of DosSleep as: dcl Sleep ext(’Sleep’) entry( fixed bin(31) byvalue ) returns( fixed bin(31) ) options( linkage(stdcall) );
Maintaining your environment
In order for PL/I (and many other languages) to work correctly, you must not damage the runtime environment they establish. When interlanguage calls are involved, this means that: v
Any routine that registers an exception handler should deregister that handler before returning to PL/I.
v
Out-of-block GOTOs are permitted only if the source and target blocks are coded in the same language and any intervening blocks are coded in the same language.
Invoking non-PL/I routines from a PL/I MAIN
If your main routine is programed in PL/I, you can call two kinds of non-PL/I routines: v
System routines (such as DOS and Windows services) v
C or COBOL
System routines do not require their own runtime environment, and they can be linked directly into a PL/I executable (.EXE) file or dynamic link library (.DLL).
With the exception of IBM VisualAge C/C++ routines, all other non-PL/I routines
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications
415
Invoking non-PL/I routines
should
not
be linked directly into an .EXE or .DLL. They should be linked instead into a .DLL so that any run-time environment initialization that they require can be performed when that .DLL is loaded.
IBM VisualAge C/C++ routines can be linked with PL/I. However, if C routines are linked with PL/I and any of them use C library functions (or are C library functions themselves), the C runtime must be initialized before any routines are called. The C runtime can be initialized by calling the following routine dcl _CRT_init ext(’_CRT_init’) entry() returns( optional fixed bin(31) ) options( linkage(optlink) );
Also, in order to ensure that the C runtime closes all files it opened and returns any other system resources it may have acquired, you have to terminate the C runtime by calling dcl _CRT_term ext(’_CRT_term’) entry() returns( optional fixed bin(31) ) options( linkage(optlink) );
Invoking PL/I routines from a non-PL/I main
The PL/I run-time environment has the ability to: v
Self-initialize when a PL/I DLL is dynamcally loaded from a non-PL/I main program.
v
Exist with a non-PL/I language run-time environment with minimal conflicts.
A PL/I routine invoked from a non-PL/I routine should handle any exceptions that occur in PL/I code and returns to the non-PL/I using a RETURN or END
statement in the first PL/I procedure (see “Using ON ANYCONDITION”)
The PL/I run-time implicitly frees any resources acquired by PL/I, but not until the application terminates.
You can also explicitly resources through various PL/I statements: v
RELEASE * - releases all fetched modules v
FLUSH FILE(*) - flushes all file buffers v
CLOSE FILE(*) - closes all open files
Using ON ANYCONDITION
Any application should be able to handle all exceptions that occur within it and return 'normal' control to the calling program. PL/I exception-handling facilities and ANYCONDITION ON-units help make this possible.
The first executable statement in any PL/I routine that is called from a non-PL/I routine should be an ON ANYCONDITION statement. This statement should contain code to handle any condition not handled explicitly by other ON-units. If a condition arises that cannot be handled, use a GOTO statement pointing to the last statement that would normally be executed in the routine, for example: pliapp: proc( p1, ..., pn ) returns( ... ) options( fromalien );
416
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Invoking PL/I routines
/* declarations of paramaters, if any */
/* declarations of other variables */ on anycondition begin;
/* handle condition if possible */
/* if unhandled, set return value */ goto return_stmt; end;
/* mainline code */ return_Stmt: return( ... ); end_stmt: end pliapp;
For PL/I routines that are not functions, the target for the GOTO should be the
END statement in the routine.
Chapter 22. Using PL/I in mixed-language applications
417
418
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
This chapter gives a brief description of Java and the Java Native Interface (JNI) and explains why you might be interested in using it with PL/I. A simple Java -
PL/I application will be described and information on compatibility between the two languages will also be discussed.
Before you can communicate with Java from PL/I you need to have Java installed on your system. There are many places to download a free version of the latest
Java Development Kit (JDK).
What is the Java Native Interface (JNI)?
Java is an object-oriented programming language invented by Sun Microsystems and provides a powerful way to make Internet documents interactive.
The Java Native Interface (JNI) is the Java interface to native programming languages and is part of the Java Development Kits. By writing programs that use the JNI, you ensure that your code is portable across many platforms.
The JNI allows Java code that runs within a Java Virtual Machine (JVM) to operate with applications and libraries written in other languages, such as PL/I. In addition, the
Invocation API
allows you to embed a Java Virtual Machine into your native PL/I applications.
Java is a fairly complete programming language; however, there are situations in which you want to call a program written in another programming language. You would do this from Java with a method call to a native language, known as a
native method
.
Some reasons to use native methods may include the following: v The native language has a special capability that your application needs and that the standard Java class libraries lack.
v
You already have many existing applications in your native language and you wish to make them accessible to a Java application.
v
You wish to implement a intensive series of complicated calculations in your native language and have your Java applications call these functions.
v
You or your programmers have a broader skill set in your native language and you do not wish to loose this advantage.
Programming through the JNI lets you use native methods to do many different operations. A native method can: v utilize Java objects in the same way that a Java method uses these objects.
v create Java objects, including arrays and strings, and then inspect and use these objects to perform its tasks.
v inspect and use objects created by Java application code.
v update Java objects that it created or were passed to it, and these updated objects can then be made available to the Java application.
Finally, native methods can also easily call already existing Java methods, capitalizing on the functionality already incorporated in the Java programming
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
419
framework. In these ways, both the native language side and the Java side of an application can create, update, and access Java objects and then share these objects between them.
JNI Sample Program #1 - 'Hello World'
The first sample program we will write is yet another variation of the "Hello
World!" program.
Our "Hello World!" program has one Java class,
callingPLI.java
. Our native method, written in PL/I, is contained in
hiFromPLI.pli
. Here is a brief overview of the steps for creating this sample program:
1.
Write a Java program that defines a class containing a native method, loads the native load library, and calls the native method.
2.
Compile the Java program to create a Java class.
3.
Write a PL/I program that implements the native method and displays the
"Hello!" text.
4.
Compile and link the PL/I program.
5.
Run the Java program which calls the native method in the PL/I program.
Step 1: Writing the Java Program
Declare the Native Method
All methods, whether Java methods or native methods, must be declared within a
Java class. The only difference in the declaration of a Java method and a native method is the keyword
native
. The
native
keyword tells Java that the implementation of this method will be found in a native library that will be loaded during the execution of the program. The declaration of our native method looks like this: public native void callToPLI();
In the above statement, the
void
means that there is no return value expected from this native method call. The empty parentheses in the method name
callToPLI( )
, means that there are no parameters being passed on the call to the native method.
Load the Native Library
A step that loads the native library must be included so the native library will be loaded at execution time. The Java statement that loads the native library looks like this: static {
System.loadLibrary("hiFromPLI");
}
In the above statement, the Java System method
System.loadLibrary(...)
is called to find and load the dynamic link library (DLL). The PL/I dynamic link library,
hiFromPLI.dll
, will be created during the step that compiles and links the PL/I program.
Write the Java Main Method
The
callingPLI
class also includes a
main
method to instantiate the class and call the native method. The
main
method instantiates
callingPLI
and calls the
callToPLI()
native method.
The complete definition of the
callingPLI
class, including all the points addressed above in this section, looks like this:
420
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
public class callingPLI { public native void callToPLI(); static {
System.loadLibrary("hiFromPLI");
} public static void main(String[] argv) { callingPLI callPLI = new callingPLI(); callPLI.callToPLI();
System.out.println("And Hello from Java, too!");
}
}
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program
Use the Java compiler to compile the
callingPLI
class into an executable form. The command would look like this: javac callingPLI.java
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program
The PL/I implementation of the native method looks much like any other PL/I subroutine.
Useful PL/I Compiler Options
The sample program contains a series of
*PROCESS
statements that define the important compiler options.
*Process Limits( Extname( 31 ) ) Margins( 1, 100 ) ;
*Process Dllinit xinfo(def);
*Process Default( IEEE );
Here is a brief description of them and why they are useful:
Extname(31)
Allows for longer, Java style, external names.
Margins(1,100)
Extending the margins gives you more room for Java style names and identifiers.
Dllinit
Includes the initilization coded needed for creating a DLL.
xinfo(def)
Instructs the compiler to build a *.DEF file to be used in the creation of the
DLL.
Default( IEEE );
IEEE
specifies that FLOAT data is held in IEEE format - the form in which it is held by JAVA
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and Procedure Statement
The PL/I procedure name must conform to the Java naming convention in order to be located by the Java Class Loader at execution time. The Java naming scheme consists of three parts. The first part identifies the routine to the Java environment, the second part is the name of the Java class that defines the native method, and the third part is the name of the native method itself.
Here is a breakdown of the external PL/I procedure name
_Java_callingPLI_callToPLI
in the sample program:
_Java
All native methods resident in dynamic libraries must begin with
_Java
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
421
_callingPLI
The name of the Java class that declares the native method
_callToPLI
The name of the native method itself.
Note:
There is an important difference between coding a native method in PL/I and in C. The
javah
tool, which is shipped with the JDK, generates the form of the external references required for C programs. When you write your native methods in PL/I and follow the rules above for naming your PL/I external references, performing the
javah
step is not necessary for PL/I native methods.
The complete procedure statement for the sample program looks like this:
Java_callingPLI_callToPLI:
Proc( JNIEnv , MyJObject )
External( "_Java_callingPLI_callToPLI" )
Options( NoDescriptor ByValue linkage(stdcall) );
JNI Include File
The PL/I include file which contains the PL/I definition of the Java interfaces is contained in two include files,
jni.cpy
which in turn includes
jni_md.cpy
. These include files are included with this statement:
%include jni;
For a complete listing of the
jni.cpy
file look in the
\ibmpliw\include
directory
The Complete PL/I Procedure
For completeness, here is the entire PL/I program that defines the native method:
*Process Limits( Extname( 31 ) ) Margins( 1, 100 ) ;
*Process Dllinit xinfo(def);
*Process Default( IEEE );
PliJava_Demo: Package Exports(*);
Java_callingPLI_callToPLI:
Proc( JNIEnv , MyJObject )
External( "Java_callingPLI_callToPLI" )
Options( NoDescriptor ByValue linkage(stdcall) );
%include jni;
Display(’Hello from PL/I for Windows!’);
End;
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I Program
Compiling the PL/I Program
Compile the PL/I sample program with the following command: pli hiFromPLI.pli
Linking the Dynamic Link Library
Link the resulting PL/I object deck into a DLL with these commands: ilib /nologo /geni hiFromPLI.def
ilink /dll hiFromPLI.obj hiFromPLI.exp
422
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Step 5: Running the Sample Program
Run the Java - PL/I sample program with this command: java callingPLI
The output of the sample program will look like this:
Hello from PL/I for Windows!
And Hello from Java, too!
The first line written from the PL/I native method. The second line is from the calling Java class after returning from the PL/I native method call.
JNI Sample Program #2 - Passing a String
This sample program passes a string back and forth between Java and PL/I. Refer
to Figure 30 on page 424 for the complete listing of the
jPassString.java
program.
The Java portion has one Java class,
jPassString.java
. Our native method, written in
PL/I, is contained in
passString.pli
. Much of the information from the first sample program applies to this sample program as well. Only new or different aspects will be discussed for this sample program.
Step 1: Writing the Java Program
Declare the Native Method
The native method for this sample program looks like this: public native void pliShowString();
Load the Native Library
The Java statement that loads the native library for this sample program looks like this: static {
System.loadLibrary("passString");
}
Write the Java Main Method
The
jPassString
class also includes a
main
method to instantiate the class and call the native method. The
main
method instantiates
jPassString
and calls the
pliShowString()
native method.
This sample program prompts the user for a string and reads that value in from the command line. This is done within a
try/catch
statement as shown in Figure 30 on page 424.
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
423
// Read a string, call PL/I, display new string upon return import java.io.*; public class jPassString{
*/ /* Field to hold Java string
String myString;
/* Load the PL/I native library static {
System.loadLibrary("passString");
}
/* Declare the PL/I native method public native void pliShowString();
*/
*/
}
}
/* Main Java class public static void main(String[] arg) {
System.out.println(" ");
/* Instantiate Java class and initilize string jPassString myPassString = new jPassString(); myPassString.myString = " ";
/* Prompt user for a string try {
BufferedReader in = new BufferedReader( new InputStreamReader(System.in));
*/
*/
*/
/* Process until ’quit’ received */ while (!myPassString.myString.equalsIgnoreCase("quit")) {
System.out.println(
"From Java: Enter a string or ’quit’ to quit.");
System.out.print("Java Prompt > ");
/* Get string from command line */ myPassString.myString = in.readLine(); if (!myPassString.myString.equalsIgnoreCase("quit"))
{
/* Call PL/I native method */ myPassString.pliShowString();
/* Return from PL/I and display new string */
System.out.println(" ");
System.out.println(
"From Java: String set by PL/I is: "
+ myPassString.myString );
}
}
} catch (IOException e) {
}
Figure 30. Java Sample Program #2 - Passing a String
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program
The command to compile the Java code would look like this: javac jPassString.java
424
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program
All of the information about writing the PL/I "Hello World" sample program applies to this program as well.
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and Procedure Statement
The external PL/I procedure name for this program would be
_Java_jPassString_pliShowString
.
The complete procedure statement for the sample program looks like this:
Java_jPassString_pliShowString:
Proc( JNIEnv , myjobject ) external( "_Java_jPassString_pliShowString" ) options( byvalue nodescriptor linkage(stdcall) );
JNI Include File
The PL/I include file which contains the PL/I definition of the Java interfaces is contained in two include files,
jni.cpy
which in turn includes
jni_md.cpy
. These include files are included with this statement:
%include jni;
For a complete listing of the
jni.cpy
file look in the
\ibmpliw\include
directory
The Complete PL/I Procedure
The complete PL/I program is shown in Figure 31 on page 426. This sample PL/I
program makes several calls through the JNI.
Upon entry, a reference to the calling Java Object,
myObject
is passed into the PL/I procedure. The PL/I program will use this reference to get information from the calling object. The first piece of information is the Class of the calling object which is retrieved using the
GetObjectClass
JNI function. This Class value is then used by the
GetFieldID
JNI function to get the identity of the Java string field in the Java object that we are interested in. This Java field is further identified by providing the name of the field,
myString
, and the JNI field descriptor,
Ljava/lang/String;
, which identifies the field as a Java String field. The value of the Java string field is then retrieved using the
GetObjectField
JNI function. Before PL/I can use the Java string value, it must be unpacked into a form that PL/I can understand. The
GetStringUTFChars
JNI function is used to convert the Java string into a PL/I varyingz string which is then displayed by the PL/I program.
After displaying the retrieved Java string, the PL/I program prompts the user for a
PL/I string to be used to update the string field in the calling Java object. The
PL/I string value is converted to a Java string using the
NewString
JNI function.
This new Java string is then used to update the string field in the calling Java object using the
SetObjectField
JNI function.
When the PL/I program ends control is returned to Java, where the newly updated
Java string is displayed by the Java program.
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
425
*Process Limits( Extname( 31 ) ) Margins( 1, 100 ) ;
*Process Dllinit xinfo(def);
*Process Default( IEEE ); plijava_demo: package exports(*);
Java_passString_pliShowString:
Proc( JNIEnv , myJObject ) external( "_Java_jPassString_pliShowString" ) options( byvalue nodescriptor linkage(stdcall) );
%include jni;
Dcl myBool
Dcl myClazz
Dcl myFID
Dcl myJObject
Dcl myJString
Dcl newJString
Dcl myID
Dcl mySig
Dcl pliStr
Dcl pliReply
Dcl pliStrPtr
Dcl nullPtr
Type jBoolean;
Type jClass;
Type jFieldID;
Type jObject;
Type jString;
Type jString;
Char(9) Varz static init( ’myString’ );
Char(18) Varz static init( ’Ljava/lang/String;’ );
Char(132) Varz Based(pliStrPtr);
Char(132) Varz;
Pointer;
Pointer;
Display(’ ’);
/* Get information about the calling Class myClazz = GetObjectClass(JNIEnv, myJObject);
*/
/* Get Field ID for String field from Java myFID = GetFieldID(JNIEnv, myClazz, myID, mySig );
*/
/* Get the Java String in the string field myJString = GetObjectField(JNIEnv, myJObject, myFID );
*/
/* Convert the Java String to a PL/I string */ pliStrPtr = GetStringUTFChars(JNIEnv, myJString, myBool );
Display(’From PLI: String retrieved from Java is: ’ || pliStr );
Display(’From PLI: Enter a string to be returned to Java:’ ) reply(pliReply);
/* Convert the new PL/I string to a Java String */ newJString = NewString(JNIEnv, trim(pliReply), length(pliReply) );
/* Change the Java String field to the new string value */ nullPtr = SetObjectField(JNIEnv, myJObject, myFID, newJString);
End; end;
Figure 31. PL/I Sample Program #2 - Passing a String
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I Program
Compiling the PL/I Program
Compile the PL/I sample program with the following command: pli passString.pli
426
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Linking the Dynamic Link Library
Link the resulting PL/I object deck into a DLL with these commands: ilib /nologo /geni passString.def
ilink /dll passString.obj passString.exp
Step 5: Running the Sample Program
Run the Java - PL/I sample program with this command: java jPassString
The output of the sample program, complete with the prompts for user input from both Java and PL/I, will look like this:
>java jPassString
From Java: Enter a string or ’quit’ to quit.
Java Prompt >
A string entered in Java
From PLI: String retrieved from Java is: A string entered in Java
From PLI: Enter a string to be returned to Java:
A string entered in PL/I
From Java: String set by PL/I is: A string entered in PL/I
From Java: Enter a string or ’quit’ to quit.
Java Prompt > quit
>
JNI Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer
This sample program passes an integer back and forth between Java and PL/I.
Refer to Figure 32 on page 428 for the complete listing of the
jPassInt.java
program.
The Java portion has one Java class,
jPassInt.java
. The native method, written in
PL/I, is contained in
passInt.pli
. Much of the information from the first sample program applies to this sample program as well. Only new or different aspects will be discussed for this sample program.
Step 1: Writing the Java Program
Declare the Native Method
The native method for this sample program looks like this: public native void pliShowInt();
Load the Native Library
The Java statement that loads the native library for this sample program looks like this: static {
System.loadLibrary("passInt");
}
Write the Java Main Method
The
jPassInt
class also includes a
main
method to instantiate the class and call the native method. The
main
method instantiates
jPassInt
and calls the
pliShowInt()
native method.
This sample program prompts the user for an integer and reads that value in from the command line. This is done within a
try/catch
statement as shown in Figure 32 on page 428.
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
427
// Read an integer, call PL/I, display new integer upon return import java.io.*; import java.lang.*; public class jPassInt{
*/ /* Fields to hold Java string and int int myInt;
String myString;
/* Load the PL/I native library static {
System.loadLibrary("passInt");
}
/* Declare the PL/I native method public native void pliShowInt();
*/
*/
}
}
/* Main Java class public static void main(String[] arg) {
System.out.println(" ");
/* Instantiate Java class and initilize string jPassInt pInt = new jPassInt(); pInt.myInt = 1024; pInt.myString = " ";
/* Prompt user for an integer try {
BufferedReader in = new BufferedReader( new InputStreamReader(System.in));
*/
*/
*/
/* Process until ’quit’ received */ while (!pInt.myString.equalsIgnoreCase("quit")) {
System.out.println
("From Java: Enter an Integer or ’quit’ to quit.");
System.out.print("Java Prompt > ");
/* Get string from command line pInt.myString = in.readLine(); if (!pInt.myString.equalsIgnoreCase("quit"))
*/
{
/* Set int to integer value of String */ pInt.myInt = Integer.parseInt( pInt.myString );
/* Call PL/I native method pInt.pliShowInt();
*/
/* Return from PL/I and display new string */
System.out.println(" ");
}
System.out.println
("From Java: Integer set by PL/I is: " + pInt.myInt );
}
} catch (IOException e) {
/* Say something bad happened */
System.out.println("Something bad happened... ");
}
Figure 32. Java Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer
428
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Step 2: Compiling the Java Program
The command to compile the Java code would look like this: javac jPassInt.java
Step 3: Writing the PL/I Program
All of the information about writing the PL/I "Hello World" sample program applies to this program as well.
Correct Form of PL/I Procedure Name and Procedure Statement
The external PL/I procedure name for this program would be
_Java_jPassInt_pliShowInt
.
The complete procedure statement for the sample program looks like this:
Java_passNum_pliShowInt:
Proc( JNIEnv , myjobject ) external( "_Java_jPassInt_pliShowInt" ) options( byvalue nodescriptor linkage(stdcall) );
JNI Include File
The PL/I include file which contains the PL/I definition of the Java interfaces is contained in two include files,
jni.cpy
which in turn includes
jni_md.cpy
. These include files are included with this statement:
%include jni;
For a complete listing of the
jni.cpy
file look in the
\ibmpliw\include
directory
The Complete PL/I Procedure
The complete PL/I program is shown in Figure 33 on page 430. This sample PL/I
program makes several calls through the JNI.
Upon entry, a reference to the calling Java Object,
myObject
, is passed into the PL/I procedure. The PL/I program will use this reference to get information from the calling object. The first piece of information is the Class of the calling object which is retrieved using the
GetObjectClass
JNI function. This Class value is then used by the
GetFieldID
JNI function to get the identity of the Java integer field in the Java object that we are interested in. This Java field is further identified by providing the name of the field,
myInt
, and the JNI field descriptor,
I
, which identifies the field as an integer field. The value of the Java integer field is then retrieved using the
GetIntField
JNI function which is then displayed by the PL/I program.
After displaying the retrieved Java integer, the PL/I program prompts the user for a PL/I integer to be used to update the integer field in the calling Java object. The
PL/I integer value is then used to update the integer field in the calling Java object using the
SetIntField
JNI function.
When the PL/I program ends, control is returned to Java, where the newly updated Java integer is displayed by the Java program.
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
429
*Process Limits( Extname( 31 ) ) Margins( 1, 100 ) ;
*Process Dllinit xinfo(def);
*Process Default( IEEE ); plijava_demo: package exports(*);
Java_passNum_pliShowInt:
Proc( JNIEnv , myjobject ) external( "_Java_jPassInt_pliShowInt" ) options( byvalue nodescriptor linkage(stdcall) );
%include jni;
Dcl myClazz
Dcl myFID
Dcl myJInt dcl rtnJInt
Dcl myJObject
Dcl pliReply
Dcl nullPtr
Display(’ ’);
Type jClass;
Type jFieldID;
Type jInt;
Type jInt;
Type jObject;
Char(132) Varz;
Pointer;
/* Get information about the calling Class myClazz = GetObjectClass(JNIEnv, myJObject);
/* Get Field ID for int field from Java myFID = GetFieldID(JNIEnv, myClazz, "myInt", "I");
*/
*/
/* Get Integer value from Java myJInt = GetIntField(JNIEnv, myJObject, myFID);
*/ display(’From PLI: Integer retrieved from Java is: ’ || trim(myJInt) ); display(’From PLI: Enter an integer to be returned to Java:’ ) reply(pliReply); rtnJInt = pliReply;
/* Set Integer value in Java from PL/I */ nullPtr = SetIntField(JNIEnv, myJObject, myFID, rtnJInt);
End; end;
Figure 33. PL/I Sample Program #3 - Passing an Integer
Step 4: Compiling and Linking the PL/I Program
Compiling the PL/I Program
Compile the PL/I sample program with the following command: pli passInt.pli
Linking the Dynamic Link Library
Link the resulting PL/I object deck into a DLL with these commands: ilib /nologo /geni passInt.def
ilink /dll passInt.obj passInt.exp
430
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Step 5: Running the Sample Program
Run the Java - PL/I sample program with this command: java jPassInt
The output of the sample program, complete with the prompts for user input from both Java and PL/I, will look like this:
>java jPassInt
From Java: Enter an Integer or ’quit’ to quit.
Java Prompt > 12345
From PLI: Integer retrieved from Java is: 12345
From PLI: Enter an integer to be returned to Java:
54321
From Java: Integer set by PL/I is: 54321
From Java: Enter an Integer or ’quit’ to quit.
Java Prompt > quit
>
Determining equivalent Java and PL/I data types
When you communicate with Java from PL/I you will need to match the data types between the two programming languages. This table shows Java primitive types and their PL/I equivalents:
Table 30. Java Primitive Types and PL/I Native Equivalents
Java Type
boolean byte char short int long float double void
PL/I Type
jboolean jbyte jchar jshort jint jlong jfloat jdouble jvoid
Size in Bits
32
64
21
53 n/a
8, unsigned
8
16, unsigned
16
Chapter 23. Interfacing with Java
431
432
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
PL/I for Windows supports the PLISRT
x
(
x
= A, B, C, or D) built-in subroutines.
To use the PLISRT
x
subroutines, you need to: v
Include a call to one of the subroutines and pass it the information on the fields to be sorted. This information includes the length of the records, the name of a variable to be used as a return code, and other information required to carry out the sort.
v
Specify the data sets required by the sort program in DD statements.
When used from PL/I, these subroutines sort records of all normal lengths on a large number of sorting fields. Data of most types can be sorted into ascending or descending order. The source of the data to be sorted can be either a data set or a
PL/I procedure written by the programmer that the sort program calls each time a record is required for the sort. Similarly, the destination of the sort can be a data set or a PL/I procedure that handles the sorted records.
Comparing S/390 and workstation sort programs
If your existing mainframe programs contain CALL PLISRTx, you can download and run them on your workstation. Several of the parameters allowed on S/390 are ignored, and alter run-time behavior to some extent. The following table indicates which arguments accepted by OS PL/I are ignored by the workstation compiler.
Table 31. workstation PLISRTx
Built-in subroutine
PLISRTA
Arguments
(sort statement,record statement,storage,return code
[,data set prefix,message level, sort technique])
Sort input: data set
Sort output: data set
PLISRTB
Sort input: PL/I subroutine
Sort output: data set
PLISRTC
Sort input: data set
Sort output: PL/I subroutine
PLISRTD
Sort input: PL/I subroutine
Sort output: PL/I subroutine
(sort statement,record statement,storage,return code, input routine
[,data set prefix,message level,sort technique])
(sort statement,record statement,storage,return code, output routine
[,data set prefix,message level,sort technique])
(sort statement,record statement,storage,return code, input routine,output routine [,data set prefix,message level,sort technique])
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
433
Comparing sort programs
Table 31. workstation PLISRTx (continued)
Built-in subroutine
Argument definitions:
Arguments
Sort statement
Record statement
Storage
Ignored by workstation PL/I.
Return code
Fixed binary variable of precision (31,0) in which sort places a return code when it has completed. The meaning of the return code is:
0=Sort successful
16=Sort failed
Input routine
(PLISRTB and PLISRTD only.) Name of the PL/I external or internal procedure used to supply the records for
Output routine
(PLISRTC and PLISRTD only.) Name of the PL/I external or internal procedure to which Sort passes the sorted
Data set prefix
Ignored by workstation PL/I, which only processes SORTIN and SORTOUT as ddnames.
Message level
Ignored by workstation PL/I.
Sort technique
Ignored by workstation PL/I.
Preparing to use sort
Before using sort, you must determine the type of sort you require, the length and format of the sorting fields in the data, and the length of your data records.
To determine which PLISRTx built-in subroutine to use, you must decide the source of your unsorted data, and the destination of your sorted data. You must choose between data sets and PL/I subroutines. Using data sets is simpler to understand and gives faster performance. Using PL/I subroutines gives you more flexibility and more function, enabling you to manipulate the data before it is sorted, and to make immediate use of the data in its sorted form. If you decide to
use an input or output handling subroutine, read “Sort data handling routines” on page 441.
The sort built-in subroutines and the source and destination of data are as follows:
Built-in subroutine
PLISRTA
PLISRTB
PLISRTC
Source
Data set
Subroutine
Data set
Destination
Data set
Data set
Subroutine
434
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Built-in subroutine
PLISRTD
Source
Subroutine
Preparing to use sort
Destination
Subroutine
Source data sets are defined using the SORTIN environment variable while destination data sets are defined using SORTOUT. Alternatively, you can use the
PUTENV built-in function to set those functions.
Having determined the subroutine you are using, you must now determine a number of things about your data set and specify the information on the SORT statement: v
The position of the sorting fields; these can be either the complete record or any part or parts of it.
v
The type of data these fields represent, for example, character or binary.
v
Whether you want the sort on each field to be in ascending or descending order.
Next, you must determine two things about the records to be sorted and specify the information on the RECORD statement: v Whether the record format is fixed or varying v The length of the record (maximum length for varying)
You use these on the RECORD statement, which is the second argument to
PLISRT
x
.
Choosing the type of sort
To make the best use of the sort program, you should understand how it works. In your PL/I program you specify a sort by using a CALL statement to the built-in subroutine PLISRTx. Each specifies a different source for the unsorted data and destination for the data when it has been sorted.
For example, a call to PLISRTA specifies that the unsorted data (the input to sort) is on a data set, and that the sorted data (the output from sort) is to be placed on another data set. The CALL PLISRT
x
statement must contain an argument list giving the sort program information about the data set to be sorted, the fields on which it is to be sorted, the name of a variable into which sort places a return code indicating the success or failure of the sort, and the name of any output or input handling procedure that can be used.
The sort interface routine builds an argument list for the sort from the information supplied by the PLISRTx argument list and depends on your choice of A, B, C, or
D for x. Control is then transferred to the sort program. If you have specified an output- or input-handling routine, it is called by the sort program as many times as is necessary to handle each of the unsorted or sorted records.
The sort operation ends in one of two ways:
1.
Communicating success or failure by sending a return code to the PL/I calling procedure.
2.
Raising an error condition when certain errors are detected and the return code is undefined.
Figure 34 on page 436 is a simplified flowchart showing the sort operation.
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
435
Preparing to use sort
┌─────────────┐
│ │
│CALL PLISRTx │
│ │
└──┬─┬─┬─┬────┘
│ │ │ │
┌────────────────────────────┘ │ │ └───────────────────────────────┐
│ ┌────────┘ └───────────┐ │
↓
PLISRTA
│
↓
PLISRTB
│
↓
PLISRTC
│
↓
PLISRTD
│
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
┌───────────┴─────────────────────┴──────────────────────┴─────────────────────┴───────┐
│
SORT PROGRAM
│
├───────────┬──────────────────┬──────────────────┬─────────────────────┬──────────────┤
│ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
│┌──────────┴──────┐ ┌─────────┴────────┐ ┌───────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴────────┐
││Get records from │ │Call
PL/I sub-
│ │Get records from │ │Call
PL/I sub-
│
││
data set
until │ │
routine
receiving │ │
data set
until │ │
routine
receiving │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
││end of file
││
│ │one record on │ │end of file
│ │each call (E15) │ │
│ │one record on │
│ │each call (E15) │
│└─────────┬───────┘ └──────────┬───────┘ └─────────┬───────┘ └──────────┬───────┘
│ │ │ │ │
│ └───────┐ ┌───────┘ │
└──────────────────────────┐ │ │ ┌──────────────────────────┘
│ │ │ │
↓ ↓
┌──────────────────────────┘ │
↓ ↓
┌─┴─┴───┴─┴───┐
│ │
│Sort records │
│ │
└─┬─┬───┬─┬───┘
│ │ │ │
│ └───────────────────────────┐
│
│
│
│
┌───────┘ └─────────┐
│ │
│
│
│ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
│┌─────────┴───────┐ ┌──────────┴───────┐ ┌───────────┴─────┐ ┌───────────┴──────┐
││Place sorted │ │Place sorted │ │Call
PL/I sub-
│ │Call
PL/I sub-
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
││records on
││
data set
│ │records on
│ │
data set
│ │
routine
passing │ │
routine
passing │
│ │one record on │ │one record on │
││ │ │ │ │each call (E35) │ │each call (E35) │
│└─────────┬───────┘ └──────────┬───────┘ └───────────┬─────┘ └────────────┬─────┘
│
│
│
└───────┐
└──────────────────────────┐ │
│ │
│
┌──────────┘
│ ┌─────────────────────────────┘
│ │
│
│
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
┌────┴─┴──┴─┴─────────┐
│Set up return code
│to indicate success
│or failure of sort
│
│
│
└──────────┬──────────┘
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────┼──────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌───────┴─────────┐
│Return to caller │
│ of PLISRTx │
└─────────────────┘
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
Figure 34. Flow of control for the sort program
Within the sort program itself, the flow of control between the sort program and output- and input-handling routines is controlled by return codes. The sort program calls these routines at the appropriate point in its processing. (Within the sort program, these routines are known as user exits. The routine that passes input to be sorted is the E15 sort user exit. The routine that processes sorted output is the E35 sort user exit.) From the routines, the sort program expects a return code indicating either that it should call the routine again, or that it should continue with the next stage of processing.
436
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
│
Preparing to use sort
The remainder of this chapter gives detailed information on how to use sort from
PL/I. First the required PL/I statements are described, followed by the data set requirements. The chapter finishes with a series of examples showing the use of the four built-in subroutines.
Specifying the sorting field
The SORT statement is the first argument to PLISRTx. The syntax of the SORT statement must be a character string expression that takes the form:
'bSORTbFIELDS= (
,
start,length,form,seq
) b'
other options
b
One or more blanks. Blanks shown are mandatory. No other blanks are allowed.
start,length,form,seq
Sorting fields. You can specify any number of such fields, but there is a limit on the total length of the fields. If more than one field is to be sorted on, the records are sorted first according to the first field, and then those that are of equal value are sorted according to the second field, and so on. If all the sorting values are equal, the order of equal records is preserved. The overlaying of sort fields is not supported.
start
The starting position within the record. Give the value in bytes. The first byte in a string is considered to be byte 1.
length
The length of the sorting field. Give the value in bytes. The length of sorting fields is restricted according to their data type.
form
The format of the data. This is the format assumed for the purpose of sorting. All data passed between PL/I routines and sort must be in the form of character strings. The main data types and the restrictions on their length are shown below.
Code Data Type and Length
CH
character 1–65535
ZD
PD
BI
zoned decimal signed 1–255 packed decimal signed 1–255 binary, unsigned 1 bit to 4095 bytes
Note:
If the file is EBCDIC, the PL/I library changes the sort argument from CH to BI to use the binary collating sequence for the field specified. The binary field limit is 4095.
seq
The sequence in which the data is sorted:
A – ascending (that is, 1,2,3,...)
D – descending (that is, ...,3,2,1).
Note that you cannot specify E, because PL/I does not provide a method of passing a user-supplied sequence.
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
437
Preparing to use sort other options
The only option supported under workstation PL/I is the default, EQUALS.
Source code downloaded from the mainframe, however, does not need to be altered.
Example:
’ SORT FIELDS=(1,10,CH,A) ’
Specifying the records to be sorted
Use the RECORD statement as the second argument to PLISRT
x
. The syntax of the
RECORD statement must be a character string expression which, when evaluated, accepts the following syntax:
'bRECORDbTYPE=rectype b'
,LENGTH=(n)
b
One or more blanks. Blanks shown are mandatory. No other blanks are allowed.
TYPE
Specifies the type of record as follows:
F
Fixed length
V
Varying length
Even when you use input and output routines to handle the sorted and unsorted data, you must specify the record type as it applies to the work data sets used by sort.
If varying-length strings are passed to sort from an input routine (E15 exit), you should normally specify V as a record format. However, if you specify F, the records are padded to the maximum length with blanks.
LENGTH
Specifies the length of the record to be sorted. You can omit LENGTH if you use PLISRTA or PLISRTC, because the length is taken from the input data set.
The maximum length of a record that can be sorted is 32,767 bytes. For varying-length records, you must include the 2-byte prefix.
n
The length of the record to be sorted.
Note:
Additional length specifications that can be used are ignored by workstation PL/I.
Example:
’ RECORD TYPE=F,length=(80) ’
Calling the sort program
When you have determined the sort field and record type specifications, you are in a position to write the CALL PLISRT
x
statement.
PLISRT examples
The following examples indicate commonly used forms of calls to PLISRTx.
Example 1
A call to PLISRTA sorting 80-byte records from SORTIN to SORTOUT, and a return code, RETCODE, declared as FIXED BINARY (31,0).
438
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Calling the sort program
call plisrta (’ SORT FIELDS=(1,80,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0, retcode);
Example 2
This example is the same as example 1 but the sort is to be undertaken on two fields. First, bytes 1 to 10 which are characters, and then, if these are equal, bytes
11 and 12 which contain a binary field. Both fields are to be sorted in ascending order.
call plisrta (’ SORT FIELD =(1,10,CH,A,11,2,BI,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0, retcode);
Example 3
A call to PLISRTB. The input is to be passed to sort by the PL/I routine PUTIN, the sort is to be carried out on characters 1 to 10 of an 80 byte fixed-length record.
Other information as above.
call plisrtb (’ SORT FIELDS=(1,10,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0, retcode, putin);
Example 4
A call to PLISRTD. The input is to be supplied by the PL/I routine PUTIN and the output is to be passed to the PL/I routine PUTOUT. The record to be sorted is 82 bytes varying (including the length prefix). It is to be sorted on bytes 1 through 5 of the data in ascending order, then if these fields are equal, on bytes 6 through 10 in descending order. If both these fields are the same, the order of the input is to be retained. (The EQUALS option does this.) call plisrtd (’ SORT FIELDS=(1,5,CH,A,6,5,CH,D),EQUALS ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(82) ’,
0, retcode, putin, putout);
/* input routine (sort exit 15) */
/* output routine (sort exit 35) */
Determining whether the sort was successful
When the sort is completed, sort sets a return code in the variable named in the fourth argument of the call to PLISRTx. It then returns control to the statement that follows the CALL PLISRTx statement. The value returned indicates the success or failure of the sort as follows:
0 Sort successful
16 Sort failed
You must declare this variable as FIXED BINARY (31,0). It is standard practice to test the value of the return code after the CALL PLISRTx statement and take appropriate action according to the success or failure of the operation.
For example (assuming the return code was called RETCODE): if retcode¬=0 then do; put data(retcode); signal error; end;
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
439
Calling the sort program
The error condition is raised if errors are detected. When sort detects a fatal error and the corresponding error code is greater than 16, the error condition is raised.
If the job step that follows the sort depends on the success or failure of the sort, you should set the value returned in the sort program as the return code from the
PL/I program. This return code is then available for the following job step. The
PL/I return code is set by a call to PLIRETC. The following example shows how you can call PLIRETC with the value returned from sort: call pliretc(retcode);
You should not confuse this call to PLIRETC with the calls made in the input (E15) and output (E35) routines, where a return code is used for passing control information to sort.
Getting diagnostic information
This topic describes environment variables that you can specify to get helpful diagnostic information.
The IBM_SORT_RC environment variable
When you set the value of the IBM_SORT_RC environment variable to 1, the PL/I library returns more informative return codes from the PLISRTx calls, for example: export IBM_SORT_RC=1
Table 32 lists the possible return codes from PLISRTx calls and the types of errors
that are detected when you specify
IBM_SORT_RC=1
.
Table 32. Return codes from PLISRTx
Return Code
38
39
40
43-47
49
50-55
57
58
1-32
34
35
36
37
61-62
112
232-233
254-255
Type of Error Detected
Internal error detected.
Read error on file detected.
Write error on file detected.
Cannot open input file.
Cannot open message file.
Internal error detected.
Internal error detected.
Not enough temporary disk space.
Internal error detected.
Insufficient storage to continue execution.
Internal error detected.
Cannot open output file.
Cannot open temporary file.
Internal error detected.
No msg disk full.
Internal error detected.
Internal error detected.
440
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Calling the sort program
The IBM_SORT_DIR environment variable
When you specify the IBM_SORT_DIR environment variable, temporary work files are saved in the directory you have specified instead of the current directory, for example: export IBM_SORT_DIR=/tmp
The IBM_SORT_MSGFILE environment variable
When the IBM_SORT_MSGFILE environment variable is set to a path or file name,
SORT messages are written to the specified file, for example: export IBM_SORT_MSGFILE=./msg.txt
These messages are internal SORT error messages, which provide more information about the problem.
Sort data input and output
The source of the data to be sorted is provided either directly from a data set or indirectly by a routine (sort exit E15) written by the user. Similarly, the destination of the sorted output is either a data set or a routine (sort exit E35) provided by the user.
PLISRTA is the simplest of all of the interfaces because it sorts from data set to
data set. An example of a PLISRTA program is in Figure 38 on page 446. Other
interfaces require either the input-handling routine or the output-handling routine, or both.
To sort varying-length records, you first need to convert your data sets to
TYPE(VARLS) format, and then use this TYPE(VARLS) file as input to the sort program. TYPE(VARLS) records have a 2-byte length field at the beginning, so the record size is actually two less than the length of the record. This means the record size you specify should be two less than the maximum record length for the file.
You can convert your data set to a TYPE(VARLS) file by writing a PL/I program that reads from the existing data file and writes to an output file declared as
TYPE(VARLS) .
Sort data handling routines
The input-handling and output-handling routines are called by sort when
PLISRTB, PLISRTC, or PLISRTD is used. They must be written in PL/I, and can be either internal or external procedures. If they are internal to the routine that calls
PLISRT
x
, they behave in the same way as ordinary internal procedures with respect to the scope of names. The input and output procedure names themselves must be known in the procedure that makes the call to PLISRT
x
.
The routines are called individually for each record required by sort or passed from sort. Therefore, each routine must be written to handle one record at a time.
Variables declared as AUTOMATIC within the procedures do not retain their values between calls. Consequently, items such as counters, which need to be retained from one call to the next, should either be declared as STATIC or be declared in the containing block.
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
441
Sort data handling routines
E15 — input-handling routine (sort exit E15)
Input routines are normally used to process data in some way before it is sorted,
such as printing it, (see Figure 39 on page 447 and Figure 41 on page 449), or
generating or manipulating the sorting fields to achieve the correct results.
The input-handling routine is used by SORT when a call is made to either
PLISRTB or PLISRTD. When SORT requires a record, it calls the input routine which should return a record in character string format, and a return code of 12, which means the record passed is to be included in the sort. SORT continues to call the routine until a return code of 8 is passed. This means that all records have
already
been passed, and SORT is not to call the routine again. If a record is returned when the return code is 8, it is ignored by SORT.
Note:
You must compile the program that calls PLISRTB or PLISRTD with the same options (ASCII or EBCDIC; NATIVE or NONNATIVE; HEXADEC or
IEEE) that you used to compile the E15 handling routine.
The data returned by the E15 routine must be a fixed or varying character string. If it is varying, you should normally specify V as the record format in the RECORD statement which is the second argument in the call to PLISRTx. However, you can specify F, in which case the string is padded to its maximum length with blanks.
The record is returned with a RETURN statement, and you must specify the
RETURNS attribute in the PROCEDURE statement. The return code is set in a call
to PLIRETC. Examples of an input routine are given in Figure 39 on page 447 and
In addition to the return codes of 12 (include current record in sort) and 8 (all records sent), SORT allows the use of a return code of 16. This ends the sort and sets a return code from SORT to your PL/I program of 16–sort failed.
It should be noted that a call to PLIRETC sets a return code that is passed by your
PL/I program, and is available to any job steps that follow it. When an output handling routine has been used, it is a good practice to reset the return code with a call to PLIRETC after the call to PLISRT
x
to avoid receiving a nonzero completion code. By calling PLIRETC with the return code from sort as the argument, you can make the PL/I return code reflect the success or failure of the sort. This practice is
shown in Figure 40 on page 448.
442
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Sort data handling routines
E15: proc returns (char(80));
/* Returns attribute must be used specifying length of data to be sorted, maximum length if varying strings are passed to sort.
*/ dcl string char(80); /* A character string variable is normally required to return the data to sort */ if Last_Record_Sent then do;
/* A test must be made to see if all the records have been sent, if they have, a return code of 8 is set up and control returned to sort end; call pliretc(8); /* Set return code of 8, meaning last record already sent.
*/
*/ else do;
/*
/* If another record is to be sent to sort, do the necessary processing, set a return code of 12 by calling PLIRETC, and return the data as a character string to sort
The code to do your processing goes here */ call pliretc (12);/* Set return code of 12, meaning this record is to be included in the sort end; return (string); /* Return data with RETURN statement end; /* End of the input procedure
*/
*/
*/
*/
Figure 35. Skeletal code for an input procedure
In addition, to code the input user exit routine, the explicit attributes of the E15 must be specified in the program unit that calls PLISRTx if E15 is not nested in that program unit.
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
443
Sort data handling routines
plisort: proc options(main);
dcl e15 entry returns(char(2000) varying);
/* Code to do your processing goes here */ call plisrtb(’ SORT FIELDS=(5,10,CH,A) ’
’ RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(2000) ’,
0, retcode, e15);
/* Code to do your processing goes here */ end plisort;
*PROCESS
E15: proc returns (char(2000) varying);
/* Returns option must be used specifying length of data to be sorted, maximum length if varying strings are passed to sort.
*/ dcl string char(2000) varying;
/* A character string variable is normally required to return the data to sort if Last_Record_Sent then do;
/* A test must be made to see if all the records have been sent, if they have, a return code of 8 is set up and control returned to sort end; call pliretc(8); /* Set return code of 8, meaning last record already sent.
else do;
/* If another record is to be sent to sort, do the necessary processing, set a return code of 12 by calling PLIRETC, and return the data as a character string to sort
/* Code to do your processing goes here */ call pliretc (12);/* Set return code of 12, meaning this record is to be included in the sort end; return (string); /* Return data with RETURN statement end; /* End of the input procedure
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
Figure 36. When E15 is external to the procedure calling PLISRTx
E35 — output-handling routine (sort exit E35)
You must compile the program that calls PLISRTC or PLISRTD with the same options (ASCII or EBCDIC; NATIVE or NONNATIVE) that you used to compile the E35 handling routine.
Output-handling routines are normally used for any processing that is necessary
after the sort. This could be to print the sorted data, as shown in Figure 40 on page
444
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Sort data handling routines
448 and Figure 41 on page 449, or to use the sorted data to generate further
information. The output handling routine is used by sort when a call is made to
PLISRTC or PLISRTD.
When the records have been sorted, sort passes them (one at a time) to the output handling routine. The output routine then processes them as required. When all the records have been passed, sort sets up its return code and returns to the statement after the CALL PLISRT
x
statement. There is no indication from sort to the output handling routine that the last record has been reached. Any end-of-data handling must therefore be done in the procedure that calls PLISRT
x
.
The record is passed from sort to the output routine as a character string, and you must declare a character string parameter in the output-handling subroutine to receive the data. The output-handling subroutine must also pass a return code of 4 to sort to indicate that it is ready for another record. You set the return code by a call to PLIRETC.
The sort can be stopped by passing a return code of 16 to sort. This results in sort returning to the calling program with a return code of 16–sort failed.
The record passed to the routine by sort is a character string parameter. If you specified the record type as F in the second argument in the call to PLISRT
x
, you should declare the parameter with the length of the record. If you specified the record type as V, you should declare the parameter as adjustable, for example: dcl string char(*);
Skeletal code for a typical output-handling routine is shown in Figure 37.
You should note that a call to PLIRETC sets a return code that is passed by your
PL/I program, and is available to any job steps that follow it. When you have used an output handling routine, it is good practice to reset the return code with a call to PLIRETC after the call to PLISRT
x
to avoid receiving a nonzero completion code. By calling PLIRETC with the return code from sort as the argument, you can make the PL/I return code reflect the success or failure of the sort. This practice is shown in the examples at the end of this chapter.
E35: proc(String);
/* The procedure must have a character string parameter to receive the record from sort */
*/ dcl String char(80); /* Declaration of parameter
/* Your code goes here */ call pliretc(4); end E35;
/* Pass return code to sort indicating that the next sorted record is to be passed to this procedure.
/* End of procedure returns control to sort
*/
*/
Figure 37. Skeletal code for an output-handling procedure
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
445
Sort data handling routines
Calling PLISRTA
/*******************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Sorting from an input data set to an output data set
/*
/* Use the following statements:
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/* set dd:sortin=ex106.dat,type(crlf),lrecl(80) set dd:sortout=ex106.out,type(crlf),lrecl(80)
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*******************************************************************/ ex106: proc options(main); dcl Return_code fixed bin(31,0); call plisrta (’ SORT FIELDS=(7,74,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0,
Return_code); select (Return_code); when(0) put skip edit
(’Sort complete return_code 0’) (a); when(16) put skip edit
(’Sort failed, return_code 16’) (a); other put skip edit (
’Invalid sort return_code = ’, Return_code) (a,f(2)); end /* Select */;
/* Set pl/i return code to reflect success of sort */ call pliretc(Return_code); end ex106;
Figure 38. PLISRTA—Sorting from input data set to output data set
Content of EX106.DAT to be used with Figure 38
003329HOOKER S.W. RIVERDALE, SATCHWELL LANE, BACONSFIELD
002886BOOKER R.R. ROTORUA, LINKEDGE LANE, TOBLEY
003077ROOKER & SON, LITTLETON NURSERIES, SHOLTSPAR
059334HOOK E.H. 109 ELMTREE ROAD, GANNET PARK, NORTHAMPTON
073872HOME TAVERN, WESTLEIGH
000931FOREST, IVER, BUCKS
446
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Sort data handling routines
Calling PLISRTB
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*******************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
*/
Sorting from an input-handling routine to an output data set */
/*
/* Use the following statements:
*/
*/ set dd:sysin=ex107.dat,type(crlf),lrecl(80) set dd:sortout=ex107.out,type(crlf),lrecl(80)
/*******************************************************************/ ex107: proc options(main);
*/
*/
*/
*/ dcl Return_code fixed bin(31,0); call plisrtb (’ SORT FIELDS=(7,74,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0,
Return_code, e15x); select(Return_code); when(0) put skip edit
(’Sort complete return_code 0’) (a); when(16) put skip edit
(’Sort failed, return_code 16’) (a); other put skip edit
(’Invalid return_code = ’,Return_code)(a,f(2)); end /* Select */;
/* Set pl/i return code to reflect success of sort call pliretc(Return_code);
*/ e15x: /* Input-handling routine gets records from the input stream and puts them before they are sorted proc returns (char(80)); dcl sysin file stream input,
Infield char(80);
*/ on endfile(sysin) begin; put skip(3) edit (’End of sort program input’)(a); call pliretc(8); /* Signal that last record has already been sent to sort */ goto ende15; end; get file (sysin) edit (infield) (l); put skip edit (infield)(a(80)); /* Print input */ call pliretc(12); /* Request sort to include current record and return for more */ return(Infield); ende15: end e15x; end ex107;
Figure 39. PLISRTB—Sorting from input-handling routine to output data set
Content of EX107.DAT to be used with Figure 39
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
447
Sort data handling routines
003329HOOKER S.W. RIVERDALE, SATCHWELL LANE, BACONSFIELD
002886BOOKER R.R. ROTORUA, LINKEDGE LANE, TOBLEY
003077ROOKER & SON, LITTLETON NURSERIES, SHOLTSPAR
059334HOOK E.H. 109 ELMTREE ROAD, GANNET PARK, NORTHAMPTON
073872HOME TAVERN, WESTLEIGH
000931FOREST, IVER, BUCKS
Calling PLISRTC
/*******************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/*
*/
Sorting from an input data set to an output-handling routine */
/*
/* Use the following statement:
/*
/* set dd:sortin=ex108.dat,type(crlf),lrecl(80)
/* */
/*******************************************************************/
*/
*/
*/
*/ ex108: proc options(main); dcl Return_code fixed bin(31,0); call plisrtc (’ SORT FIELDS=(7,74,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0,
Return_code, e35x); select(Return_code); when(0) put skip edit
(’Sort complete return_code 0’) (a); when(16) put skip edit
(’Sort failed, return_code 16’) (a); other put skip edit
(’Invalid return_code = ’, Return_code) (a,f(2)); end /* Select */;
/* Set pl/i return code to reflect success of sort call pliretc (return_code);
*/ e35x: /* Output-handling routine prints sorted records proc (Inrec); dcl inrec char(*); put skip edit (inrec) (a); call pliretc(4); /* Request next record from sort end e35x; end ex108;
*/
*/
Figure 40. PLISRTC—Sorting from input data set to output-handling routine
Content of EX108.DAT to be used with Figure 40
003329HOOKER S.W. RIVERDALE, SATCHWELL LANE, BACONSFIELD
002886BOOKER R.R. ROTORUA, LINKEDGE LANE, TOBLEY
003077ROOKER & SON, LITTLETON NURSERIES, SHOLTSPAR
059334HOOK E.H. 109 ELMTREE ROAD, GANNET PARK, NORTHAMPTON
073872HOME TAVERN, WESTLEIGH
000931FOREST, IVER, BUCKS
448
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Calling PLISRTD, example 1
/*******************************************************************/
/* */
/* DESCRIPTION
/* Sorting an input-handling to output-handling routine
/*
/* Use the following statement:
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* set dd:sysin=ex109.dat,type(crlf),lrecl(80)
*/
*/
/* */
/*******************************************************************/ ex109: proc options(main); dcl Return_code fixed bin(31,0); call plisrtd (’ SORT FIELDS=(7,74,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=(80) ’,
0,
Return_code, e15x, e35x); select(Return_code); when(0) put skip edit
(’Sort complete return_code 0’) (a); when(16) put skip edit
(’Sort failed, return_code 16’) (a); other put skip edit
(’Invalid return_code = ’, Return_code) (a,f(2)); end /* select */;
/* Set pl/i return code to reflect success of sort call pliretc(Return_code);
*/ e15x: /* Input-handling routine prints input before sorting */ proc returns(char(80)); dcl infield char(80); on endfile(sysin) begin; put skip(3) edit (’end of sort program input.
’,
’sorted output should follow’)(a); call pliretc(8); /* Signal end of input to sort */ goto ende15; end; ende15: get file (sysin) edit (infield) (l); put skip edit (infield)(a); call pliretc(12); /* Input to sort continues return(Infield); end e15x;
*/ e35x: /* Output-handling routine prints the sorted records */ proc (Inrec); dcl inrec char(80); put skip edit (inrec) (a); next: call pliretc(4); /* Request next record from sort */ end e35x; end ex109;
Figure 41. PLISRTD—Sorting input-handling routine to output-handling routine
Sort data handling routines
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
449
Sort data handling routines
Contents of EX109.DAT and EX110.DAT used with Figure 41 on page 449 and
003329HOOKER S.W. RIVERDALE, SATCHWELL LANE, BACONSFIELD
002886BOOKER R.R. ROTORUA, LINKEDGE LANE, TOBLEY
003077ROOKER & SON, LITTLETON NURSERIES, SHOLTSPAR
059334HOOK E.H. 109 ELMTREE ROAD, GANNET PARK, NORTHAMPTON
073872HOME TAVERN, WESTLEIGH
000931FOREST, IVER, BUCKS
450
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Sort data handling routines
Calling PLISRTD, example 2
ex110: proc options(main);
/*****************************************************************/
/* */
/* PLISRTD: sorting from an input-handling rtn to an
/*
*/ output-handling routine. Records are varying-length. */
/* */
/*****************************************************************/ dcl rc fixed bin(31,0); call plisrtd(’ SORT FIELDS=(7,4,CH,A) ’,
’ RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(80) ’,
256000, rc, e15x, e35x ); select( rc ); when(0) put skip edit
(’Sort complete return code = 0’) (a); when(16) put skip edit
(’Sort failed return code = 16’) (a); other put skip edit end;
(’Invalid return code = ’, rc) (a,f(2)); call pliretc(rc); e15x: proc returns( char(80) varying ); dcl infield char(80) var; on endfile(sysin) begin; put skip(3) edit(’End of sort program input.
’,
’Sortout output should follow’) (a); call pliretc(8); goto ende15; end; get file(sysin) edit(infield) (l); put skip edit( infield ) (a); call pliretc(12); return(infield); ende15: end e15x; e35x: proc ( inrec ); dcl inrec char(*); put skip edit(inrec) (a); call pliretc(4); end e35x; end ex110;
Figure 42. PLISRTD—Sorting input-handling routine to output-handling routine
Chapter 24. Using sort routines
451
Sort data handling routines
452
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
The compiler provides an interface called PLISAX x
( x
= A or B) that provides you basic XML capability to PL/I. The support includes a high-speed XML parser, which allows programs to consume inbound XML messages, check them for well-formedness, and transform their contents to PL/I data structures.
The XMLCHAR built-in function provides support for XML generation.
Overview
There are two major types of interfaces for XML parsing: event-based and tree-based.
For an event-based API, the parser reports events to the application through callbacks. Such events include: the start of the document, the beginning of an element, etc. The application provides handlers to deal with the events reported by the parser. The Simple API for XML or SAX is an example of an industry-standard event-based API.
For a tree-based API (such as the Document Object Model or DOM), the parser translates the XML into an internal tree-based representation. Interfaces are provided to navigate the tree.
IBM PL/I provides a SAX-like event-based interface for parsing XML documents.
The parser invokes an application-supplied handler for parser events, passing references to the corresponding document fragments.
The parser has the following characteristics: v It provides high-performance, but non-standard interfaces.
v
It supports XML files encoded in either Unicode UTF-16 or any of several single-byte code pages listed below.
v
The parser is non-validating, but does partially check well-formedness. See section 2.5.10,
XML documents have two levels of conformance: well-formedness and validity, both of which are defined in the XML standard, which you can find at http://www.w3c.org/XML/. Recapitulating these definitions, an XML document is well-formed if it complies with the basic XML grammar, and with a few specific rules, such as the requirement that the names on start and end element tags must match. A well-formed XML document is also valid if it has an associated document type declaration (DTD) and if it complies with the constraints expressed in the
DTD.
The XML parser is non-validating, but does partially check for well-formedness errors, and generates exception events if it discovers any.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
453
The PLISAXA built-in subroutine
The PLISAXA built-in subroutine allows you to invoke the XML parser for an XML document residing in a buffer in your program.
PLISAXA(
e
,
p
,
x
,
n
)
,
c
e
An event structure
p
A pointer value or "token" that the parser will pass back to the event functions
x
The address of the buffer containing the input XML
n
The number of bytes of data in that buffer
c
A numeric expression specifying the purported codepage of that XML
Note that if the XML is contained in a CHARACTER VARYING or a WIDECHAR
VARYING string, then the ADDRDATA built-in function should be used to obtain the address of the first data byte.
Also note that if the XML is contained in a WIDECHAR string, the value for the number of bytes is twice the value returned by the LENGTH built-in function.
The PLISAXB built-in subroutine
The PLISAXB built-in subroutine allows you to invoke the XML parser for an XML document residing in a file.
PLISAXB(
e
,
p
,
x
)
,
c
e
An event structure
p
A pointer value or "token" that the parser will pass back to the event functions
x
A character string expression specifying the input file
c
A numeric expression specifying the purported codepage of that XML
Under batch, the character string specifying the input file should have the form
'file://dd:ddname', where ddname is the name of the DD statement specifying the file.
Under z/OS UNIX, the character string specifying the input file should have the form 'file://filename', where filename is the name of a z/OS UNIX file.
The SAX event structure
The event structure is a structure consisting of 24 LIMITED ENTRY variables which point to functions that the parser will invoke for various "events".
The descriptions below of each event refer to the example of an XML document in
Figure 43 on page 455. In these descriptions, the term "XML text" refers to the
string based on the pointer and length passed to the event.
454
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
xmlDocument =
’<?xml version="1.0" standalone="yes"?>’
|| ’<!--This document is just an example-->’
|| ’<sandwich>’
|| ’<bread type="baker’s best"/>’
|| ’<?spread please use real mayonnaise ?>’
|| ’<meat>Ham & turkey</meat>’
|| ’<filling>Cheese, lettuce, tomato, etc.</filling>’
|| ’<![CDATA[We should add a <relish> element in future!]]>’
|| ’</sandwich>’
|| ’junk’;
Figure 43. Sample XML document
In the order of their appearance in this structure, the parser may recognize the following events:
start_of_document
This event occurs once, at the beginning of parsing the document. The parser passes the address and length of the entire document, including any line-control characters, such as LF (Line Feed) or NL (New Line). For the above example, the document is 305 characters in length.
version_information
This event occurs within the optional XML declaration for the version information.
The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the version value,
"1.0" in the example above.
encoding_declaration
This event occurs within the XML declaration for the optional encoding declaration. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the encoding value.
standalone_declaration
This event occurs within the XML declaration for the optional standalone declaration. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the standalone value, "yes" in the example above.
document_type_declaration
This event occurs when the parser finds a document type declaration. Document type declarations begin with the character sequence "<!DOCTYPE" and end with a
">" character, with some fairly complicated grammar rules describing the content in between. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the entire declaration, including the opening and closing character sequences, and is the only event where XML text includes the delimiters. The example above does not have a document type declaration.
end_of_document
This event occurs once, when document parsing has completed.
start_of_element
This event occurs once for each element start tag or empty element tag. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the element name. For the first start_of_element event during parsing of the example, this would be the string
"sandwich".
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
455
attribute_name
This event occurs for each attribute in an element start tag or empty element tag, after recognizing a valid name. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the attribute name. The only attribute name in the example is
"type".
attribute_characters
This event occurs for each fragment of an attribute value. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the fragment. An attribute value normally consists of a single string only, even if it is split across lines:
<element attribute="This attribute value is split across two lines"/>
The attribute value might consist of multiple pieces, however. For instance, the value of the "type" attribute in the "sandwich" example at the beginning of the section consists of three fragments: the string "baker", the single character "'" and the string "s best". The parser passes these fragments as three separate events. It passes each string, "baker" and "s best" in the example, as attribute_characters events, and the single character "'" as an attribute_predefined_reference event, described next.
attribute_predefined_reference
This event occurs in attribute values for the five pre-defined entity references "&",
"'", ">", "<" and "'". The parser passes a CHAR(1) or WIDECHAR(1) value that contains one of "&", "'", ">", "<" or '"', respectively.
attribute_character_reference
This event occurs in attribute values for numeric character references (Unicode code points or "scalar values") of the form "&#dd;" or "&#xhh;", where "d" and "h" represent decimal and hexadecimal digits, respectively. The parser passes a FIXED
BIN(31) value that contains the corresponding integer value.
end_of_element
This event occurs once for each element end tag or empty element tag when the parser recognizes the closing angle bracket of the tag. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the element name.
start_of_CDATA_section
This event occurs at the start of a CDATA section. CDATA sections begin with the string “<![CDATA[” and end with the string “]]”, and are used to "escape" blocks of text containing characters that would otherwise be recognized as XML markup.
The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the opening characters “<![CDATA[”. The parser passes the content of a CDATA section between these delimiters as a single content-characters event. For the example, in the above example, the content-characters event is passed the text "We should add a <relish> element in future!".
end_of_CDATA_section
This event occurs when the parser recognizes the end of a CDATA section. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the closing character sequence, “]]”.
456
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
content_characters
This event represents the "heart" of an XML document: the character data between element start and end tags. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the this data, which usually consists of a single string only, even if it is split across lines:
<element1>This character content is split across two lines</element1>
If the content of an element includes any references or other elements, the complete content may comprise several segments. For instance, the content of the
"meat" element in the example consists of the string "Ham ", the character "&" and the string " turkey". Notice the trailing and leading spaces, respectively, in these two string fragments. The parser passes these three content fragments as separate events. It passes the string content fragments, "Ham " and " turkey", as content_characters events, and the single "&" character as a content_predefined_reference event. The parser also uses the content_characters event to pass the text of CDATA sections to the application.
content_predefined_reference
This event occurs in element content for the five pre-defined entity references "&",
"'", ">", "<" and "'". The parser passes a CHAR(1) or WIDECHAR(1) value that contains one of "&", "'", ">", "<" or '"', respectively.
content_character_reference
This event occurs in element content for numeric character references (Unicode code points or "scalar values") of the form "&#dd;" or "&#xhh;", where "d" and "h" represent decimal and hexadecimal digits, respectively. The parser passes a FIXED
BIN(31) value that contains the corresponding integer value.
processing_instruction
Processing instructions (PIs) allow XML documents to contain special instructions for applications. This event occurs when the parser recognizes the name following the PI opening character sequence, "<?". The event also covers the data following the processing instruction (PI) target, up to but not including the PI closing character sequence, "?>". Trailing, but not leading white space characters in the data are included. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the target, "spread" in the example, and the address and length of the text containing the data, "please use real mayonnaise " in the example.
comment
This event occurs for any comments in the XML document. The parser passes the address and length of the text between the opening and closing comment delimiters, "<!--" and "-->", respectively. In the example, the text of the only comment is "This document is just an example".
unknown_attribute_reference
This event occurs within attribute values for entity references other than the five pre-defined entity references, listed for the event attribute_predefined_character.
The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the entity name.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
457
unknown_content_reference
This event occurs within element content for entity references other than the five pre-defined entity references listed for the content_predefined_character event. The parser passes the address and length of the text containing the entity name.
start_of_prefix_mapping
This event is currently not generated.
end_of_prefix_mapping
This event is currently not generated.
exception
The parser generates this event when it detects an error in processing the XML document.
Parameters to the event functions
All of these functions must return a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) value that is a return code to the parser. For the parser to continue normally, this value should be zero.
All of these functions will be passed as the first argument a BYVALUE POINTER that is the token value passed originally as the second argument to the built-in function.
With the following exceptions, all of the functions will also be passed a BYVALUE
POINTER and a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) that supply the address and length of the text element for the event. The functions/events that are different are:
end_of_document
No argument other than the user token is passed.
attribute_predefined_reference
In addition to the user token, one additional argument is passed: a BYVALUE
CHAR(1) or, for a UTF-16 document, a BYVALUE WIDECHAR(1) that holds the value of the predefined character.
content_predefined_reference
In addition to the user token, one additional argument is passed: a BYVALUE
CHAR(1) or, for a UTF-16 document, a BYVALUE WIDECHAR(1) that holds the value of the predefined character.
attribute_character_reference
In addition to the user token, one additional argument is passed: a BYVALUE
FIXED BIN(31) that holds the value of the numeric reference.
content_character_reference
In addition to the user token, one additional argument is passed: a BYVALUE
FIXED BIN(31) that holds the value of the numeric reference.
processing_instruction
In addition to the user token, four additional arguments are passed:
1.
a BYVALUE POINTER that is the address of the target text
2.
a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) that is the length of the target text
3.
a BYVALUE POINTER that is the address of the data text
4.
a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) that is the length of the data text
458
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
exception
In addition to the user token, three additional arguments are passed:
1.
a BYVALUE POINTER that is the address of the offending text
2.
a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) that is the byte offset of the offending text within the document
3.
a BYVALUE FIXED BIN(31) that is the value of the exception code
Coded character sets for XML documents
The PLISAX built-in subroutine supports only XML documents in WIDECHAR encoded using Unicode UTF-16, or in CHARACTER encoded using one of the explicitly supported single-byte character sets listed below. The parser uses up to three sources of information about the encoding of your XML document, and signals an exception XML event if it discovers any conflicts between these sources:
1.
The parser determines the basic encoding of a document by inspecting its initial characters.
2.
If step 1 succeeds, the parser then looks for any encoding declaration.
3.
Finally, it refers to the codepage value on the PLISAX built-in subroutine call. If this parameter was omitted, it defaults to the value provided by the
CODEPAGE compiler option value that you specified explicitly or by default.
If the XML document begins with an XML declaration that includes an encoding declaration specifying one of the supported code pages listed below, the parser honors the encoding declaration if it does not conflict with either the basic document encoding or the encoding information from the PLISAX built-in subroutine. If the XML document does not have an XML declaration at all, or if the
XML declaration omits the encoding declaration, the parser uses the encoding information from the PLISAX built-in subroutine to process the document, as long as it does not conflict with the basic document encoding.
Supported EBCDIC code pages
In the following table, the first number is for the Euro Country Extended Code
Page (ECECP), and the second is for Country Extended Code Page (CECP).
CCSID
01047
01140, 00037
01141, 00273
01142, 00277
01143, 00278
01144, 00280
01145, 00284
01146, 00285
01147, 00297
01148, 00500
01149, 00871
Description
Latin 1 / Open Systems
USA, Canada, etc.
Austria, Germany
Denmark, Norway
Finland, Sweden
Italy
Spain, Latin America (Spanish)
UK
France
International
Iceland
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
459
Supported ASCII code pages
CCSID
00813
00819
00920
Description
ISO 8859-7 Greek / Latin
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 / Open Systems
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (ECMA-128, Turkey TS-5881)
Specifying the code page
If your document does not include an encoding declaration in the XML declaration, or does not have an XML declaration at all, the parser uses the encoding information provided by the PLISAX built-in subroutine call in conjunction with the basic encoding of the document.
You can also specify the encoding information for the document in the XML declaration, with which most XML documents begin. An example of an XML declaration that includes an encoding declaration is:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ibm-1140"?>
If your XML document includes an encoding declaration, ensure that it is consistent with the encoding information provided by the PLISAX built-in subroutine and with the basic encoding of the document. If there is any conflict between the encoding declaration, the encoding information provided by the
PLISAX built-in subroutine and the basic encoding of the document, the parser signals an exception XML event.
Specify the encoding declaration as follows:
Using a number:
You can specify the CCSID number (with or without any number of leading zeroes), prefixed by any of the following (in any mixture of upper or lower case):
IBM_
IBM-
CP
CP_
CP-
CCSID_
CCSID-
500
813
819
920
1200
Using an alias
You can use any of the following supported aliases (in any mixture of lower and upper case):
Code page
037
Supported aliases
EBCDIC-CP-US, EBCDIC-CP-CA, EBCDIC-CP-WT,
EBCDIC-CP-NL
EBCDIC-CP-BE, EBCDIC-CP-CH
ISO-8859-7, ISO_8859-7
ISO-8859-1, ISO_8859-1
ISO-8859-9, ISO_8859-9
UTF-16
460
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Exceptions
For most exceptions, the XML text contains the part of the document that was parsed up to and including the point where the exception was detected. For encoding conflict exceptions, which are signaled before parsing begins, the length of the XML text is either zero or the XML text contains just the encoding declaration value from the document. The example above contains one item that causes an exception event, the superfluous "junk" following the "sandwich" element end tag.
There are two kinds of exceptions:
1.
Exceptions that allow you to continue parsing optionally. Continuable exceptions have exception codes in the range 1 through 99, 100,001 through
165,535, or 200,001 to 265,535. The exception event in the example above has an exception number of 1 and thus is continuable.
2.
Fatal exceptions, which don't allow continuation. Fatal exceptions have exception codes greater than 99 (but less than 100,000).
Returning from the exception event function with a non-zero return code normally causes the parser to stop processing the document, and return control to the program that invoked the PLISAXA or PLISAXB built-in subroutine.
For continuable exceptions, returning from the exception event function with a zero return code requests the parser to continue processing the document, although further exceptions might subsequently occur. See section 2.5.6.1, "Continuable exceptions" for details of the actions that the parser takes when you request continuation.
A special case applies to exceptions with exception numbers in the ranges 100,001 through 165,535 and 200,001 through 265,535. These ranges of exception codes indicate that the document's CCSID (determined by examining the beginning of the document, including any encoding declaration) is not identical to the CCSID value provided (explicitly or implicitly) by the PLISAXA or PLISAXB built-in subroutine, even if both CCSIDs are for the same basic encoding, EBCDIC or
ASCII.
For these exceptions, the exception code passed to the exception event contains the document's CCSID, plus 100,000 for EBCDIC CCSIDs, or 200,000 for ASCII
CCSIDs. For instance, if the exception code contains 101,140, the document
└ s
CCSID is 01140. The CCSID value provided by the PLISAXA or PLISAXB built-in subroutine is either set explicitly as the last argument on the call or implicitly when the last argument is omitted and the value of the CODEPAGE compiler option is used.
Depending on the value of the return code after returning from the exception event function for these CCSID conflict exceptions, the parser takes one of three actions:
1.
If the return code is zero, the parser proceeds using the CCSID provided by the built-in subroutine.
2.
If the return code contains the document's CCSID (that is, the original exception code value minus 100,000 or 200,000), the parser proceeds using the document
└ s CCSID. This is the only case where the parser continues after a non-zero value is returned from one of the parsing events.
3.
Otherwise, the parser stops processing the document, and returns control to the
PLISAXA or PLISAXB built-in subroutine which will raise the ERROR condition.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
461
Example
The following example illustrates the use of the PLISAXA built-in subroutine and uses the example XML document cited above: saxtest: package exports(saxtest); define alias event limited entry( pointer, pointer, fixed bin(31) ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); define alias event_end_of_document limited entry( pointer ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); define alias event_predefined_ref limited entry( pointer, char(1) ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor ); define alias event_character_ref limited entry( pointer, fixed bin(31) ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); define alias event_pi limited entry( pointer, pointer, fixed bin(31), pointer, fixed bin(31) ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); define alias event_exception limited entry( pointer, pointer, fixed bin(31), fixed bin(31) ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue );
Figure 44. PLISAXA coding example - type declarations
462
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
saxtest: proc options( main ); dcl
1 eventHandler static
,2 e01 type event init( start_of_document )
,2 e02 type event init( version_information )
,2 e03 type event init( encoding_declaration )
,2 e04 type event init( standalone_declaration )
,2 e05 type event init( document_type_declaration )
,2 e06 type event_end_of_document init( end_of_document )
,2 e07 type event init( start_of_element )
,2 e08 type event init( attribute_name )
,2 e09 type event init( attribute_characters )
,2 e10 type event_predefined_ref init( attribute_predefined_reference )
,2 e11 type event_character_ref init( attribute_character_reference )
,2 e12 type event init( end_of_element )
,2 e13 type event init( start_of_CDATA )
,2 e14 type event init( end_of_CDATA )
,2 e15 type event init( content_characters )
,2 e16 type event_predefined_ref init( content_predefined_reference )
,2 e17 type event_character_ref init( content_character_reference )
,2 e18 type event_pi init( processing_instruction )
,2 e19 type event init( comment )
,2 e20 type event init( unknown_attribute_reference )
,2 e21 type event init( unknown_content_reference )
,2 e22 type event init( start_of_prefix_mapping )
,2 e23 type event init( end_of_prefix_mapping )
,2 e24 type event_exception init( exception )
;
Figure 45. PLISAXA coding example - event structure
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
463
dcl token char(8); dcl xmlDocument char(4000) var; xmlDocument =
’<?xml version="1.0" standalone="yes"?>’
|| ’<!--This document is just an example-->’
|| ’<sandwich>’
|| ’<bread type="baker’s best"/>’
|| ’<?spread please use real mayonnaise ?>’
|| ’<meat>Ham & turkey</meat>’
|| ’<filling>Cheese, lettuce, tomato, etc.</filling>’
|| ’<![CDATA[We should add a <relish> element in future!]]>’.
|| ’</sandwich>’
|| ’junk’; call plisaxa( eventHandler, addr(token), addrdata(xmlDocument), length(xmlDocument) ); end;
Figure 46. PLISAXA coding example - main routine
464
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
dcl chars char(32000) based; start_of_document: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ length=’ || tokenlength ); return(0); end; version_information: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; encoding_declaration: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
Figure 47. PLISAXA coding example - event routines
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
465
standalone_declaration: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; document_type_declaration: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; end_of_document: proc( userToken ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken pointer; put skip list( lowercase( procname() ) ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
466
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
start_of_element: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; attribute_name: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; attribute_characters: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
467
attribute_predefined_reference: proc( userToken, reference ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor ); dcl userToken pointer; dcl reference char(1); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ ’ || hex(reference ) ); return(0); end; attribute_character_reference: proc( userToken, reference ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl reference pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || hex(reference ) ); return(0); end; end_of_element: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
468
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
start_of_CDATA: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; end_of_CDATA: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; content_characters: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
469
content_predefined_reference: proc( userToken, reference ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue nodescriptor ); dcl userToken pointer; dcl reference char(1); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ ’ || hex(reference ) ); return(0); end; content_character_reference: proc( userToken, reference ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl reference pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || hex(reference ) ); return(0); end; processing_instruction: proc( userToken, piTarget, piTargetLength, piData, piDataLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl piTarget pointer; pointer; dcl piTargetLength fixed bin(31); dcl piData pointer; dcl piDataLength fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(piTarget->chars,1,piTargetLength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
470
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
comment: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; unknown_attribute_reference: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; unknown_content_reference: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
471
start_of_prefix_mapping: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; end_of_prefix_mapping: proc( userToken, xmlToken, TokenLength ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken dcl tokenLength pointer; pointer; fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ <’ || substr(xmltoken->chars,1,tokenlength ) || ’>’ ); return(0); end; exception: proc( userToken, xmlToken, currentOffset, errorID ) returns( byvalue fixed bin(31) ) options( byvalue ); dcl userToken dcl xmlToken pointer; pointer; dcl currentOffset fixed bin(31); dcl errorID fixed bin(31); put skip list( lowercase( procname() )
|| ’ errorid =’ || errorid ); return(0); end; end;
PLISAXA coding example - event routines (continued)
The preceding program would produce the following output:
472
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
start_of_dcoument length= version_information <1.0>
305 standalone_declaration <yes> comment <This document is just an example> start_of_element <sandwich> start_of_element <bread> attribute_name <type> attribute_characters <baker> attribute_predefined_reference 7D attribute_characters <s best> end_of_element <bread> processing_instruction <spread> start_of_element <meat> content_characters <Ham > content_predefined_reference 50 content_characters < turkey> end_of_element <meat> start_of_element <filling> content_characters <Cheese, lettuce, tomato, etc.> end_of_element <filling> start_of_cdata <<![CDATA[> content_characters <We should add a <relish> element in future!> end_of_cdata <]]> end_of_element <sandwich> exception errorid = content_characters <j>
1
1 exception errorid = content_characters <u> exception errorid = content_characters <n> exception errorid = content_characters <k> end_of_document
1
1
Figure 48. PLISAXA coding example - program output
Continuable exception codes
For each value of the exception code parameter passed to the exception event
(listed under the heading "Number"), the following table describes the exception, and the actions that the parser takes when you request it to continue after the exception. In these descriptions, the term "XML text" refers to the string based on the pointer and length passed to the event.
Table 33. Continuable Exceptions
Number
1
2
Description
The parser found an invalid character while scanning white space outside element content.
The parser found an invalid start of a processing instruction, element, comment or document type declaration outside element content.
Parser Action on Continuation
The parser generates a content_characters event with XML text containing the (single) invalid character. Parsing continues at the character after the invalid character.
The parser generates a content_characters event with the
XML text containing the 2- or
3-character invalid initial character sequence. Parsing continues at the character after the invalid sequence.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
473
Table 33. Continuable Exceptions (continued)
Number
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Description
The parser found a duplicate attribute name.
The parser found the markup character "<" in an attribute value.
The start and end tag names of an element did not match.
The parser found an invalid character in element content.
The parser found an invalid start of an element, comment, processing instruction or CDATA section in element content.
The parser found in element content the CDATA closing character sequence “]]” without the matching opening character sequence
“<![CDATA[”.
The parser found an invalid character in a comment.
The parser found in a comment the character sequence "--" not followed by ">".
The parser found an invalid character in a processing instruction data segment.
Parser Action on Continuation
The parser generates an attribute_name event with the XML text containing the duplicate attribute name.
Prior to generating the exception event, the parser generates an attribute_characters event for any part of the attribute value prior to the "<" character. After the exception event, the parser generates an attribute_characters event with XML text containing "<". Parsing then continues at the character after the
"<".
The parser generates an end_of_element event with XML text containing the mismatched end name.
The parser includes the invalid character in XML text for the subsequent content_characters event.
Prior to generating the exception event, the parser generates a content_characters event for any part of the content prior to the "<" markup character. After the exception event, the parser generates a content_characters event with XML text containing 2 characters: the "<" followed by the invalid character.
Parsing continues at the character after the invalid character.
Prior to generating the exception event, the parser generates a content_characters event for any part of the content prior to the “]]” character sequence. After the exception event, the parser generates a content_characters event with XML text containing the 3-character sequence “]]”. Parsing continues at the character after this sequence.
The parser includes the invalid character in XML text for the subsequent comment event.
The parser assumes that the "--" character sequence terminates the comment, and generates a comment event. Parsing continues at the character after the "--" sequence.
The parser includes the invalid character in XML text for the subsequent processing_instruction event.
474
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Table 33. Continuable Exceptions (continued)
Number
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
50
51
52
Description Parser Action on Continuation
A processing instruction target name was "xml" in lower-case, upper-case or mixed-case.
The parser found an invalid digit in a hexadecimal character reference (of the form �).
The parser found an invalid digit in a decimal character reference (of the form &#dddd;).
The encoding declaration value in the
XML declaration did not begin with lower- or upper-case A through Z
A character reference did not refer to a legal XML character.
The parser found an invalid character in an entity reference name.
The parser found an invalid character in an attribute value.
The parser generates a processing_instruction event with
XML text containing "xml" in the original case.
The parser generates an attribute_characters or content_characters event with XML text containing the invalid digit.
Parsing of the reference continues at the character after this invalid digit.
The parser generates an attribute_characters or content_characters event with XML text containing the invalid digit.
Parsing of the reference continues at the character after this invalid digit.
The parser generates the encoding event with XML text containing the encoding declaration value as it was specified.
The parser generates an attribute_character_reference or content_character_reference event with XML-NTEXT containing the single Unicode character specified by the character reference.
The parser includes the invalid character in the XML text for the subsequent unknown_attribute_reference or unknown_content_reference event.
The parser includes the invalid character in XML text for the subsequent attribute_characters event.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported
EBCDIC code page, but the document encoding declaration did not specify a recognizable encoding.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the document encoding declaration specified a supported
EBCDIC encoding, but the parser does not support the code page specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported
EBCDIC code page, but the document encoding declaration specified an
ASCII encoding.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the document encoding declaration.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
475
Table 33. Continuable Exceptions (continued)
Number
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Description
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported
EBCDIC code page, but the document encoding declaration specified a supported Unicode encoding.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported
EBCDIC code page, but the document encoding declaration specified a
Unicode encoding that the parser does not support.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported
EBCDIC code page, but the document encoding declaration specified an encoding that the parser does not support.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document encoding declaration did not specify a recognizable encoding.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the document encoding declaration specified a supported
ASCII encoding, but the parser does not support the code page specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document encoding declaration specified a supported
EBCDIC encoding.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document encoding declaration specified a supported
Unicode encoding.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document encoding declaration specified a Unicode encoding that the parser does not support.
Parser Action on Continuation
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the document encoding declaration.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
476
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Table 33. Continuable Exceptions (continued)
Number
61
100,001 through
165,535
200,001 through
265,535
Description Parser Action on Continuation
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document encoding declaration specified an encoding that the parser does not support.
The document was encoded in
EBCDIC, and the encodings specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option and the document encoding declaration are both supported
EBCDIC code pages, but are not the same. The exception code contains the
CCSID for the encoding declaration plus 100,000.
The parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option.
If you return zero from the exception event, the parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option. If you return the CCSID from the document encoding declaration
(by subtracting 100,000 from the exception code), the parser uses this encoding.
The document was encoded in ASCII, and the encodings specified by the
CODEPAGE compiler option and the document encoding declaration are both supported ASCII code pages, but are not the same. The exception code contains the CCSID for the encoding declaration plus 200,000.
If you return zero from the exception event, the parser uses the encoding specified by the CODEPAGE compiler option. If you return the CCSID from the document encoding declaration
(by subtracting 200,000 from the exception code), the parser uses this encoding.
Terminating exception codes
Table 34. Terminating Exceptions
Number Description
100
101
102
103
104
106
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning the start of the XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the end of the XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the root element.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the version information in the
XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the version information value in the XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the encoding declaration value in the XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while looking for the standalone declaration value in the XML declaration.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning an attribute name.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning an attribute value.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a character reference or entity reference in an attribute value.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning an empty element tag.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning the root element name.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning an element name.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
477
132
133
134
135
127
128
130
131
122
123
124
125
126
136
137
138
139
140
141
Table 34. Terminating Exceptions (continued)
Number Description
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
142
143
144
145
146
147
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning character data in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a processing instruction in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a comment or CDATA section in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a comment in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a CDATA section in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning a character reference or entity reference in element content.
The parser reached the end of the document while scanning after the close of the root element.
The parser found a possible invalid start of a document type declaration.
The parser found a second document type declaration.
The first character of the root element name was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
The first character of the first attribute name of an element was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
The parser found an invalid character either in or following an element name.
The parser found a character other than '=' following an attribute name.
The parser found an invalid attribute value delimiter.
The first character of an attribute name was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
The parser found an invalid character either in or following an attribute name.
An empty element tag was not terminated by a '>' following the '/'.
The first character of an element end tag name was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
An element end tag name was not terminated by a '>'.
The first character of an element name was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
The parser found an invalid start of a comment or CDATA section in element content.
The parser found an invalid start of a comment.
The first character of a processing instruction target name was not a letter, '_' or ':'.
The parser found an invalid character in or following a processing instruction target name.
A processing instruction was not terminated by the closing character sequence '?>'.
The parser found an invalid character following '&' in a character reference or entity reference.
The version information was not present in the XML declaration.
'version' in the XML declaration was not followed by a '='.
The version declaration value in the XML declaration is either missing or improperly delimited.
The version information value in the XML declaration specified a bad character, or the start and end delimiters did not match.
The parser found an invalid character following the version information value closing delimiter in the XML declaration.
The parser found an invalid attribute instead of the optional encoding declaration in the
XML declaration.
478
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Table 34. Terminating Exceptions (continued)
Number Description
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
'encoding' in the XML declaration was not followed by a '='.
The encoding declaration value in the XML declaration is either missing or improperly delimited.
The encoding declaration value in the XML declaration specified a bad character, or the start and end delimiters did not match.
The parser found an invalid character following the encoding declaration value closing delimiter in the XML declaration.
The parser found an invalid attribute instead of the optional standalone declaration in the
XML declaration.
'standalone' in the XML declaration was not followed by a '='.
The standalone declaration value in the XML declaration is either missing or improperly delimited.
The standalone declaration value was neither 'yes' nor 'no' only.
The standalone declaration value in the XML declaration specified a bad character, or the start and end delimiters did not match.
The parser found an invalid character following the standalone declaration value closing delimiter in the XML declaration.
The XML declaration was not terminated by the proper character sequence '?>', or contained an invalid attribute.
The parser found the start of a document type declaration after the end of the root element.
The parser found the start of an element after the end of the root element.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option specified
Unicode.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option specified an unsupported code page.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option is unsupported and the document encoding declaration was either empty or contained an unsupported alphabetic encoding alias.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option is unsupported and the document did not contain an encoding declaration.
The document was encoded in EBCDIC, but the CODEPAGE compiler option is unsupported and the document encoding declaration did not specify a supported EBCDIC encoding.
The document was encoded in ASCII, but the CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported EBCDIC code page.
The document was encoded in ASCII, but the CODEPAGE compiler option specified
Unicode.
The document was encoded in ASCII, but the CODEPAGE compiler option did not specify a supported EBCDIC code page, ASCII or Unicode.
The CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported ASCII code page, but the document was encoded in Unicode.
The CODEPAGE compiler option specified a supported EBCDIC code page, but the document was encoded in Unicode.
The CODEPAGE compiler option specified an unsupported code page, but the document was encoded in Unicode.
Chapter 25. Using the SAX parser
479
316
317
318
319
Table 34. Terminating Exceptions (continued)
Number Description
312
313
314
315
The document was encoded in ASCII, but both the encodings provided externally and within the document encoding declaration are unsupported.
The document was encoded in ASCII, but the CODEPAGE compiler option is unsupported and the document did not contain an encoding declaration.
The document was encoded in ASCII, but the CODEPAGE compiler option is unsupported and the document encoding declaration did not specify a supported ASCII encoding.
The document was encoded in UTF-16 Little Endian, which the parser does not support on this platform.
The document was encoded in UCS4, which the parser does not support.
The parser cannot determine the document encoding. The document may be damaged.
The document was encoded in UTF-8, which the parser does not support.
The document was encoded in UTF-16 Big Endian, which the parser does not support on this platform.
Internal error. Please report the error to your service representative.
500 to
99,999
480
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications
With the introduction of MLE, PL/I for Windows allows support for a number of additional language features. The purpose of this chapter is for you to become familiar with the new attribute, compile-time options, date patterns, and built-in functions. As you follow the sequence of the chapter, you should have an idea about how to apply these to your existing applications.
Applying attributes and options
The language features introduced in these sections are found elsewhere in the
Programming Guide and Language Reference, but are repeated in this chapter so you can better understand how they work together.
DATE attribute
Implicit date comparisons and conversions are made by the compiler if the two operands have the DATE attribute. The DATE attribute specifies that a variable, argument, or returned value holds a date with a specified pattern. millennium language extensions supports a number of date patterns as described in
“Understanding date patterns” on page 483.
pattern
One of the supported date patterns. If you do not specify a pattern, YYMMDD is the default.
The DATE attribute is valid only with variables having one of the following sets of attributes: v
CHAR(n) NONVARYING v
PIC'(n)9' REAL v
FIXED DEC(n,0) REAL
The length or precision,
n
, must be a constant equal to the length of the date pattern or default pattern.
When the RESPECT compile-time option (discussed later in this chapter) has been specified, the DATE built-in function returns a value that has the attribute
DATE('YYMMDD'). This allows DATE() to be assigned to a variable with the attribute DATE('YYMMDD') without an error message being generated. If DATE() is assigned to a variable not having the DATE attribute, however, an error message is generated.
Here are a few examples using the DATE attribute: dcl gregorian_Date char(6) date; dcl julian_Date dcl year pic’(5)9’ date (’YYDDD’); fixed dec(2) date(’YY’);
The DATE attribute is useful even if you have no year 2000 problems in your applications. You can use it to manipulate differing dates as shown in these examples:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
481
DATE attribute
dcl gregorian_Date char(8) date (’YYYYMMDD’); dcl julian_Date pic’(7)9’ date (’YYYYDDD’); if julian_Date > gregorian_Date then ...
RESPECT compile-time option
Use the RESPECT option to specify which attributes the compiler should recognize.
Currently, DATE is the only selection possible for this compile-time option.
The default is RESPECT() and causes the compiler to ignore any specification of the DATE attribute. Therefore, the DATE attribute is not applied to the result of
DATE built-in. NORESPECT is a synonym for RESPECT()
Specifying RESPECT(DATE), on the other hand, causes the compiler to honor any specification of the DATE attribute and to apply the DATE attribute to the result of
DATE built-in.
RESPECT() is not accepted when compiling with the
PLI command on TSO/MVS.
WINDOW compile-time option
By default, all dates with two-digit years are viewed as falling in a window starting with 1950 and ending in 2049. You can use the WINDOW option to change the value for your century window.
As previously mentioned, the default for this option is WINDOW(1950). You can specify the value for
w
as one of the following: v
An unsigned integer between 1582 and 9999 (inclusive) that represents the start of a fixed century window v
A negative integer between -1 and -99 (inclusive) that creates a "sliding" century window v Zero, indicating the value for w is the current year.
To create a fixed window, you could specify WINDOW(1900) and all two-digit years would be assumed to occur in the 20th century.
If the current year were 1998, and you wanted to create a sliding window, you could specify WINDOW(-5). The resulting century window would span the years
1993 through 2092, inclusive. When the year changes to 1999, the window would also move forward by one year.
If you set a value for the century window using the WINDOW compile-time option, that value is used for the window argument in the built-in functions which
RULES compile-time option
In general, the RULES option allows or disallows certain language capabilities and allows you to choose semantics when alternatives are available. Currently,
LAXCOMMENT is the only selection available for this option.
The default is RULES(NOLAXCOMMENT). LAXCOM and NOLAXCOM are acceptable abbreviations for the suboptions.
482
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
RULES compile-time option
If you specify RULES(LAXCOMMENT), the compiler ignores the special characters
/*/
; therefore, whatever comes between the sets of characters is interpreted as part of the syntax instead of as a comment. If you specify RULES(NOLAXCOMMENT), the compiler treats
/*/ as the start of a comment which continues until a closing
*/ is found.
If you happen to have workstation code that you are porting to the mainframe and uses /*/ around the DATE attribute, you need to use the RULES(LAXCOMMENT) option so that the compiler honors the attribute.
Understanding date patterns
PL/I MLE supports a series of date patterns as shown in the following table.
Table 35. Date patterns supported by PL/I MLE
4-digit year Example
Year first
Month first
Day first
YYYY
YYYYMM
YYYYMMDD
YYYYMMM
YYYYMMMDD
YYYYMmm
YYYYMmmDD
YYYYDDD
MMYYYY
MMDDYYYY
MMMYYYY
MMMDDYYYY
MmmYYYY
MmmDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
DDMMMYYYY
DDMmmYYYY
DDDYYYY
1999
199912
19991225
1999DEC
1999DEC25
1999Dec
1999Dec25
1999359
121999
12251999
DEC1999
DEC251999
Dec1999
Dec251999
25121999
25DEC1999
25Dec1999
3591999
2-digit year
YY
YYMM
YYMMDD
YYMMM
YYMMMDD
YYMmm
YYMmmDD
YYDDD
MMYY
MMDDYY
MMMYY
MMMDDYY
MmmYY
MmmDDYY
DDMMYY
DDMMMYY
DDMmmYY
DDDYY
Example
99
9912
991225
99DEC
99DEC25
99Dec
99Dec25
99359
1299
122599
DEC99
DEC2599
Dec99
Dec2599
251299
25DEC99
25Dec99
35999
When the day or month is omitted from one of these patterns, the compiler assumes it has a value of 1.
If the day or month are not omitted but out of range, for example 00/38/11, a message is issued if the date involves a comparison. Exceptions to the rules are cases of patterns
YYMM and
YYMMDD with values of all zeros that will be converted to a Julian date of 1, that, is, the smallest valid date.
Patterns and windowing
To define how a date with a two-digit year (
YY
) is interpreted, a century window is defined using the WINDOW compile-time option. As described previously, the century window defines the beginning of a 100-year span to which the two-digit year applies.
Without the help of PL/I's Millennium Language Extensions, you would have to implement something like the following logic which converts y2 from a two-digit year to a four-digit year with a window ( w
).
dcl y4 pic’9999’; dcl cc pic’99’;
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications
483
Patterns and windowing
cc = w/100; if y2 < mod(w,100) then y4 = (100 * cc) + 100 + y2; else y4 = (100 * cc) + y2;
Using this example, if you were to specify WINDOW(1900), 19 would be interpreted as the year 1919. If you were to specify WINDOW(1950), however, 19 would be interpreted as the year 2019.
Conversely, this logic calculates the two-digit year ( y2
) when converting from a four-digit year.
dcl y4 pic’9999’; if y4 < w | y4 >= w + 100 then signal error; y2 = mod(y4,100);
Using built-in functions with MLE
The date patterns for PL/I MLE are supported by the DAYS and DAYSTODATE built-in functions. These built-ins both accept the optional argument ( w
) that specifies a window to be used in handling two-digit year patterns. If you specify w as part of DAYS or DAYSTODATE, the value you enter overrides the value as defined by the WINDOW compile-time option.
DAYS
DAYS returns a FIXED BINARY(31,0) value which is the number of days (in Lilian format) corresponding to the date
d
.
d
String expression representing a date. If omitted, it is assumed to be the value returned by DATETIME().
The value for
d
should have character type. If not,
d
is converted to character.
p
One of the supported date patterns shown in Table 35 on page 483. If omitted,
the compiler assumes that
p
is the default pattern returned by the DATETIME built-in function (YYYYMMDDHHMISS999).
p
should have character type. If not, it is converted to character.
w
An integer expression that defines a century window to be used to handle any two-digit year formats.
v
If the value is positive, such as 1950, it is treated as a year.
v
If negative or zero, the value specifies an offset to be subtracted from the current, system-supplied year.
v If omitted,
w
defaults to the value specified in the WINDOW compile-time option.
The following example shows uses of both the DAYS and DAYSTODATE built-in functions: dcl date_format char(8) static init(’MMDDYYYY’); dcl todays_date char(8); dcl sep2_1993 char(8); dcl days_of_july4_1993 fixed bin(31); dcl msg char(100) varying; dcl date_due char(8);
484
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
DAYS
todays_date = daystodate(days(),date_format); days_of_july4_1993 = days(’07041993’,’MMDDYYYY’); sep2_1993 = daystodate(days_of_july4_1993 + 60, Date_format);
/* 09021993 */ date_due = daystodate(days() + 60, date_format);
/* assuming today is July 4, 1993, this would be Sept. 2, 1993 msg = ’Please pay amount due on or before ’
{ substr(date_due, 1, 2)
{
’/’
{ substr(date_due, 3,2)
{
’/’
{ substr(date_due, 5);
DAYSTODATE
DAYSTODATE returns a nonvarying character string containing the date in the form
p
that corresponds to
d
days (in Lilian format).
d
The number of days (in Lilian format).
d
must have a computational type and is converted to FIXED BINARY(31,0) if necessary.
p
One of the supported date patterns shown in Table 35 on page 483. If omitted,
the compiler assumes that
p
is the default pattern returned by the DATETIME built-in function (YYYYMMDDHHMISS999).
p
should have character type. If not, it is converted to character.
w
An integer expression that defines a century window to be used to handle any two-digit year formats.
v
If the value is positive, such as 1950, it is treated as a year.
v
If negative or zero, the value specifies an offset to be subtracted from the current, system-supplied year.
v
If omitted,
w
defaults to the value specified in the WINDOW compile-time option.
Performing date calculations and comparisons
Once you understand what the PL/I millennium language features are and you have made the appropriate syntax changes, you can use MLE to perform calculations and comparisons in your applications.
Explicit date calculations
You can use the DAYS and DAYSTODATE built-in functions to make date comparisons and calculations manually.
Comparing dates
To compare two dates d1 and d2 which have the date pattern
YYMMDD
, you can use the following code:
DAYS (d1, ’YYMMDD’, w) < DAYS(d2, ’YYMMDD’, w)
Converting dates
You can convert between a two-digit date ( d1
) with the pattern
YYMMDD and a four-digit date ( d2
) with the pattern
YYYYMMDD using assignments: d2 = DAYSTODATE(DAYS(d1,’YYMMDD’,w), ’YYYYMMDD’); d1 = DAYSTODATE(DAYS(d2,’YYYYMMDD’), ’YYMMDD’ ,w);
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications
485
Explicit date calculations
Subtracting dates
To subtract 2 two-digit years, y1 and y2
, you need to calculate the imposing difference:
DAYSTODATE(DAYS(y1,’YY’,w), ’YYYY’) -
DAYSTODATE(DAYS(y2,’YY’,w),’YYYY’)
Implicit date calculations
You can use MLE to take advantage of implicit date comparisons and conversions if you first complete the following steps: v Give the two operands the DATE attribute v
Specify the RESPECT compile-time option
Implicit date comparisons
The DATE attribute causes implicit
commoning
when two variables declared with the DATE attribute are compared. Comparisons where only one variable has the
DATE attribute are flagged, and the other comparand is generally treated as if it had the same DATE attribute, although some exceptions apply which are discussed later.
Implicit commoning means that the compiler generates code to convert the dates to a common, comparable representation. This process converts 2-digit years using the
window
you specify in the WINDOW compile-time option.
In the following code fragment, if the DATE attribute is honored, then the comparison in the second display statement is 'windowed'. This means that if the window started at 1900, the comparison would return false. However, if the window started at 1950, the comparison would return true.
dcl a pic’(6)9’ date; dcl b pic’(6)9’ def(a); dcl c pic’(6)9’ date; dcl d pic’(6)9’ def(c); b = ’670101’; d = ’010101’; display( b || ’ < ’ || d || ’ ?’ ); display( a < c );
Date comparisons can also occur in the following places: v
IF and SELECT statements v
WHILE or UNTIL clauses v
Implicit comparisons caused by a TO clause.
Comparing dates with like patterns
The compiler does not generate any special code to compare dates with identical patterns under the following conditions: v The comparison operator of = or ¬ = is used v The pattern is equal to YYYY, YYYYMM, YYYYDDD, or YYYYMMDD.
Comparing dates with differing patterns
For comparisons involving dates with unlike patterns, the compiler generates code to convert the dates to a common comparable representation. Once the conversion has taken place, the compiler compares the two values.
486
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Implicit date comparisons
Comparisons involving the DATE attribute and a literal
If you are making comparisons in which one comparand has the DATE attribute and the other is a literal, the compiler issues a W-level message. Further compiler action depends on the value of the literal as follows: v
If the literal appears to be a valid date, it is treated as if it had the same date pattern and window as the comparand with the DATE attribute.
v If the literal does not appear to be a valid date, the DATE attribute is ignored on the other comparand.
dcl start_date char(6) date; if start_date >= ’’ then /* no windowing */
...
if start_date >= ’851003’ then /* windowed */
...
Comparisons involving the DATE attribute and a non-literal
In comparisons where one comparand has the DATE attribute and the other is not a date and not a literal, the compiler issues an E-level message. The non-date value is treated as if it had the same date pattern as the other comparand and as if it had the same window.
dcl start_date char(6) date; dcl non_date char (6); if start_date >= non_date then /* windowed */
...
Implicit DATE assignments
The DATE attribute can also cause implicit conversions to occur in assignments of two variables declared with date patterns.
v
If the source and target have the same DATE and data attributes, then the assignment proceeds as if neither had the DATE attribute.
v
If the source and target have differing DATE attributes, then the compiler generates code to convert the source date before making the assignment.
v In assignments where the source has the DATE attribute but the target does not, the compiler issues an E-level message and ignores the DATE attribute.
v
In assignments where the target has the DATE attribute but the source does not
(and the source IS NOT a literal), the compiler issues an E-level message and ignores the DATE attribute.
v
In assignments where the target has the DATE attribute but the source does not
(and the source IS a literal), the compiler issues a W-level message and ignores the DATE attribute.
dcl start_date char(6) date; start_date = ’’;
...
v If the source holds a four-digit year and the target holds a two-digit year, the source can hold a year that is not in the target window. In this case, the ERROR condition is raised.
dcl x char(6) date; dcl y char(8) date(’YYYYMMDD’); y = ’20600101’; x = y; /* raises error if window is <= 1960 */ v
The DATE attribute is ignored in:
– The debugger
– Assignments performed in record I/O statements
Chapter 26. Using PL/I MLE in your applications
487
Implicit DATE assignments
– Assignments and conversions performed in stream I/O statements (such as
GET DATA).
Even if you do not choose a windowing solution, you might have some code that needs to manipulate both two- and four-digit years. You can use multiple date patterns to help you in these situations: dcl old_date char(6) date(’YYMMDD’); dcl new_date char(8) date(’YYYYMMDD’); new_date = old_date;
488
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Part 7. Appendixes
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
489
490
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Notices
Programming interface information .
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation
J74/G4
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
491
Programming interface information
This publication documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the customer to write programs to obtain the services of IBM PL/I for Windows.
Macros for customer use
IBM PL/I for Windows provides no macros that allow a customer installation to write programs that use the services of IBM PL/I for Windows.
Attention:
Do not use as programming interfaces any IBM PL/I for Windows macros.
Trademarks
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA 95141-1099
U.S.A.
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement between us.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations might not appear.
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
AIX
CICS
CICS/ESA
DFSMS/MVS
DFSORT
IBM
IMS
IMS/ESA
Language Environment
OS/2
OS/390
Proprinter
Rational
VisualAge
WebSphere
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
492
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and/or other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Notices
493
494
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Bibliography
Enterprise PL/I publications .
PL/I publications
PL/I for AIX
Programming Guide
, SC14-7319
Language Reference
, SC14-7320
Messages and Codes
, GC14-7321
Installation Guide
, GC14-7322
Enterprise PL/I publications
Programming Guide
, GI11-9145
Language Reference
, SC14-7285
Messages and Codes
, GC14-7286
Diagnosis Guide
, GC27-1459
Compiler and Run-Time Migration Guide
, GC14-7284
Related publications
DB2 UDB for OS/390 and z/OS
Administration Guide
, SC26-9931
Command Reference
, SC26-9934
SQL Reference
, SC26-9944
Application Programming and SQL Guide
, SC26-9933
Messages and Codes
, GC26-9940
TXSeries for Multiplatforms
Encina Administration Guide Volume 2: Server Administration
, SC09-4474
Encina SFS Programming Guide
, SC09-4483
See also the Information Center: publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/txformp/ v7r1/index.jsp
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
495
496
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines terms for all platforms and releases of PL/I. It might contain terms that this manual does not use. If you do not find the terms for which you are looking, see the index in this manual or
IBM Dictionary of Computing
,
SC20-1699.
A access
To reference or retrieve data.
action specification
In an ON statement, the ON-unit or the single keyword SYSTEM, either of which specifies the action to be taken whenever the appropriate condition is raised.
activate (a block)
To initiate the execution of a block. A procedure block is activated when it is invoked. A begin-block is activated when it is encountered in the normal flow of control, including a branch. A package cannot be activated.
activate (a preprocessor variable or preprocessor entry point)
To make a macro facility identifier eligible for replacement in subsequent source code. The %ACTIVATE statement activates preprocessor variables or preprocessor entry points.
active
The state of a block after activation and before termination. The state in which a preprocessor variable or preprocessor entry name is said to be when its value can replace the corresponding identifier in source program text. The state in which an event variable is said to be during the time it is associated with an asynchronous operation. The state in which a task variable is said to be when its associated task is attached. The state in which a task is said to be before it has been terminated.
actual origin (AO)
The location of the first item in the array or structure.
additive attribute
A file description attribute for which there are no defaults, and which, if required, must be stated explicitly or implied by
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012 another explicitly stated attribute.
Contrast with
alternative attribute
.
adjustable extent
The bound (of an array), the length (of a string), or the size (of an area) that might be different for different generations of the associated variable. Adjustable extents are specified as expressions or asterisks
(or by REFER options for based variables), which are evaluated separately for each generation. They cannot be used for static variables.
aggregate
See
data aggregate
.
aggregate expression
An array, structure, or union expression.
aggregate type
For any item of data, the specification whether it is structure, union, or array.
allocated variable
A variable with which main storage is associated and not freed.
allocation
The reservation of main storage for a variable. A generation of an allocated variable. The association of a PL/I file with a system data set, device, or file.
alignment
The storing of data items in relation to certain machine-dependent boundaries
(for example, a fullword or halfword boundary).
alphabetic character
Any of the characters A through Z of the
English alphabet and the alphabetic extenders #, $, and @ (which can have a different graphic representation in different countries).
alphameric character
An alphabetic character or a digit.
alternative attribute
A file description attribute that is chosen from a group of attributes. If none is specified, a default is assumed. Contrast with
additive attribute
.
497
ambiguous reference
A reference that is not sufficiently qualified to identify one and only one name known at the point of reference.
area
A portion of storage within which based variables can be allocated.
argument
An expression in an argument list as part of an invocation of a subroutine or function.
argument list
A parenthesized list of zero or more arguments, separated by commas, following an entry name constant, an entry name variable, a generic name, or a built-in function name. The list becomes the parameter list of the entry point.
arithmetic comparison
A comparison of numeric values. See also
bit comparison, character comparison
.
arithmetic constant
A fixed-point constant or a floating-point constant. Although most arithmetic constants can be signed, the sign is not part of the constant.
arithmetic conversion
The transformation of a value from one arithmetic representation to another.
arithmetic data
Data that has the characteristics of base, scale, mode, and precision. Coded arithmetic data and pictured numeric character data are included.
arithmetic operators
Either of the prefix operators + and -, or any of the following infix operators: + - *
/ **
array
A named, ordered collection of one or more data elements with identical attributes, grouped into one or more dimensions.
array expression
An expression whose evaluation yields an array of values.
array of structures
An ordered collection of identical structures specified by giving the dimension attribute to a structure name.
array variable
A variable that represents an aggregate of
498
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide data items that must have identical attributes. Contrast with
structure variable
.
ASCII
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange.
assignment
The process of giving a value to a variable.
asynchronous operation
The overlap of an input/output operation with the execution of statements. The concurrent execution of procedures using multiple flows of control for different tasks.
attachment of a task
The invocation of a procedure and the establishment of a separate flow of control to execute the invoked procedure
(and procedures it invokes) asynchronously, with execution of the invoking procedure.
attention
An occurrence, external to a task, that could cause a task to be interrupted.
attribute
A descriptive property associated with a name to describe a characteristic represented. A descriptive property used to describe a characteristic of the result of evaluation of an expression.
automatic storage allocation
The allocation of storage for automatic variables.
automatic variable
A variable whose storage is allocated automatically at the activation of a block and released automatically at the termination of that block.
B base
The number system in which an arithmetic value is represented.
base element
A member of a structure or a union that is itself not another structure or union.
base item
The automatic, controlled, or static variable or the parameter upon which a defined variable is defined.
based reference
A reference that has the based storage class.
based storage allocation
The allocation of storage for based variables.
based variable
A variable whose storage address is provided by a locator. Multiple generations of the same variable are accessible. It does not identify a fixed location in storage.
begin-block
A collection of statements delimited by
BEGIN and END statements, forming a name scope. A begin-block is activated either by the raising of a condition (if the begin-block is the action specification for an ON-unit) or through the normal flow of control, including any branch resulting from a GOTO statement.
binary
A number system whose only numerals are 0 and 1.
binary digit
See
bit
.
binary fixed-point value
An integer consisting of binary digits and having an optional binary point and optional sign. Contrast with
decimal fixed-point value
.
binary floating-point value
An approximation of a real number in the form of a significand, which can be considered as a binary fraction, and an exponent, which can be considered as an integer exponent to the base of 2. Contrast with
decimal floating-point value
.
bit
A 0 or a 1. The smallest amount of space of computer storage.
bit comparison
A left-to-right, bit-by-bit comparison of binary digits. See also
arithmetic comparison, character comparison
.
bit string constant
A series of binary digits enclosed in and followed immediately by the suffix B.
Contrast with
character constant
. A series of hexadecimal digits enclosed in single quotes and followed by the suffix B4.
bit string
A string composed of zero or more bits.
bit string operators
The logical operators not and exclusive-or
(
¬
), and (&), and or (|).
bit value
A value that represents a bit type.
block
A sequence of statements, processed as a unit, that specifies the scope of names and the allocation of storage for names declared within it. A block can be a package, procedure, or a begin-block.
bounds
The upper and lower limits of an array dimension.
break character
The underscore symbol ( _ ). It can be used to improve the readability of identifiers. For instance, a variable could be called OLD_INVENTORY_TOTAL instead of OLDINVENTORYTOTAL.
built-in function
A predefined function supplied by the language, such as SQRT (square root).
built-in function reference
A built-in function name, which has an optional argument list.
built-in name
The entry name of a built-in subroutine.
built-in subroutine
Subroutine that has an entry name that is defined at compile-time and is invoked by a CALL statement.
buffer
Intermediate storage, used in input/output operations, into which a record is read during input and from which a record is written during output.
C call
To invoke a subroutine by using the
CALL statement or CALL option.
character comparison
A left-to-right, character-by-character comparison according to the collating sequence. See also
arithmetic comparison, bit comparison
.
Glossary
499
character string constant
A sequence of characters enclosed in single quotes; for example, 'Shakespeare''s
'Hamlet:''.
character set
A defined collection of characters. See
language character set
and
data character set
.
See also
ASCII
and
EBCDIC
.
character string picture data
Picture data that has only a character value. This type of picture data must have at least one A or X picture specification character. Contrast with
numeric picture data
.
closing (of a file)
The dissociation of a file from a data set or device.
coded arithmetic data
Data items that represent numeric values and are characterized by their base
(decimal or binary), scale (fixed-point or floating-point), and precision (the number of digits each can have). This data is stored in a form that is acceptable, without conversion, for arithmetic calculations.
combined nesting depth
The deepest level of nesting, determined by counting the levels of
PROCEDURE/BEGIN/ON, DO, SELECT, and IF...THEN...ELSE nestings in the program.
comment
A string of zero or more characters used for documentation that are delimited by
/* and */.
commercial character
v
CR (credit) picture specification character v
DB (debit) picture specification character
comparison operator
An operator that can be used in an arithmetic, string locator, or logical relation to indicate the comparison to be done between the terms in the relation.
The comparison operators are:
= (equal to)
> (greater than)
< (less than)
500
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
>= (greater than or equal to)
<= (less than or equal to)
¬
= (not equal to)
¬
> (not greater than)
¬
< (not less than)
compile time
In general, the time during which a source program is translated into an object module. In PL/I, it is the time during which a source program can be altered, if desired, and then translated into an object program.
compiler options
Keywords that are specified to control certain aspects of a compilation, such as: the nature of the object module generated, the types of printed output produced, and so forth.
complex data
Arithmetic data, each item of which consists of a real part and an imaginary part.
composite operator
An operator that consists of more than one special character, such as <=, **, and
/*.
compound statement
A statement that contains other statements. In PL/I, IF, ON, OTHERWISE, and WHEN are the only compound statements. See
statement body
.
concatenation
The operation that joins two strings in the order specified, forming one string whose length is equal to the sum of the lengths of the two original strings. It is specified by the operator ||.
condition
An exceptional situation, either an error
(such as an overflow), or an expected situation (such as the end of an input file). When a condition is raised
(detected), the action established for it is processed. See also
established action
and
implicit action
.
condition name
Name of a PL/I-defined or programmer-defined condition.
condition prefix
A parenthesized list of one or more
condition names prefixed to a statement.
It specifies whether the named conditions are to be enabled or disabled.
connected aggregate
An array or structure whose elements occupy contiguous storage without any intervening data items. Contrast with
nonconnected aggregate
.
connected reference
A reference to connected storage. It must be apparent, prior to execution of the program, that the storage is connected.
connected storage
Main storage of an uninterrupted linear sequence of items that can be referred to by a single name.
constant
An arithmetic or string data item that does not have a name and whose value cannot change. An identifier declared with the VALUE attribute. An identifier declared with the FILE or the ENTRY attribute but without the VARIABLE attribute.
constant reference
A value reference which has a constant as its object
contained block, declaration, or source text
All blocks, procedures, statements, declarations, or source text inside a begin, procedure, or a package block. The entire package, procedure, and the BEGIN statement and its corresponding END statements are not contained in the block.
containing block
The package, procedure, or begin-block that contains the declaration, statement, procedure, or other source text in question.
contextual declaration
The appearance of an identifier that has not been explicitly declared in a
DECLARE statement, but whose context of use allows the association of specific attributes with the identifier.
control character
A character in a character set whose occurrence in a particular context specifies a control function. One example is the end-of-file (EOF) marker.
control format item
A specification used in edit-directed transmission to specify positioning of a data item within the stream or printed page.
control variable
A variable that is used to control the iterative execution of a DO statement.
controlled parameter
A parameter for which the
CONTROLLED attribute is specified in a
DECLARE statement. It can be associated only with arguments that have the
CONTROLLED attribute.
controlled storage allocation
The allocation of storage for controlled variables.
controlled variable
A variable whose allocation and release are controlled by the ALLOCATE and
FREE statements, with access to the current generation only.
control sections
Grouped machine instructions in an object module.
conversion
The transformation of a value from one representation to another to conform to a given set of attributes. For example, converting a character string to an arithmetic value such as FIXED BINARY
(15,0).
cross section of an array
The elements represented by the extent of at least one dimension of an array. An asterisk in the place of a subscript in an array reference indicates the entire extent of that dimension.
current generation
The generation of an automatic or controlled variable that is currently available by referring to the name of the variable.
D data
Representation of information or of value in a form suitable for processing.
data aggregate
A data item that is a collection of other data items.
Glossary
501
data attribute
A keyword that specifies the type of data that the data item represents, such as
FIXED BINARY.
data-directed transmission
The type of stream-oriented transmission in which data is transmitted. It resembles an assignment statement and is of the form name = constant .
data item
A single named unit of data.
data list
In stream-oriented transmission, a parenthesized list of the data items used in GET and PUT statements. Contrast with
format list
.
data set
A collection of data external to the program that can be accessed by reference to a single file name. A device that can be referenced.
data specification
The portion of a stream-oriented transmission statement that specifies the mode of transmission (DATA, LIST, or
EDIT) and includes the data list(s) and, for edit-directed mode, the format list(s).
data stream
Data being transferred from or to a data set by stream-oriented transmission, as a continuous stream of data elements in character form.
data transmission
The transfer of data from a data set to the program or vice versa.
data type
A set of data attributes.
DBCS
In the character set, each character is represented by two consecutive bytes.
deactivated
The state in which an identifier is said to be when its value cannot replace a preprocessor identifier in source program text. Contrast with
active
.
debugging
Process of removing bugs from a program.
decimal
The number system whose numerals are 0 through 9.
502
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
decimal digit picture character
The picture specification character 9.
decimal fixed-point constant
A constant consisting of one or more decimal digits with an optional decimal point.
decimal fixed-point value
A rational number consisting of a sequence of decimal digits with an assumed position of the decimal point.
Contrast with
binary fixed-point value
.
decimal floating-point constant
A value made up of a significand that consists of a decimal fixed-point constant, and an exponent that consists of the letter
E followed by an optionally signed integer constant not exceeding three digits.
decimal floating-point value
An approximation of a real number, in the form of a significand, which can be considered as a decimal fraction, and an exponent, which can be considered as an integer exponent to the base 10. Contrast with
binary floating-point value
.
decimal picture data
See
numeric picture data.
declaration
The establishment of an identifier as a name and the specification of a set of attributes (partial or complete) for it. A source of attributes of a particular name.
default
Describes a value, attribute, or option that is assumed when none has been specified.
defined variable
A variable that is associated with some or all of the storage of the designated base variable.
delimit
To enclose one or more items or statements with preceding and following characters or keywords.
delimiter
All comments and the following characters: percent, parentheses, comma, period, semicolon, colon, assignment symbol, blank, pointer, asterisk, and single quote. They define the limits of identifiers, constants, picture specifications, iSUBs, and keywords.
descriptor
A control block that holds information about a variable, such as area size, array bounds, or string length.
digit
One of the characters 0 through 9.
dimension attribute
An attribute that specifies the number of dimensions of an array and indicates the bounds of each dimension.
disabled
The state of a condition in which no interrupt occurs and no established action will take place.
do-group
A sequence of statements delimited by a
DO statement and ended by its corresponding END statement, used for control purposes. Contrast with
block
.
do-loop
See
iterative do-group
.
dummy argument
Temporary storage that is created automatically to hold the value of an argument that cannot be passed by reference.
dump
Printout of all or part of the storage used by a program as well as other program information, such as a trace of an error's origin.
E
EBCDIC
(Extended Binary-Coded Decimal
Interchange Code). A coded character set consisting of 8-bit coded characters.
edit-directed transmission
The type of stream-oriented transmission in which data appears as a continuous stream of characters and for which a format list is required to specify the editing desired for the associated data list.
element
A single item of data as opposed to a collection of data items such as an array; a scalar item.
element expression
An expression whose evaluation yields an element value.
element variable
A variable that represents an element; a scalar variable.
elementary name
See
base element
.
enabled
The state of a condition in which the condition can cause an interrupt and then invocation of the appropriate established
ON-unit.
end-of-step message
message that follows the listng of the job control statements and job scheduler messages and contains return code indicating success or failure for each step.
entry constant
The label prefix of a PROCEDURE statement (an entry name). The declaration of a name with the ENTRY attribute but without the VARIABLE attribute.
entry data
A data item that represents an entry point to a procedure.
entry expression
An expression whose evaluation yields an entry name.
entry name
An identifier that is explicitly or contextually declared to have the ENTRY attribute (unless the VARIABLE attribute is given) or An identifier that has the value of an entry variable with the
ENTRY attribute implied.
entry point
A point in a procedure at which it can be invoked.
primary entry point
and
secondary entry point
.
entry reference
An entry constant, an entry variable reference, or a function reference that returns an entry value.
entry variable
A variable to which an entry value can be assigned. It must have both the ENTRY and VARIABLE attributes.
entry value
The entry point represented by an entry constant or variable; the value includes
Glossary
503
the environment of the activation that is associated with the entry constant.
environment (of an activation)
Information associated with and used in the invoked block regarding data declared in containing blocks.
environment (of a label constant)
Identity of the particular activation of a block to which a reference to a statement-label constant applies. This information is determined at the time a statement-label constant is passed as an argument or is assigned to a statement-label variable, and it is passed or assigned along with the constant.
established action
The action taken when a condition is raised. See also
implicit action
and
ON-statement action
.
epilogue
Those processes that occur automatically at the termination of a block or task.
evaluation
The reduction of an expression to a single value, an array of values, or a structured set of values.
event
An activity in a program whose status and completion can be determined from an associated event variable.
event variable
A variable with the EVENT attribute that can be associated with an event. Its value indicates whether the action has been completed and the status of the completion.
explicit declaration
The appearance of an identifier (a name) in a DECLARE statement, as a label prefix, or in a parameter list. Contrast with
implicit declaration
.
exponent characters
The following picture specification characters:
1.
K and E, which are used in floating-point picture specifications to indicate the beginning of the exponent field.
2.
F, the scaling factor character, specified with an integer constant that indicates the number of decimal positions the decimal point is to be moved from its
504
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide assumed position to the right (if the constant is positive) or to the left (if the constant is negative).
expression
A notation, within a program, that represents a value, an array of values, or a structured set of values. A constant or a reference appearing alone, or a combination of constants and/or references with operators.
extended alphabet
The uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters A through Z, $, @ and #, or those specified in the NAMES compiler option.
extent
The range indicated by the bounds of an array dimension, by the length of a string, or by the size of an area. The size of the target area if this area were to be assigned to a target area.
external name
A name (with the EXTERNAL attribute) whose scope is not necessarily confined only to one block and its contained blocks.
external procedure
A procedure that is not contained in any other procedure. A level-2 procedure contained in a package that is also exported.
external symbol
Name that can be referred to in a control section other than the one in which it is defined.
External Symbol Dictionary (ESD)
Table containing all the external symbols that appear in the object module.
extralingual character
Characters (such as $, @, and #) that are not classified as alphanumeric or special.
This group includes characters that are determined with the NAMES compiler option.
F factoring
The application of one or more attributes to a parenthesized list of names in a
DECLARE statement, eliminating the repetition of identical attributes for multiple names.
field (in the data stream)
That portion of the data stream whose width, in number of characters, is defined by a single data or spacing format item.
field (of a picture specification)
Any character-string picture specification or that portion (or all) of a numeric character picture specification that describes a fixed-point number.
file
A named representation, within a program, of a data set or data sets. A file is associated with the data set(s) for each opening.
file constant
A name declared with the FILE attribute but not the VARIABLE attribute.
file description attributes
Keywords that describe the individual characteristics of each file constant. See also
alternative attribute
and
additive attribute
.
file expression
An expression whose evaluation yields a value of the type file.
file name
A name declared for a file.
file variable
A variable to which file constants can be assigned. It has the attributes FILE and
VARIABLE and cannot have any of the file description attributes.
fixed-point constant
See
arithmetic constant
.
fix-up
A solution, performed by the compiler after detecting an error during compilation, that allows the compiled program to run.
floating-point constant
See
arithmetic constant
.
flow of control
Sequence of execution.
format
A specification used in edit-directed data transmission to describe the representation of a data item in the stream (data format item) or the specific positioning of a data item within the stream (control format item).
format constant
The label prefix on a FORMAT statement.
format data
A variable with the FORMAT attribute.
format label
The label prefix on a FORMAT statement.
format list
In stream-oriented transmission, a list specifying the format of the data item on the external medium. Contrast with
data list
.
fully qualified name
A name that includes all the names in the hierarchical sequence above the member to which the name refers, as well as the name of the member itself.
function (procedure)
A procedure that has a RETURNS option in the PROCEDURE statement. A name declared with the RETURNS attribute. It is invoked by the appearance of one of its entry names in a function reference and it returns a scalar value to the point of reference. Contrast with
subroutine
.
function reference
An entry constant or an entry variable, either of which must represent a function, followed by a possibly empty argument list. Contrast with
subroutine call
.
G generation (of a variable)
The allocation of a static variable, a particular allocation of a controlled or automatic variable, or the storage indicated by a particular locator qualification of a based variable or by a defined variable or parameter.
generic descriptor
A descriptor used in a GENERIC attribute.
generic key
A character string that identifies a class of keys. All keys that begin with the string are members of that class. For example, the recorded keys 'ABCD', 'ABCE', and
'ABDF', are all members of the classes identified by the generic keys 'A' and
'AB', and the first two are also members of the class 'ABC'; and the three recorded
Glossary
505
keys can be considered to be unique members of the classes 'ABCD', 'ABCE',
'ABDF', respectively.
generic name
The name of a family of entry names. A reference to the generic name is replaced by the entry name whose parameter descriptors match the attributes of the arguments in the argument list at the point of invocation.
group
A collection of statements contained within larger program units. A group is either a do-group or a select-group and it can be used wherever a single statement can appear, except as an on-unit.
H hex
See
hexadecimal digit
.
hexadecimal
Pertaining to a numbering system with a base of sixteen; valid numbers use the digits 0 through 9 and the characters A through F, where A represents 10 and F represents 15.
hexadecimal digit
One of the digits 0 through 9 and A through F. A through F represent the decimal values 10 through 15, respectively.
I identifier
A string of characters, not contained in a comment or constant, and preceded and followed by a delimiter. The first character of the identifier must be one of the 26 alphabetic characters and extralingual characters, if any. The other characters, if any, can additionally include extended alphabetic, digit, or the break character.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers.
implicit
The action taken in the absence of an explicit specification.
implicit action
The action taken when an enabled condition is raised and no ON-unit is currently established for the condition.
Contrast with
ON-statement action
.
506
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
implicit declaration
A name not explicitly declared in a
DECLARE statement or contextually declared.
implicit opening
The opening of a file as the result of an input or output statement other than the
OPEN statement.
infix operator
An operator that appears between two operands.
inherited dimensions
For a structure, union, or element, those dimensions that are derived from the containing structures. If the name is an element that is not an array, the dimensions consist entirely of its inherited dimensions. If the name is an element that is an array, its dimensions consist of its inherited dimensions plus its explicitly declared dimensions. A structure with one or more inherited dimensions is called a nonconnected aggregate. Contrast with
connected aggregate
.
input/output
The transfer of data between auxiliary medium and main storage.
insertion point character
A picture specification character that is, on assignment of the associated data to a character string, inserted in the indicated position. When used in a P-format item for input, the insertion character is used for checking purposes.
integer
An optionally signed sequence of digits or a sequence of bits without a decimal or binary point. An optionally signed whole number, commonly described as FIXED
BINARY (p,0) or FIXED DECIMAL (p,0).
integral boundary
A byte multiple address of any 8-bit unit on which data can be aligned. It usually is a halfword, fullword, or doubleword
(2-, 4-, or 8-byte multiple respectively) boundary.
interleaved array
An array that refers to nonconnected storage.
interleaved subscripts
Subscripts that exist in levels other than the lowest level of a subscripted qualified reference.
internal block
A block that is contained in another block.
internal name
A name that is known only within the block in which it is declared, and possibly within any contained blocks.
internal procedure
A procedure that is contained in another block. Contrast with
external procedure
.
interrupt
The redirection of the program's flow of control as the result of raising a condition or attention.
invocation
The activation of a procedure.
invoke
To activate a procedure.
invoked procedure
A procedure that has been activated.
invoking block
A block that activates a procedure.
iteration factor
In an INITIAL attribute specification, an expression that specifies the number of consecutive elements of an array that are to be initialized with the given value. In a format list, an expression that specifies the number of times a given format item or list of format items is to be used in succession.
iterative do-group
A do-group whose DO statement specifies a control variable and/or a WHILE or
UNTIL option.
K key
Data that identifies a record within a direct-access data set. See
source key
and
recorded key
.
keyword
An identifier that has a specific meaning in PL/I when used in a defined context.
keyword statement
A simple statement that begins with a keyword, indicating the function of the statement.
known (applied to a name)
Recognized with its declared meaning. A name is known throughout its scope.
L label
A name prefixed to a statement. A name on a PROCEDURE statement is called an entry constant; a name on a FORMAT statement is called a format constant; a name on other kinds of statements is called a label constant. A data item that has the LABEL attribute.
label constant
A name written as the label prefix of a statement (other than PROCEDURE,
ENTRY, FORMAT, or PACKAGE) so that, during execution, program control can be transferred to that statement through a reference to its label prefix.
label data
A label constant or the value of a label variable.
label prefix
A label prefixed to a statement.
label variable
A variable declared with the LABEL attribute. Its value is a label constant in the program.
leading zeroes
Zeros that have no significance in an arithmetic value. All zeros to the left of the first nonzero in a number.
level number
A number that precedes a name in a
DECLARE statement and specifies its relative position in the hierarchy of structure names.
level-one variable
A major structure or union name. Any unsubscripted variable not contained within a structure or union.
lexically
Relating to the left-to-right order of units.
library
An MVS partitioned data set or a CMS
Glossary
507
MACLIB that can be used to store other data sets called members.
list-directed
The type of stream-oriented transmission in which data in the stream appears as constants separated by blanks or commas and for which formatting is provided automatically.
locator
A control block that holds the address of a variable or its descriptor.
locator/descriptor
A locator followed by a descriptor. The locator holds the address of the variable, not the address of the descriptor.
locator qualification
In a reference to a based variable, either a locator variable or function reference connected by an arrow to the left of a based variable to specify the generation of the based variable to which the reference refers. It might be an implicit reference.
locator value
A value that identifies or can be used to identify the storage address.
locator variable
A variable whose value identifies the location in main storage of a variable or a buffer. It has the POINTER or OFFSET attribute.
locked record
A record in an EXCLUSIVE DIRECT
UPDATE file that has been made available to one task only and cannot be accessed by other tasks until the task using it relinquishes it.
logical level (of a structure or union member)
The depth indicated by a level number when all level numbers are in direct sequence (when the increment between successive level numbers is one).
logical operators
The bit-string operators not and exclusive-or (
¬
), and (&), and or (|).
loop
A sequence of instructions that is executed iteratively.
lower bound
The lower limit of an array dimension.
M
508
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
main procedure
An external procedure whose
PROCEDURE statement has the
OPTIONS (MAIN) attribute. This procedure is invoked automatically as the first step in the execution of a program.
major structure
A structure whose name is declared with level number 1.
member
A structure, union, or element name in a structure or union. Data sets in a library.
minor structure
A structure that is contained within another structure or union. The name of a minor structure is declared with a level number greater than one and greater than its parent structure or union.
mode (of arithmetic data)
An attribute of arithmetic data. It is either
real
or
complex
.
multiple declaration
Two or more declarations of the same identifier internal to the same block without different qualifications. Two or more external declarations of the same identifier.
multiprocessing
The use of a computing system with two or more processing units to execute two or more programs simultaneously.
multiprogramming
The use of a computing system to execute more than one program concurrently, using a single processing unit.
multitasking
A facility that allows a program to execute more than one PL/I procedure simultaneously.
N name
Any identifier that the user gives to a variable or to a constant. An identifier appearing in a context where it is not a keyword. Sometimes called a user-defined name.
nesting
The occurrence of: v
A block within another block v
A group within another group
v
An IF statement in a THEN clause or in an ELSE clause v
A function reference as an argument of a function reference v
A remote format item in the format list of a FORMAT statement v
A parameter descriptor list in another parameter descriptor list v An attribute specification within a parenthesized name list for which one or more attributes are being factored
nonconnected storage
Storage occupied by nonconnected data items. For example, interleaved arrays and structures with inherited dimensions are in nonconnected storage.
null locator value
A special locator value that cannot identify any location in internal storage. It gives a positive indication that a locator variable does not currently identify any generation of data.
null statement
A statement that contains only the semicolon symbol (;). It indicates that no action is to be taken.
null string
A character, graphic, or bit string with a length of zero.
numeric-character data
See
decimal picture data
.
numeric picture data
Picture data that has an arithmetic value as well as a character value. This type of picture data cannot contain the characters
'A' or 'X.'
O object
A collection of data referred to by a single name.
offset variable
A locator variable with the OFFSET attribute, whose value identifies a location in storage relative to the beginning of an area.
ON-condition
An occurrence, within a PL/I program, that could cause a program interrupt. It can be the detection of an unexpected error or of an occurrence that is expected, but at an unpredictable time.
ON-statement action
The action explicitly established for a condition that is executed when the condition is raised. When the
ON-statement is encountered in the flow of control for the program, it executes, establishing the action for the condition.
The action executes when the condition is raised if the ON-unit is still established or a RESIGNAL statement reestablishes it.
Contrast with
implicit action
.
ON-unit
The specified action to be executed when the appropriate condition is raised.
opening (of a file)
The association of a file with a data set.
operand
The value of an identifier, constant, or an expression to which an operator is applied, possibly in conjunction with another operand.
operational expression
An expression that consists of one or more operators.
operator
A symbol specifying an operation to be performed.
option
A specification in a statement that can be used to influence the execution or interpretation of the statement.
P package constant
The label prefix on a PACKAGE statement.
packed decimal
The internal representation of a fixed-point decimal data item.
padding
One or more characters, graphics, or bits concatenated to the right of a string to extend the string to a required length.
One or more bytes or bits inserted in a structure or union so that the following element within the structure or union is aligned on the appropriate integral boundary.
Glossary
509
parameter
A name in the parameter list following the PROCEDURE statement, specifying an argument that will be passed when the procedure is invoked.
parameter descriptor
The set of attributes specified for a parameter in an ENTRY attribute specification.
parameter descriptor list
The list of all parameter descriptors in an
ENTRY attribute specification.
parameter list
A parenthesized list of one or more parameters, separated by commas and following either the keyword
PROCEDURE in a procedure statement or the keyword ENTRY in an ENTRY statement. The list corresponds to a list of arguments passed at invocation.
partially qualified name
A qualified name that is incomplete. It includes one or more, but not all, of the names in the hierarchical sequence above the structure or union member to which the name refers, as well as the name of the member itself.
picture data
Numeric data, character data, or a mix of both types, represented in character form.
picture specification
A data item that is described using the picture characters in a declaration with the PICTURE attribute or in a P-format item.
picture specification character
Any of the characters that can be used in a picture specification.
PL/I character set
A set of characters that has been defined to represent program elements in PL/I.
PL/I prompter
Command processor program for the PLI command that checks the operands and allocates the data sets required by the compiler.
point of invocation
The point in the invoking block at which the reference to the invoked procedure appears.
pointer
A type of variable that identifies a location in storage.
pointer value
A value that identifies the pointer type.
pointer variable
A locator variable with the POINTER attribute that contains a pointer value.
precision
The number of digits or bits contained in a fixed-point data item, or the minimum number of significant digits (excluding the exponent) maintained for a floating-point data item.
prefix
A label or a parenthesized list of one or more condition names included at the beginning of a statement.
prefix operator
An operator that precedes an operand and applies only to that operand. The prefix operators are plus (+), minus (-), and not (
¬
).
preprocessor
A program that examines the source program before the compilation takes place.
preprocessor statement
A special statement appearing in the source program that specifies the actions to be performed by the preprocessor. It is executed as it is encountered by the preprocessor.
primary entry point
The entry point identified by any of the names in the label list of the
PROCEDURE statement.
priority
A value associated with a task, that specifies the precedence of the task relative to other tasks.
problem data
Coded arithmetic, bit, character, graphic, and picture data.
problem-state program
A program that operates in the problem state of the operating system. It does not contain input/output instructions or other privileged instructions.
procedure
A collection of statements, delimited by
510
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
PROCEDURE and END statements. A procedure is a program or a part of a program, delimits the scope of names, and is activated by a reference to the procedure or one of its entry names. See also
external procedure
and
internal procedure
.
procedure reference
An entry constant or variable. It can be followed by an argument list. It can appear in a CALL statement or the CALL option, or as a function reference.
program
A set of one or more external procedures or packages. One of the external procedures must have the
OPTIONS(MAIN) specification in its procedure statement.
program control data
Area, locator, label, format, entry, and file data that is used to control the processing of a PL/I program.
prologue
The processes that occur automatically on block activation.
pseudovariable
Any of the built-in function names that can be used to specify a target variable. It is usually on the left-hand side of an assignment statement.
Q qualified name
A hierarchical sequence of names of structure or union members, connected by periods, used to identify a name within a structure. Any of the names can be subscripted.
R range (of a default specification)
A set of identifiers and/or parameter descriptors to which the attributes in a
DEFAULT statement apply.
record
The logical unit of transmission in a record-oriented input or output operation.
A collection of one or more related data items. The items usually have different data attributes and usually are described by a structure or union declaration.
recorded key
A character string identifying a record in a direct-access data set where the character string itself is also recorded as part of the data.
record-oriented data transmission
The transmission of data in the form of separate records. Contrast with
stream data transmission
.
recursive procedure
A procedure that can be called from within itself or from within another active procedure.
reentrant procedure
A procedure that can be activated by multiple tasks, threads, or processes simultaneously without causing any interference between these tasks, threads, and processes.
REFER expression
The expression preceding the keyword
REFER, which is used as the bound, length, or size when the based variable containing a REFER option is allocated, either by an ALLOCATE or LOCATE statement.
REFER object
The variable in a REFER option that holds or will hold the current bound, length, or size for the member. The REFER object must be a member of the same structure or union. It must not be locator-qualified or subscripted, and it must precede the member with the REFER option.
reference
The appearance of a name, except in a context that causes explicit declaration.
relative virtual origin (RVO)
The actual origin of an array minus the virtual origin of an array.
remote format item
The letter R followed by the label
(enclosed in parentheses) of a FORMAT statement. The format statement is used by edit-directed data transmission statements to control the format of data being transmitted.
repetition factor
A parenthesized unsigned integer constant that specifies:
Glossary
511
1.
The number of times the string constant that follows is to be repeated.
2.
The number of times the picture character that follows is to be repeated.
repetitive specification
An element of a data list that specifies controlled iteration to transmit one or more data items, generally used in conjunction with arrays.
restricted expression
An expression that can be evaluated by the compiler during compilation, resulting in a constant. Operands of such an expression are constants, named constants, and restricted expressions.
returned value
The value returned by a function procedure.
RETURNS descriptor
A descriptor used in a RETURNS attribute, and in the RETURNS option of the PROCEDURE and ENTRY statements.
S scalar variable
A variable that is not a structure, union, or array.
scale
A system of mathematical notation whose representation of an arithmetic value is either fixed-point or floating-point.
scale factor
A specification of the number of fractional digits in a fixed-point number.
scaling factor
See
scale factor
.
scope (of a condition prefix)
The portion of a program throughout which a particular condition prefix applies.
scope (of a declaration or name)
The portion of a program throughout which a particular name is known.
secondary entry point
An entry point identified by any of the names in the label list of an entry statement.
select-group
A sequence of statements delimited by
SELECT and END statements.
512
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
selection clause
A WHEN or OTHERWISE clause of a select-group.
self-defining data
An aggregate that contains data items whose bounds, lengths, and sizes are determined at program execution time and are stored in a member of the aggregate.
separator
See
delimiter
.
shift
Change of data in storage to the left or to the right of original position.
shift-in
Symbol used to signal the compiler at the end of a double-byte string.
shift-out
Symbol used to signal the compiler at the beginning of a double-byte string.
sign and currency symbol characters
The picture specification characters. S, +,
-, and $ (or other national currency symbols enclosed in < and >).
simple parameter
A parameter for which no storage class attribute is specified. It can represent an argument of any storage class, but only the current generation of a controlled argument.
simple statement
A statement other than IF, ON, WHEN, and OTHERWISE.
source
Data item to be converted for problem data.
source key
A key referred to in a record-oriented transmission statement that identifies a particular record within a direct-access data set.
source program
A program that serves as input to the source program processors and the compiler.
source variable
A variable whose value participates in some other operation, but is not modified by the operation. Contrast with
target variable
.
spill file
Data set named SYSUT1 that is used as a temporary workfile.
standard default
The alternative attribute or option assumed when none has been specified and there is no applicable DEFAULT statement.
standard file
A file assumed by PL/I in the absence of a FILE or STRING option in a GET or
PUT statement. SYSIN is the standard input file and SYSPRINT is the standard output file.
standard system action
Action specified by the language to be taken for an enabled condition in the absence of an ON-unit for that condition.
statement
A PL/I statement, composed of keywords, delimiters, identifiers, operators, and constants, and terminated by a semicolon
(;). Optionally, it can have a condition prefix list and a list of labels. See also
keyword statement, assignment statement
, and
null statement
.
statement body
A statement body can be either a simple or a compound statement.
statement label
See
label constant
.
static storage allocation
The allocation of storage for static variables.
static variable
A variable that is allocated before execution of the program begins and that remains allocated for the duration of execution.
stream-oriented data transmission
The transmission of data in which the data is treated as though it were a continuous stream of individual data values in character form. Contrast with
record-oriented data transmission
.
string
A contiguous sequence of characters, graphics, or bits that is treated as a single data item.
string variable
A variable declared with the BIT,
CHARACTER, or GRAPHIC attribute, whose values can be either bit, character, or graphic strings.
structure
A collection of data items that need not have identical attributes. Contrast with
array
.
structure expression
An expression whose evaluation yields a structure set of values.
structure of arrays
A structure that has the dimension attribute.
structure member
See
member
.
structuring
The hierarchy of a structure, in terms of the number of members, the order in which they appear, their attributes, and their logical level.
subroutine
A procedure that has no RETURNS option in the PROCEDURE statement. Contrast with
function
.
subroutine call
An entry reference that must represent a subroutine, followed by an optional argument list that appears in a CALL statement. Contrast with
function reference
.
subscript
An element expression that specifies a position within a dimension of an array. If the subscript is an asterisk, it specifies all of the elements of the dimension.
subscript list
A parenthesized list of one or more subscripts, one for each dimension of the array, which together uniquely identify either a single element or cross section of the array.
subtask
A task that is attached by the given task or any of the tasks in a direct line from the given task to the last attached task.
synchronous
A single flow of control for serial execution of a program.
T
Glossary
513
target
Attributes to which a data item (source) is converted.
target reference
A reference that designates a receiving variable (or a portion of a receiving variable).
target variable
A variable to which a value is assigned.
task
The execution of one or more procedures by a single flow of control.
task name
An identifier used to refer to a task variable.
task variable
A variable with the TASK attribute whose value gives the relative priority of a task.
termination (of a block)
Cessation of execution of a block, and the return of control to the activating block by means of a RETURN or END statement, or the transfer of control to the activating block or to some other active block by means of a GO TO statement.
termination (of a task)
Cessation of the flow of control for a task.
truncation
The removal of one or more digits, characters, graphics, or bits from one end of an item of data when a string length or precision of a target variable has been exceeded.
type
The set of data attributes and storage attributes that apply to a generation, a value, or an item of data.
U undefined
Indicates something that a user must not do. Use of a undefined feature is likely to produce different results on different implementations of a PL/I product. In that case, the application program is in error.
union
A collection of data elements that overlay each other, occupying the same storage.
The members can be structures, unions, elementary variables, or arrays. They need not have identical attributes.
union of arrays
A union that has the DIMENSION attribute.
upper bound
The upper limit of an array dimension.
V value reference
A reference used to obtain the value of an item of data.
variable
A named entity used to refer to data and to which values can be assigned. Its attributes remain constant, but it can refer to different values at different times.
variable reference
A reference that designates all or part of a variable.
virtual origin (VO)
The location where the element of the array whose subscripts are all zero are held. If such an element does not appear in the array, the virtual origin is where it would be held.
Z zero-suppression characters
The picture specification characters Z and
*, which are used to suppress zeros in the corresponding digit positions and replace them with blanks or asterisks respectively.
514
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
Index
Special characters
%PROCESS statement
specifying compile-time options with 25
A
access methods
accessing data sets
adapting existing programs for workstation VSAM 294
adding or replacing objects in a library,
aggregate
ALIGNED compile-time suboption 46
American National Standard Institute
(ANSI)
ANS
ANSI
control character 234, 255 print control characters 255
application program coding SQL statements
AREAs and INITIAL attribute 11
array expressions restrictions 5
ASCII compile-time suboption
ASSIGNABLE compile-time suboption 46
attributes and cross-reference table 180
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2012
avoiding calls to library routines 366
B
base file of VSAM keyed data set 287
built-in functions
BYADDR
description 358 effect on performance 358
BYVALUE
description 358 effect on performance 358
C
call interface conventions
general-purpose register implications
examples of passing parameters 397 parameters 397
carriage return-line feed (CR - LF) 246
CEE.OPTIONS environment variable 207
CICS
coding
command line parameters for ILIB 383
command line, setting run-time options 207
comparing dates
using literals 487 using non-literals 487
with differing patterns 486 with like patterns 485, 486
compatibility of PL/I for z/OS files for the workstation 294
compilation
environment variables
mainframe applications on your workstation 3
preparing your source program 18
user exit
using the PLI command to invoke the compiler 24
compilation output
using the compiler listing 175
compiler
listing
compiler options
515
compiler options
(continued)
516
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide compiler options
(continued)
compiler restrictions
array expressions 5 built-in functions 5
DEFAULT statement 5 extents of automatic variables 5
condition handling
general concepts 219 interrupts 219
list of conditions and their attributes 222 qualified and unqualified conditions 222
scope and descendancy 219 terminology 219
conditions
handling conversions inline 366
handling string built-in functions inline 367
CONNECTED compile-time suboption
CONSECUTIVE
option
consecutive data sets controlling input from the terminal
capital and lowercase letters 267 end of file 267
using files conversationally 266
controlling output to the terminal
example of an interactive program 268 format of PRINT files 268 stream and record files 268
consecutive data sets
(continued)
using record-oriented I/O
accessing and updating a data set 271 creating a data set 271
ENVIRONMENT options for data transmission 271
using stream-oriented data transmission
accessing a data set with stream
creating a data set with stream
using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files 265
control blocks
control characters
cross-reference table in compilation output 180
CURRENCY compile time option
customizing
setting compile-time environment variables 21
user exit
structure of global control blocks 372 writing your own compiler exit 372
D
data
files
OPEN 250 closing a PL/I file 250 creating 250
record 232 remote file access 232
representations, portability 7
types
data set
VSAM
workstation VSAM
data sets
accessing
associating a PL/I file with a data set
using environment variables 248
combinations of I/O statements, attributes, and options 251
variable 239, 248 default identification 248
DISPLAY statement input and output 253
establishing characteristics
DD:ddname environment variable 239
PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute 233 record formats 233
organization
PL/I standard files (SYSPRINT and
redirecting standard input
specifying characteristics 232
types
conventional text files and devices 230 fixed-length data sets 230 native data sets 230
data sets
(continued)
workstation VSAM
data-directed I/O
DBCS constants 236 specifying GRAPHIC option 236
DATE attribute
DAYSTODATE built-in function 485
DBCS (double-byte character set)
DD information
DD:ddname environment variables 239
specifying characteristics 239
DDM data sets
debugging programs common PL/I errors
compiler or library subroutine failure 225
invalid use of PL/I 222 logical errors in source 222
loops and other unforeseen errors 223
unexpected input/output data 224
unexpected program results 225
unexpected program termination 224
uninitialized entry variables 223
debugging programs
(continued)
using compile-time options 213
using footprints for debugging
DECLARE
declaring
host variables, SQL preprocessor 161
DEF files
DEFAULT compile-time option suboptions
suboptions
Index
517
DEFAULT statement restrictions 5
DEFINED
defining files
definition file
DELAY option
DELIMIT option
DEPRECATENEXT compiler option 55
DESCLIST compile-time suboption 47
DESCLOCATOR compile-time suboption 47
DESCRIPTOR compile-time option
DESCRIPTOR compile-time suboption
device
DIRECT file
using to access a workstation VSAM direct data set 309
using to access a workstation VSAM keyed data set 302
Distributed Data Management 229
DPATH run-time environment variable 207
DRIVER sample program
example of FETCHing a DLL at run time 381
DRIVER1.DEF file
sample program to build a DLL 381
DRIVER1.PLI file
sample program that uses a DLL 381
DSNTIAR.PLI sample program 169
dummy
DUMMY compile-time suboption 48
dummy records
dumps
SNAP dumps for trace information 219
dynamic link libraries
compiling, linking, running 381
using FETCH and RELEASE in your main program 381
ERROR
error and condition handling
conditions used for testing and debugging 222
dynamic descendancy 219 general concepts 219 interrupts and PL/I conditions 219
E
EBCDIC
F
static descendancy 219 terminology 219
errors
calling uninitialized entry variables 223
embedded
embedded SQL
end of file characters (/*) 267
ENVIRONEMENT options not supported 4
ENVIRONMENT attribute
(REREAD) on the CLOSE statement
options
specifying characteristics 233
differences in issuing from PL/I for z/OS 12
invalid use of PL/I 222 logical errors in source program 222
unexpected
EVENDEC compile-time suboption 48
EXTDICTIONARY option for ILIB 393
specifying options
for workstation VSAM data sets 292
environment differences, S/390 and
ENVIRONMENT options for record-oriented data transmission
stream-oriented data transmission 257
environment variables
FETCH statement
using in your main program 381
files adapting existing programs for workstation VSAM
using CONSECUTIVE files 293 using INDEXED files 293
using REGIONAL(1) files 294 using VSAM files 294
declarations for REGIONAL(1) data sets 277
defining
PL/I
518
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
FIXED
BINARY, mapping and portability 11
fixed-length record format 233
FLAG compile-time option
FLOATINMATH compiler option 60
FREEFORMAT option for ILIB 392
G
GENDEF (/gd) option for ILIB 392
general purpose register implications example
passing conforming parameters to a routine 398
passing floating point parameters to a routine 400
generating declare statements 323
GENIMPLIB (/gi) option for ILIB 392
GET statements
controlling input from the terminal 265
global control blocks
writing the initialization procedure 373 writing the message filtering procedure 373
writing the termination procedure 375
GONUMBER compile-time option
GONUMBER compiler option 61, 356
GRAPHIC
graphic data and stream I/O 256
H
handling conditions
built-in for condition handling 221
PL/I run-time error message formats 220
SNAP messages 221 system messages 221
HEXADECIMAL
host
variables, using in SQL statements 161
I
I/O access methods
IEEE
ILIB
ILINK environment variable 193
improving performance 355 improving application performance 355
INCLUDE
include files
include preprocessor
INDEXAREA ENVIRONMENT option 4
INDEXED files, adapting programs 293
INITFILL compile-time suboption 49
initialization procedure of compiler user exit 373
INLINE compile-time suboption 49
input
defining data sets for stream files 256
example of interactive program 268
to the terminal
example of an interactive program 268
input
(continued)
to the terminal
(continued)
format of PRINT files 268 stream and record files 268
input and output with workstation
VSAM data sets
organization
accessing records in 288 creating and accessing 288 determining which type you need 288
using workstation VSAM direct data sets
using a DIRECT file to access 309 using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 309
using workstation VSAM keyed data sets
using a DIRECT file to access 302 using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 302
using workstation VSAM sequential data sets
using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 296
input- and output-handling routines, sort program 441
Institute (ANSI)
interactive program, example 268
interlanguage communication (ILC) 411
invoking
J
Java 420, 421, 422, 423, 424, 425, 426,
Java code, compiling 421, 424, 429
Java code, writing 420, 423, 427
jni
JNI sample program 420, 423, 427
K
key
accessing a sequential data set 290
relative record number
KEY
keys for workstation VSAM keyed data sets 289
Index
519
KEY
(continued)
relative record numbers 290 sequential record values 290
keyboard
keyed data sets
statements and options for 298
KEYFROM, relative record numbers 290
keys
using for workstation VSAM keyed data sets 289
using relative record numbers 290 using sequential record values 290
KEYTO
keys for workstation VSAM keyed data sets 289
sequential file to access a workstation
L
large object (LOB) support, SQL preprocessor 167
length of record
library, compiler subroutine failure 225
line feed (LF)
delimiting logical records 230
LINE option
in controlling output to the terminal 268
using with PRINT files 261 when using PRINT files 261
LINESIZE option
accessing a data set with stream
I/O 257 creating a data set with stream
linkage
OPTLINK
SYSTEM
520
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide linkage
(continued)
SYSTEM
(continued)
LINKAGE compile-time suboption
linking your program creating files
dynamic link library 190 executable files 190
search rules 188 specifying directories 188
starting the linker 185 static linking 185
list-directed I/O
DBCS constants 236 specifying GRAPHIC option 236
loops
LOWERINC compile-time suboption 49
M
macro facility
macro preprocessor
mainframe applications
managing libraries (.LIB files) 383
messages
modifying in compiler user exit 371
migration
compatibility with PL/I for z/OS 3
migration
(continued)
PL/I for z/OS files for the workstation
Millennium Language Extensions
using in PL/I applications 481
mixed-language applications 411
N
named constants
defining 365 versus static variables 365
NATIVE compile-time suboption
native data sets
accessing 230 character devices 230 conventional text files 230
NATIVEADDR compile-time suboption 50
NATLANG
NMAKE utility
characters that modify commands 352
introduction 333 make file utility (NMAKE) 333
NOBIN1ARG compiler suboption 46
NODESCRIPTOR compile-time suboption 47
NOEVENDEC compile-time suboption 48
NOFREEFORMAT option for ILIB 392
NOINITFILL compile-time suboption 49
NOINLINE compile-time suboption 49
NOLAXDCL compile-time option 213
NOLAXIF compile-time option 213
NONASSIGNABLE compile-time suboption 46
NONCONNECTED compile-time suboption 47
NONNATIVE compile-time suboption 49
NONNATIVEADDR compile-time suboption 50
NONRECURSIVE compile-time suboption 51
NONULLSTRADDR compiler suboption 50
NOOVERLAP compile-time suboption
NOT compile time option
NULL370 compile-time suboption 50
NULLSTRADDR compiler suboption 50
NULLSTRPTR compiler suboption 50
NULLSYS compile-time suboption 50
NUMBER compile-time option 180
numeric arguments for the linker 194
O
driver manager 315 embedded SQL 315
environment-specific information 316
offset
determining statement numbers 221
Open Database Connectivity (see
OPEN statement
specifying the length of records 232
using
Operating system
data definition (DD) information 248
optimal coding
OPTIMIZE compiler option 99, 355
options compile-time
DD:ddname environment variables
output
(continued)
to the terminal
example of an interactive program 268 format of PRINT files 268 stream and record files 268
OVERLAP compile-time suboption
page
PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute
PAGESIZE tab set table field 264
PAGE option
PATH run-time environment variable 207
performance improvement coding for performance
avoiding calls to library routines 366
DATA-directed input and output 361
named constants versus static variables 365
PRINT attribute
selecting compile-time options
run-time
using
OR compile time option
PL/I compiler
ORDER compile-time suboption
ORDINAL compile-time suboption 51
organization
output
defining data sets for stream files 256
P
ENVIRONMENT attribute
options portable to other SAA implementations 233
files
associating with a data set 248
preparing for compilation 18 structure 18
PL/I code, compiling 422, 426, 430
PL/I code, linking 422, 426, 430
PL/I code, writing 421, 425, 429
platform
PLI command
Index
521
PLI command
(continued)
specifying compile-time options 25
PLIDUMP
obtaining
reading a formatted PL/I dump 218
PLISRTx
determining which subroutine to use 434
input- and output-handling routines 441
sort data input and output 441
specifying the sorting field 437
portability
national characters and other symbols 3 operating system differences 3
PPTRACE compile-time option 108
using compile-time options 18 using the sample programs provided 18
PREFIX compile-time option
PREFIX compiler option 110, 357 using default suboptions 357
preparing your source program for compilation
line continuation 20 margins 20 program file format 20
preprocessors
macro facility 148 macro preprocessor 148
PRINT files
applying the PRINT attribute 261
controlling printed line length 262
inserting ANSI print control characters 261
overriding the tab control table 264
printer control character, ASA 255 printer-destined files 255
ANSI print control characters
IBM Proprinter equivalents 256
controlling printed line length 262
example of creating a file 263
overriding the tab control table 264
program file format
line continuation 20 margins 20
Proprinter, IBM, control characters 234
PSEUDODUMMY compile-time suboption 51
PUT
statement
controlling input from the terminal 266
PUT statement
PAGE, SKIP, and LINE options 255
Q
R
READ statement, attributes, and options 252
RECORD condition
adapting CONSECUTIVE file for workstation VSAM 293 adapting INDEXED file for workstation VSAM 293
RECORD I/O
522
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide
RECORD OUTPUT files
associated with consecutive data sets 234 using CTLASA 234
record-oriented I/O
accessing a data set 271 creating a data set 271
ENVIRONMENT options for data transmission 271
essential information 272 examples of consecutive data sets 272
records
accessing in workstation VSAM data sets 288
RECSIZE option
PL/I ENVIRONMENT attribute 237
specifying the length of records 232
RECURSIVE compile-time suboption 51
regional data sets
commands and options 277 description 277
file definition
specifying ENVIRONMENT options 279
using keys with regional data sets 280
using REGIONAL(1) data sets
sequential access 282 updating 282
REGIONAL(1) data sets
relative record numbers in workstation
RELEASE statement, example 381
REORDER compile-time suboption
RESPECT compiler option 117, 482
RETCODE compile-time suboption 51
RETURNS compile-time suboption 51,
REWRITE statement, attributes and options 253
routines, library, conversions 367
RULES compile-time option
RULES compiler option 118, 482
run-time messages
run-time options
NATLANG 208 specifying multiple run-time options or suboptions 208
where to specify run-time options 207
running your program
setting run-time environment variables 207 specifying run-time options 207
runtime behavior differences
INITIAL attribute for AREAs is ignored 11 language elements 11 using variables declared as FIXED
differences between platforms 7
S
sample program, running 423, 427, 431
screen and keyboard operations 253
search rules
sequential
data sets
record value
in workstation VSAM sequential data set 290
SEQUENTIAL
SEQUENTIAL file
using to access a workstation VSAM direct data set 309
using to access a workstation VSAM keyed data set 302
SEQUENTIAL file
(continued)
using to access a workstation VSAM sequential data set 296
SET command
run-time environment variables 207
SHORT compile-time suboption 51
SKIP option
controlling input from the terminal 267
SNAP compile-time option
sort exit
sort program
comparing S/390 to the workstation 433
input- and output-handling routines 441
sort data input and output 441
specifying the sorting field 437
specifying run-time options 207
SQL preprocessor
error return codes, handling 169
SQL statements
standard
statement numbers, determining from offset 221
statements
storage
STREAM attribute
stream I/O
creating a data set 257 essential information 257
STREAM I/O
stream-oriented data transmission accessing a data set with stream I/O
essential information 260 example 260
creating a data set with stream
defining files using stream I/O 256
ENVIRONMENT options for stream-oriented data transmission 257
using SYSIN and SYSPRINT files 265
structure expression restrictions 5
structure of global control blocks
writing the initialization procedure 373 writing the message filtering procedure 373
writing the termination procedure 375
SYSIN files
redirecting standard input 254
SYSPRINT files
redirecting standard output 254
system
standard action for conditions 220
SYSTEM
linkage, calling conventions 403
Index
523
T
terminal
example of an interactive program 268
termination procedure
compiler user exit 375 example of procedure-specific control block 375
syntax
testing programs
code inspection 211 data testing 211
text file
TITLE option
opening and closing a file 250
specifying the length of records 232
using
using files not associated with data sets 250
user exit
(continued)
customizing
(continued)
writing your own compiler exit 372
using
arrays as host variable, SQL preprocessor 161 using host variables, SQL preprocessor 161
Using Millennium Language Extensions
V
U
U-format record 233 undefined-length record format 233
UNDEFINEDFILE condition
raising when opening a file 248 using files not associated with data sets 248
unexpected
uninitialized entry variables 223
UPPERINC compile-time suboption 49
user defined functions, SQL preprocessor 168
user exit
customizing
structure of global control blocks 372
524
PL/I for Windows Programming Guide variables
environment variables for compile time 21
varying-length records
VSAM
W
WINDOW compile-time option 140
WINDOW compiler option 140, 482
workstation
workstation VSAM (virtual storage access method) data sets
dummy data set 291 file attribute 291
workstation VSAM data sets
adapting programs
using CONSECUTIVE files 293 using INDEXED files 293
using REGIONAL(1) files 294 using VSAM files 294
defining files
adapting existing programs 293
specifying options of the PL/I
keyed
base file 288 prime index file 288 sequential 288 types and advantages 288
workstation VSAM direct data sets
using a DIRECT file to access 309 using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 309
workstation VSAM keyed data sets
using a DIRECT file to access 302 using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 302
workstation VSAM sequential data sets
accessing from a SEQUENTIAL file 296 defining and loading 296
using a SEQUENTIAL file to access 296
WRITE statement, attributes and options 251
X
XREF compile-time option
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
Rational Developer for System z, Version 8.5
PL/I for Windows
Programming Guide
Version 8.5
Publication No. SC18-9977-05
We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy, organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.
For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your
IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.
Comments:
Thank you for your support.
Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:
Address Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Email address
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
SC18-9977-05
Cut or Fold
Along Line
Please do not staple
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
IBM
H150/090
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA
USA 95141-1099
Fold and Tape
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
SC18-9977-05
Cut or Fold
Along Line
Product Number: 5724-T07
Printed in USA
SC18-9977-05
ดาวน์โหลด
ลิงก์สาธารณะได้รับการอัปเดตแล้ว
ลิงก์สาธารณะไปยังแชทของคุณได้รับการอัปเดตแล้ว You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
ลิงก์สาธารณะของเอกสาร
โฆษณา
